city of coffeyville c8320 mechanical installation

City of Coffeyville

C8320 Mechanical Installation

ATTACHMENT B

Specifications & Contract Drawings

Coffeyville Generation Facility 2 Mechanical Installation

Specifications & Drawings

000006-2 81799_8320_000006

ATTACHMENT B SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Revision SPECIFICATIONS Number of Pages

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 0 Section 011100 Summary of Work 6 0 Section 012500 Substitutions 3 0 Section 013100 Project Coordination and Meetings 6 0 Section 013200 Construction Progress Schedules and Reports 12 0 Section 013233 Construction Photographs 2 0 Section 013300 Submittals 9 0 Appendix A Submittal Schedule 1 0 Appendix B Submittal Information Block 1 0 Appendix C Submittal Description 1 0 Appendix D Typical Instruction Book Cover 1 0 Appendix E Vendor Submittal Reference Document 11 0 Section 014005 Contractor QA/QC 13 0 Section 014200 Definitions and Standards 3 0 Section 015200 Field Offices and Shed 2 0 Section 015300 Temporary Barriers and Controls 3 0 Section 015600 Temporary Utilities and Facilities 4 0 Section 016000 Equipment and Materials 3 0 Section 016310 Substitutions 3 0 Section 017329 Cutting and Patching 6 0 Section 017500 Manufacturer’s Field Services 2 0 Section 017800 Contract Closeout 6

37 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

0 Section 031000 Concrete Formwork 3 0 Section 032000 Concrete Reinforcement 3 0 Section 033000 Concrete 22

DIVISION 5 – METALS

0 Section 050513 Galvanizing 6 0 Section 055001 Metal Fabrications 7 0 Section 055013 Steel 15

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

0 Section 099000 Protective Coatings 7 0 Appendix CR1 Coating Report 1 0 Appendix PCS C-1 Protective Coating Specification C-1 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION



81799_8320_000006 000006-3

Revision SPECIFICATIONS Number of Pages 0 Section 210000 Fire Protection 4 0 Section 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 6 0 Section 210548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping

and Equipment 4

0 Section 211000 Fire-Suppression Piping 21

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 0 Section 253005 Instrumentation 16 0 Appendix A Instrument List 4 0 COC-IS-1020 Instrument Specification - Thermowell 2 0 COC-IS-1041 Instrument Specification – Temperature Gauge 3 0 COC-IS-1201 Instrument Specification – Temperature Transmitter 2 0 COC-IS-2001 Instrument Specification – Pressure Gauge 3 0 COC-IS-2201 Instrument Specification – Pressure Transmitter 2 0 COC-IS-4600 Instrument Specification – Level – Non Contact (Ultrasonic,

Radar, etc.) 2

73 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

0 Section 260100 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 8 0 Section 260507 Pipe Freeze Protection System 4 0 Section 260551 Alternating Current Electric Motor 4

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

0 Section 283100 Fire Detection & Gas Monitor Systems 15 DIVISION 48 – ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION LATER

Section 485150 Engine Water Softeners LATER

0 Section 485715 Piping Equipment to be Furnished 3 0 Appendix A Piping Specials Data Sheets 23

LATER

Section 485422 Vertical Inline Pumps LATER

LATER

Appendix A Vertical Inline Pump Data Sheets LATER

0 Section 485790 Description of Equipment Furnished by Others 5 0 Appendix A Equipment List 3 0 Appendix B Equipment Reference Files List 2 0 Section 485901 Piping Materials 10 0 Appendix A Piping Material Specifications 52 0 Appendix B Line List 15 0 Section 485925 Low Pressure Valves 8 0 Appendix A Manual Valve List 17 0 Appendix B Actuated Valve List 1 0 Section 485935 Power Piping Welding and Fabrication 9 0 Section 485940 Hangers, Supports, and Anchors 4



000006-4 81799_8320_000006

Revision SPECIFICATIONS Number of Pages 0 Section 485945 Power Piping Insulation 16 0 Section 485961 Erection and Installation of Equipment and Material 6 0 Section 485990 Erection and Installation of Power Piping 8 0 Appendix A System Requirements 1 0 Section 485995 Preparation for Initial Operation 3

le Index

ot be Zero

CONTRACTOR RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED

Contractor acknowledges receipt of all listed specifications and drawings:

By:____________________________________________________________________________ Date: _________________

81799_8320_000005 000005-1

Coffeyville Municipal Light & Power Coffeyville Generation Facility 2 C8320 – Mechanical Installation

Burns & McDonnell Project No. 81799 Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.

DOCUMENT 000005 - INDEX AND CERTIFICATION PAGE

SPECIFICATION INDEX DOCUMENT / DIVISION

DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF PAGES

3 CONCRETE 28 5 METALS 28

CERTIFICATION(S) Structural Scope

I hereby certify that this information in the document was assembled under my responsible charge. This report is not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by others without specific verification or adaptation by the Engineer. This certification is made in accordance with the provisions of the statutes and rules of the Kansas State Board of Licensure for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors.

Bid Document not for Regulatory Approval, Permitting, or Construction Without Engineer’s Seal

000005-2 81799_8320_000005

Coffeyville Municipal Light & Power

Coffeyville Generation Facility 2 C8320 – Mechanical Installation





9 FINISHES 9 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 35 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 34 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 15 48 ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION 186

CERTIFICATION(S) Mechanical Scope



81799_8320_000005 000005-3

Coffeyville Municipal Light & Power Coffeyville Generation Facility 2 C8320 – Mechanical Installation





26 ELECTRICAL 16

CERTIFICATION(S) Electrical Scope



81799_8320_011100 011100-1

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This SECTION includes basic identification of the Work covered in detail in the complete

Contract.

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: A. The Project is a natural gas fired reciprocating engine power plant designed for 56 MW

(nominal) net electric power output. B. The Project Site is located at 2601 N 5th St, Liberty, Montgomery County, Kansas 67351.

1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all material, tools, equipment, labor,

supervision, and any other incidental items or services necessary to perform all Work described herein.

B. All Work shall be designed to meet the design data and Site Conditions as defined and stated herein.

C. The Work under this Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following items of which are listed for the Contractor’s convenience in understanding the scope of Work: 1. Maintain erosion and sedimentation controls in accordance with SWPPP and Contract

Documents. Erosion and sedimentation controls shall be maintained by this Contract while Contractor is on Site.

2. Furnish construction trailer, temporary toilets, dumpsters and debris removal for Contractor Work only.

3. Receive, inspect, inventory, log, unload, store and remove from storage all Owner supplied equipment which is to be installed by Contractor per the Contract Documents.

4. Furnish, fabricate, install, weld and test above ground pipe, valves, specials, fittings, painting of pipe, hangers, supports, auxiliary support steel, and anchors for the following systems:

a. ACI – Instrument Air b. ACS – Starting Air c. AAU – Urea d. BAG – Combustion Air e. CWM - Cooling Water f. DOC - Oily Water g. FGS - Fuel Gas

(1) All house gas lines for the Power Block Building is included in this contract including regulators, flex connections and gas cocks at the Unit Heaters. Unit heaters, including thermostats and vent ducting, will be supplied and installed by Others (4310 contract).

h. FPW - Fire Protection System i. LOT - Lubricating Oil j. SCR – Exhaust Gas k. WPO - Potable Water l. WRW - Raw Water m. WSW - Service Water

SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY OF WORK: continued

011100-2 81799_8320_011100

n. WTW - Treated Water 5. Furnish, install and commission water booster pumps. 6. Furnish and install engine water treatment equipment. 7. Furnish and install lube oil filters. 8. Furnish, install and commission eye wash and emergency showers in engine hall and at

tank containment area. 9. Furnish and install suction and discharge air ductwork for each instrument air

compressor. 10. Furnish and installation of housekeeping equipment pads for the following equipment:

a. Instrument air compressors b. Instrument air dryers c. Starting air compressors

11. Erect Owner supplied structural steel, grating, ladders, stairs, kick plates and hand rails including:

a. SCR steel support structure, ladders and hand rails b. Silencer and stack steel support structure c. Radiator steel support structure, stairs, grating and handrail d. Pipe rack steel support structure (exterior to building) e. Pipe bridge steel support structure (exterior to building) f. Charge air filter support steel g. Engine exhaust gas module support steel h. Engine access platforms, ladders, stairs and hand rails. i. All other steel per Contract Documents j. Pre-Engineered Metal Building frame steel and building auxiliary steel installed by

Others. k. Grating and access ladders at tank containment and GSU/distribution transformer

foundations are supplied and installed by Others. l. All cast-in-place anchor bolts are supplied and installed by Others. Contractor is

responsible for fastening steel to existing anchor bolts. m. All non cast-in-place anchor bolts for equipment and steel installed under this

Contract shall be supplied and installed by Contractor. 12. Install engine Charge Air ducts and Exhaust Gas ducting.

a. Supply of Charge Air ducts and Exhaust Gas ducts is by Others. All flanges, bolts and gaskets will be provided by Others.

b. Support saddles for Exhaust Gas and Charge Air ducting are supplied by Others. 13. Erect Silencers and Exhaust Stacks. Supply of the Silencers and Stacks is by Others. 14. Install Owner supplied equipment listed under specification section 485790 and all other

Contract Documents. 15. Design, furnish, install and commission fire protection and detection system in both the

Power Block Building and Administration Building including all piping, valves, sprinklers, detectors, alarms, fire alarm control panels, associated wiring and all other items required by the Contract Documents. Power wiring will be brought to fire alarm control panels by Others (8410 contract).

16. Furnish, install and calibrate instrumentation listed under specification section 253005 and all other Contract Documents.

17. Furnish and install insulation for piping, ducting and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for supply of insulation required on Owner supplied piping or ducting. Insulation of equipment includes:

a. SCR’s


81799_8320_011100 011100-3

b. Lube Oil Tanks c. All other equipment indicated in the Contract Documents

18. Furnish and install, and commission pipe heat tracing systems. a. Power wiring will be brought to the heat trace panel by Others (8410 contract).

1.04 WORK BY OTHERS: A. C4310 – Pre Engineered Metal Building: Provides and installs building steel, walls, roof,

panels, masonry walls, insulation, interior finishes, doors, door hardware, plumbing and fixtures, toilet accessories, air handling units, ventilation fans, unit heaters (including thermostat and vent ducting) and HVAC ducting. Installs engine hall ventilation fans. This contractor will pour the concrete ceiling cap in the administration building conference room, electrical room and communications room.

B. C8110 – Site Development: Provides clearing, grubbing, site grading, surfacing, temporary and finish gravel, seeding and roadways. Installs storm sewer system including detention ponds and HDPE piping. Installs temporary and permanent site fencing. Installs and maintains erosion control during while on site.

C. C8220 – Foundations and Underground Utilities: Provides and constructs foundation for major plant equipment and pre-engineered buildings. Also provides and constructs underground piping, transformer pads, electrical ductbanks, electrical cable trench, cathodic protection, and grounding. This contract will be responsible for all equipment pads and underground piping. Floor drains, cleanouts, and stub-ups to above grade sanitary piping will be furnished and installed under this contract. This contract will be responsible for providing and installing anchor bolts for building steel columns.

D. C8410 – Electrical Installation: Installs all electrical wiring, cable tray, and electrical equipment. Connects equipment and steel to the Contractor provided below ground grounding grid. Installs roadway light pole foundations, buried conduit for roadway lighting and light poles.

E. C8440 – Above Ground Substation Installation: Installs substation equipment, steel, dead end structure, lighting, fencing and wiring.

F. C9055 – Materials Testing: Third party construction services and material testing including but not limited to compaction, density, moisture, concrete and concrete paving testing.

G. C1210 – Reciprocating Engines: Supply and Install by Others. Contractor shall assist with final alignment.

H. Electrical Equipment: Supply and Install of GSU Transformers, Auxiliary Transformers, Auxiliary Generator, MV & LV Switchgear, Motor Control Centers, Non-Seg Phase Bust Duct, batteries and electrical panels by Others.

I. Substation Equipment: High Voltage Breakers, Switchyard Control Building and Substation Steel and Deadend Structure by others.

1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Design specifications and construction of the Project shall be in accordance with (1) applicable

laws, regulations, codes and standards of the Federal Government and State of Oklahoma, including those set forth below and, (2) applicable local (including county and city) laws, regulations, codes and ordinances, including those set forth below. Publications from the following nationally recognized organizations are applicable to the engineering, design, manufacture, and testing of the Equipment included in the Specifications to the extent referenced in these Specifications. All references to publications are to the latest issue of each


011100-4 81799_8320_011100

together with all latest addenda, amendments, or additions thereto as of the Effective Date. References shall be made in accordance with the abbreviations listed below. In the event that conflicts arise between the codes, standards of practice, specifications or manufacturer recommendations described herein and codes, laws, rules, decrees, regulations, standards, etc., of the locality where the equipment is to be installed, the more stringent code shall apply. Supplier shall provide a written position of any such conflict clarifications to Owner in writing.

B. Federal Codes:

CAAA Clean Air Act and Amendments CFR Code of Federal Regulations FERC Federal Energy Regulatory Commission NERC North American Electric Reliability Corporation Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 1910 Occupational

Safety and Health Standards.

C. Industry Codes:

AA Aluminum Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials ACI American Concrete Institute 318-08 ACI Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures 530-05 AFPA American Forest and Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute for Steel Construction, ASD/LRFD (13th Ed.) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 7-05 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ASNT American Society of Nondestructive Testing AWWA American Water Works Association AWS American Welding Society CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DIN German Standard (Deutsche Institute für Normung) EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association EN European Standard FCI Fluid Control Institute HEI Heat Exchange Institute HI Hydraulic Institute IAPWS International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam IBC International Building Code 2009 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association


81799_8320_011100 011100-5

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES IES Lighting Handbook ISA International Society of Automation ISO International Standard Organization MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NESC National Electric Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioner Contractors National Association SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TEMA UFC Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association UL Underwriters Laboratories

D. County / City Codes:

Fire Marshall / AHJ 2009 International Fire Code Building Code 2009 International Building Code

1.06 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS: A. The Project Site has the following Site Conditions:

1. Plant elevation is 755 feet above mean sea level. 2. Indoor Design Temperatures – Engine Halls, Mechanical Rooms

a. Maximum Dry Bulb 120°F b. Minimum Dry Bulb 50°F

3. Outdoor Design Temperatures (2009 ASHRAE) a. Maximum Dry Bulb (1%) 97.1°F b. Mean Coincident Wet Bulb (1%) 75.8°F c. Minimum Dry Bulb (99.6%) 10.3°F

4. Outdoor Extreme Design Temperatures (2009 ASHRAE) a. Maximum Dry Bulb (n = 1 years) 102.8°F b. Minimum Dry Bulb (n = 1 years) 0.6°F c. Extreme Max Wet Bulb 88.9°F

B. IBC Design Criteria: 1. Occupancy Category: III 2. Wind loads – Section 1609

a. Basic wind speed: V3S = 90 mph b. Exposure category: C c. Wind Importance Factor: Iw=1.15 d. Minimum lateral pressure: ps = 10 psf

3. Seismic loads – Section 1613 a. Seismic Site Class: D b. Seismic Importance Factor: IE=1.25 c. Component Importance Factor: IP = 1.0

(per ASCE 7-05 Section 13.1)


011100-6 81799_8320_011100

d. Design Spectral Response Acceleration (1) Short Period: Ss = 0.193 (2) 1 Second: S1 = 0.063 (3) Max. considered short period: SMS = 0.309 (4) Max. considered 1-second: SM1 = 0.151 (5) 5% damped design short period: SDS = 0.206 (6) 5% damped design 1-second: SD1 = 0.101 (7) Long-Period Transition Period: TL = 12 seconds

e. Seismic Design Category: B 4. Snow loads – Section 1608:

a. Snow Importance Factor: IS = 1.1 b. Ground snow load: pg = 15 psf c. Terrain Category: C

5. Ice Loads a. Ice thickness Importance Factor: Ii = 1.25 b. Wind Concurrent with ice Importance Factor

IW = 1.0 c. Nominal Ice Thickness: t = 0.75” d. Concurrent wind speed VC = 40mph

C. Precipitation 1. Minimum Annual: Unknown 2. Average Annual: 37 inches 3. Maximum Annual: Unknown 4. Maximum 25-year 24 Hour Rain: 8 inches 5. Maximum 24 Hour Snow: 13 inches

D. Prevailing Wind Direction 1. Annual: South

1.07 SITE UTILITIES: A. Mechanical:

1. Water (usage cost to be paid by Owner) 2.

B. Electrical: 1. AC Power: 480VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz (usage cost to be paid by Owner)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION 011100

75644_8320_012500 012500 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Requirements for submitting Contractor's construction progress schedule and the Submittal

schedule: SECTIONS 01 32 00 and 01 33 00. B. Requirements governing Contractor's selection of products: SECTION 01 60 00.

1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the

Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, Materials, Equipment, and methods of construction

required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Engineer. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents. 3. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to

award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Substitution Request Submittal: Engineer will consider written requests for substitution if

received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of Engineer. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the

form and according to procedures required for Change Order proposals. Requests for substitution shall not be submitted in the form of a Request for Information (RFI).

2. Identify the Equipment or Material, the fabrication, or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section/Article and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Statement indicating why specified product or method of construction cannot be

provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTIONS: continued

012500 - 2 75644_8320_012500

f. Identification of available sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. g. A statement indicating the effect of the substitution on Contractor's construction

progress schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on the overall Contract Times. If specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Times, provide letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delay in delivery.

h. An itemized estimate of costs that will result directly or indirectly from approval of the substitution, including: (1) A proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract Price. (2) Costs of redesign required by the proposed change. (3) Costs of resulting claims as determined in coordination with other contractors

having work on the Project affected by the substitution. i. Statement indicating whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute is subject

to payment of any license fee or royalty. j. Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in

the Contract Documents, will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, is similar in substance to that specified, and is suitable for same use as that indicated and specified.

k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

4. Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within two weeks of receipt of a request for substitution. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Conditions: Engineer will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution when one

or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Engineer. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed substitution is in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents and

will produce indicated results. 3. Substitution request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Times. Engineer will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTIONS: continued

75644_8320_012500 012500 - 3

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

10. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime contractor, each contractor shall cooperate with the other contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products.

B. Engineer’s review and acceptance of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Engineer’s acceptance of Submittals not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval of a substitute. Acceptance by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION 01 25 00

81799_013100 013100-1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on the

Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests For Information (RFIs). 4. Coordination of Contractor(s) on-Site.

B. Each Contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific Contractor.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. For preparing and submitting Contractor's construction progress schedule: SECTION

013200. 2. For Submittal Requirements: SECTION 013300. 3. For coordinating closeout of the Contract: SECTION 017800.

1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. RFI: Request For Information prepared by Contractor and submitted to Engineer seeking

interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.03 COORDINATION: A. Coordination: Each Contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other

Contractors, Owner, and other entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each Contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other Contractors to allow optimum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

allow optimum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors if coordination of their

Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of others to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of construction progress schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Provide quantities and man hours for Field Progress Measurement System (FPMS) 4. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: continued

013100-2 81799_013100

5. Delivery and processing of Submittals. 6. Progress meetings. 7. Preinstallation conferences. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Startup and adjustment of systems. 10. Project closeout activities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: NOT USED

1.05 PROJECT MEETINGS: A. Not Used B. Preconstruction Conference:

1. Engineer will conduct a meeting prior to Contractor mobilization, to review items stated in the following agenda and to establish a working understanding between the parties as to their relationships during performance of the Work of Site.

2. Preconstruction conference shall be attended by: a. Representative(s) of Contractor including Contractor’s superintendent. b. Engineer. c. Representative(s) of Owner. d. At Engineer or Owner's option, representatives of principal Subcontractors and

Suppliers. 3. Meeting Agenda:

a. Construction schedules. b. Phasing. c. Critical Work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties; lines of communication. e. Project coordination. f. Procedures and Processing of:

(1) RFIs. (2) Field decisions. (3) Substitutions. (4) Submittals. (5) Change Orders. (6) Applications for Payment.

g. Procedures for testing. h. Procedures for preparing and maintaining record documents. i. Use of Premises:

(1) Office, Work, storage, laydown, and parking areas. (2) Owner's requirements. (3) Work restrictions and hours.

j. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. k. Temporary utilities. l. Safety and first-aid. m. Deliveries of Equipment and Materials.

4. Location of Meeting: At the Project Site or as directed by Engineer. 5. Reporting:

a. Within 5 working Days after the meeting, Engineer will prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner and Contractor.

b. Contractor shall provide copies to Subcontractors and major Suppliers.


81799_013100 013100-3

C. Coordination Schedules: 1. Engineer will conduct a meeting at least 10 Days before submission of the first

Application for Payment to finalize the initial coordination schedules requested under SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS.

2. The meeting shall be attended by: a. Representative(s) of Contractor including Contractor’s superintendent (and

scheduler). b. At Engineer or Owner's option, representatives of principal Subcontractors and

Suppliers. c. Engineer and Resident Project Representative. d. Representative(s) of Owner.

D. Construction Progress Meetings: 1. Engineer will schedule and conduct a meeting at least weekly and at other times

requested by Engineer. Representatives of the Engineer, and Contractor shall be present at each meeting. With Engineer's concurrence, Contractor may request attendance by representatives of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities concerned with current program or involved with planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants in the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Contractor and each Subcontractor represented shall be prepared to discuss the current construction progress report and any anticipated future changes to the schedule. Each Subcontractor shall comment on the schedules of Contractor and other Subcontractors and advise if their current progress or anticipated activities are compatible with that Subcontractor's Work.

3. If one Subcontractor is delaying another, Contractor shall issue such directions as are necessary to resolve the situation and promote construction progress.

4. Meeting Agenda: a. Review of construction progress since previous meeting. b. Field observations, interface requirements, conflicts. c. Issues which may impede construction schedule. d. Off-Site fabrication. e. Delivery schedules. f. Submittal schedules and status. g. Site use; coordination with other Contractors. h. Temporary facilities, controls, and services. i. Hours of Work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Housekeeping. l. Quality and Work standards. m. RFIs. n. Status of Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests. p. Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule if necessary. q. Revisions to construction schedule. r. Review of proposed activities for succeeding Work period. s. Review proposed Contract modifications for:

(1) Effect on construction schedule and on completion date. (2) Effect on other Contracts of the Project.

t. Other business.


013100-4 81799_013100

5. Location of Meetings: At Project Site. 6. Reporting:

a. Within 3 working Days after each meeting, Engineer will prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner and Contractor.

b. Contractor shall distribute copies to principal Subcontractors and Suppliers. E. Preinstallation Conferences:

1. Contractor shall conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction and where required in DIVISIONS 2 through 48.

2. Engineer, Contractor and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators, of products furnished by this Contract or by others, involved in or affected by the installation Work and its coordination or integration with other Materials and installations, shall attend the meeting.

3. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including installation procedures and requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, product data, and quality control Samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities and controls. p. Space and access limitations. q. Governing regulations. r. Safety. s. Inspecting and testing requirements. t. Required performance results. u. Recording requirements. v. Protection of construction, personnel, and adjacent Work.

4. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference. Contractor shall distribute the minutes of the meeting within 3working Days after the meeting to everyone concerned, including Owner and Engineer.

5. Do not proceed with the installation if disagreements arise during the conference which cannot be successfully resolved at the time. Contractor shall take actions necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

F. Not Used. G. Startup Coordination Meetings:

1. Engineer will conduct weekly (or as required to meet project needs) startup coordination meetings to be attended by Owner’s representative(s) and Contractors at the Site.


81799_013100 013100-5

Contractor shall participate in such conferences, accompanied by Subcontractors as requested by Engineer.

2. Agenda will be discussion of daily startup tasks and labor needs. 3. Location of Meetings: (At the Project Site).

1.06 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs): A. Procedure: Promptly on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI with the content specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

Work or Work of Subcontractors. 3. RFIs shall be submitted via Burns & McDonnell WebTools application.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Contract number and title. 5. Name of Engineer. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 10. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Times

or the Contract Price, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature. 12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, product data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as

indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 5 working Days for Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. local time will be considered as received the following working Day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of Submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Times or the Contract Price. e. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on Submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Multiple RFIs addressing similar or identical issues may be addressed by Engineer with a single broad response.

3. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer's time for response will start again upon Contractor's response and resubmittal.

4. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Times or the Contract Price, notify Engineer in writing within 5 Days of receipt of the RFI response.


013100-6 81799_013100

E. On receipt of Engineer's action, update the RFI log and promptly distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within 5 Days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. RFI Log: Resident Project Representative will maintain RFI log.


PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 013100

75644_8320_013200 013200-1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the

progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary construction progress schedule. 2. Construction progress schedule. 3. Schedule of Submittals. 4. Schedule of values. 5. Construction progress reports. 6. Daily construction reports. 7. Equipment and Material location reports. 8. Field condition reports. 9. Special reports.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. For submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes: SECTION 013105 -

PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS. 2. For submitting schedules and reports: SECTION 013305 - SUBMITTALS.

1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float available in the schedule, at any time shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Engineer or the Contractor. During the course of contract execution, any float generated due to the efficiencies of either party is not for the sole use of the party generating the float; rather it is a shared commodity to be reasonably used by either party. A schedule showing work completing in less time than the Contract time, and accepted by the Engineer, will be considered to have Project Float. Project Float will be a resource available to both the Engineer and the Contractor. No time extensions will be granted nor delay damages paid unless a delay occurs which impacts the Project's critical path, consumes all available float or contingency time, and extends the work beyond the Contract Completion Date. Contractor shall not use artificial activity durations, preferential logic, or other devices for sequestering float. Engineer retains the right to reject any schedule submittal in which Contractor has sequestered float.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting an intermediate deadline or the planned Contract completion date.

B. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. A milestone has no duration.

C. Time Scaled Logic Diagram: A bar chart diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

D. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower, quantities or equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

E. Activity Percent Complete – Physical percent compete of an activity as determined by a consensus of a subjective evaluation between contactor and Engineer

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND REPORTS: continued

013200-2 75644_8320_013200

F. Contractor Caused Delays: Shortage of manpower, or late delivery by Contractor’s material or equipment suppliers, shall not be considered cause for delay in completion. If the schedule deficiency occurs through no fault of Engineer, any costs incurred by Contractor to implement and maintain the recovery schedule shall be to Contractor’s account.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Schedule of Submittals: Per SECTION 013300-APPENDIX A. C. Preliminary Construction Progress Schedule: Submit in specified electronic format per

SECTION 013300 SUBMITTALS . D. Construction Progress Schedule: Contractor’s Baseline schedule and all updates of the

Detailed Construction Schedule shall:

1. Contractor shall submit for Engineer approval, within seven (7) calendar days of the prescheduling conference, a preliminary schedule defining Contractor’s planned operations for the first sixty (60) calendar days.

2. Contractor shall submit for Engineer approval, within thirty (30) days of the prescheduling conference, a Critical Path Method (CPM) project schedule showing the sequence and the due date of data Submittals, Engineer approvals, procurement, fabrication, contractual milestones, and all construction activities to coincide with the Schedule of Work.

3. The project schedule shall include an appropriate level of detail. Contractor submissions shall follow the direction of Engineer regarding reasonable activity durations. Reasonable durations are those that allow the progress of activities to be accurately determined between update periods (usually all non-procurement activities' Original Durations are less than the total workdays between two update periods). Durations shall be in workdays. Contractor's scheduler should develop the proper calendars in the scheduling software, based on the proposed weekly work schedule and planned holidays (5-day, 6-day, 7-day, etc).

4. Contractor shall update the submitted Schedule on a weekly basis in preparation for the Construction Progress Meetings or as otherwise directed by Engineer. The weekly progress report will be issued to Engineer, in the approved electronic format, by 8:00 am the business day prior to the weekly Construction Progress Meeting.

5. Contractor shall submit an update of Contractor’s complete schedule with the monthly Application for Payment. The status date of the schedule and activity progress therein will coincide with the progress payments requested in the Application for Payment. Receipt of the Schedule by Engineer shall be a condition precedent to processing and paying Applications for Payment.

6. Engineer intends to use Primavera P6 software for the integrated project schedule. Other scheduling software or manual methods used by Contractor to produce required information shall require approval by Engineer. All schedules prepared with Primavera P6 software shall be configured to calculate data as follows:

a. Contiguous scheduling.


75644_8320_013200 013200-3

b. Total float calculations based upon finish dates.

c. Retained logic.

d. Start-to-start lags calculated from actual start dates.

e. Percent complete and remaining duration not linked.

7. Cost Loading Activities: In compliance with the contract cost breakdown represented by the Contract Schedule of Values, the project schedule will be loaded with costs. Costs for submittal preparation will be assigned to the respective submittal milestone(s). Equipment costs will be assigned to their respective Procurement Activities (i.e., the delivery milestone activity). Costs for installation of the material/equipment (labor, construction equipment, and temporary materials) will be assigned to their respective Construction Activities. The value of inspection/testing activities will not be less than 10 percent of the total costs for Procurement and Construction Activities. Evenly disperse overhead and profit to each activity over the duration of the project. The total of all cost loaded activities; including costs for material and equipment delivered for installation on the project, and labor and construction equipment loaded construction activities, shall total to 100 percent of the value of the contract

8. Be work hour loaded by activity. Have an account code assigned to each activity and produce percent complete progress curves based on work hours extracted by account code.

9. Resource load activities with quantities so as to provide Quantity Curves prior to the start of work. These curves are to reflect planned installed quantities in accordance with Contractor’s Detailed Construction Schedule. All major commodities should be addressed, including but not limited to: Concrete (CY), LB Pipe (LF), SB Pipe (LF), Structural Steel (TN), Cable Tray (LF), Conduit (LF), Cable (LF), Terminations (EA), Loop Checks (EA), Hydrotests (EA), etc. On a weekly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer actual installed quantities for each of the Quantity Curves.

10. Provide a Systems Turnover Schedule in accordance with Engineer’s defined systems. As bulk installation nears completion, approx 60% to 75% construction complete, Contractor shall develop a Systems Turnover Schedule for the Work to-go.

11. Utilize the Critical Path Method (CPM) with predecessor/successor relationships defined.

12. Include all interferences and impacts to Contractor’s Work.

13. Display all major milestones for completion of Work as defined in the Contract Documents.

14. Contain all activities required to be completed by others in order for Engineer to complete the Work as defined in the Contract Documents.

15. Include the total Scope of Work, whether performed directly by Contractor, or contracted to a third party.


013200-4 75644_8320_013200

16. Display the Baseline schedule as a thin solid black bar under the current bar. E. Schedule Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit copy of each of the following

computer-generated reports. 1. Bar Chart or Time Scaled Logic Diagram: All printed updates of the schedule will be in

the form of a bar-chart containing the following information: Activity ID, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Percent Complete, Planned/Actual Start Date, Planned/Actual Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, Planned/Actual Finish Date variance to Baseline Planned Finish Date and Total Float. The original approved schedule shall be referenced as the “Baseline” schedule. All printed update submittals of the schedule shall reflect the Baseline schedule planned start and finish dates for like activities as target bars represented as solid thin black bars below the current bar. Open-ended activities and artificial constraint dates shall be minimized. Mandatory constraint dates and hammock activities may only be used with Engineer approval.

2. Earnings Report: A compilation of total earnings on the project from the sooner of the Notice to Proceed, Contract award or commencement of the Work to the most recent monthly progress payment request. Include a column for the difference between the previous request amount and the current payment request amount. Sort report first by Schedule of Values category and then by activity.

3. Critical Path Report: All activities with float values of less than ten (10) work days are considered critical. In this report all critical activities will be grouped by total float and then their independent logical path ending with the appropriate contractual completion milestone or tie to a longer path. They will be sorted by early start, early finish and activity ID within the activities flowing from upper left to lower right on the page. Display relationship lines.

4. Log Report: With each updated schedule submission, provide a computer generated Log Report using a recognized schedule comparison software listing all changes made between the previous schedule and current updated schedule. Identify the name of the previous schedule and name of the current schedule being compared. This report will as a minimum show changes for: Added & Deleted Activities, Original Durations, Remaining Durations, Activity Percent Complete, Total Float, Free Float, Calendars, Descriptions, Constraints (added, deleted or changed), Actual Starts/Finishes, Added/Deleted Resources, Resource Quantities, Costs, Added/Deleted Relations, Changed Relation Lags, Changed Driving Relations, and Changed Critical Status.

F. Contractor’s Three-Week Lookahead Schedule: Shall be issued to Engineer on a weekly basis, be manpower loaded, and indicate all planned Work to be accomplished during the current week and the next two (2) week period in support of and in accordance with Contractor’s Detailed Construction Schedule. Planned and actual activities shall also be indicated for the previous week. Any activities that are required to be accomplished by Others that would impact and/or prevent Contractor from starting and/or accomplishing its planned Work shall also be displayed. The level of detail shall be sufficient to direct the efforts of the craft on a day to day basis.

G. Field Progress Measurement System (FPMS): 1. The detailed breakdown for the FPMS will be in accordance with Engineer’s Code of

Accounts. Along with the proper Account Code, each item of the breakdown must have assigned an estimated quantity and estimated manhours. As additional scope is identified and added to the Work, Contractor shall provide detailed breakdowns in the same manner. Within each account, the breakdown shall be detailed enough to allow installed quantities (i.e., cy, lf, each, etc.) to be physically verifiable, and to allow status


75644_8320_013200 013200-5

availability for testing and system turnover. Engineer’s Code of Accounts is included in SECTION 013200 Appendix B – Construction Field Progress Measurement System.

2. On a weekly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a status of the quantities installed for each activity in 013200 Appendix B – Construction Field Progress Measurement System, and actual manhours spent. Activities partially complete will be reportable by Contractor utilizing the Partial Credit Guidelines (attached within Appendix A). Appendix A-Partial Credit Guidelines represent draft conditions prior to Engineer’s finalization of Field Progress Measurement System (FPMS) for the specified Work. Engineer will create and determine partial credit weighting per work scope. The quantity and manhour data will be used to establish the Percent Complete of the Work, and to measure Productivity (earned/actual manhours).

H. Schedule of Values: Submit with initial construction progress schedule to Engineer for review and approval in specified electronic format copy of schedule if not defined within the Contract Agreement.

I. Construction Progress Reports: Unless directed more frequently by Engineer, submit copy on at least monthly intervals via electronic means per SECTION 013300-SUBMITTALS.

J. Daily Construction Reports: Submit copies on at least weekly intervals. K. Material Location Reports: Submit copies, in specified electronic format, on at least monthly

intervals. L. Field Condition Reports: Submit copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. M. Special Reports: Submit copies at time of unusual event, not to exceed within twenty-four (24)

hours of the event.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be

responsible for the preparation and submittal of the entire project schedule including all items specified and revisions to the schedule or supplemental completion schedules, as applicable or directed by Engineer. The scheduling representative shall be approved by the Engineer’s Contract Administrator based on a resume indicating as a minimum, formal training from software vendor or 5 years’ experience in working with schedules for projects of similar scope and complexity.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Within two weeks of the earlier of notice to proceed, contract award or as otherwise directed by Engineer, conduct conference at Project Site to comply with requirements in SECTION 013100 - PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS. Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and "baseline" construction progress schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including as applicable phasing, work stages, area separations,

interim milestones, Substantial Completion and potential early partial Engineer use. 4. Review delivery dates for Engineer-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Engineer's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of Submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review Submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.


013200-6 75644_8320_013200

12. Review procedures for development and updating FPMS.

1.05 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate Contractors. B. Coordinate construction progress schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

schedule of Submittals, Material and Equipment procurement, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS: A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of Submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction progress schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates as required in SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS. 1. Coordinate Submittals schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

"Baseline" construction progress schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: If not predefined within the awarded Contract Agreement, submit

concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include Submittals required during at least the first (60) days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of construction progress schedule.

2.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE, GENERAL: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than sixty (60) days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, Submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS in schedule. Coordinate Submittal review times in Contractor's construction progress schedule with schedule of Submittals.

3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. c. Use of premises restrictions. d. Seasonal variations. e. Environmental control.


75644_8320_013200 013200-7

5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and initial operation. m. Performance, guarantee, and acceptance testing. n. Placement into final use and operation.

B. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion, milestones per the Scope of Work and the following interim milestones:

C. Deficiencies: Once notified in writing by Engineer to correct a schedule deficiency, Contractor shall submit, within three (3) working days, a recovery plan in the form of a Revised Detailed Construction Schedule. Contractor shall implement the approved recovery plan within three (3) days after written notification from Engineer. If Contractor fails to submit its recovery plan or fails to implement the plan within the stated time limits, Engineer may, at its sole discretion, exercise any and all remedies available under the Contract Agreement.

D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall schedule.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART): A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: After submittal of preliminary construction progress schedule as stated

above, submit a detailed construction progress schedule within (30) days after the earlier of Notice to Proceed, Contract Agreement award date or Effective Date of Agreement. Base the schedule on the preliminary construction progress schedule and incorporate review comments and other feedback.

B. The schedule shall show the Work in a horizontal bar chart or other graphic format suitable for displaying scheduled and actual progress. 1. The schedule shall indicate phases of the Work, starting date, interim milestones, and

dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion. 2. Breakdown Work phases into separate time bar for each significant construction activity

entry, with dates Work is expected to begin and be completed. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 5% increments.

3. Scale and spacing shall allow room for notation and revisions. 4. Sheet Size (including of electronic PDF): Minimum 11 x 17 inches.

C. Provide subschedules to define in more detail critical portions of schedules, including inspections and tests.

D. Coordinate construction progress schedule with schedule of values, schedule of Submittals schedule, procurement schedule, progress reports, and payment requests.


013200-8 75644_8320_013200

E. Engineer will review and comment on construction progress schedule and, upon agreement between Engineer and Contractor on necessary changes: 1. Contractor shall distribute copies as specified of the accepted "baseline" schedule to

Engineer. Contractor shall provide additional copies to Contractors and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates, one copy to each party.

F. Revise the construction progress schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have been recognized and accepted to reflect impacts of new developments on the schedule.

G. Update and submit copies, electronic unless otherwise directed, to Engineer of the revised schedule at least once each month to show actual progress compared to the originally accepted "baseline" schedule and any proposed changes in the schedule of remaining Work. Include with construction progress report.

2.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A. If a schedule of values was not established as part of contract award, based on the preliminary

draft schedule of values, reviewed by Engineer, submit finalized schedule of values acceptable to Engineer as to form and basic details. Submit final within five (5) working days after Notice to Proceed.

B. Coordinate preparation of schedule of values with preparation and content of construction progress schedule.

C. Schedule of Values content: 1. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient

detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

2. Follow the construction progress schedule breakdown of Work activities as format for listing component items and assigning values.

3. Follow the table of contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items. a. Identify each line item, with the number and title of the respective major Division or

Section of the Specifications. 4. For each major line item, list subvalues of major products or operations under the item.

a. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

b. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials received, but not installed, break down the value into: (1) The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, including taxes paid unless

taxes are exempted. (2) The total installed value.

c. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Price.

2.05 REPORTS: A. Construction Progress Reports:

1. Submit a report on actual construction progress on a monthly basis, unless otherwise directed by Engineer for more frequently. More frequent reports may be required should the Work fall behind the accepted schedule. a. Submit a weekly report, and three-week look-ahead schedule, to coordinate with

and supplement the monthly construction progress report and which details Work scheduled for the following one-week interval, including: (1) Work activities which will occur. (2) Number and size of crews.


75644_8320_013200 013200-9

(3) Construction equipment on Site. (4) Major items of Equipment and Material to be installed.

b. Format shall be on 11 x 17-inch electronic PDF, submitted to Engineer in electronic format, unless otherwise directed.

2. Construction progress reports shall consist of the revised construction progress schedule and a narrative report which shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Executive Summary. b. Prose summary of activities completed since the previous construction progress

report. c. Prose summary of activities planned for next reporting period. d. Schedule Reports. e. Progress Curves. f. Identification of problem areas. g. A description of current and anticipated delaying factors, if any. h. Impact of possible delaying factors. i. Proposed corrective actions.

3. Submit a construction progress report to Engineer with each application for partial payment. Work reported complete but not readily apparent to Engineer must be substantiated with supporting data when requested by Engineer.

B. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project Site: 1. List of Contractors at Project Site. 2. List of separate Contractors at Project Site. 3. Approximate count of Contractor’s personnel at Project Site, and breakdown by craft,

including any of Contractor’s subcontractors. 4. Equipment at Project Site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents / Incidents / Near Misses. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures.

C. Equipment and Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of Equipment and Materials delivered to and stored at Project Site. List shall be cumulative, showing Equipment and Materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for Materials or items of Equipment fabricated or stored away from Project Site.

D. Field Condition Reports: Promptly on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for information (RFI). Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

E. Special Reports: 1. General: Submit special reports directly to Engineer within one (1) day(s) of an

occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. 2. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at

Project Site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel,


013200-10 75644_8320_013200

evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Engineer in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE: A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting

using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Engineer may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if

Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications to Engineer for Engineer review and approval.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to construction progress, alleged delays, and time impact.


SECTION 013200 APPENDIX A – FPMS SAMPLE PARTIAL CREDIT CONDITIONS

75644_8320_013200 013200-11

75644_8320_013233 013233-1

SECTION 013233 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for construction

photographs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit prints as specified in SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS and in PART 3 - this

Section.

B. Photographer shall submit two sample prints of the type and quality required during

construction, for review and acceptance by Engineer.

1.03 NOT USED

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS: Specified in PART 3, this Section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROGRESS SITE PHOTOGRAPHS:

A. Contractor shall be responsible for photographs of the Site to show the existing and general

progress of the Work. Engineer will advise as to which views are of interest. Photographs

shall be taken of the following areas and at the following times.

1. Existing Site conditions before Site work is started. Number of views shall be adequate

to cover the Site.

2. Progress of the Work from excavation throughout construction. There shall be three (3)

different views taken on or about the first of each month.

3. Finished Project after completion of Work. Number of views shall be adequate to show

the finished Work.

4. If Project is not completed during the Contract Time or authorized extensions,

photographs shall continue to be taken at no increase in Contract Price.

B. Photographic Prints:

SECTION 013233 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: continued

013233-2 75644_8320_13233

C. Digital Images:

1. Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of the

Construction Progress Report defined in SECTION 013200-CONSTRUCTION

PROGRESS SCHDULES AND REPORTS.

a. Provide images in JPEG format, with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels.

b. Provide image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.

c. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

D. Print Negatives:

E. Identification:

1. NOT USED.

2. Identify electronic media with date digital photographs were taken.

F. Provide three (3) prints of each view.

G. Deliver electronic media files to Engineer.

H. NOT USED.

3.02 NOT USED.

3.03 NOT USED.

3.04 ADDITIONAL PHOTOGRAPHS:

A. From time to time Engineer may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to

periodic photographs specified.

1. Engineer will give the photographer three days' notice, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, the photographer shall take additional photographs within 24

hours of Engineer's request.

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to:

a. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of Work.

b. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.

c. Special events planned at Project Site.

d. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

e. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project Site.

f. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.


81799_8320_013300 013300-1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes definitions, descriptions, transmittal, and review of Submittals. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Progress Schedules and Reports: SECTION 013200. 2. Contract Closeout: SECTION 017800.

1.02 GENERAL INFORMATION: A. Definitions:

1. Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples are technical Submittals prepared by manufacturer or Contractor and submitted by Contractor to Engineer as a basis for review and approval of the use of Equipment and Materials proposed for incorporation in the Work or needed to describe installation, operation, maintenance, or technical properties, as specified in each Division of the Specifications. a. Shop Drawings include custom-prepared data of all types including drawings,

diagrams, performance curves, material schedules, templates, instructions, and similar information not in standard printed form applicable to other projects.

b. Product data includes standard printed information on materials, products, and systems; not custom-prepared for this Contract, other than the designation of selections from available choices.

c. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of Materials, products, and Work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of Work; either for limited visual inspection or for more detailed testing and analysis. Mockups are a special form of Samples which are too large to be handled in the specified manner for transmittal of Sample Submittals.

2. Informational Submittals are those technical reports, administrative Submittals, certificates and guarantees not defined as Shop Drawings, product data, or Samples. a. Technical reports include laboratory reports, tests, technical procedures, technical

records, and Contractor's design analysis. b. Administrative Submittals are those nontechnical Submittals required by the

Contract Documents or deemed necessary for administrative records. These Submittals include maintenance agreements, Bonds, photographs, physical work records, statements of applicability, copies of industry standards, Contract record data, schedules, security/protection/safety data, and similar type Submittals.

c. Certificates and guarantees are those Submittals on Equipment and Materials where a written certificate or guarantee from the manufacturer or Contractor is called for in the Specifications.

3. Refer to ARTICLES 1.03 and 1.04 of this Part for detailed lists of documents and specific requirements.

B. Quality Requirements: 1. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted in electronic format. Every line,

character, and letter shall be clearly legible and of suitable quality for reproduction. 2. Documents submitted to Owner and Engineer that do not conform to specified

requirements shall be subject to rejection by Owner and Engineer, and upon request, Contractor shall resubmit conforming documents. Documents rejected due to illegibility or failure to comply with non-technical requirements will not satisfy schedule requirements. If conforming Submittals cannot be obtained, such documents shall be

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS: continued

013300-2 81799_8320_013300

retraced, redrawn, or photographically restored as may be necessary to meet such requirements. Contractor’s failure to initially satisfy the legibility quality requirements will not relieve Contractor from meeting the required schedule for Submittals.

3. Contractor shall be notified of any submittals rejected prior to review for legibility or formatting reasons by Engineer or Owner within 2 business days of receipt. No notification will be provided for submittals which are not rejected.

C. Language and Dimensions: 1. All words and dimensional units shall be in the English language. 2. Metric dimensional unit equivalents may be stated in addition to the English units.

However, English units of measurement shall prevail. D. Submittal Completeness:

1. Submittals shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction, and other information specified to enable Engineer to review the information effectively.

2. Where standard drawings are furnished which cover a number of variations of the general class of Equipment, each drawing shall be annotated to indicate exactly which parts of the drawing apply to the Equipment being furnished. Use hatch marks or X-outs to clearly indicate variations, optional equipment, or other items which do not apply to the Submittal and circle or box all selected variations, optional equipment, or other applicable selections. The use of “highlighting markers” will not be an acceptable means of annotating Submittals. Such annotation shall also include proper identification of the Submittal permanently attached to the drawing.

3. Reproduction or copies of Contract Drawings or portions thereof will not be accepted as complete fabrication or erection drawings, but will be acceptable when used by Contractor as a drawing upon which to indicate information on erection or to identify detail drawing references. Whenever the Contract Drawings are revised to show that additional Contractor's information, Engineer's title block shall be replaced with Contractor's title block, and Engineer's professional seal shall be removed from the drawing.

E. Form of Submittals: 1. Contractor shall have one contact person for submitting and retrieving documents.

a. This person will be responsible for making sure all documents are submitted properly.

b. This person will be receiving an email every week stating what needs to be resubmitted. (1) All submittals with an action status of “B”, “C”, or “D” need to be

resubmitted as described herein. 2. Submittal Documents

a. Name of file must include: (1) Spec Section number in front of filename (2) Must be short and specific to the file

b. Name of file must NOT include: (1) Revision number/letter (2) Date (3) The word “Submittal”

c. All documents that are supplied by the Vendor must be .PDF formatted d. A Submittal Block will be provided to you as a .JPEG file. e. The submittal block must be included on:

(1) Each individual PDF drawing. (one drawing per PDF file)


75644_8320_013300 013300-3

(2) The first page of each document that is NOT a drawing. f. When submitting:

(1) See Appendix E for submittal instructions on the Webtools site. (2) Send a transmittal letter by email to: [email protected], with cc:

[email protected] and [email protected]. (3) State the project number (75644), Contract number (CXXXX), and the

number indicating the submittal number (1, 2, 3, etc.) (4) Include a transmittal letter. The submittal may be rejected if it does not

contain the transmittal letter. (a) On the transmittal letter:

1) Include a description for each file 2) State what revision the file is.

g. Return Submittal: (1) Make sure the file name has stayed exactly the same as when you first

submitted it. (2) Pick up any of Engineer’s comments and make the necessary changes to the

original document/drawing. (3) If you are making a change or verifying information on any document,

provide comment clouding on these items. (4) If the Engineer has made comments and you are needing to add or delete

pages from you original document: (a) Place an “X” through the page to delete it (b) Add additional pages to the end of the PDF.

3. Webtools – Document Control System a. See Appendix E.

4. Document Pick-Up a. Contractor will receive an e-mail stating that your package is ready to be picked up. b. Click on the Webtools link. c. Download the package.

(1) Included in the package: (a) A return transmittal letter listing the document being returned and

what action status they are given. (Reference spec section 013300 for action status definitions).

(b) Documents that are being returned with the submittal block filled out. d. Pick-up or respond to all comments from the Contract Engineer. e. Resubmit any required documents as described above.

1.03 TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS: A. Provide required Submittals as specified in Appendix A and in the Specifications. Additional

information about Submittals listed in Appendix A is provided in Appendix C. All durations are Days.

B. Schedule of Submittals: 1. Prepare for Engineer's concurrence a schedule for submission of all Submittals specified

or necessary for Engineer's approval of the use of Equipment and Materials proposed for incorporation in the Work or needed for proper installation, operation, or maintenance. Submit the schedule with the Work progress schedule. Schedule submission of all

mailto:[email protected]




013300-4 81799_8320_013300

Submittals to permit review, fabrication, and delivery in time to not cause delay in the Work of Contractor or its Subcontractors or any other contractors as described herein.

2. In establishing schedule for Submittals, allow 14 Days in Engineer's office for reviewing original submittals and 14 Days in Engineer's office for reviewing resubmittals. For submittals exceeding 20 drawings, Engineer and Owner may request additional time for review within 2 days of submittal receipt.

3. Submittals requiring revision shall be resubmitted within 14 Days after receipt of Engineer's review notations.

4. The schedule shall indicate the anticipated dates of original submission for each item and Engineer's approval thereof, and shall be based upon at least one resubmission of each item.

5. Schedule all Submittals required for submission within the time specified for each in Appendix A.

6. Resubmit Submittals the number of times required for Engineer's action stamp to read either A, F, or G as described below. However, any need for resubmittals in excess of the number set forth in the accepted schedule, or any other delay in obtaining approval of Submittals, will not be grounds for extension of the Contract Time provided Engineer completes its reviews within the times specified. Contractor shall not commence production of any part of the Equipment and Materials affected thereby until such Submittal has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

C. Transmittal of Submittals: 1. All Submittals (Shop Drawings, product data, and Samples) for Equipment and Materials

furnished by manufacturers and Contractor shall be submitted to Engineer by Contractor. 2. Transmit all Submittals to Engineer for approval as follows:

a. Include Submittal Information Block: (1) Electronic files of Submittal Information Blocks will be provided to

Contractor for use on electronic Submittals. (2) An example of the Submittal Information Block is included as Appendix B to

this Section. b. Mark each Submittal by Project name and number, Contract title and number, and

the applicable Specification Section and Article numbers. c. Check and include Contractor's approval for Submittals of Contractors and

manufacturers prior to transmitting them to Engineer. Contractor’s approval shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all design criteria, quantities, dimensions, materials, catalog numbers, compliance with Laws and Regulations, and similar data, or Contractor assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

d. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of Engineer in the transmittal letter any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

e. Make all modifications noted or indicated by Engineer and return revised Submittals until approved. Direct specific attention in writing, or on revised Submittals, to changes other than the modifications called for by Engineer on previous Submittals. Previously approved Submittals transmitted for final distribution will not be further reviewed and are not to be revised. If errors are discovered during manufacture or fabrication, correct the Submittal and resubmit for review.

f. Resubmitted files shall be indicated on the transmittal letter by a later date and revision number than the previous submissions.


75644_8320_013300 013300-5

g. Following completion of the Work and prior to final payment, furnish record documents and approved Samples and Shop Drawings necessary to indicate "as constructed" conditions, including field modifications, in the number of copies specified. Furnish additional copies for insertion in Equipment instruction books and operating manuals as required. All such copies shall be clearly marked "PROJECT RECORD." (1) Submit a final record copy of the Master Field Drawing list which shall

indicate the final revision status of each drawing on the list. 3. Quantity Requirements:

a. Except as otherwise specified in Appendix A, transmit all Shop Drawings in the following quantities: (1) Initial Submittal:

(a) Per Appendix A, this Section. (2) Resubmittals:

(a) Per Appendix A, this Section. (3) Submittal for final distribution:

(a) Paper - One copy to Owner, One copy to Engineer. (b) Electronic - One CD-ROM copy to Engineer in native format.

(4) As-constructed documents: (a) Paper - One copy to Owner, one copy to Engineer. (b) Electronic - Three CD-ROM copies to Engineer in native format.

b. Transmit Submittals of product data as indicated for Shop Drawings above. c. Transmit Submittals of Material Samples, color charts, and similar items as follows:

(1) Initial Submittal – Two to Engineer. One to Owner. (2) Resubmittal – Two to Engineer. One to Owner. (3) Upon approval, no Sample(s) will be returned to Contractor.

d. Except as otherwise specified in Appendix A, transmit Submittals of Equipment instruction books and operating manuals as follows: (1) Initial Submittal:

(a) Paper - No copies to Engineer. One copy to Owner. Only Engineer’s comments will be returned to Contractor.

(b) Electronic - One copy to Engineer. One copy to Owner. (2) Resubmittals:

(a) Paper - No copies to Engineer. One copy to Owner. Only Engineer’s comments will be returned to Contractor.

(b) Electronic - One copy to Engineer. One copy to Owner. (3) Submittal for Final Distribution –

(a) Four paper copies to Owner upon Engineer’s written authorization. (b) One CD-ROM copy to Engineer in native format and Two CD-Rom

copies to Owner. e. When all Submittals have been updated to "as-constructed" conditions, transmit to

Engineer three copies and Owner five copies each of manuals on CD-ROM. f. Owner may copy and use for internal operations and staff training purposes any and

all document Submittals required by this Contract and approved for final distribution, whether or not such documents are copyrighted, at no additional cost to Owner. If permission to copy any such Submittal for the purposes stated is withheld from Owner by manufacturer or Contractor, the Contractor shall provide to Owner 50 copies plus the number of copies required by Contractor at each final distribution issue.


013300-6 81799_8320_013300

4. Contractor’s erection drawings and other Submittals required for installation of Equipment furnished under this Contract for installation under other contracts will be transmitted electronically to installing contractor by Engineer in the final distribution of such Submittals.

5. Information to Manufacturer's District Office: Contractor shall arrange for manufacturers and suppliers of Equipment or Materials to furnish copies of all agreements, drawings, specifications, operating instructions, correspondence, and other matters associated with this Contract to the manufacturer's district office servicing Owner. Insofar as practicable, all business matters relative to Equipment and Materials included in this Contract shall be conducted through such local district offices.

D. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will review and take appropriate action on Submittals in accordance with the

accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if items of Equipment and Materials covered by the Submittals are compatible with the design concept and conform to information given in the Contract Documents.

2. Such review and approval will not extend to design data reflected in Submittals which is peculiarly within the special expertise of Contractor. Review and approval of a component item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.

3. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings, product data, or Samples will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviation at the time of submission, and Engineer has given written concurrence in and approval of the specific deviation. Approval by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in Submittals.

E. Submittal Action Stamp: 1. Engineer's review action stamp, appropriately completed, will appear on all Submittals of

Contractor when returned by Engineer. Review status designations listed on Engineer's action stamp are defined as follows:

A - SUBMITTAL APPROVED Signifies Equipment or Material represented by the Submittal conforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the Contract Documents and is approved for incorporation in the Work. Contractor is to proceed with fabrication or procurement of the items and with related Work. Copies of the Submittal are to be transmitted to Engineer for final distribution.

B - SUBMITTAL APPROVED AS NOTED (RESUBMIT) Signifies Equipment or Material represented by the Submittal conforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the Contract Documents and is approved for incorporation in the Work in accordance with Engineer's notations. Contractor is to proceed with fabrication or procurement of the items and with related Work in accordance with Engineer's notations and is to submit a revised Submittal responsive to notations marked on the returned Submittal or written in the letter of transmittal.

C - SUBMITTAL RETURNED FOR REVISION (RESUBMIT) Signifies Equipment or Material represented by the Submittal appears to conform with the design concept and comply with the intent of the Contract Documents but information is either insufficient in detail or contains discrepancies which prevent Engineer from completing its review. Contractor is to resubmit revised information responsive to


75644_8320_013300 013300-7

Engineer's annotations on the returned Submittal or written in the letter of transmittal. Fabrication or procurement of items represented by the Submittal and related Work is not to proceed until the Submittal is approved.

D - SUBMITTAL NOT APPROVED (SUBMIT ANEW) Signifies Equipment or Material represented by the Submittal does not conform with the design concept or comply with the intent of the Contract Documents and is disapproved for use in the Work. Contractor is to provide Submittals responsive to the Contract Documents.

E - PRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL Signifies Submittals of such preliminary nature that a determination of conformance with the design concept or compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents must be deferred until additional information is furnished. Contractor is to submit such additional information to permit layout and related activities to proceed.

F - FOR REFERENCE, NO APPROVAL REQUIRED Signifies Submittals which are for supplementary information only; pamphlets, general information sheets, catalog cuts, standard sheets, bulletins and similar data, all of which are useful to Engineer or Owner in design, operation, or maintenance, but which by their nature do not constitute a basis for determining that items represented thereby conform with the design concept or comply with the intent of the Contract Documents. Engineer reviews such Submittals for general content but not for basic details.

G - DISTRIBUTION COPY (PREVIOUSLY APPROVED) Signifies Submittals which have been previously approved and are being distributed to Contractor, Owner, and others for coordination and construction purposes.

F. Instruction Books and Operating Manuals:

1. In addition to electronic Submittals specified above, Equipment instruction books and operating manuals prepared by the manufacturer shall include the following: a. Index and tabs. b. Instructions for installation, start-up, operation, inspection, maintenance, parts lists

and recommended spare parts, and data sheets showing model numbers. c. Applicable drawings. d. Warranties and guarantees. e. Name and address of nearest manufacturer-authorized service facility. f. All additional data specified.

2. Each hard copy of the manuals shall be assembled and bound in black three-ring binders designed for rough usage. Binders shall be as specified below. a. Front covers and spine of the manuals shall be permanently marked with white

lettering indicating Owner’s name, plant name, unit number, name of equipment, volume number if applicable, contract number, name of Contractor, Contractor’s address, and year of manufacture. See Appendix D of this Section for more details.

Manufacturer ViaTech Publishing Solutions or approved equal 424 North Cedarbrook Avenue Springfield, Missouri 65802 1-800-888-0823


013300-8 81799_8320_013300

Binder type Swing Hinge C78 Split Prong

Construction Stiff binder board

Covering Supported vinyl skytogen liner

Material and color Black imitation leather (Material Code NV899)

Font News Gothic Condensed

Imprinting Foil stamp in accordance with Appendix D of this section. Imprinting color is to be white.

Capacities available Split prong swing hinge 2 inch or 3 inch as required.

b. Binder capacities shall not exceed 3 inches, nor shall material included exceed the designed binder capacity. If material to be bound exceeds capacity rating, multiple volumes shall be furnished. Binder capacity should not be more than approximately ½- inch greater than the thickness of the material within the binder.

c. Submit mockup of cover and spine for Engineer's review. G. Samples:

1. Office Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the following: a. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and

attachment devices. b. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. c. Material, manufacturer, pertinent catalog number, and intended use.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Informational Submittals are comprised of technical reports, administrative Submittals, and

guarantees which relate to the Work, but do not require Engineer approval prior to proceeding with the Work. Informational Submittals include: 1. Test reports. 2. Certification on Materials:

a. Steel mill tests. 3. Shipping and/or packing lists. 4. Job progress schedules. 5. Equipment and Material delivery schedules. 6. Warranties and guarantees. 7. Welder qualification records. 8. Welding procedures qualification tests. 9. X-ray and radiograph reports. 10. Hydrostatic testing.

B. Transmittal of Informational Submittals: 1. All Informational Submittals furnished by manufacturers and suppliers shall be submitted

to Engineer by Contractor unless otherwise specified. a. Identify each Informational Submittal by Project name and number, Contract title

and number, and the Specification Section and Article numbers marked thereon or in the letter of transmittal. Unidentifiable Submittals will be returned for proper identification.

b. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of Engineer in the letter of transmittal any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.


75644_8320_013300 013300-9

2. Quantity Requirements: a. Technical reports and administrative Submittals except as otherwise specified:

(1) Paper: One copy each to Engineer and Owner. (2) Electronic: One copy each to Engineer and Owner.

3. Test Reports: a. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, and Engineer regarding tests and inspections

of Equipment, Materials, and completed Work are set forth elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

b. The party specified responsible for testing or inspection shall in each case, unless otherwise specified, arrange for the testing laboratory or reporting agency to distribute one electronic copy of the test reports to Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and Manufacturer, or Supplier.

C. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will review informational Submittals for indications of Work or Material

deficiencies. 2. Engineer will respond to Contractor on those informational Submittals which indicate

Work or Material deficiency.



81799_8320_013300-Appendix A 013300 – Appendix A-1

APPENDIX A SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

LEGEND: E = Electronic Copy; P(x) = Paper Copy (no. of copies)

ID Description

Subject to Liquidated Damages

With Proposal

(for bid evaluation)

For Approval (required prior to

fabrication)

For Information / Certification / Construction

(conformed including Owner’s and Engineer’s

comments)

1. Partial Lien Waiver P (1) - With Invoice

2. Final Lien Waiver P (1) - With Final Invoice

3. Construction Progress Schedule

E – 20 Days after Notice to Proceed.

E - Weekly during construction.

4. Schedule of Values E – 20 Days after Notice to Proceed.

P (1) – With each Payment Application

5. Construction Progress Reports

E – Monthly

6. Material Safety Data Sheets (if applicable)

P (5), E – With Notice of Shipment and with Shipment.

7. Test Reports E – 10 days after each test.

8. All submittals specified in the Specifications - Divisions 1 through 48

E E

81799_8320_013300-APPENDIX B 013300-APPENDIX B

APPENDIX B

SUBMITTAL INFORMATION BLOCK

Contractor fill in all blankswithout preprinted information

Contractor fill in this blockon all Submittals

For the use of Engineer

Contractor

(Do not send drawing to Engineerwithout Contractor’s prior Approval.)

Engineer’s ActionEn

gine

er R

ecor

d St

amp

Initials & DateDate Received

Project NameProject NumberContract TitleContract No.Spec. Sect. No. Art. No.

Approved ByDate

Contractor’s Approval(See Contract Documents)

ABCD

EFG

(See Contract Documents)

1. Use this decal on all shop drawings, whether prepared by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. Place as near as possible to the drawing title in the lower right corner.

2. Affix the gummed edge paper information blocks to all “product data” type Submittals immediately inside the front cover.

81799_8320_013300 APPENDIX C 013300-APPENDIX C

APPENDIX C SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION

System I/O list • Tabulation of all inputs and outputs associated with a PLC or DCS to

be used to control the supplied system. Electrical Schematic • Detailed schematics showing each and every light, switch, controller,

relay, timer, etc., associated with a systems control circuit • All voltage and current ratings • Special wiring requirements (coax, high temp., etc.) Control Panel Front View & Internal Wiring Diagram • Physical diagrams of all supplied control panels (internal and

external) • All light and switches including color • All wiring internal to the panel • All Tagging/Labeling • Panel NEMA rating Electrical Load List • Tabulation of all motors (load in hp) • Tabulation of all variable speed drives (load in kW) • Tabulation of all 120V vital ac loads (load in kW) • Tabulation including hp, voltage, and number of phases Electrical Equipment Layout • Physical drawing showing the location of each of the electrical

interface points and elevation of equipment in respect to the plant elevation

• Location of each device that requires Owner’s cable to be run to it Equipment Installation Details • Drawings showing how to install all devices that require field

installation • Details including support/mounting devices • Instrument installation details including tubing installation from root

valve to the instrument including tubing size, slope, valve manifold, etc.

Interconnection Wiring Diagrams • Overall system diagram showing 100% of the field wiring required • Interface of each device or panel being supplied in the system • Voltage and current ratings Control Logic Diagrams • Normal start/stop sequence • Alarm development • Identification of all time delays • Auto stop/start sequence • Identification of digital control • Identification of analog control P&ID's • System diagrams of all system piping • Identification of all instruments, pressure switches, limit switches,

temperature elements, etc. • Identification of interface (PLC, DCS, or hard wired interlocks) for

each device • Identification of valves, pumps, etc. • Identification of all pipe size, materials, and schedule General Arrangement Drawings • Dimension and location (plan and elevation) of all equipment

including locating dimensions in respect to the plant columns and elevation of equipment in respect to the plant elevation

• Identification of all pull space requirements • Identification of all access/maintenance requirements

Foundation Details • Foundation details/outlines depicting overall dimensions, pad and

blockout requirements, anchor bolt locations and details, and any additional information necessary to establish the foundation arrangement

• Either actual or "not-to-exceed" foundation design loads, and their points of application, for all applicable load cases and/or combinations (i.e., dead load, live load, wind, seismic, dynamic, etc.)

• Identification of loading directions, magnitudes, and any other permanent data required for the foundation design

Structural and Miscellaneous Steel • Certified shop drawings and erection diagrams for all structural steel

and miscellaneous steel • Documents prepared in accordance with the AISC specification for

the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel for buildings Outline Drawings • Outline dimensional drawing • Location of all interface connections (plan and elevation) • Recommended/required mounting details clearly depicting bolting

location, size, material, and projection requirements, or sufficient data such that the Engineer can establish such requirements (for dynamic equipment or machinery data include operating speeds, rotating masses, centers-of-gravity, eccentricities, etc.)

• Weight and center of gravity • Type of interface connection (e.g., 150 lb. RF flange, welded, weld

end preparation, wall thickness or schedule, etc.) • Allowable loads for all nozzles • Removal space/maintenance requirements • Special rigging requirements • Thermal movements of all nozzles (if applicable) Piping Information • Physical drawing showing the routing of all vendor supplied pipe • Location of pumps, valves, traps, strainers, instrument connections,

etc. on the piping drawing • Location of all Owner/Vendor interface points (plan and elevation)

for large and small pipe • Drawing including locating dimensions in respect to the plant

columns and elevation or centerline of equipment • Allowable loads and movements for all interface points • Support locations and details • Identification of pipe sizes, materials, valves, pumps, insulation, etc. • Field weld locations • Wall/floor penetration requirements • Pipe movements in excess of 1 inch • Design/service conditions (temperature/pressure) O & M Manuals • Description of equipment • Theory of operation • Troubleshooting • Equipment drawings • Installation instructions • Maintenance instructions • Sub-supplier component list

81799_8320_013300 APPENDIX D 013300-APPENDIX D-1

APPENDIX D

TYPICAL INSTRUCTION BOOK COVER

NAME OF

EQUIPMENT

Owner’s Name

Owner’s Facility Name

CONTRACT NUMBER 5XXX

VOLUME NUMBER*

Owner’s Name

Owner’s Facility or Plant Name

INSTRUCTION BOOK FOR

NAME OF EQUIPMENT VOLUME NUMBER*

CONTRACT NUMBER XXXX

CONTRACTOR'S NAME CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS

CONTRACTOR’S ORDER NUMBER

Equipment Tag Number(s)

36

24

36 36 36 36

24

24 24 24

24

(Spine) (Cover) NOTES: 1. All lettering shall be a block style font such as Arial. 2. All spine lettering shall be 14 point. 3. Cover lettering shall be point sizes indicated in column to right of cover illustration. 4. *Volume number required only if instructions are contained in more than one volume

Appendix E Vendor Submittal Reference Document

9400 Ward Parkway • Kansas City, MO 64114-3319 Tel: 816 333-9400 • Fax: 816 333-3690 • www.burnsmcd.com

013301-Appendix E-1 REV: B

Overview: The following procedure is for vendors, suppliers, or contractors who will be issuing submittals to Burns & McDonnell (BMcD). If you have questions about uploading submittals, please email or call your BMcD contact. It is a step by step guide on:

• Login options o Logging in o Resetting the Password o Forgotten Passwords

• Preparing and Delivering a Submittal o Creating a Submittal o Notification of Receipt

• Picking up a Reviewed or Rejected Submittal o Notification of Completed/Rejected Documents o Download of Completed/Rejected Documents




Logging In: Log into BMcD WebTools at http://webtools.burnsmcd.com using the username and password sent to you by Burns and McDonnell’s IT support group.

Note: Accounts are user specific. Do not share the username and password. Others who wish to access the system should request a separate account.

Previously you were not able to change the password you received, but now it can be reset after using the initial password from BMcD. After changing the password it cannot be changed again for 24 hours. Previously used passwords cannot be used again. The Domain is BMCDEXT and should preface your username. To Login: The Domain is BMCDEXT\and should be typed in before the user name. Example: BMcDext\[user ID] so the information would be BMcDEXT\ext_jdoe.

a. You may change your password by checking the box for I want to change my password after logging on.

b. If you forgot your password you can have a new password sent to you by clicking the “Forgot your password?”

http://webtools.burnsmcd.com/




Login Screen:




Set New Password screen:

• The new password must meet BMcD password requirements: • The password has to be at least eight characters long. • The password must contain characters from at least three of the following

categories: • English uppercase characters (A - Z) • English lowercase characters (a - z) • Base 10 digits (0 - 9) • Non-alphanumeric (For example: !, $, #, or %) • The password cannot contain three or more characters from the user's

account name.




If you forgot your password you can have a new password sent to you by clicking the “Forgot your password”. If so, the following screen will appear for requesting a new password. Request New Password screen:




Creating a Submittal: If your password does not need to be changed, use your current User ID and Password to log into WebTools.

Your username and password information will be automatically populated into the BMcD Login screen.

1. To create a submittal click in the Project/Program text box and fill in with the appropriate project name or program number, then click Create Submittal. If a reminder of the appropriate project number is needed, log in to WebTools and view the available project number folders. By clicking on the “Documents” folder the list of available project number will be seen. Descriptions of those projects will be given on the right hand window pane. After the proper project number is verified, log back out to return to the Create Submittal option. Note: When creating a Submittal, the Repository information is not needed. If the number is incorrectly entered the following error message will be displayed. Check the number, if you believe you received this message in error you will need to contact your BMCD Document Control contact.




If this is the first time you are visiting the Submittal screen then you will be prompted to load the ActiveX Add-On that will allow you to drag and drop documents into the screen. Click on Install to load the ActiveX Add-On. Note: Some companies prohibit the install of an ActiveX Add-On. If this is the case for your system administrators please contact your BMcD representative.

After installing the Active X component, the window is now ready for files to be drag and dropped directly into the grid part of the window.




2. Select the files from your system and drag them into the window.

One of two options may be used in the Create Submittal window: • Drag and drop a File • Use the Add Folder or Add Files buttons in the Document Submittal window.

A vendor transmittal number will be assigned to the Submittal upon receipt. If preferred, a transmittal may be created and added to the list of files as a separate document. Please check with your project team for specific submittal needs. The Filename, client name, and project number will be pre-populated in the Create

Submittal window. Before dragging the files into the window make sure they follow the file naming requirements.

Filename should be the same as the Drawing Name or Document Number. Do not include the following in the filenames:

a. Revision b. Dates c. Transmittal Information

Note: If the document is being resubmitted then the filename must match EXACTLY with the previous submittal name.

Valid filename examples: A07-9877-8-1.pdf, M-114-1-par.pdf, A-347-wps.pdf, 18555-18 ASME calcs.pdf, Terminal Point List.pdf




Description is required and should relate to the document title from the title block of the

drawing. Valid description include: General Arrangements, Weld Procedures, Code Calcs, Terminal Point List, Wiring Diagram – Analyzer.

Revision should be the actual revision from the document title block. If the document does not have a revision enter a dash/hyphen (-).

Items with an * in the column name are required. Items that do not include the * may still be required by your project. Please fill in as much detail as possible unless directed otherwise by your BMCD Document Control contact. Note: Columns in the window may be resized as needed. If a drop down list is supplied then only those values may be selected. To narrow a list of items or if a value is known, it may be typed or the copy/paste option may be used into the drop down.




3. Click on the Upload Submittal and the files will begin to load.

4. When complete you will be prompted that the Package was successfully received. Click OK

and you will be returned to the Login Window.

Notification of Receipt:

Within a few minutes you will receive an email notice that will include a link to a transmittal receipt. If there is a correction made to the submittal you may receive an additional notice that will include a link to the updated transmittal receipt.




Picking up a Reviewed Submittal If your Submittal is being return after a review or is rejected, you will receive an email from the system with a link to a zip file consisting of the files. 1. To pick up the files, Click the File link.

2. After logging into WebTools you will be directed to the document for pickup. Click

on Download to get a copy of the file.

3. Select a location on your hard drive to save the file and click ok.

SECTION 014005 – SUBCONTRACTOR QA/QC:

81799_8320_014005 014005-1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 The Contractor is directly responsible for the quality of their products and services, including

those of their Subcontractors, suppliers & vendors. Acceptable quality is defined as meeting

the requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

1.1.2 The Contractor shall implement a written Quality Control System that includes the following,

as applicable, plus any supplemental procedures and/or instructions needed to meet the

requirements of the Contract Documents.

• Organizational description including corporate and project level organizational charts

showing lines of authority and reporting.

• Description of how the requirements specified in the Contract Documents are

implemented through procedures, training, drawings, forms, etc.

• Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, approving, and controlling documentation,

including records and submittals.

• Procedures for procuring materials and equipment.

• Procedures for material receipt, protection, control, security, and maintenance.

• Procedures for scheduling and performance of construction activities.

• Detailed procedures for control, verification, and acceptance of construction activities.

• Detailed procedures for identifying and controlling discrepancies from the project

requirements.

• Procedures for system acceptance, including punch-listing and sign-off.

• Procedures for scheduling and format of project turnover documentation.

1.1.3 The Contractor must submit their written Quality Control System to the Owner for review,

prior to starting work.

1.1.4 The Contractor’s personnel must have sufficient experience, training, and knowledge with the

product and processes for which they are responsible. Personnel must be familiar with the

applicable codes of construction, project specifications / requirements, and inspection and

testing operations used for verification.

SECTION 014005 – CONTRACTOR QA/QC: continued

81799_8320_014005 014005-2

1.1.5 The Contractor is responsible for the coordination and scheduling of required tests and

inspections, and providing the Owner with sufficient prior notice to witness the required

activities.

1.1.6 The Contractor is responsible for the receipt, protection, control, security, and maintenance of

all Contractor furnished materials, including those of their Subcontractors, suppliers &

vendors, and Owner furnished materials, as specified in the Contract Documents.

1.1.7 The Contractor shall prepare a report on a monthly basis, as a minimum, of quality control

activities performed during the reporting period and submit to Owner with copies of the

quality records generated during the period.

1.1.8 The Owner may audit or inspect the Contractor’s products, services, and records to verify they

are in accordance with the written quality control system and the Contract Documents.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

1.2.1 The Contractor shall perform the necessary activities to verify the requirements specified in

the Contract Documents are completed correctly and in their entirety.

1.2.2 The Contractor shall document the completion of all quality control activities.

1.2.3 Minimum quality control activities associated with typical scope of work items and

specifications are defined in the Quality Control Checklists in Attachment A. The Contractor

is required to perform the specified quality control activities and complete the associated

Quality Control Checklist, as applicable for their scope of work.

1.2.4 If an appropriate Quality Control Checklists is not included in Attachment A then the

Contractor shall develop an appropriate checklist.

1.2.5 The Contractor shall utilize report forms, in conjunction with the Quality Control Checklists,

to document the results and/or status of required tests and inspections. Standard report forms

are specified in Appendix B. The Contractor may substitute their form provided that it is

equivalent and has been approved by the Owner.

1.2.6 The Contractor shall include the fully executed Quality Control Checklists and report forms

with their project turnover documentation.

1.3 PREPARATORY MEETINGS


81799_8320_014005 014005-3

1.3.1 The Owner may require the Contractor QC personnel to attend a preparatory meeting prior to

starting any major work activity. The purpose of this meeting is to review the requirements

and scope of work to obtain full agreement and understanding prior to starting work.

1.4 NONCONFORMANCE CONTROL

1.4.1 The Contractor is responsible for identifying and documenting all items of nonconformance

associated with their products or services, or that of any supplier or Subcontractor to the

Contractor.

1.4.2 Items of nonconformance include the following:

• Determination that completed work or services is not in compliance with specification

requirements. This does not generally include in-process inspections and tests, such as

NDE, hydrostatic testing, etc., that are performed as part of the work.

• After the fact determination that a specified inspection, test, or other quality control

activity was not performed or at the appropriate time or was performed incorrectly.

• Loss of quality records, or control of records.

• Identification of completed work that is not in accordance with the specification

requirements specified in the Contract Documents.

• Multiple or chronic errors of the same type that have been identified during planned

quality control activities but continue to occur. This represents a failure in the quality

control system, or implementation thereof, to carry out corrective action in a timely

manner.

• Any item that may adversely impact safety or operability unless repaired by a controlled

process that has not been previously approved.

1.4.3 The Contractor is to prepare the Nonconformance Report using form CF-002, or equivalent.

This report includes several items of information that generally occur over a period of time. The

report form is therefore divided into the following sections that need to be completed as

information is generated.

Introduction

This section includes identifying information associated with the organization responsible for the

nonconformance.

Section 1 – Identification of Nonconformance


81799_8320_014005 014005-4

This section includes a description of the nonconformance and the associated requirement (i.e.

how it should have been done). It will also include the name and signature of the responsible

person from the organization reporting the nonconformance, and the date reported.

Section 2 – Disposition of Nonconformance

This section provides a means to specify the proposed disposition of the nonconformance along

with a description of the necessary corrective action, if required. Disposition may be made as

one of the following three options:

• Accept As Is

• Accept pending completion and approval of corrective action.

• Reject / Scrap

The proposed disposition and associated corrective action will generally be suggested by the

Contractor. An authorized representative from Owner must approve the use of a disposition of

“Accept As Is” or “Accept pending corrective … action”. Approval must be granted in writing

and prior to either accepting the nonconformance out right or accepting it with the proposed

corrective action.

Section 3 – Acceptance of Corrective Action

This section is used to record verification that corrective action, if required, was completed and

accepted.

1.4.4 The Contractor is to provide a copy of the Nonconformance Report to the authorized OWNER

representative upon completing Section 1 and additional copies after completing each of the

remaining Sections.

1.4.5 The Contractor is to maintain a running log of all Nonconformance Reports generated on the

project, including tracking the current status for each one. The log is to be kept up-to-date

throughout the duration of the project. Use form CF-003, Nonconformance Report Log, or

equivalent.

1.4.6 The Contractor shall include the fully executed Nonconformance Report Log and all

Nonconformance Reports with their project turnover documentation.

1.5 WELDING CONTROL

1.5.1 The Contractor is responsible for controlling welding processes in accordance with the

Contract Documents.


81799_8320_014005 014005-5

1.5.2 The Contractor is to maintain a list of all welding personnel and their current qualifications

and certifications with expiration dates.

1.5.3 When specified in the Contract Documents or the applicable Quality Control Checklists, the

Contractor shall maintain a log of all welds made on the project including the location of the

weld, welder identification, welding procedure, description of required testing, and testing

results.

1.6 TESTING CONTROL

1.6.1 The Contractor is responsible for controlling testing processes in accordance with the contract

requirements.

1.6.2 The Contractor is responsible for maintaining a list of all testing personnel with their current

qualifications and certifications including expiration dates.

1.6.3 The Contractor shall prepare a list of all required tests and record when the test was performed

and the results. This list shall be updated on a regular basis.

1.7 MATERIAL CONTROL

1.7.1 The term material, as used herein, includes materials, equipment, parts, components,

assemblies, etc.

1.7.2 The Contractor shall establish a system to document and control material receipt, status

(accepted or rejected), jobsite transportation routes, storage location, maintenance

requirements and activities, removal from storage, and material setting. The system will

comply, as a minimum, with the requirements of this procedure and the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall submit the system to Owner for approval prior to receiving and storing

material at the jobsite.

1.7.3 The Contractor shall receive and unload materials in accordance with the contract

requirements and the requirements of this procedure (see Appendix C for specific types of

materials and equipment).

1.7.4 The Contractor shall notify Owner prior to unloading any materials that are hazardous,

radioactive, or may otherwise be unsafe.

1.7.5 Prior to releasing carriers of materials delivered to jobsites, the Contractor shall verify

quantities received match the shipping papers and perform a general inspection of the

materials and shipping containers to verify they are labeled or tagged appropriately and that no


81799_8320_014005 014005-6

damage occurred during shipment. If acceptable, Contractor shall sign the shipping papers,

retain one copy, and release the carrier. If unacceptable, the Contractor shall hold the carrier

and immediately notify the Owner.

1.7.6 The Contractor shall complete a Material Receiving Report, form CF-004 or equivalent, for

each material receipt. Contractor shall sign and date each report, attach the signed Bill of

Lading, and promptly submit to Owner.

1.7.7 The Contractor shall document discrepancies with regard to the quantities and/or condition of

the material receipt by completing a supplemental Overage, Shortage, and Damage Report,

form CF-007 or equivalent. Contractor shall sign and date each report, obtain carrier’s

signature, and promptly submit a copy to the carrier and Owner with the associated Material

Receiving Report.

1.7.8 The Contractor shall maintain a Material Receiving Log, Form CF-005 or equivalent, as a

consolidated record of all items received and the associated Material Receiving Report

number.

1.7.9 The Contractor shall file any documentation received with the shipment such as storage

requirements, installation instructions, drawings, and operating manuals. Documentation shall

be turned over to Owner before the Contractor’s request for acceptance or as requested.

1.7.10 The Contractor shall store materials that are not immediately installed in accordance with the

general requirements of this procedure and the requirements in Appendix C for specific types

of materials and equipment.

1.7.11 The Contractor is responsible for the protection and security of materials in storage.

1.7.12 The Contractor shall maintain identification of all materials throughout storage.

1.7.13 The Contractor shall prepare laydown areas, and provide storage facilities when specified in

the Contract Documents.

1.7.14 The storage area must be situated in a location that provides adequate drainage of water runoff

or is otherwise prepared to account for surface water for storing and retrieving material.

1.7.15 Laydown areas must placed in areas that are free from overhead contaminates and will be

accessible during future planned construction activities.

1.7.16 Material shall be stored in a facility or area suitable to the intended use of the material.

Material designed to be used indoors shall be stored indoors. Material designed to be used in


81799_8320_014005 014005-7

a climate controlled environment shall be stored in the same environment. Material designed

to be used outdoors may generally be stored outdoors except smaller items will generally be

kept indoors for security purposes.

1.7.17 The Contractor is responsible for verifying materials are properly prepared prior to being

stored outside or in non-climate controlled environments.

1.7.18 Materials shall be stored in a manner that will prevent them from shifting or falling and

damaging the material or injuring personnel.

1.7.19 Materials received in boxes, crates, etc., shall be stored on pallets or skids.

1.7.20 Material stored in laydown areas shall be placed on cribbing or timbers to keep from

contacting mud, gravel, surface water, etc.

1.7.21 Weatherproof coverings for outdoor storage shall utilize waterproof, flame resistant type

sheeting. Sheeting widths are the maximum practical and, if necessary, widths may be built

up by using waterproof taped splices. The sheeting is carefully placed and tied down to

prevent moisture from entering the laps and to prevent wind damage to the coverings. The

sheeting shall cover the top and sides of the equipment and be fastened securely around the

base of the equipment.

1.7.22 The Contractor shall keep a log of all materials entered into and removed from storage

including the time a date of entry and removal. The Contractor shall submit this log to the

Owner on a monthly basis or as requested.

1.7.23 The Contractor shall maintain and preserve equipment during storage in accordance with the

minimum requirements specified in Appendix C and additional requirements specified as

manufacturer’s recommendations. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and reviewing

the manufacturer’s recommendations for all items. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in

the event that manufacturer’s recommendations are not available.

1.7.24 The Contractor shall maintain a record of all maintenance activities performed for each

equipment item, and submit the completed and/or updated records to the Owner on a Monthly

basis or as requested.

1.8 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

1.8.1 The Contractor will complete the following activities prior to presenting systems to the Owner

for acceptance (unless a prior arrangement was made for joint final inspections):


81799_8320_014005 014005-8

• Fully execute and document all required activities within the Contractor’s scope of

work. This will include completing the system applicable Quality Control Checklists,

testing and examination reports, and logs.

• Make a final inspection of all work performed on the system, complete the associated

documentation, and develop a punch list of any and all items that are incomplete or

are not in accordance with project requirements at that time.

1.9 PROJECT TURNOVER DOCUMENTATION

1.9.1 The Contractor shall maintain and file all quality records at the jobsite including Quality

Control Checklists, test reports and records, nonconformance reports, weld logs, material

certifications, etc.

1.9.2 The Contractor shall label and assemble all quality records into turnover packages by unit or

area as specified in the Contract Documents.

1.9.3 The Contractor shall provide the complete turnover packages to the Owner prior to or at the

time of completing their work.

QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS

Appendix A – Quality Control Checklists

81799_8320_014005 014005-9

Procedure No. Quality Verification Checklists Rev

SECTION - 1 SITE WORK

QVC-1.01 Checklist for Surveying 0

QVC-1.02 Checklist for Demolition 0

QVC-1.03 Checklist for Excavation and Backfill 0

QVC-1.05 Checklist for Plant Road and Vehicle Parking 0

QVC-1.08 Checklist for Piling 0

QVC-1.09 Checklist for Drilled Piers 1

SECTION - 2 CONCRETE

QVC-2.01 Checklist for Concreting 1

SECTION - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL

QVC-3.01 Checklist for Structural Steel Erection 0

SECTION - 4 BUILDINGS

QVC-4.01 Checklist for Buildings 0

SECTION - 5 PIPING

QVC-5.01 Checklist for Underground Piping 0

SECTION - 7 EQUIPMENT SETTING

QVC-7.01 Checklist for Stationary Equipment 0

QVC-7.02 Checklist for Rotating Equipment 0

SECTION - 8 COATINGS

QVC-8.01 Checklist for Coatings Application 0

SECTION - 9 INSULATION, FIREPROOFING AND HEAT TRACE


Appendix B – Quality Control Forms

81799_8320_014005 014005-10

Form No. Construction Forms Rev

SECTION - 0 GENERAL

CF-001 Notice of Acceptance 2

CF-002 Nonconformance Report 0

CF-003 Non-Conformance Report Log 0

CF-004 Material Receiving Report 0

CF-005 Material Receiving Log 0

CF-006 Signoff Contractor to Burns & McDonnell 3

CF-007 Receiving Overage, Shortage, and Damage Report 0

CF-008 Welding Conformance 0

CF-009 Master Punch list 0

CF-010 Equipment Maintenance Log 0

CF-011 Daily Field Report 2

CF-012 Drawing Control Audit 1

CF-013 Quality Performance Measurement System 2

CF-014 Inspection Matrix 0

SECTION - 1 SITE WORK

CF-101 Pier/Pile Installation Log 0

CF-102 Soils Log 0

CF-103 Authorization to Backfill Record 1

SECTION - 2 CONCRETE

CF-200 Concrete Placement Log 0

CF-201 Concrete Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

CF-202 Grout Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 2

SECTION - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL

CF-301 Structural Steel Authorization and Acceptance Record 4

SECTION - 4 BUILDINGS

Use QVC-4.01 Checklist for Buildings

SECTION - 5 PIPING

CF-501 Piping Pressure Test Record 2

CF-502 System Line Tracker 0

CF-503 Holiday Test Record Log 3

CF-504 Tie-In Application, Authorization, and Record 1

SECTION - 6 ELECTRICAL

Electrical Forms current QV6.02-1a thru QV6.02-18

SECTION - 7 EQUIPMENT SETTING

CF-701 Equipment Installation Log 0

CF-702 Stationary Equipment Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

CF-703 Equipment Plumb Record 1

CF-704 Final Closing Authorization Record 2

CF-705 Rotating Equipment Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

CF-706 Coupling Alignment Record 1

SECTION - 8 COATINGS


Appendix B – Quality Control Forms

81799_8320_014005 014005-11

CF-801 Coating Record 1

SECTION - 9 INSULATION, FIREPROOFING AND HEAT TRACE

CF-901 Insulation Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

CF-902 Fireproofing Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

CF-904 Electric Tracing Placement Application, Authorization, and Record 1

SECTION - 10 SPECIAL PROCESSES

CF-1001 Weld Log / Traveler 0

CF-1002 Welder Qualification and Maintenance Log 0

CF-1003 Hot Tap Form 1

CF-1004 NDE Rejects 0


Appendix C – Receiving, Storage, and Maintenance Requirements for Specific Types of Materials and Equipment

Item Receiving and Storage Maintenance

81799_8320_014005 014005-12

All Items • Verify alloy materials were not shipped in contact with carbon steel.

• Do not store alloy materials in contact with carbon steel.

• Inspect coatings for shipping damage prior to unloading, when possible.

• Inspect flange faces or verify covers were in place to prevent damage during shipment.

• Verify nozzles beveled for field welds are protected.

• Verify individual items are marked or tagged as required.

• Verify items potentially subject to freezing temperatures are drained and sealed prior to storage.

• Verify on a continual basis that materials are stored in a manner that prevents contact with debris, ground water, etc.

• Verify on a continual basis that protective covers remain in place until installation.

• Verify on a continual basis that ferrous machined surfaces remain coated with rust preventative.

• Maintain internal purge with inert gas, when required.

• Continually check seals on items stored outside.

• Remove storage oils and lubricants and replace with the correct grade.

Pipe • Store on timbers or cribbing. • Store with pipe caps or closed ends.

Valves • Store all control and relief valves and other smaller general valves (< 4”) indoors.

• Store manually operated plug and ball valves in the open position and other types in the closed position.

• Store with actuators or wheel operators in the upright position.

Instruments • Store indoors in a climate controlled environment with desiccant in original sealed shipping containers.

Static Equipment (Pressure Vessels, Heat Exchangers, etc.)

• Verify interior is clean and dry. • Verify threaded openings are capped or

plugged. • Store large items outdoors off ground on

timbers.

Rotating Equipment • Inspect bearings for damage during transit. • Verify oil reservoirs are properly filled. • Verify equipment is prepared for long term

storage, when required. • For pumps with mechanical seals, fill

stuffing box with lubricating oil. • For pumps with service packing installed,

remove packing and repack with packing dipped in oil

• Check oil reservoir levels and rotate shafts at least 1 ¼ turns on a weekly basis or as recommended by the manufacturer.

• Verify Babbitt bearings are completely submerged in lubricant prior to rotating, when applicable.

• Use vapor phase inhibitor to minimize condensation. Identify openings used to introduce inhibitor for later removal prior to start-up.

• Spray internal packing with lubricating oil every two weeks.


Appendix C – Receiving, Storage, and Maintenance Requirements for Specific Types of Materials and Equipment

Item Receiving and Storage Maintenance

81799_8320_014005 014005-13

Reciprocating Equipment

• Coat exposed rods, eccentrics, plungers, and machined surfaces with rust preventative.

• Ensure non-lubricated type compressors with Teflon or carbon pistons or piston rings are kept sealed, purged, and pressurized. Do not add oil to non-lubricated type compressors.

• Turn crankcase 2 ½ turns and operate lubricators twice weekly.

• Operate manual priming pump, when installed, at least one minute twice weekly.

Motors • Loosen drain plugs in explosion proof and TEFC motors to allow accumulated moisture to drain.

• Remove brushes and store in a climate controlled area where condensation will not occur.

• Close conduit connections and protect with plastic plugs.

• Coat collector rings on A-C units with petroleum jelly.

• Measure and record insulation resistance values for each winding on motors equal to or greater than 600V. Record temperature and weather conditions at time of measurement.

• Six weeks before start-up, measure and record insulation resistance values for each winding on motors equal to or greater than 600V. Record temperature and weather conditions at time of measurement.

• For grease lubricated motors, inspect bearing grease at least every six months. If deteriorated, clean and repack bearings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Transformers • Store indoors in dust free area (except for units designed for outdoor operation).

• Cover bushings.

• For liquid filled units, monitor liquid level on a weekly basis.

• For gas blanketed units, monitor gas pressure on a weekly basis.

Electrical Equipment (Switchgear, Starters, Control Equipment, etc.)

• Store indoors unless units are furnished with weatherproof enclosures.

• Oil immersed equipment that is shipped dry shall be stored indoors.

• Provide aux. heaters, if necessary, and energize.

• Allow for adequate ventilation in order to prevent mildew and corrosion.

• Store free standing enclosed control equipment in the upright position.

• Check aux. heaters on a daily basis.


81799_8320_014200 014200-1

SECTION 014200 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Definitions:

1. Basic contract definitions used in the Contract Documents are defined in Attachment A – Commercial Terms and Conditions of the Contract. Definitions and explanations are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work.

2. General Requirements are the provisions or requirements of DIVISION 1 Sections, and which apply to the entire Work of the Contract.

B. Related Information Specified Elsewhere: Specification standards and associations applicable to the Work are specified in each Section.

1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATIONS: A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on

the Construction Specifications Institute's (CSI) Section Format and MasterFormat numbering system. Some portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attached to such compliance or noncompliance. 1. Divisions and Sections: For convenience, a basic unit of Specification text is a "Section,"

each unit of which is numbered and named. These are organized with related Sections, into "Divisions," which are recognized as the present industry consensus on uniform organization and sequencing of Specifications. The Section title is not intended to limit meaning or content of Section, nor to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein, nor to be an integral part of text.

2. Section Numbering: Used for identification and to facilitate cross-references in Contract Documents. Sections are placed in numeric sequence; however, numbering sequence is not complete, and listing of Sections in Table of Contents at beginning of the Project Manual must be consulted to determine numbers and names of Specification Sections in these Contract Documents.

3. Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each Section. Section number is shown with page number at bottom of each page, to facilitate location of text.

4. Parts: Each Section of Specifications generally has been subdivided into three basic "parts" for uniformity and convenience (PART 1 - GENERAL, PART 2 - PRODUCTS, and PART 3 - EXECUTION). These "Parts" do not limit the meaning of text within. Some Sections may not contain all three "Parts" when some are not applicable, or may contain more than three "Parts" to add clarity to organization of Section.

5. Underscoring of Titles: Used strictly to assist reader of Specification in scanning text for key words in content. No emphasis on or relative importance is intended except where underscoring may be used in body of text to emphasize a duty, critical requirement, or similar situation.

6. Project Identification: Project file number and identification are recorded at bottom of each page of Specifications to minimize possible misuse of Specifications, or confusion with other Project Specifications.

B. Specification Content: 1. These Specifications apply certain conventions in the use of language and the intended

meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: a. Imperative and Streamlined Language: These Specifications are written in

imperative and abbreviated form. This imperative language of the technical

SECTION 014200 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS: continued

014200-2 81799_8320_014200

Sections is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall," "the Contractor shall," and "shall be," and similar mandatory phrases by inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on the Drawings. The words "shall be" shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, fulfill (perform) all indicated requirements whether stated imperatively or otherwise.

b. Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying requirements varies throughout text, and may include "prescriptive," "compliance with standards," "performance," "proprietary," or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of Work has no bearing on requirements for another unit of Work.

c. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, notify Engineer in writing for a decision, which Engineer will render in writing within a reasonable time.

d. Abbreviations: Throughout the Contract Documents are abbreviations implying words and meanings which shall be appropriately interpreted. Specific abbreviations have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in schedules. These are normally defined at first instance of use. Organizational and association names and titles of general standards are also abbreviated.

C. Assignment of Specialists: In certain instances, Specification text requires that specific Work be assigned to specialists in the operations to be performed. These specialists shall be engaged for performance of those units of Work, and assignments are requirements over which Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments shall not be confused with, and are not intended to interfere with, enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, local trade and union jurisdictions, and similar conventions. Nevertheless, final responsibility for fulfillment of Contract requirements remains with Contractor.

D. Trades: Except as otherwise specified or indicated, the use of titles such as "carpentry" in Specification text, implies neither that the Work must be performed by an accredited or unionized tradesperson of corresponding generic name (such as "carpenter"), nor that specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradespersons of that corresponding generic name.

1.03 DRAWING SYMBOLS: A. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on Drawings are those symbols

recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for clarification.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS: A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference and are stated in each Section. 1. Referenced standards, referenced directly in Contract Documents or by governing

regulations, have precedence over nonreferenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to the Work.

SECTION 014200 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS: continued

81799_8320_014200 014200-3

2. Where compliance with an industry standard is required, the latest standard in effect at time of opening Bids shall govern.

3. Where an applicable code or standard has been revised and reissued after the effective date of the Contract and before performance of Work affected by the revision, Engineer will decide whether to issue a Change Order to proceed with the revised standard.

4. In every instance the quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum to be provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly, within specified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

5. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. a. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction

activity, Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. B. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are

frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision.


PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable END OF SECTION 014200

75644_0152007564481799_8320_015200 015200-1

SECTION 015200 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes requirements for temporary field offices and other structures required for

office and storage space required by Contractor. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Equipment and Materials: SECTION 016000. 2. Temporary Utilities and Facilities: SECTION 015600.

C. Use of Existing Facilities: 1. Existing facilities at the Site shall not be used for field offices.

D. Use of Permanent Facilities: 1. Permanent facilities when substantially completed shall not be used for field offices or

for storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIELD OFFICES: A. General:

1. Provide trailers, mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised aboveground, with steps, landings, and railings at entrance doors.

2. Buildings shall be structurally sound, secure, and weathertight. 3. Provide appropriate type fire extinguishers at each office and storage area. 4. Maintain offices during progress of the Work.

B. Contractor's Office: 1. Provide a field office for Contractor's superintendent on the Site, if required by

Contractor’s operations. 2. It shall be of size required for general use, with lights, heat, furnishings, telephone

service, and other necessary facilities and utilities required by Contractor's operations.

2.02 STORAGE SHEDS AND TRAILERS: A. On Site:

1. Provide temporary buildings or trailers needed for storage of Equipment and Materials installed under this Contract.

2. Provide ventilation and heating as required by Equipment and Material stored. B. Off Site:

1. Advise Engineer of any arrangements made for storage of Equipment and Materials in a place other than Owner's Site. Furnish evidence of insurance coverage with Application for Payment as specified by the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LOCATION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE: A. General:

1. Place temporary buildings, trailers, and stored Materials in locations acceptable to Engineer.

2. Install field offices and sheds to resist winds and elements of the locality where installed. 3. Remove when no longer needed at the Site or when Work is completed. 4. Keep approach walks free of leaves, mud, water, ice, or snow.

SECTION 015200 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS: continued

015200-2 81799_0152007564481799_8320_015200

5. At completion of Work, remove temporary buildings and trailers, foundations (if any), utility services, and debris.

6. Prepare ground or paved areas as required by Contractor’s operations. END OF SECTION 015200

81799_8320_015300 015300-1

SECTION 015300 - TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes General Requirements for:

1. Safety and protection of Work. 2. Safety and protection of existing property. 3. Barriers. 4. Security. 5. Environmental controls. 6. Access roads and parking areas. 7. Traffic control and use of roadways. 8. Railroad service.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Temporary Utilities and Facilities: SECTION 015600.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY: A. General:

1. Provide for the safety and protection of the Work and of Materials and Equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site. Provide protection at all times against rain, wind, storms, frost, freezing, condensation, or heat so as to maintain all Work and Equipment and Materials free from injury or damage. At the end of each day, all new Work likely to be damaged shall be appropriately protected.

2. Notify Engineer immediately at any time operations are stopped due to conditions which make it impossible to continue operations safely or to obtain proper results.

3. Construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations, floors, pits, trenches, manholes, and ducts free of water.

4. Protect floors from damage by proper covering and care when handling heavy equipment, painting, or handling mortar or other such materials. Use proper cribbing and shoring to prevent overloading of floors while moving heavy equipment. Provide metal pans under pipe-threading machines and clean such pans daily, keeping oil off floors. Restore floors to former condition where damaged or stained.

5. Concrete floors less than 28 Days old shall not be loaded without written permission from Engineer.

6. Restrict access to roofs except as required by the Work. Where access is required, provide protection with plywood, boards, or other suitable materials.

3.02 BARRIERS: A. General:

1. Furnish, install, and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry, to protect the public, and to protect the Work, existing facilities, trees, and plants from construction operations. Remove when no longer needed or at completion of Work.

2. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but shall not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards or regulatory agencies.

SECTION 015300 - TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS: continued

015300-2 81799_8320_015300

3. Barriers shall be of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for the required purposes.

4. Maintain barriers in good repair and clean condition for adequate visibility. Relocate barriers as required by progress of Work.

5. Repair damage caused by installation and restore area to original or better condition. Clean the area.

3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS: A. Dust Control:

1. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations; and to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere.

2. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces.

B. Water and Erosion Control: 1. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the Site, or

adjoining properties. 2. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from

cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. a. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum. b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes, and drains.

3. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff.

4. Provide, operate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface and groundwater.

5. Treat and dispose of surface runoff water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, sedimentation, or other damage to any portion of the Site or to adjoining areas, and in a manner acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

6. Provide temporary drainage where the roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed prior to the connection and operation of the permanent drainage piping system.

C. Debris Control and Clean-Up: 1. Keep the premises free at all times from accumulations of debris, waste materials, and

rubbish caused by construction operations and employees. Responsibilities shall include: a. Adequate trash receptacles about the Site, emptied promptly when filled. b. Periodic cleanup to avoid hazards or interference with operations at the Site and to

maintain the Site in a reasonably neat condition. c. The keeping of construction materials such as forms and scaffolding neatly stacked. d. Immediate cleanup to protect the Work by removing splattered concrete, asphalt,

oil, paint, corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from walls, floors, and metal surfaces before surfaces are marred.

2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements.

3. Final cleanup is specified in SECTION 017800 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.

SECTION 015300 - TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS: continued

81799_8320_015300 015300-3

D. Pollution Control: 1. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water,

or atmosphere by the discharge of hazardous or toxic substances from construction operations.

2. If indicated in contract drawings, provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages, and remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-Site in approved locations, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.

3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters, sanitary, or storm sewers.

3.04 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS: A. Existing On-Site Roads and Parking Areas:

1. Designated existing on-Site streets and parking facilities may be used for construction traffic. a. Maintain existing construction, and restore to original, better, or specified condition

at completion of Work. b. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

2. Do not allow existing on-Site streets, parking facilities, or walks to be used for construction traffic, equipment, or personnel once new plant entrance road is completed.

3.05 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND USE OF ROADWAYS: A. Maintenance of Roadways:

1. Repair roads, walkways, and other traffic areas damaged by operations. Keep traffic areas as free as possible of construction materials and maintain in a manner to eliminate dust, mud, and hazardous conditions.

2. All operations and repairs shall meet the approval of owners or agencies having jurisdiction.


81799_8320_015600 015600-1

SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes requirements of a temporary nature not normally incorporated into final

Work. It includes the following: 1. Utility services. 2. Construction and support facilities. 3. Construction aids.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Temporary Barriers and Controls: SECTION 015300. 2. Field Offices and Sheds: SECTION 015200.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. A10 Series - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition. B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

1. Electrical Design Library - Temporary Electrical Facilities. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 2. 70 - National Electrical Code. 3. 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department, and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Standards: 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241, and ANSI A10 Series standards "Temporary Electrical

Facilities." 2. Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric

service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70. C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary

utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination

of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service.

B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the Site.

SECTION 01560 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES: continued

015600-2 81799_8320_015600

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Provide new materials and equipment. If acceptable to Engineer, undamaged previously used

materials and equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials and equipment suitable for the use intended, of capacity for required usage, and meeting applicable codes and standards. Comply with requirements of DIVISIONS 2 through 48.

B. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. C. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses

100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

D. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120V plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.

E. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

F. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

G. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.

H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES: A. General:

1. Provide adequate utility capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to availability of temporary utilities at the Site, provide trucked-in services as required for start-up of construction operations.

2. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities required for adequate construction, safety, and security. Modify, relocate, and extend systems as Work progresses. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove on completion of Work or until service or facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3. The types of temporary construction utilities and facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of Work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads.

4. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certifications and permits for use.


81799_8320_015600 015600-3

5. Materials used for temporary service shall not be used in the permanent system unless so specified or acceptable to Engineer.

B. Because of operational requirements, Owner may restrict or curtail Contractor's use of electric power, water, compressed air, and natural gas. If these utilities are critical to Contractor's operations and completion of the Contract on the agreed schedule, Contractor shall consider furnishing alternate sources for its own use. Restriction or curtailment of these utilities shall not be a basis for a claim against Owner or an extension of the agreed schedule.

3.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING: A. Use of Existing System:

1. Owner will provide limited provisions for temporary electricity at a central location. Contractor shall provide means for distributing electricity as necessary to complete the Work and to connect construction trailer. Usage cost for construction will be paid by Owner. When temporary service is not available, Contractor shall provide portable generators as is necessary to complete the work.

B. Use of Permanent System: 1. Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of

Owner. 2. Maintain permanent system as specified for temporary facilities.

3.03 TEMPORARY WATER: A. Use of Existing System:

1. Owner will provide limited provisions for connection to the existing system for temporary water. Usage cost for construction will be paid by Owner.

B. Use of Permanent System: 1. Prior to use of permanent system for construction purposes, obtain written permission of

Owner. 2. Prior to Use of System for Drinking Water:

a. Disinfect piping. b. Obtain inspection and approval of governing authority.

3.04 TEMPORARY GAS: A. Use of Existing System:

1. Owner will not provide provisions for connection to the existing system for temporary natural gas. Contractor to inform Owner Prior to starting work if natural gas is required to perform the Work.

B. Use of Permanent System: 1. Use of permanent system by Contractor shall not be allowed.

3.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: A. Contractor to provide temporary sanitary facilities for Contractor’s use. B. Use of Existing Facilities:

1. Existing restroom facilities shall not be used. C. Use of Permanent Facilities:

1. Permanent sanitary facilities shall not be used by construction personnel.

3.06 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AIDS: A. General:


015600-4 81799_8320_015600

1. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, and other such facilities and equipment.

2. Materials may be new or used, must be suitable for the intended purpose, and meet the requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and standards.

3. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms, and railings for use by construction personnel.

3.07 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL: A. Relocation: Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, storage

limitations, or Work requirements and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors at the Site.

B. Removal: Remove temporary materials, equipment, and services when construction needs can be met and allowed by use of permanent construction, or at completion of the Project.

C. Repair: Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids.


81799_8320_016000 016000-1

SECTION 016000 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes general requirements for transportation and handling, delivery, storage,

and protection of Contractor-furnished Equipment and Materials. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Substitutions and Product Options: SECTION 016310. 2. Submittals: SECTION 013300.

1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. Not used

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Equipment and Material Incorporated into the Work:

1. Conform to applicable Specifications, codes, standards, and requirements of regulatory agencies.

2. Provide products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new and unused at the time of installation. Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. a. Standard Products: Where available and comply with Specifications, provide

standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

b. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, Owner is likely to need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard products for which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and its parts are likely to be available to Owner at a later date.

3. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by Engineer.

4. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the applicable standard trade,

engineering, and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be

interchangeable. c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Equipment and Material shall be suitable for conditions intended. e. Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to

unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 5. Do not use Material or Equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed

or is specified. B. Not Used.. C. Nameplates: Along with required labels and operating data, manufacturer or producer's

nameplates, imprints, or trademarks may be placed on surfaces exposed to view. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or, where

required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

SECTION 016000 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: Continued

016000-2 81799_8320_016000

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated Equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer including address (and telephone number). b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

D. Electronic Equipment Compliance: 1. Contractor warrants that all equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, or

firmware provided shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing). This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the equipment, device, item, system, software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without reference to a manufacturer’s name, make, or model number.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING: A. Shipment Preparation:

1. Contractor shall prepare Equipment and Materials for shipment in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling, and to protect against damage or unnecessary exposure in transit and storage. Provisions for protection shall include the following: a. Crates or other suitable packaging materials. b. Covers and other means to prevent corrosion, moisture damage, mechanical injury,

and accumulation of dirt in motors, electrical equipment, and machinery. c. Suitable rust-preventive compound on exposed machined surfaces and unpainted

iron and steel. d. Grease packing or oil lubrication in all bearings and similar items.

B. Marking: Tag or mark each item of Equipment and Material as identified in the delivery schedule or on Submittals and include complete packing lists and bills of material with each shipment. Each piece of every item need not be marked separately provided that all pieces of each item are packed or bundled together and the packages or bundles are properly tagged or marked.

C. Bills of Material: Contractor shall mail bills of material to Engineer (with copy to the Resident Project Representative) prior to delivery of each shipment and shall include bills of material with each shipment.

D. Delivery: 1. Furnish Owner all requirements for unloading and handling of Equipment and Materials

upon delivery sufficiently in advance to allow installing contractor sufficient preparation time. Include type and capacity of unloading equipment required as applicable.

2. Deliver all Equipment and Materials to Point of Delivery by truck to the site address listed in SECTION 011100.

3. Deliver Equipment and Materials in an undamaged condition, in original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

4. Mark partial deliveries of component parts to identify the Equipment or Material, to permit easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly.

E. Receipt and Unloading:

SECTION 016000 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: continued

81799_8320_016000 016000-3

1. Deliver all Equipment and Materials to the Point of Delivery complete with packing lists and bills of material. Contractor will furnish receipts to shipper upon delivery.

2. Contractor will receive, check, unload, inventory, accept, and store all Equipment and Materials delivered to the Point of Delivery in accordance with proper notice. Installing contractor will report any damage to Engineer prior to or during unloading and advise Engineer of any shortage at time of delivery. Engineer will verify such reports and so notify Contractor.

3. Contractor will be responsible for proper location of trucks for unloading, and all demurrage charges and substantiated claims for damage to trucks resulting from unloading operations.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION: A. Storage Requirements:

1. Contractor will furnish all facilities needed for storage of Equipment and Materials at the Project Site.

2. Contractor will assume responsibility for and protect all Equipment and Materials in accordance with Contractor's recommendations.

1.06 EQUIPMENT TAGS: A. All equipment, instruments, valves, etc., furnished under this Contract shall be provided with a

permanently affixed tag, the shall include at a minimum the tag idenfification number assigned by Contractor in accordance with the tagging scheme indicated on the Contract Drawings. Tags shall be stainless steel, 0.040” thick (minimum), and be stamped with the idenificaiton number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Specified in applicable Sections.


81799_8320_016310 016310-1

SECTION 016310 - SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

substitutions made after award of the Contract. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Requirements for submitting Contractor's construction progress schedule and the Submittal schedule: SECTIONS 013200 and 013300.

2. Requirements governing Contractor's selection of products: SECTION 016000.

1.02 DEFINITIONS: A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the

Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, Materials, Equipment, and methods of construction

required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by Owner or Engineer. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Substitution Request Submittal: Engineer will consider written requests for substitution if

received within 30days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 30 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of Engineer. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the

form and according to procedures required for Change Order proposals. Requests for substitution shall not be submitted in the form of a Request for Information (RFI).

2. Identify the Equipment or Material, the fabrication, or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section/Article and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Statement indicating why specified product or method of construction cannot be

provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Identification of available sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services. g. A statement indicating the effect of the substitution on Contractor's construction

progress schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution.


016310-2 81799_8320_016310

Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on the overall Contract Times. If specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Times, provide letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delay in delivery.

h. An itemized estimate of costs that will result directly or indirectly from approval of the substitution, including: (1) A proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract Price. (2) Costs of redesign required by the proposed change. (3) Costs of resulting claims as determined in coordination with other

contractors having work on the Project affected by the substitution. i. Statement indicating whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute is subject

to payment of any license fee or royalty. j. Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in

the Contract Documents, will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, is similar in substance to that specified, and is suitable for same use as that indicated and specified.

k. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

4. Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Conditions: Engineer will receive and consider Contractor's request for substitution when one

or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Engineer. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed substitution is in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents and

will produce indicated results. 3. Substitution request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Times. Engineer will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.


81799_8320_016310 016310-3

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

10. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime contractor, each contractor shall cooperate with the other contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products.

B. Engineer’s review and acceptance of Submittals shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Engineer’s acceptance of Submittals not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval of a substitute. Acceptance by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 016310

81799_8320_017329 017329-1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Definition: Cutting and patching includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the

installation of Work, and the repair required to restore materials to their original or better

condition.

1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the Work, to uncover Work for

access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed,

or for other similar purposes.

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products or during the initial

fabrication, erection, or installation process is not considered to be cutting and patching

under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations is also

not considered to be cutting and patching.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Refer to DIVISION 2 for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations.

2. Refer to other Sections of these Specifications for specific cutting and patching

requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of

the time cutting and patching will be performed if Owner requires approval of these procedures

before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as

applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and

indicate why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes

to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's

appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.

4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING: continued

017329-2 81799_8320_017329

5. List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that

will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long

service will be disrupted.

6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit

details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the

original structure.

7. Approval by Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive Engineer's

right to later require complete removal and replacement of defective Work.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that

would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the

following structural elements:

a. Foundation construction.

b. Bearing and retaining walls.

c. Structural concrete.

d. Structural steel.

e. Lintels.

f. Timber and primary wood framing.

g. Structural decking.

h. Stair systems.

i. Miscellaneous structural metals.

j. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

k. Equipment supports.

l. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and Equipment.

m. Structural systems for special construction.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a

manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and

patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased

maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the

following operating elements or safety related systems:


81799_8320_017329 017329-3

a. Primary operational systems and Equipment.

b. Air or smoke barriers.

c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

d. Membranes and flashings.

e. Fire protection systems.

f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.

g. Control systems.

h. Communication systems.

i. Conveying systems.

j. Electrical wiring systems.

k. Operating systems for special construction.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in

occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's

aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a

visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work

listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage

another recognized experienced and specialized firm.

a. Processed concrete finishes.

b. Stonework and stone masonry.

c. Ornamental metal.

d. Matched-veneer woodwork.

e. Preformed metal panels.

f. Firestopping.

g. Window wall system.

h. Stucco and ornamental plaster.

i. Acoustical ceilings.

j. Terrazzo.

k. Finished wood flooring.

l. Fluid-applied flooring.

m. Carpeting.

n. Aggregate wall coating.


017329-4 81799_8320_017329

o. Wall covering.

p. Swimming pool finishes.

q. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.

1.04 WARRANTY:

A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by

methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, specified, or as directed by Engineer, use materials

for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not

available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest

extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will

equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ÍNSPECTION:

A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the

Work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered,

take corrective action before proceeding with the Work.

B. Before the start of cutting Work, meet at the Project site with all parties involved in cutting and

patching. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades.

Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the Work.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support of Work to be cut to prevent failure.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that may be

exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining

areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.


81799_8320_017329 017329-5

C. Precautions: Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the

building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated, until provisions have been made to bypass

them.

3.03 PERFORMANCE:

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time and complete Work without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore

surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting:

1. Cut existing construction using methods that are least likely to damage elements to be

retained, or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the

original installer.

2. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting

machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill. Cut holes and slots as small

as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.

To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side

into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

3. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of DIVISION 31 where cutting and

patching requires excavating and backfilling.

4. Bypass utility services such as pipe and conduit before cutting, where such utility

services are shown or required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned. Cut off conduit

and pipe in walls or partitions to be removed. After bypass and cutting, cap, valve, or

plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture

or other foreign matter.

C. Patching:

1. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances for the Work.

2. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.


017329-6 81799_8320_017329

3. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining Work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and

refinishing.

4. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area,

patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of

uniform color and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance,

remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials.

a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire

unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and

second coat.

5. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of

uniform appearance.

3.04 CLEANING:

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where Work is performed. Remove dirt, dust, grease, paint

splatter, mortar, oils, sealants, and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit,

and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe

covering to its original condition.


75644_8320_017500 017500-1

SECTION 017500 - MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes requirements of manufacturers for services to be

performed at the Project Site in regards to erection, start-up, and testing of Equipment.

1.02 SERVICES REQUIRED:

A. Services with Equipment and Materials Furnished Under this Contract:

1. Furnish the services of qualified field personnel from the Suppliers or manufacturers of Equipment furnished and installed under this Contract, as required to perform all manufacturer's Field Services called for in the Specifications. Field personnel shall be certified by the Supplier or manufacturer of the specific product or system as having the necessary knowledge and experience to perform the required functions.

2. Where such service is specified, Contractor shall not perform any Work related to the installation or operation of Equipment furnished and installed under this Contract without direct observation and guidance of the Supplier’s or manufacturer's field personnel unless Engineer concurs otherwise.

3. Contractor shall arrange for the Supplier's or manufacturer’s field personnel to perform the following: a. Observe the erection, installation, start-up, and testing of Equipment. b. Instruct and guide Contractor in proper procedures. c. Supervise the initial start-up, operational check, and any required adjustments of

Equipment. d. Instruct Owner's designated personnel in proper operation and maintenance of all

Equipment. e. Furnish a written report to Engineer covering all Work done at least once each week

and when Work on each item of Equipment or system is completed. 4. Advise Engineer of arrival at the Site of all Supplier’s and manufacturer's field personnel.

B. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Specified in applicable Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 OPERATION AND TESTING:

A. Placing Equipment in Operation: 1. Place all Equipment installed under this Contract into successful operation according to

instructions of the Supplier, manufacturer, or field representative, including making all required adjustments, tests, operation checks, and the following: a. Cleaning, sounding, blowing-out, and flushing of lubricating oil and water systems,

and other pipelines. b. Lubrication,lubricants supplied by Contractor unless specified to be furnished by

Owner or others. c. Tests of lubrication system safety interlocks and system performance. d. Final alignment checks and measurements made under observation of Engineer and

Owner. Alignment checks shall include opening connections, if required, to ensure there are no abnormal stresses on Equipment from pipes, ducts, or other attachments. Alignment shall be within tolerances specified by the manufacturer, and measurements shall be recorded and furnished to Engineer.

SECTION 017500 - MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: Continued

017500-2 75644_8320_017500

e. Motor rotation checks before connecting couplings. f. Inspection of sleeve bearings for adequate contact. g. Checking of anchor-bolt tensions, grout, and shims. Tighten anchor bolts with

calibrated torque wrenches using care not to over stress bolts. 2. After "run-in" and acceptance of alignment, affix major Equipment in place using

standard tapered dowels with jack-out nuts at head end to facilitate removal. 3. Record all above operations on forms furnished by Engineer. 4. Furnish all necessary attendants and personnel as part of the Work to accomplish the

above operations until such time as individual items, systems, Equipment, or sections of the plant are acceptable for operation by Owner.

5. Provide attendants on a continuous basis as required to complete events without interruption once they have been started.

6. Contractor shall provide all necessary untilties, lubricants, first fills and fuels for placing Equipment supplied by this Contract in operation, unless stated to be furnished by Others.

B. Performance Tests: 1. Equipment Furnished Under this Contract:

a. Owner may conduct acceptance tests after installation to determine if the Equipment installed as part of the Work perform in accordance with Contract Documents and as guaranteed. Final acceptance of Equipment will be based on acceptable results of such tests.

b. No tests will be conducted on Equipment for which Supplier’s or manufacturer's Field Service is specified unless Supplier’s or manufacturer's field representative is present and declares in writing that the Equipment is ready for such test.

c. Contractor will be notified by Owner so that Contractor can have a representative or manufacturer's representative present during any tests of Equipment for which Supplier’s or manufacturer's Field Service is not specified.

d. The tests will be made as set forth in the Contract Documents unless the interested parties mutually agree upon some other manner of testing.

2. Equipment Furnished by Others: a. Contractor shall participate in the testing of Equipment as follows:

(1) None


75644_8320_017800 017800-1

SECTION 017800 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout

including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Instruction book and operating manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning.

B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections of the Specifications.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Prerequisites to Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance: RUS Form 200. 2. Submittals: SECTION 013300. 3. Warranties: Contract Attachment A Section 9

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial

Completion is claimed, show 100% completion for the portion of the Work claimed as Substantially Complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract

Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price. b. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value

of incomplete Work, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship Bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner's operation and

maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the Site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and assured by Contractor that the Work

is Substantially Complete. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final

acceptance.

SECTION 017800 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: continued

017800-2 75644_8320_017800

1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance

and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. 3. Submit record drawings, instruction books and operating manuals, final project

photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

4. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required.

5. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Price.

6. Submit a certified copy of Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by Engineer. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by Engineer.

7. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the Date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.Submit consent of surety to final payment.

8. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

9. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. B. Reinspection Procedure: Engineer will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the

Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to Engineer. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, Engineer will prepare a certificate of final acceptance.

If the Work is incomplete, Engineer will advise Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.

1.04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents

from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 2. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

variations in separate categories of the Work. Mark each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.

3. Mark new information that is important to Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.

4. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.


75644_8320_017800 017800-3

5. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.

6. Upon completion of the Work, submit record drawings to Engineer for Owner's records. 7. Include the following:

a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements. c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. d. Where Submittals are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding

location on Drawings. e. Field changes of dimension and detail. f. Changes made by Change Order or other Modifications. g. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual including Addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and Modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in

comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on

concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

3. Note related record drawing information and product data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to Engineer for Owner's

records. 5. Include the following:

a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of Equipment actually installed, particularly optional and substitute items.

b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Order, or other Modifications. c. Related Submittals.

D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data Submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in

comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the Site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record product data to Engineer for Owner's records.

E. Record Samples Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. Comply with Owner's instructions regarding packaging, identification, and delivery to Owner.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and Submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records, and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to Engineer for Owner's records.


017800-4 75644_8320_017800

G. Instruction Books and Operating Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size as specified in SECTION 013300.

H. Electronic Documentation: 1. None

I. Warranties and Bonds: Specified in RUS Form 200 and SECTION 013300.

1.05 SPARE PARTS: A. Products Required:

1. Provide to Owner the quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance Materials specified in individual Sections, in addition to that required for completion of Work.

2. Products shall be identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities required from Supplier or manufacturer of original purchase to avoid variations in manufacture.

B. Storage, Maintenance: 1. Coordinate with Owner. Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Project Site and

obtain receipt prior to final payment. 2. For portions of the Work accepted and occupied by Owner prior to Substantial

Completion, deliver the applicable spare products to Owner at time of acceptance. Obtain receipt.

3. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of Equipment that requires

regular maintenance to meet with Owner's personnel at Project Site to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Instruction books and operating manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and Materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards, hazardous chemicals data sheets. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. As part of instruction for operating Equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures.


75644_8320_017800 017800-5

6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING: A. General: Contractor shall keep the Site premises free from accumulations of waste Materials,

rubbish, and other debris resulting from the Work. Regular Site cleaning is included in SECTION 015300.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent Materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable, vision-obscuring Materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent Materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Clean concrete floors to a "broom clean" condition. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical Equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

e. Remove debris and surface dirt from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, Equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces.

f. Clean the Site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

g. Clean and polish plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure.

h. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 2. Remove temporary structures, tools, Equipment, supplies, and surplus Materials. 3. Remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed to protect

previously completed Work. 4. Special Cleaning: Cleaning for specific units of Work is specified in applicable Sections

of Specifications. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of

the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards

for cleaning. Do not burn waste Materials. Do not bury debris or excess Materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous Materials into drainage systems. Remove waste Materials from the Site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Extra Materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work become Owner's

property. Dispose of these Materials as directed by Owner. E. Repairs:

1. Repair damaged protective coated surfaces.


017800-6 75644_8320_017800

2. Repair roads, walks, fences, and other items damaged or deteriorated because of construction operations.

3. Restore all ground areas affected by construction operations.


81799_8320_031000 031000-1

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes formwork for cast-in-place concrete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete Reinforcement: SECTION 032000. 2. Concrete: SECTION 033000.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Standards:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. b. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. c. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. d. 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. b. C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens. c. C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS FOR FACING: A. Where concrete will be exposed to view after construction:

1. Use exterior grade plywood at least 5/8-inch thick or steel forms capable of producing a smooth, uniform appearance.

2. Do not use form-facing materials with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, dents, or other defects that will impair the texture of concrete surfaces.

B. Where concrete will not be exposed to view after construction: 1. Exterior grade plywood at least 5/8-inch thick. 2. Steel. 3. Wood fiberboard. 4. Dressed lumber free of loose knots.

C. Treat forms with commercially available form releasing agents that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces. Agents shall not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon bond or adhesion, nor shall it impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Form releasing agents shall be VOC compliant with a maximum VOC content of 3.8 lbs/gal (450 g/L), or less where area restrictions are more stringent.

D. Clean forms of sawdust, dust, dirt, and other foreign materials.

2.02 FORM TIES: A. Break-back, coil, or screw-type, except where otherwise specified.

SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMWORK: continued

031000-2 81799_8320_031000

B. Use water-seal coil type in walls below grade and in walls of water-bearing structures. Removable through-wall tappered ties shall not be used.

C. Coil type shall leave conical depression in concrete. D. Space as required against pressure of fresh concrete. E. The portion of the form tie remaining in place shall provide for a clearance of two times the

minimum cross-sectional dimension of the tie, but not less than 3/4-inch, from the formed surface.

2.03 CHAMFER STRIPS: A. Chamfer: 3/4-inch except where otherwise indicated. B. Place in all forms to provide chamfer where concrete will have exposed projecting corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION: A. Conform to ACI 301, 318, and 347, except Shop Drawings for formwork, shoring, and

reshoring shall not be submitted for approval. B. Adequately brace, stiffen, and support forms to prevent perceptible deflection or settlement,

and to hold plumb, level, and true to line. C. Construct and maintain forms to the tolerances given in ACI 117. D. Construct sufficiently tight to prevent mortar leakage. E. Avoid offsets between adjacent forms and construct so that shores, braces, and stiffening

members are in line with those below. F. Space studs and stringers as required to support facing against concrete pressure, but not more

than 12 inches for 5/8-inch plywood or 16 inches for 3/4-inch plywood. Maximum deflection of facing materials reflected on concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members of the formwork.

G. Use wales, strongbacks, shores, and bracing as required. H. Form all necessary openings or chases for piping, ductwork, and similar items where indicated

or as required for the Work. I. Construct forms to be removable in sections without marring concrete surface. J. Surface of forms shall provide a smooth, dense, plane surface to finished concrete where

exposed to view. K. Subcontractor shall be responsible for structural adequacy, design, engineering, and

construction of the formwork. L. Stay-in-place metal forms shall not be used.

3.02 TIME-IN-PLACE FOR FORMS: A. It is the responsibility of Subcontractor to consider all applicable factors and leave the

formwork in place until it is safe to remove them. B. All removal shall be performed in a manner which will prevent damage to the concrete and

ensure the complete safety of the structure. C. Where forms support more than one element, the forms shall not be removed until the form

removal criteria are met by all supported elements. D. Evidence that concrete has gained sufficient strength to permit removal of forms shall be

determined by tests on control cylinders. All control cylinders shall be stored in the structure or as near the structure as possible so they receive the same curing conditions and protection methods as given those portions of the structure they represent. Control cylinders shall be

SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMWORK: continued

81799_8320_031000 031000-3

removed from the molds at an age of no more than 24 hours. All control cylinders shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39 at the expense of Subcontractor by an independent laboratory that complies with ASTM C107. Control cylinders shall be tested within 4 hours after removal from the Site.

E. Forms shall not be removed unless the minimum time or minimum compressive strength requirements below are met. 1. Formwork Not Supporting Weight of Concrete:

a. Formwork for walls, columns, sides of beams, gravity structures, slabs-on-ground and other vertical type formwork not supporting the weight of concrete shall remain in place 24-hours minimum after concrete placement is completed.

2. Formwork Supporting Weight of Concrete: a. Formwork supporting weight of concrete and shoring shall not be removed until

structural members have acquired sufficient strength to safely support their own weight and any construction or other superimposed loads to which the supported concrete may be subjected. As a minimum, no forms or shoring shall be loosened or removed until control concrete test cylinders indicate the concrete has attained the following compressive strengths for the respective structural members:

Percent of Design Structural Member Compressive Strength Unshored slab and beam forms or forms which can be removed without disturbing shores………...………. 70

Slab or beam shoring ……………………………………… 85


81799_8320_032000 032000-1

SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes steel reinforcement bars, ties, welded wire fabric, bolsters, chair

supports, and accessories.


1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. A185 - Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. c. A615/A615M - Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement. d. A706/A706M - Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. b. SP-66 - Detailing Manual. c. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. d. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.5 - Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. B2.1 - Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification. c. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. Manual of Standard Practice.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Complete bar schedule, bar details, and erection drawings to conform to ACI SP-66. 2. Drawing with each type of bent bar marked with identification mark. Straight bars shall

have mark number or be identified by size and length. 3. Erection drawings shall be clear, easily legible, and to a minimum scale of:

a. 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50). b. 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:100) if bars in each face are shown in separate views.

4. Size and location of all openings. 5. Concrete protective cover. 6. Grade of steel. 7. Lap splice lengths.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Store steel reinforcement blocked-up off the ground and in orderly stacks. B. Store only bars with the same identifying label in the same stack.

1.05 TESTING: A. Perform at the mill for each heat.

SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT: continued

032000-2 81799_8320_032000

B. Submit certified test results upon request.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCEMENT BARS, TIES, AND STIRRUPS: A. Materials:

1. Conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, except as otherwise specified. 2. Cold-drawn wire for spiral column ties shall conform to ASTM A82. 3. Reinforcement indicated or specified to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706. 4. Drilled shaft ties and stirrups of any size shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless

otherwise indicated. B. Fabrication of Bars:

1. Fabricate with cold bends conforming to the recommended dimensions shown in ACI 318.

2. Fabricate bars according to the tolerances given in ACI 117. 3. Field fabrication will be allowed only if contractor has equipment to properly fabricate

steel, and must be approved by the Engineer/Owner. 4. Attach metal or plastic tags with identifying mark or length corresponding to mark

number or length on Drawing. Straight bars shall have mark number or size and length. Bent bars shall have mark number.

5. Contractor may, at his option, continue steel reinforcement through openings in walls and slabs, then field-cut the opening so that there will be the required concrete cover between ends of bars and edge of opening.

2.02 WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT: A. Conform to ASTM A185 using bright basic wire conforming to ASTM A82. B. Wire sizes W1.4 and smaller shall be galvanized. C. Provide mats only. Rolled fabric is not acceptable.

2.03 BOLSTERS, CHAIRS, AND ACCESSORIES: A. Conform to ACI SP-66 and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Provide all spacers, bolsters, chairs, ties, and other devices necessary to properly space, place,

support, and fasten steel reinforcement in place during the concrete placement. C. Metal accessories shall be galvanized or plastic-coated where legs will be exposed in finished

concrete surfaces. D. Do not use rocks, broken bricks, wood blocks, or concrete fragments for support of steel

reinforcement.

2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCK BAR SUPPORTS: A. May be used only for bar supports in slabs on ground. B. Conform to ACI SP-66 and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. C. Each block shall have a minimum of 9 square inches (5800 square millimeters) of bearing

area. Space as required by the particular condition of weight, bearing surface, and rigidity of the steel reinforcement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT: continued

81799_8320_032000 032000-3

3.01 PLACEMENT OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT: A. Place all steel reinforcement before concrete is cast in accordance with approved erection

drawings, ACI 117, Chapters 7 and 12 of ACI 318, and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

B. Remove oil, mill scale, pitting, mud, loose rust, ice, and other materials that would reduce bond from bars before placing.

C. Tie securely with 1.6 mm (16-gage) or larger annealed iron wire. D. Place to maintain concrete cover to conform to ACI 117 and Chapter 7 of ACI 318, unless

otherwise indicated. E. Splice steel where indicated. Splices shall be in full contact and shall conform to Chapter 12 of

ACI 318. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, lap splices shall be Class B as defined by ACI 318. 2. Splice steel using Cadweld Series C- or T-splices where indicated or approved.

a. Provide a manufacturer's representative to give on-site instructions to all welders who will perform the splices in the field.

b. Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative instruct, observe, and approve in writing those persons doing the welding.

c. Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer's representative to return at the request of the Engineer.

3. Any additional Contractor-proposed splice shall be submitted for acceptance of location and splice length.

F. Lap welded wire reinforcement in accordance with Section 12.19 of ACI 318, but not less than the length of one mesh plus 2 inches (50 mm).

G. Connection of reinforcement bars to steel shapes or plate shall be with a Cadweld Series B-splice.

H. Do not bend bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete without approval from Engineer. If bending is permitted, conform to procedures of ACI 301 unless otherwise prescribed by the governing building code.

I. Do not weld reinforcing bars unless specifically indicated. Where welding is indicated, provide bars conforming to ASTM A706/A706M and comply with AWS D1.4.

J. Contractor shall supply bracing required to insure constructability of the reinforcing steel cage. Braces shall be located so they do not interfere with the placement or pumping of the concrete.


81799_8320_033000 033000-1 REV 1

SECTION 033000 - CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes concrete and related items. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete Formwork: SECTION 031000. 2. Concrete Reinforcement: SECTION 032000. 3. Steel: SECTION 055013.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except as

otherwise indicated. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. b. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

B. Applicable Standards Where Referenced Herein: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. c. C31/C31M - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. d. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. e. C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. f. C40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. g. C42 - Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of

Concrete. h. C78 - Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with

Third-Point Loading). i. C88 - Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate. j. C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. k. C114 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement. l. C117 - Test Method for Material Finer than 75µ (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral

Aggregates by Washing. m. C136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. n. C142 - Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates. o. C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. p. C150 - Portland Cement. q. C172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. r. C192/C192M - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Laboratory. s. C231 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method. t. C233 - Test Methods for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. u. C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. v. C289 - Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical

Method). w. C295 - Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete. x. C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. y. C430 - Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 45µ (No. 325) Sieve.

SECTION 033000 - CONCRETE: continued

REV 1 033000-2 81799_8320_033000

z. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. aa. C566 - Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by

Drying. bb. C595/C595M - Blended Hydraulic Cements. cc. C618 - Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. dd. C881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. ee. C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). ff. C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. gg. C1315 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for

Caring and Sealing Concrete. hh. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural

Construction. (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). ii. D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint

Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. jj. D2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. kk. E1155/E1155M - Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor

Levelness Numbers. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

a. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.

b. 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. c. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. d. 305R - Committee Report on Hot Weather Concreting. e. 306R - Committee Report on Cold Weather Concreting. f. 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. g. 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. h. 313 - Standard Practice for Design and Construction of Concrete Silos and Stacking

Tubes for Storing Granular Materials. i. 506R - Guide to Shotcrete. j. 506.2 - Specification for Shotcrete.

3. Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau (CPMB): a. 100 - Concrete Plant Standards. b. 102 - Recommended Guide Specifications for Batching Equipment and Control

Systems in Concrete Batch Plants. c. Plant Mixer Manufacturers Division (PMMD) 100 - Concrete Plant Mixer

Standards. 4. Federal Specification (FS):

a. SS-S-200 - Sealants, Joint: Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant, Cold-Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.

b. TT-S-227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures).

5. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Specifications for Scales. 6. Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau (TMMB):

a. Truck Mixer, Agitator and Front Discharge Concrete Carrier Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Include, but not limited to, product data and Shop Drawings of the following:

1. Admixtures.


81799_8320_033000 033000-3 REV 1

2. Bonding agents. 3. Curing agents. 4. Concrete floor hardeners, sealers, and coloring compounds. 5. Expansion joint materials. 6. Joint sealants. 7. Waterstops. 8. Aggregate Concrete Floor Hardener.

C. Mill Certificates: 1. Submit to Owner a minimum of one copy for each cement shipment.

D. Concrete Mix Design Proportions: 1. Submit as specified in PART 2, paragraph 2.01D - Mix Proportions, this Section. 2. Submit for each mix design, including aggregate gradation data. 3. Resubmit for any change in each mix design.

E. Production Test Reports: Submit as specified in DIVISION 1 and PART 2, paragraph 2.01E - Measurement of Materials, this Section.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Testing: Shall be performed by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1. B. Finishing: Finishing of concrete slabs and floors shall be supervised by an ACI Concrete

Flatwork Technician/Finisher. C. Submit qualification records of field testing and finishing technicians prior to placing concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE: A. Materials:

1. Portland cement Type I, Type II. Type I, II, or I/II shall conform to ASTM C150. a. Fly ash shall be used as the pozzolan and be interground with the clinker in the

manufacture of the cement. Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Class F. (1) Fly ash may be added by Supplier as a separate ingredient provided the

Supplier has scales for dispensing fly ash that meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.01.E, this Part.

b. The maximum amount retained on the No. 325 sieve shall be 10% as determined in accordance with ASTM C430.

c. The maximum amount of alkalies (NA2O + 0.658 K2O) shall be 0.60% determined in accordance with ASTM C114. A running average of three Samples shall not exceed a maximum of 0.50%.

d. Use one brand of cement throughout the Project unless otherwise approved. 2. Fine Aggregate:

a. Conform to ASTM C33, except deleterious substances shall not exceed (by weight): (1) Clay Lumps: 0.25%. (2) Material Finer than No. 200 (75µ) Sieve: 2.0%. (3) Coal and Lignite: 0.25% except use sand containing not more than 0.05%

coal and lignite when used in concrete for finished floor surfaces. (4) Other Deleterious Substances: 0.25%.

b. Approved service record of 3 years with a history indicating that the fine aggregate is not chemically reactive.

c. For a new fine aggregate source, or when 3 years' approved service records are not available, or when the service records are unacceptable; the aggregate shall be


REV 1 033000-4 81799_8320_033000

evaluated for potential reactivity. Aggregate must be considered innocuous in accordance with petrographic examination by ASTM C295 and tests conforming to ASTM C289.

d. Fine aggregate considered deleterious or potentially deleterious shall not be used without approval.

e. Maintain fine aggregate free of ice and frozen lumps. f. Fineness modulus shall be between 2.3 and 3.1.

3. Coarse Aggregate: a. Conform to ASTM C33, except deleterious substances shall not exceed the

following percentages (by weight): (1) Clay lumps and friable particles................ 1.0 (2) Shale or shale-like material....................... 1.0 (3) Coal and lignite......................................... 0.05 (4) Material finer than No. 200 sieve............. 1.5 (5) Sum of all deleterious material................ 3.0

b. Approved service record of 3 years with a history indicating that the coarse aggregate is not chemically reactive.

c. For a new coarse-aggregate source, when 3 years' approved service records are not available, or when the service records are unacceptable; the aggregate shall be evaluated for potential reactivity. Aggregate must be considered innocuous in accordance with petrographic examination by ASTM C295 and tests conforming to ASTM C289.

d. Coarse aggregate considered deleterious or potentially deleterious shall not be used without approval.

e. Blast furnace slag will not be permitted. f. Maintain coarse aggregate free of ice and frozen lumps. g. Grading Requirements:

(1) Size No. 67, from 3/4-inch (19 mm) to No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve for all concrete unless otherwise specified.

4. Mixing Water: a. Only potable water will be acceptable.

5. Admixtures: a. Water-Reducing Type:

(1) Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. (2) Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for use. (3) Technical assistance of the manufacturer's field representative shall be

furnished upon request. b. Air-Entraining Type:

(1) Conform to ASTM C260. (2) Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for use. (3) Technical assistance of the manufacturer's field representative shall be

furnished upon request. (4) Testing of air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C233.

c. Other Admixtures: Use only with approval. (1) Water-Reducing, Retarding Type: Conform to ASTM C494, Type D.

d. Admixtures shall not contain any chloride ions. e. Storage: Admixtures shall be stored in such a manner as to avoid contamination,

evaporation, freezing, temperature changes, settling, or any damage which would adversely affect their characteristics.


81799_8320_033000 033000-5 REV 1

B. Laboratory Testing of Materials for Use in Concrete: 1. An approved independent testing laboratory shall be selected and paid by Contractor to

perform all required laboratory tests of materials proposed for use in the production of concrete and to determine mix proportions when laboratory trial batches are required.

2. Contractor shall deliver representative Samples of all proposed concrete materials to the laboratory for the following testing: a. Fine Aggregate:

(1) ASTM C33 (as amended by PART 2, paragraph 2.01A. - Materials, this Section).

(2) ASTM C40. (3) ASTM C88. (4) ASTM C117. (5) ASTM C136. (6) ASTM C142. (7) Fineness modulus. (8) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

b. Coarse Aggregate: (1) ASTM C33 (as amended by PART 2, paragraph 2.01A. - Materials, this

Section). (2) ASTM C88. (3) ASTM C136. (4) ASTM C142. (5) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

c. Air-entraining admixture shall be tested conforming to ASTM C233. 3. The laboratory test results shall be part of the design mix submittal specified in this

PART 2, paragraph 2.01D. - Mix Proportions. C. Concrete Qualities Required:

1. Compressive Strength: a. Minimum 28-day compressive strength = 4,000 psi (27,579 kPa) for all construction

unless otherwise indicated. b. Compressive-strength determinations shall be made from 6-inch (150 mm) diameter

x 12-inch (300 mm) long concrete cylinders tested in accordance with ASTM C39. 2. Flexural Strength:

a. Minimum 28-day flexural strength = 650 psi (4,480 kPa) for all concrete slabs on grade.

b. Flexural-strength determinations shall be made from cross section beams in accordance with ASTM C78.

3. Slump of concrete shall be between 2 inches (50 mm) and 4 inches (100 mm) as tested in accordance with ASTM C143, unless noted otherwise. Concrete slump for drilled shafts shall be as indicated for each method of construction: a. Dry and Uncased Excavation: 5 inches ± 1 inch. b. Cased Excavation with Casing Withdrawn: 7 inches ± 1 inch. c. Slurry Construction (Underwater Placement): 8 inches ± 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 6% + 1.5% as tested in accordance with ASTM C231 for air-entrained concrete.

5. Water-Cement Ratio: a. In addition to the aforementioned requirements, water-cement ratios shall be limited

as follows: (1) 0.45 for all concrete unless otherwise specified.


REV 1 033000-6 81799_8320_033000

(2) 0.42 for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in a moist condition or to deicing chemicals.

(3) 0.40 for structures subject to chemicals or saltwater spray. D. Mix Proportions:

1. Concrete shall be homogeneous, readily placeable, uniformly workable, and finishable; proportioned to conform to ACI 211.1.

2. Mix proportions for all concrete, unless otherwise specified, shall be selected preferably on the basis of field experience; but in the case where sufficient or suitable strength test data is not available, concrete shall be proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mix design. a. Field experience using test results within the preceding year, with the materials and

plant to be employed may be the basis of mix proportioning, provided that not less than 30 consecutive satisfactory compressive-strength (or flexural-strength) tests on concrete using the proposed materials with a similar mix are available. A compressive-strength test is defined as the average 28-day compressive strength of two companion cylinders made conforming to ASTM C172 and ASTM C31 and tested conforming to ASTM C39. (A flexural-strength test is defined as the average 28-day flexural strength of two companion cross section beams conforming to and tested in accordance with ASTM C78.) (1) The standard deviation of compressive-strength tests shall be computed as a

basis for design of the mix. The design average compressive strength shall exceed the specified strength by at least: (a) 400 psi (2760 kPa) if standard deviation is less than 300 psi (2070

kPa). (b) 550 psi (3800 kPa) if standard deviation is 300 to 400 psi (2070 to

2760 kPa). (c) 700 psi (4830 kPa) if standard deviation is 400 to 500 psi (2760 to

3450 kPa). (d) 900 psi (6200 kPa) if standard deviation is 500 to 600 psi (3450 to

4140 kPa). (e) 1,200 psi (8275 kPa) if standard deviation is greater than 600 psi

(4140 kPa). (2) The standard deviation of flexural-strength tests shall be completed as a basis

for design of the mix. The design average flexural strength shall exceed the specified strength by at least: (a) 65 psi (449 kPa) if standard deviation is less than 50 psi (345 kPa). (b) 90 psi (621 kPa) if standard deviation is 50 to 65 psi (345 to 449 kPa). (c) 114 psi (785 kPa) if standard deviation is 65 to 81 psi (449 to 560

kPa). (d) 146 psi (1,010 kPa) if standard deviation is 81 to 98 psi (560 to 676

kPa). (e) 195 psi (1,345 kPa) if standard deviation is greater than 98 psi (676

kPa). (3) Submit the following test data to Owner for approval prior to placing

concrete: (a) Fine Aggregate:

1) ASTM C33. 2) ASTM C40. 3) ASTM C88.


81799_8320_033000 033000-7 REV 1

4) ASTM C117. 5) ASTM C136. 6) ASTM C142. 7) Fineness modulus. 8) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

(b) Coarse Aggregate: 1) ASTM C33. 2) ASTM C88. 3) ASTM C136. 4) ASTM C142. 5) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

(c) Cement: 1) Mill certificate. 2) ASTM C430.

(d) Concrete: 1) Fine and coarse aggregate, water and cement sources. 2) Mix proportions, slump and air content. 3) Data on 30 consecutive satisfactory compressive strength tests

and standard deviation calculations. b. Laboratory Trial Batch: When laboratory trial batches are used as a basis for

determining mix proportions, all such Work shall be performed by the laboratory as specified in PART 2, paragraph 2.01B. - Laboratory Testing of Materials for Use in Concrete, this Section. (1) Laboratory trial batches shall be used to establish a water-cement ratio,

compression-strength curve (or water-cement ratio, flexural-strength curve) with at least three points, each representing the strength of a separate trial batch. At least one point shall be above and one below the strength required. Each point on the curve shall represent the average of at least three cylinders (or cross section beams) tested at 28 days or an earlier age when approved.. The slump and air content shall be at the maximum limits specified in PART 2, paragraph 2.01C. - Concrete Qualities Required, this Section.

(2) A point on the water-cement ratio, compressive-strength curve shall be selected that will provide an average compressive strength at least 1,200 psi (8275 kPa) greater than the specified minimum strength.

(3) A point on the water-cement ratio, flexural-strength curve shall be selected that will provide an average flexural strength at least 200 psi (1,380 kPa) greater than the specified maximum strength.

(4) Submit the following test data to Owner for approval prior to placing concrete. (a) Fine Aggregate:

1) ASTM C33. 2) ASTM C40. 3) ASTM C88. 4) ASTM C117. 5) ASTM C136. 6) ASTM C142. 7) Fineness modulus. 8) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

(b) Coarse Aggregate:


REV 1 033000-8 81799_8320_033000

1) ASTM C33. 2) ASTM C88. 3) ASTM C136. 4) ASTM C142. 5) ASTM C295 and ASTM C289 or approved service records.

(c) Cement: 1) Mill certificate. 2) ASTM C430.

(d) Concrete: 1) Fine and coarse aggregate, water and cement sources. 2) Laboratory mix proportions, slump and air content. 3) Water-cement ratio, compressive-strength curve. 4) Water-cement ratio, flexural-strength curve.

3. Mix proportions for topping course of 2-course floors or pan-filled stairs, when such courses are 2 inches (50 mm) or less in thickness, shall be: a. Fine Aggregate: 110 pounds (50 kg). b. Coarse Aggregate 3/8 inch to No. 4 (9.5 mm to 4.75 mm) sieve: 220 pounds (100

kg). c. Cement: 94 pounds (43 kg). d. Water: Minimum required to obtain a 2-inch (50-mm) maximum slump. e. Water-reducing admixture. f. Submit the same test data as required for in PART 2, paragraph 2.01D.2.b. -

Laboratory Trial Batch, this Section, except for the water-cement ratio compressive-strength curve. Submit this proposed mix design to Owner for approval prior to placing concrete.

4. Prior to placing any concrete, the laboratory selected by Contractor shall report the results of the testing and mix designs to the following: a. Resident Project Representative, Field Office (one copy). b. Contractor (copies as required). c. Concrete Supplier (copies as required).

E. Measurement of Materials: 1. General Requirements:

a. Conform to ACI 304R. b. Beam or springless dial-type scale conforming with NBS - "Specifications for

Scales." c. Volumetric measurement of water shall be performed with an approved automatic

valve. 2. Concrete Plant Scale Accuracy and Calibration Frequency:

a. The concrete plant scales shall be accurate to +0.4% of the capacity of the scale. b. The scales shall be calibrated at intervals as specified in PART 3, ARTICLE 3.09 -

TESTING, this Section. 3. Individual Batch Accuracy:

a. Cement: +1.0%. b. Water: +1.0% by volume or weight. c. Aggregates: +2.0%. d. Admixtures: +3.0% by volume or weight. e. Fly Ash: +1.0%.

F. Mixing and Delivery: 1. Conform to ACI 304R.


81799_8320_033000 033000-9 REV 1

2. Cement temperature, when added to mix, shall not exceed 170oF (77oC). 3. Adjust the amount of mix water to compensate for the moisture content of the

aggregates. 4. Concrete Plant:

a. Conform to "Concrete Plant Mixer Standards" of the Plant Mixer Manufacturers Division, Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau, and "Concrete Plant Standards" of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau.

b. Charge with 5% to 10% of the mixing water both in advance and after the addition of aggregates and cement.

c. Charge with remaining water uniformly with the other materials. d. Avoid charging in excess of manufacturer's rating. e. Discharge mixed concrete completely prior to recharging. f. Mixing Time:

(1) Start immediately when all ingredients, except the last of the water, are in the mixer.

(2) Minimum mixing time shall conform with mixer manufacturer's instructions, but not be less than the following:

Capacity of Mixer Minimum Time Cubic Yards of Mixing 1 or less ..................................... 1 minute 2 ................................................. 1 minute, 15 seconds 3 ................................................. 1 minute, 30 seconds 4 ................................................. 1 minute, 45 seconds 5 ................................................. 2 minutes 6 ................................................. 2 minutes, 15 seconds Add 15 seconds' mixing time for each additional cubic yard of concrete. Capacity of Mixer Minimum Time Cubic Meters of Mixing 1 or less ..................................... 1 minute, 20 seconds 2 ................................................. 1 minute, 40 seconds 3 ................................................. 2 minutes 4 ................................................. 2 minutes, 20 seconds 5 ................................................. 2 minutes, 40 seconds 6 ................................................. 3 minutes Add 20 seconds' mixing time for each additional cubic meter of concrete.

5. Mixing of Concrete at Plant Off Jobsite: a. Mix concrete in central mixer or truck mixer. Transport in truck mixer turning at

agitation speeds only. b. Water added to concrete having a slump below the specified minimum shall be at

Contractor's risk. If the water added produces a slump greater than the specified maximum, the concrete will be rejected. If water is added, the concrete shall be remixed for a minimum of 25 revolutions. Water shall not be added after the truck mixer has begun to discharge concrete.

c. Truck mixer shall conform to "Truck Mixer, Agitator, and Front Discharge Concrete Carrier Standards" of the Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau.


REV 1 033000-10 81799_8320_033000

d. Ready-mixed concrete shall be produced and delivered conforming to ASTM C94 as applicable.

e. Contractor shall furnish Owner with a concrete delivery ticket for each load of concrete. The ticket shall have the following information recorded: (1) Serial number of ticket. (2) Time batched. (3) Time arrived on jobsite. (4) Amount of concrete (by volume). (5) Mix number. (6) Amount of all water added at jobsite by Contractor. (7) Name of ready-mix batch plant. (8) Date. (9) Truck number. (10) Name of purchaser.

6. Plant and truck mixer uniformity shall be tested according to ASTM C94. Frequency of tests shall be as specified in PART 3, this Section.

2.02 GROUT: A. Grout for Dry Packing:

1. Volume: 1 part portland cement to 2 parts sand. 2. Keep water to a minimum as required for placing by the dry packing method. 3. Place after the mixed grout has been allowed to stand for 2 hours. 4. The sand and cement shall be as specified for concrete.

B. Flowable Nonshrinking Grout: 1. Required for setting handrail posts, for setting equipment recommended by the

manufacturer to be set with nonshrinking grout, and in other places indicated. 2. Grout shall be nonmetallic and conform to ASTM C1107, Grade C. 3. Prepare and place conforming to manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. For equipment bases, the concrete surfaces shall be grit blasted or roughened with a

chipping hammer prior to grouting. The foundation plates shall be cleaned of any grease, oil, paint, primers, or epoxy coatings.

C. Grout for Bonding: 1. Proportion (by weight): 1 part cement to 1-1/2 parts sand. 2. Keep water to a minimum.

2.03 BONDING AGENT: 1. Provide moisture-insensitive, epoxy-resin bonding agent conforming to ASTM C881,

Type V.

2.04 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES: A. PVC Waterstops:

1. 6-inch ribbed serrated virgin polyvinyl chloride equal to one of the following: a. Greenstreak, Inc. - Greenstreak Style 580. b. Vinylex Corporation - R6-38T. c. W.R. Meadows - Sealtight No. 6380.

2. Base Seal: Virgin polyvinyl chloride equal to one of the following: a. Non-expansion joints:

(1) Greenstreak, Inc. - Greenstreak Style 771. (2) Vinylex Corporation - BS9-532.


81799_8320_033000 033000-11 REV 1

b. Expansion joints: (1) Greenstreak, Inc. - Greenstreak Style 772. (2) Vinylex Corporation - BSE9-532.

3. Provide factory fabricated waterstop corner transitions and intersections leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field.

4. Waterstops shall be provided with factory-installed hog rings at 12-inch centers along each flange.

5. Use for all locations unless otherwise specified. B. Expansion Joints:

1. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed asphalt-impregnated fiber of thickness indicated and conforming to ASTM D1751. Use where indicated.

2. Bond Breaker: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide closed cell backer rod or other backing material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

4. Joint Sealants; a. Multi-component sealant as follows:

(1) Joint Sealant - General Use: (a) BASF Building Systems: Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2 (vertical use)

and Sonolastic SL 2 (horizontal use). (b) Epoxy Systems Products Company: Product #11. (c) Euclid Chemical Company: Eucolastic II. (d) Pecora Corporation: NR-200, Dynatred.

(2) Joint Sealant - Industrial Floors (Shore A hardness >80): (a) BASF Building Systems: Sonneborn TF-100. (b) Euclid Chemical Company: EUCO 800.

(3) Joint Sealant - Traffic Grade (conforming to FS TT-S-227): (a) BASF Building Systems: Sonneborn Sonolastic SL 2. (b) Epoxy Systems Products Company: Product #913. (c) Pecora Corporation: Dynatrol II SG. (d) Sika Corporation: Sikaflex-2c NS TG.

(4) Joint Sealant - Potable Water Treatment and Storage Facilities: (a) Sika Corporation: Sikaflex-2c NS.

(5) Joint Sealant - Wastewater Treatment and Storage Facilities: (a) BASF Building Systems: Sonneborn Polysulfide Sealant. (b) Pecora Corporation: Synthacalc GC2+. (c) Sika Corporation: Sikaflex-2c NS.

(6) Joint Sealant - Jet-Fuel Resistant (conforming to FS SS-S-200): (a) Epoxy Systems Products Company: Product #917. (b) Pacific Polymers: Elasto-Seal 200. (c) Pecora Corporation: Urexpan NR-300.

C. Preformed Contraction Joints: Zip Joint T-shaped plastic strip as manufactured by BoMetals, Inc., Powder Springs, Georgia. Depth of preformed construction joint shall exceed 1/4 of the slab thickness.

D. Flashing Reglets: 1. Fabricate of sheet metal, open-type with continuous groove 1-1/8 inches (30 mm) deep

minimum by 3/16 inch (5 mm) wide at opening and sloped upward at 45 degrees. Top surface shall have toothed lip section to anchor upturned edge of metal snap-lock counter flashing when inserted. [Sheet metal shall be stainless steel, 0.011 inch (0.28 mm)


REV 1 033000-12 81799_8320_033000

minimum thickness, ASTM A167, type 302 or Type 304, Number 2D finish, soft temper.] [Sheet metal shall be copper strip for building construction, weight 16 ounce per square foot (4.8 kg per square meter) minimum, ASTM B370, cold-rolled temper.]

E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 1. Preformed metal slot approximately 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm) of not less than 22 gage

galvanized steel cast in concrete. Coordination actual size and throat opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable filler material.

2.05 CURING AGENT: A. Apply to all concrete surfaces unless otherwise indicated or specified. B. Curing agent shall conform as follows:

1. ASTM C309, Type 1: Use where concrete surface is not exposed to direct sunlight after placement.

2. ASTM C309, Type 1-D: Use where slabs are exposed to direct sunlight for a period of seven days minimum after placement. Curing and sealing agent with fugitive dye shall be readily distinguishable upon the concrete surface for at least four hours after application but shall be inconspicuous within seven days after application.

3. ASTM C309, Type 2: Use as specified in PART 3, ARTICLE 3.05 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING, this Section.

C. Curing compound used on floors to be sealed, painted, tiled, topped, dampproofed, waterproofed, or covered with resilient floor covering shall be guaranteed not to interfere with application of sealer, paint, tile mortar, or tile adhesive after a 28-day curing period.

D. Curing compound shall be VOC compliant with a maximum VOC content of 2.9 lbs/gal (350 g/L), or less where Project location regulations are more stringent.

2.06 CONCRETE FLOOR CURING AND SEALING AGENT: A. Apply to all interior concrete floor surfaces subject to vehicle or pedestrian traffic. B. Curing and sealing agent shall conform as follows:

1. ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A: Use where slabs are not exposed to direct sunlight after placement.

2. ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A with Fugitive Dye: Use where slabs are exposed to direct sunlight for a period of seven days minimum after placement. Curing and sealing agent with fugitive dye shall be readily distinguishable upon the concrete surface for at least four hours after application but shall be inconspicuous within seven days after application.

3. ASTM C1315, Type II, Class A: Use as specified in PART 3, ARTICLE 3.05 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING, this Section.

C. Apply as soon as possible and in conformance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2.07 CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENER: A. Apply to the following areas:

1. Genset foundation B. Liquid floor hardener shall be one of the following:

1. Tamms Industries - Clearseal WB300. 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. - Chem Hard. 3. ChemRex, Inc. - Sonneborn Sonosil. 4. Euclid Chemical Company - Euco Diamond Hard.


81799_8320_033000 033000-13 REV 1

C. Apply as soon as possible and in conformance to manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - 0EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. Openings Through Concrete: Provide openings through concrete as indicated and for the

proper installation of all equipment, piping, wiring, ductwork and similar items, installed under this Contract.

B. Installation of Embedded Items: 1. Provide for accurate installation of embedded items installed under this Contract. 2. Securely fix floor drains in place to prevent flotation while placing concrete. Uniformly

and accurately slope finish floor slab toward the drains. 3. Embedded items shall be as indicated or specified. 4. During cold weather, protect pipe sleeves from moisture which may freeze, expand, and

crack the sleeve and concrete structure. 5. Grease or tape anchor bolt threads to protect from concrete splatter.

C. Installation of Joints: 1. Construction Joints:

a. Location: (1) Locate joints, which are not indicated or specified, in conformance with ACI

318. (2) Obtain Engineer's approval of joints located by Contractor prior to

preparation of reinforcing steel drawings. b. Preparation and Installation:

(1) Clean and break laitance or other foreign material from bonding surface. (2) Tighten forms remaining in place (where applicable) to prevent seepage

between forms and hardened concrete. (3) Provide waterstops and shear keys as indicated or specified and as required

in any new construction joint requested by Contractor. c. Waterstops:

(1) Install in all construction joints where indicated. (2) Install conforming to manufacturer's printed instructions. All joints and

splices of PVC waterstop shall be 100% fused. Use thermostatically controlled splicing iron as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Expansion Joints: a. Install filler, backer rod and sealant in strict conformance with manufacturer's

written instructions. b. Reinforcing steel shall not extend through expansion joints unless indicated

otherwise. c. Attach rigid joint filler to the face of the joint prior to placing adjacent concrete.

The filler shall occupy the entire width of the joint. d. Install sealant backer rod for sealant except where indicated to be omitted. Install

bond breaker where indicated. e. Clean joints surfaces immediately before application of sealant. f. Install joint sealants to conform to ASTM C1193. Tool sealants to provide smooth,

uniform bead with a slightly concave surface, eliminate air pockets, and insure sealant contact and adhesion with sides of joint.

g. Protect joints from moisture and ice during freezing.


REV 1 033000-14 81799_8320_033000

3. Contraction Joints: As specified in this PART 3, ARTICLE 3.03 - FINISHING, this Section.

D. Cutting and Bonding to Existing Concrete: 1. Cutting Existing Concrete:

a. Use methods and equipment that will avoid damage to adjacent parts of the structure from heavy blows or vibration.

b. Cut existing concrete with power concrete saw where possible to prevent spalling and chipping and to form neat, straight edge.

c. Remove all loose or cracked concrete resulting from cutting existing concrete, leaving only sound, undamaged concrete adjacent to new Work.

d. Leave access opening edges with a neat, true grout surface to the opening size indicated.

e. Cut reinforcing steel with sufficient length remaining (approximately 38 bar diameters) for bending and lapping into new construction.

2. Bonding to Existing Concrete: a. Roughen concrete to 1/4-inch (6 mm) amplitude by use of a pneumatic chipping

hammer or other approved means. b. Thoroughly clean the concrete surface and apply the bonding agent in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 PLACING OF CONCRETE: A. Conventional Placing:

1. General Requirements: a. Conform to ACI 304R. b. Bonding surfaces, including reinforcement, shall be clean, free of laitance and

foreign materials. c. Face horizontal bonding surfaces with 1-inch (25-mm)-thick coat of fresh "grout for

bonding." Wet all other surfaces. d. Place concrete on properly prepared and unfrozen subgrade and only in dewatered

excavation and forms. e. Use forms for all concrete except where otherwise indicated or specified. f. Do not place concrete that has partially hardened or has been contaminated by

foreign materials. g. Prevent mud or foreign materials from entering the concrete or forms during

placement operations. 2. Conveying:

a. Convey concrete from the mixer and deposit in place by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of materials.

b. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to provide a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end.

c. Aluminum conveying equipment shall not be used. 3. Depositing:

a. Place concrete in continuous horizontal lifts not to exceed 2 feet (600 mm), and place concrete against bulkheads and keyways at vertical joints.

b. Maximum free drop of concrete and grout for bonding shall be 5 feet (1.5 meters), in walls 10 inches (250 mm) or less in thickness, with 1-foot (300 mm) additional drop allowed for each inch (25 mm) of wall thickness over 10 inches (250 mm), with a maximum drop of 10 feet (3 meters).


81799_8320_033000 033000-15 REV 1

4. Consolidation of Concrete: a. Consolidate concrete in conformance with ACI 309R. Characteristics and

application of concrete vibrators shall be as set forth in Table 5.1.5. b. Provide an adequate number of vibrators of sufficient capacity to keep up with the

maximum rate of concrete placement. Keep on hand adequate standby equipment in good operating condition.

c. Vibrate concrete only until the concrete is thoroughly consolidated and the voids filled, as evidenced by the leveled appearance of the concrete at the exposed surface and the embedment of the surface aggregate.

d. Insert internal vibrators vertically to the full depth of the layer being placed and into the previous layer. Do not drag vibrators through the concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrator slowly with the vibrator running continuously so that no hole will be left in the concrete. Do not flow concrete from one location to another by use of a vibrator.

e. Consolidate concrete layer to full depth when using a surface vibrator. Use thinner layers or a more powerful vibrator if necessary to achieve complete consolidation.

f. Use form vibrators only where sections are too thin or where sections are inaccessible for internal vibrators.

5. Time Requirements: a. Place concrete at a sufficient rate to assure that lifts below have not taken initial set

before fresh concrete is deposited. b. Place concrete within 45 minutes after mixing. This period may be extended to 1

hour and 30 minutes provided that the combined air temperature, relative humidity, and wind velocity are such that the plasticity of the fresh concrete is satisfactory for placement and consolidation, and that the specified mixing water is not exceeded. Concrete which has partially set shall not be retempered but shall be discarded.

B. Placing Concrete at Joints: 1. Bed horizontal joints with 1 inch (25 mm) of grout for bonding. 2. Take precautions to ensure tight, well-bonded construction joints with no air pockets or

voids. 3. Take special precautions to avoid bending or displacing waterstop while placing concrete

around it. 4. Delay construction at a joint a minimum of 16 hours where placement is continued past

joint, except where otherwise indicated. C. Slip-Form Method of Placing Concrete:

1. General Requirements: a. Slip-forming will be permitted at Contractor's option provided the operations are

performed only with a supervisor having at least 5 years of slip-form experience. b. Perform only if standby equipment for placing concrete, such as hoists or pumps, is

available to maintain uniform slide rate. 2. Method:

a. Prepare reinforcing steel for placing in the forms before the slide is started. b. Install embedded items accurately and securely to prevent movement during

slipping. c. Minimum form height shall be 4'-0" (1200 mm), with a suspended finisher's

scaffold underneath. d. Continuously check for plumbness, cross section, thickness, and spiraling.

Variations shall not exceed those set forth in ACI 313. e. Maximum slide rate shall be 12 inches (300 mm) per hour.


REV 1 033000-16 81799_8320_033000

f. Place concrete in 8-inch (200-mm) maximum layers with not more than a 1-hour time lapse between successive layers.

g. Float and brush all surfaces as soon as the concrete is exposed, repairing honeycomb and surface blemishes.

h. Do not use chemical accelerators. i. Cure all surfaces with membrane-type curing compound.

3.03 FINISHING: A. Unformed Surfaces:

1. Screed Finish: a. Use as first stage for all concrete finishes. b. Use as final finish on surfaces that will be covered by additional concrete, grout

placement, or mortar setting bed except as otherwise specified. c. Immediately after screeding, use a wood float, darby, or bullfloat to eliminate high

and low spots and to embed large aggregate. This shall be done in a manner to produce even, uniform surfaces so that surface irregularities do not exceed 3/8 inch in 10 feet (9 mm in 3 meters) when used as final finish.

d. Finish screeded base slab with coarse broom or rake in areas to receive 2-course floor finish.

2. Floated Finish: a. Use as second stage of broomed, troweled, or magnesium-troweled finish. b. Float with mechanical float. Hand floating will be permitted only in areas

inaccessible to mechanical float. c. On surfaces not to receive troweled or magnesium-troweled finish, finish with wood

or cork float after mechanical floating to a true uniform surface so that surface irregularities do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 meters), except at floor drains.

3. Broomed Finish: a. Use as final finish on all outdoor slabs including pavements, sidewalks, and loading

docks. b. After floated finish, draw a stiff bristle broom across the surface making uniform

corrugations, perpendicular to the direction of traffic, not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) deep.

4. Troweled Finish: a. Use as final finish on inside floors and on all other unformed surfaces not otherwise

indicated or specified. b. Trowel with mechanical steel trowel to obtain a smooth, dense finish. Hand steel

trowel shall be used in areas not accessible by mechanical trowel. The final troweling shall be done after the concrete has become hard enough so that no mortar adheres to the edge of trowel and a ringing sound is produced as the trowel passes over the surface.

c. Do not trowel before surface water has evaporated or has been removed with a squeegee.

d. Finish to a true uniform surface so that surface irregularities do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 meters), except at floor drains.

e. Do not add sand or cement to the floor surface. 5. Magnesium-Troweled Finish:


81799_8320_033000 033000-17 REV 1

a. Perform as specified in PART 3, paragraph 3.03A.4. - Troweled Finish, this Section, except use a magnesium trowel by hand instead of a steel trowel to obtain a dense, but not slick, finish.

b. Use where floor will receive protective coating after curing. 6. Two-Course Floor Finish:

a. Use on floor areas indicated. b. Topping mix shall be as specified in PART 2, paragraph 2.01D. - Mix Proportions,

this Section. c. Clean the rough surface of the base slab of all mud, oil, grease, or any material that

would prevent proper bonding of the topping course. d. Thoroughly saturate base slab with water prior to placing topping course. e. Thoroughly saturate base slab with water; remove standing water and apply bonding

agent. Place the topping after the bonding agent becomes tacky. f. Finish topping with troweled finish unless otherwise indicated.

7. Contraction Joints: a. Locate as indicated. b. Maintain true alignment with straightedge. c. Joints shall be grooved except where sawed joints are indicated.

(1) Slab on grade joints shall be sawed. d. Grooved Joints:

(1) Perform during the finishing process. (2) Width of groove shall not exceed 1/4-inch (6 mm). (3) Depth of groove shall be at least 1 inch (25 mm).

e. Sawed Joints: (1) Cut joints with power blade as soon as concrete surface is firm enough to

resist tearing or damage by the blade and before random shrinkage cracks can occur. (Usually required 4 to 12 hours after finishing.)

(2) Make joints approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide with depth equal to 1/4 the slab thickness unless otherwise indicated.

(3) Seal where indicated with the same type sealant specified for expansion joint sealant.

B. Formed Surfaces: 1. Repair surface defects as specified in PART 3, paragraph 3.03C. - Repair of Defective

Surfaces, this Section. C. Repair of Defective Surfaces:

1. Defined as any concrete surface showing misalignment, rock pockets, poor joints, holes from ties, voids, honeycomb, or any other defective area.

2. Repairing: a. Repair as soon as forms have been removed. b. Chip surface back to minimum depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm), chip edges perpendicular

to surface, prewet depression and brush with neat cement immediately before patching.

c. Patch surfaces using stiff mortar with same sand-cement ratio as original concrete and with minimum water for placing. Blend with white cement to match concrete color.

d. Compact mortar into depressions so that after curing, hole is filled and mortar is flush with surface. Use hammer and ramming rod for compacting the holes.

e. Moist-cure for 3 days or use curing compound.


REV 1 033000-18 81799_8320_033000

f. Resident Project Representative shall be notified of areas containing defects or where reinforcing steel is exposed, prior to determination of repair method.

3.04 CURING: A. Cure concrete by one of the following methods in accordance with ACI 308.1:

1. Leaving in forms for a minimum of 7 days. Keep formwork wet to prevent drying of concrete surfaces.

2. Using polyethylene sheets applied in full contact with surfaces. 3. Using one coat of a liquid membrane forming compound as specified. Apply

immediately after removal of forms (which have been continuously wet); or in case of a slab, after the concrete has been finished and is hardened sufficiently to walk on.

4. Curing of concrete during hot or cold weather shall conform to PART 3 - HOT WEATHER CONCRETING and COLD WEATHER CONCRETING, this Section.

3.05 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING: A. Follow the recommendations of ACI 305R if any of the following conditions occur:

1. When the temperature is 90oF (32oC ) or above. 2. When the temperature is likely to rise above 90oF (32oC) within the 24-hour period after

concrete placement. 3. When there is any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind

velocity which would impair either concrete strength or quality. B. Concrete shall have a maximum temperature of 85oF (29oC) during placement. C. Dampen subgrade and forms with cool water immediately prior to placement of concrete. D. Protect freshly placed concrete immediately after placement so that the rate of evaporation as

determined by ACI 305R (Figure 2.1.5) does not exceed 0.2 pound per square foot (1.0 kg per square meter) per hour.

E. Protect concrete with suitable insulation if rapidly decreasing nighttime temperatures occur, which would cause thermal shock to concrete placed during warm daytime temperatures.

F. Protect the concrete with temporary wet covering during any appreciable delay between placement and finishing.

G. Begin curing unformed surfaces immediately after finishing and continue for 24 hours. Curing shall consist of application and maintenance of water-saturated material to all exposed surfaces; horizontal, vertical, and otherwise. After the 24-hour interval, continue curing using one of the following methods: 1. Moist curing for 6 days. 2. Application of one coat of curing compound as specified. 3. Application and maintenance of curing paper or heat-reflecting plastic sheets for 6 more

days. H. Begin curing formed concrete immediately after placing. Curing shall consist of keeping

forms continuously wet for 24 hours. Thereafter, continue curing using one of the following methods: 1. Loosen forms and position soaker hose so that water runs down along concrete surfaces.

Continue for 6 days. 2. Strip forms and apply curing compound as specified. Do not allow concrete surfaces to

dry prior to application of curing compound.

3.06 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING:


81799_8320_033000 033000-19 REV 1

A. When the temperature is 40oF (4.4oC) or is likely to fall below 40oF (4.4oC) during the 24-hour period after concrete placement, follow the recommendations of ACI 306R to prevent loss of concrete strength or quality.

B. Minimum temperature for concrete as mixed shall be as indicated on lines 2, 3, and 4 of Table 3.1 of ACI 306R. Maximum temperature for concrete as mixed shall be 10oF (5.6oC) greater than the corresponding minimum temperature.

C. Place and maintain concrete so that its temperature is never less than the temperature indicated on line 1 of Table 3.1 of ACI 306R. Maintain the required temperature for the time duration indicated on Tables 5.1 and 5.3 of ACI 306R.

D. Monitor temperature of concrete in place at corners or edges of formwork as applicable. E. Air Heaters:

1. Do not expose concrete to carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide fumes from heaters or engines.

2. Oil- or coke-burning salamanders will not be permitted. 3. Heaters shall be ultramatic portable heaters approved by Owner. 4. Personnel shall be present at all times to maintain safe, continuous operation of heating

system. F. Control temperature and humidity of protected concrete so that excessive drying of concrete

surfaces does not occur. G. Calcium chloride will not be permitted as a concrete accelerator or to thaw frozen subgrade

prior to concrete placement. H. The maximum allowable temperature drop during the first 24-hour period after protection is

discontinued shall be as indicated on Table 5.5 of ACI 306R. I. Cure the concrete in accordance with Chapter 5 of ACI 306R.

3.07 LOW-STRENGTH CONCRETE: A. Low-Strength Concrete:

1. Defined as either: a. Concrete whose average, of any sets of three consecutive 28-day compressive

strength tests, is below the required 28-day strength. b. Concrete whose individual 28-day strength test (average of two cylinders) is more

than 500 psi (3450 kPa) below the required 28-day strength. 2. Should concrete meet either definition of low-strength concrete as a minimum, the

Contractor shall take the following steps: a. Increase the cement content. The increase shall be based on a statistical evaluation

of the strength data, the design water-cement ratio, compressive-strength curve, and acceptable mix-design literature as follows: (1) If sufficient concrete has been furnished to accumulate 30 tests, these should

be used to establish a new target average strength in accordance with ACI 318, Section 5.3.

(2) If less than 30 tests have been made, the new target average strength should be at least as great as the average strength used in the initial selection of the mix proportions. Increase the target average strength based on a statistical evaluation of the available strength data, the design water-cement ratio, compressive-strength curve, and acceptable mix-design literature. If the statistical average equals or exceeds the initial mix-design level, a further increase in the average level is required.


REV 1 033000-20 81799_8320_033000

b. Remove and replace with acceptable concrete when the quality and location of the low-strength concrete is such that Resident Project Representative considers the strength or durability of the structure is impaired and so orders.

3.08 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Concrete Seal Coat:

1. Apply to the ground surface immediately beneath all "on-grade" slabs and footings where indicated or specified.

2. Seal coat shall consist of a concrete slab of the thickness indicated but not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

3. Accurately screed so that the top of the seal coat will not be higher than the bottom elevation of structural slabs or footings to be placed thereon.

4. Do not place seal coat until after all excavating, piling, in the area have been completed and all drain lines, conduits, and other items under the area are completed and properly backfilled and compacted.

B. Equipment Bases: 1. Construct equipment bases, pads, and foundations as indicated or, when not indicated,

conforming to equipment manufacturer's requirements and constructed to accommodate location of equipment shown on drawings.

2. Reinforce conforming to typical detail unless otherwise indicated. 3. Equipment bases shall include concrete, reinforcing steel, form work as required, and

anchor bolts. Place grout for equipment installed under this Contract. 4. Finish top area of bases between anchor bolts and forms with a troweled finish.

C. Foundations: 1. General Requirements:

a. Construct accurately to dimensions and elevations indicated. b. For foundations that contain heavy reinforcing, take extra care to prevent

honeycombing. 2. Construction:

a. Set edge plates to true alignment, avoiding varying gaps between floor and foundation.

b. Locate and set all anchor bolts and sleeves within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of indicated dimensions and elevations with no accumulated error in any direction. Anchor bolts set without sleeves must maintain a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Anchor bolts for stack structures shall be set with template and other devices to align and hold bolts in place top and bottom during placement of concrete. Grease threads and cap pipe sleeves with moisture-tight material so that water cannot enter. Protect bolts and sleeves during construction until bedplates (by others) are in place.

c. Check templates during placing of concrete until concrete has taken its initial set. d. Place embedded items as indicated.

3.09 TESTING: A. Field Testing of Concrete Plant and Mixing Trucks:

1. The concrete plant shall be inspected and tested to ensure conformance with ACI 304R and the "Concrete Plant Standards of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau." The scales shall be calibrated at the initial setup and at 3-month intervals thereafter.

2. Mixing trucks shall be inspected and tested to ensure conformance with ACI 304R and "Truck Mixer and Agitator Standards of the Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau" of the


81799_8320_033000 033000-21 REV 1

National Ready-Mix Concrete Association. Tests shall be done at initial setup and every 3 months thereafter.

3. Submit test reports when requested. B. Field Testing of Concrete and Making of Concrete Test Cylinders:

1. Contractor shall furnish test equipment, test cylinder molds, and certified personnel to perform all required field tests, make the required concrete test cylinders, and deliver test cylinders to the testing laboratory. The prescribed tests shall be made in the presence of or with the concurrence of the Owner.

2. Field testing personnel shall be on Site throughout placement of concrete. 3. Concrete sampling for tests and cylinder making shall be done conforming to ASTM

C172. Samples shall be taken at random and at the point of truck discharge. 4. Perform the following tests:

a. Moisture content, ASTM C566. Perform this test a minimum of twice a day and adjust the amount of mix water to compensate for the moisture content of the aggregates.

b. Prepare test cylinders conforming to ASTM C31, with not less than one set of cylinders (four cylinders) from each day's placement for each 100 cubic yards (75 cubic meters) or fraction thereof.

c. Slump test conforming to ASTM C143. Perform tests on the first batch produced each day, for every 50 cubic yards or fraction thereafter, and with every set of test cylinders. Additional tests shall be run when directed by Resident Project Representative.

d. Air content test conforming to ASTM C231. Perform for first batch of day and with each set of test cylinders.

e. The batch of concrete being tested for slump or air content shall not be placed until acceptable results are obtained.

f. Discard concrete used for slump and air tests. g. Perform concrete and air temperature tests for first batch of day and with each set of

test cylinders. Additional readings shall be taken when directed by Resident Project Representative.

h. Any batch of concrete with slump or air content not in conformance with Specifications shall be rejected.

i. Furnish slump, air content, and temperature test results to the testing laboratory for inclusion in the cylinder test reports.

C. Laboratory Testing of Aggregates and Concrete During Construction: 1. An independent testing laboratory will be selected and paid by the Contractor to perform

the required laboratory tests and statistical evaluations of aggregates and concrete being used in the Work.

2. Laboratory will cure and test concrete cylinders conforming to ASTM C192 and C39, testing two cylinders at 7 days of age and two at 28 days of age.

3. Contractor shall have the right to observe all phases of concrete cylinder curing and testing. Should Contractor observe any deviations from the prescribed testing procedures that he considers detrimental to concrete strength test results, he shall immediately notify Owner in writing.

4. Contractor shall assist laboratory in obtaining Samples of fine and coarse aggregate for testing.

5. Contractor shall make arrangements with the testing laboratory to receive copies of test reports. The cost of providing a maximum of two copies of each report to the Contractor will be paid by Contractor.


REV 1 033000-22 81799_8320_033000

6. Should the test results indicate low strength concrete as defined in PART 3, ARTICLE 3.07 - LOW-STRENGTH CONCRETE, this Section, Contractor shall take immediate corrective action.

7. Should the statistical data indicate an excessive margin of safety, the concrete mix may be modified subject to approval.

8. Should the material tests taken during construction indicate nonconformance with the Specifications, Contractor shall take immediate corrective action.

3.10 REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, AND FIELD MODIFICATIONS: A. Embedded items and concrete that are misplaced or damaged during construction shall not be

repaired, replaced, or field-modified without approval of Resident Project Representative. END OF SECTION 033000

81799_8320_050513 050513-1

DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 050513 - GALVANIZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes hot-dip galvanizing of structural steel members, assemblies and metal

fabrications. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Steel: SECTION 055013 2. Metal Fabrications: SECTION 055001

C. Definitions: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: The dipping of steel members and assemblies into molten zinc for

lasting, long-term corrosion protection. The resultant zinc coating fuses permanently with the base steel material.

2. Electrogalvanizing: Electrodepositing or electroplating with zinc by electrolysis for limited corrosion protection.

3. Passivating: The chemical treatment of freshly galvanized steel materials to prevent humid storage stain (white rust or white corrosion). This treatment (passivation) consists of quenching freshly galvanized steel in water to which a chromate or a chromic-acid solution, or other proprietary solution, has been added.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. For applicable codes and standards, equivalent International System of Units (SI) measures or

grades may be used wherever English units are used in this Specification. Although only the English measures or grades are as listed in this Specification, the metric/SI measures or grades are applicable for projects using the metric system/SI.

B. Applicable Standards: 1. American Galvanizers Association, Inc. (AGA):

a. T-IPAF - Inspection of Products Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication. b. D-PGAF - The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication. c. D-RDS - Recommended Details for Galvanizing Structures. d. Quality Assurance Manual.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel

Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. c. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. d. A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. e. A384 - Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing

of Steel Assemblies. f. A385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip). g. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. h. A767 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. i. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. j. B6 - Zinc (Slab Zinc). k. D2092 - Guide for Treatment of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for

Painting.

SECTION 050513 – GALVANIZING: continued

050513-2 81799_8320_050513

l. D6386 - Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting.

m. E376 - Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Test methods.

3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D19.0 - Welding Zinc-Coated Steel.

4. Federal Specification: a. DOD-P-21035 - Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair. b. MIL-P-26915 - Primer Coating, Zinc Dust Pigmented.

5. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation: a. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

6. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications: a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Removes oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds,

and other soluble contaminants. b. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Two-thirds of every 9 square inches free of

visible residues; remainder only slight discoloration. c. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1:

1. Certification: Furnish notarized Certificates of Compliance with AGA, ASTM Specifications and Standards specified herein. Each certificate shall be signed by Contractor and galvanizer certifying that steel materials, bolts, nuts, washers, and items of iron and steel hardware conform with specified requirements. Certificate shall contain a detailed description of material processed and shall indicate the ASTM standard used for coating.

2. Name and location of coating applicator. Applicator shall certify that applicator specializes in hot-dip galvanizing and follows the procedures in the AGA Quality Assurance Manual.

3. Contractor shall review all details and submit modified details and/or recommended modified details to Engineer which comply with AGA guidelines.

4. Submit coating data sheets and applicator's recommendations.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Inspections and Tests: Inspections, tests, and samples shall conform with ASTM

Specifications and Standards. Inspection rights and privileges, procedures, and acceptance or rejection of galvanized steel materials shall conform with ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable. Inspections and tests include the following: 1. Visual examination of samples and finished products. 2. Tests to determine weight or mass of zinc coating per square foot of metal surface. 3. Tests to determine distribution and uniformity of zinc coating.

B. Owner and Engineer shall be provided access to galvanizer's facilities during normal working hours for the purpose of obtaining information on the status and for visual inspection of materials being fabricated.

C. Delivery of any material shall in no way relieve Contractor of any responsibility for meeting all of requirements of the Specifications, and it shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

SECTION 050513– GALVANIZING: continued

81799_8320_050513 050513-3

D. Galvanizing plant shall review all design drawings for compatibility with galvanizing plant limitations and fabrication details. Any redesign, due to galvanizing limitations, shall be responsibility of Contractor.

E. All steel shall be marked with metal tags that will remain in place during normal handling and galvanizing.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Packaging: Of type to prevent damage to galvanized surfaces and distortion of steel materials

and components. B. Handling and Storage: Handle and protect galvanized materials from damage to zinc coating.

Store galvanized material above ground and separate material with strip spacers. Do not allow galvanized material to rest on cinders, clinkers, or on wet soil or decaying vegetation. Store in a manner to promote continuous drainage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL: A. Material for galvanizing shall be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in ASTM

A384 and A385. Steel materials suitable for galvanizing include structural shapes, pipe, sheet, fabrications, and assemblies.

B. Material shall be chemically suitable for galvanizing. Steel fabricator shall provide galvanizing shop mill orders (or any information required), such that galvanizer can determine that the supplied steel is chemically suited for galvanizing.

2.02 IRON AND STEEL HARDWARE: A. Bolts, nuts, washers, and items of iron and steel hardware furnished for galvanizing shall be

suitable for hot-dip galvanizing. B. Inspect iron and steel hardware before galvanizing and ascertain whether suitable for

galvanizing. Replace items which are not suitable for galvanizing.

2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Prepare all steel to be galvanized by removing paint markings, welding slag, and burrs.

Preclean in an alkaline cleaner and acid pickle, and flux. Alternatively, steel shall be blast cleaned and fluxed.

2.04 ZINC FOR GALVANIZING: A. Conform to ASTM B6, as specified in ASTM A123.

2.05 GALVANIZING: A. Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication, by hot-dip process in

accordance with ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable. Weight of zinc coating shall conform with paragraph 5.1 of ASTM A123 or Table 1 of ASTM A153, as applicable.

B. Safeguard against steel embrittlement conforming to ASTM A143. C. Safeguard against warpage or distortion of steel members conforming to ASTM A384. Notify

Engineer of potential warpage problems which may require modification in design, before proceeding with steel fabrications.

D. Finish and uniformity of zinc coating and adherence of coating shall conform with ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable.


050513-4 81799_8320_050513

E. Galvanize bolts, nuts, and washers, and iron and steel hardware components in accordance with ASTM A153. Weight of zinc coating shall conform to requirements specified under "Weight of Coating" in ASTM A153. Nuts shall be tapped after galvanizing to minimum diametral amounts specified in ASTM A563. Coat nuts with waterproof lubricant, clean and dry to touch. High strength bolts for structural steel joints shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A325.

F. Comply with AGA's "Recommended Details for Galvanized Structure." G. Galvanize reinforcing steel in conformance with ASTM A767.

2.06 POST-GALVANIZING TREATMENTS: A. Galvanized materials subject to extended periods of storage in open, exterior locations shall be

given passivating treatment or light oiling to prevent humid storage stain. Treatment, solution and process shall be subject to review and acceptance by Engineer. Chromate passivation should not be used on items galvanized after fabrication and to be painted after erection.

B. Do not treat freshly galvanized or passivated surfaces with oils, grease, or chemicals which might interfere with adhesion of subsequent paint primers and coatings.

C. Where slip factors are required to enable friction grip bolting, these shall be obtained after galvanizing by suitable treatment of the faying surfaces in accordance with the latest edition of the "Specification for Structural Joints" using ASTM A325 or A490. Bolts shall be as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation. Slip critical connections will be used for steel to steel connections.

2.07 COATING OF STEEL WHICH CANNOT BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED: A. Coat as outlined below. Engineer approval is required prior to coating any steel as outlined

below. B. Surface Preparation: If grease or oils are present, SSPC-SP1 cleaning shall precede any other

method specified. C. Prepare surface in accordance with SSPC-SP6 methods and 1.0 to 1.5 mils profile depth. D. Shop Coat: Inorganic zinc rich primer (ethyl silicate base) with minimum 80% zinc in dry

film, by weight. Apply at 3 mils dry film thickness. 1. Ameron - Dimetcote 9HS. 2. Carboline - Carbozinc 11HS. 3. ICI Devoe - Catha-Coat 304 Series. 4. International - Interzinc 22HS. 5. Tnemec - Span Prime Ultra IOZ Series 385.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF STEEL MATERIALS: A. Steel materials, fabrications, and assemblies are specified to be installed in various other

Sections and under SECTION 05120 - STEEL.

3.02 FIELD INSPECTION: A. Inspect installed galvanized materials, fabrications, and assemblies to conform with applicable

requirements of AGA "Inspection Manual for Hot-Dip Galvanized Products," consisting of visual inspection.

3.03 REPAIR (TOUCH-UP) OF DAMAGED COATING:

SECTION 050513– GALVANIZING: continued

81799_8320_050513 050513-5

A. Repair areas damaged by welding, flame cutting, or during handling, transport, or erection by the approved method (as outlined below), and in accordance with ASTM A780 for any noticeably damaged galvanizing.

B. Surface Preparation: If grease or oils are present, SSPC-SP1 cleaning shall precede any other method specified.

C. Prepare galvanized surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP11 methods. Surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating by a minimum of 1 inch. For welds, remove all flux and weld splatter. Apply organic zinc-rich primer containing a minimum of 93% zinc in the dry film, by weight. Apply multiple coats, 2 coats minimum, (allowing proper recoating time as recommended by coating manufacturer) to achieve 4 mils dry film thickness. Color shall approximately match color of galvanizing, but if primer color cannot match galvanizing, apply a finish coat of aluminum paint over galvanizing compound. Approved coatings are as follows: 1. Subox, Division of Carboline - Galvanox Type I. 2. Crown North American Professional Products, Inc. - Cold Galvanizing Compound. 3. ZRC Products Co. - Cold Galvanizing Compound. 4. Duncan - Zirp. 5. Brite Products - Brite Zinc.

D. Prepare inorganic zinc coated surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP11 methods. Surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged zinc coating by a minimum of 1 inch. For welds, remove all flux and weld splatter. Apply organic zinc-rich primer containing a minimum of 50% zinc in the dry film, by weight. Apply 1 coat minimum to achieve 3 mils dry film thickness. Color shall approximate match color of shop coating. Approved coatings are as follows: 1. Ameron-Amercoat 68HS. 2. Carboline - Carbozinc 859. 3. ICI Devoe - Catha-Coat 303H. 4. International - Interzinc 52HS. 5. Tnemec - Tnemezinc 90-97.

E. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge.

F. Repair of damaged surfaces shall be a continuous activity and shall occur as the coating is damaged and shall take place prior to rust bloom starting.

3.04 WELDING: A. Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. B. Perform welding in accordance with the American Welding Society D19.0. Welders and

welding operators shall be trained in the hazards of welding galvanized steel prior to performing any welding on Site.

C. Touch up all welded areas as specified.

3.05 WET STORAGE STAIN: A. Remove any wet storage stain prior to installation as follows:

1. Arrange steel so that surfaces dry rapidly. 2. Light stain deposits are to be removed by means of a stiff bristle (not wire) brush.

Remove heavier deposits by brushing with a 5% solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1% by volume of concentrated sulfuric acid. Apply with a stiff bristle brush and leave for about 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying. Alternatively, a proprietary product such as Oakite Highlite, or approved equal,


050513-6 81799_8320_050513

which is intended for this purpose may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations. Dispose of rinse water in an approved manner and in accordance with state, local, and federal Laws and Regulations.

3. A coating thickness check shall be made in the affected areas to ensure that zinc coating remaining after the removal of wet storage stain is sufficient to meet or exceed requirements of the Specification.

3.06 REPAIRS: A. Repair material showing evidence of damage to zinc coating. If not repairable, material with

damaged coating will be subject to rejection. END OF SECTION 05910

81799_8320_055001 055001-1

SECTION 055001 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes fabrication and installation of the following miscellaneous steel or metal

items: 1. Metal ladders. 2. Ladder safety cages. 3. Alternating tread stairs. 4. Grating and grating treads. 5. Stairs. 6. Handrails. 7. Expansion joint covers. 8. Guard posts. 9. Miscellaneous supports. 10. Stainless steel fabrications. 11. Barrier gate.

B. Although such Work may not be specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a complete installation and suitable for its intended use.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Steel: SECTION 055013 2. Galvanizing: SECTION 050513


1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA); Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.

2. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 3. American Galvanizers Association (AGA). 4. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A27 - Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application. b. A36 - Carbon Structural Steel. c. A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. d. A48 - Gray Iron Castings. e. A53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. f. A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. g. A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. h. A148 - Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes. i. A197 - Cupola Malleable Iron. j. A276 - Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. k. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. l. A312/A312M - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. m. A325 - High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. n. A354 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally

Threaded Fasteners. o. A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. p. A575 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades.

SECTION 055001 - METAL FABRICATIONS: continued

055001-2 81799_8320_055001

q. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

r. A666 - Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

s. A668 - Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use. t. B26/B26M – Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. u. B209/209M - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. v. B221/B221M - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Profiles, and Tubes. w. B632/B632M - Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. x. E894 - Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails

for Buildings. y. E935 - Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and

Rails for Buildings. z. E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

6. American Welding Society (AWS). 7. Federal Specifications (FS). 8. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). 9. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications:

a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. b. SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. c. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. d. SP7 - Brush Off Blast Cleaning. e. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Includes, but not limited to, the following:

1. Fabrication and erection drawings for all Work including anchor bolts and welds.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. As specified for each item.

2.02 BASIC MATERIALS: A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, A575, or A108 as applicable. B. Cast Steel: ASTM A27, Grade 65-35; and A148, Grade 80-50. C. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668. D. Rivet Steel: ASTM A502. E. Bolts: ASTM A307, A325, and A354 as applicable. F. Filler Metal: AWS Standards. G. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 30, minimum 30,000 psi tensile. H. Malleable Iron: ASTM A47 and A197 as applicable. I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53. J. Galvanizing: ASTM 123 or A653 as applicable. K. Aluminum:

1. Aluminum Plate Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M, Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221/B221M, Alloy 6063-T6.


81799_8320_055001 055001-3

3. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/B532M, Alloy 6061-T6. 4. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 443.O-F.

L. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666, Type 304. M. Anchorage Devices, Masonry:

1. Lead Expansion Shields for Machine Screws and Bolts 1/4 Inch (6 mm) and Smaller: Head out embedded nut type.

2. Machine Screws and Bolts Larger Than 1/4 inch (6 mm): Manufacturer's standard. 3. Bolt Anchor Expansion Shields for Lag Bolts: Zinc alloy, long shield anchors. 4. Bolt Anchor Expansion Shields for Bolts: Closed-end, bottom-bearing type.

N. Fasteners: 1. Zinc-coated (stainless steel) where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,

grade, and class required: a. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head ASTM A307, Grade A. b. Lag Bolts: Square head type. c. Machine Screws: Cadmium-plated steel. d. Wood Screws: Flathead, carbon steel. e. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel. f. Lock Washers: Helical spring carbon steel.

O. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint (93% zinc in dry film by weight) for regalvanizing welds

and abrasions in galvanized steel. a. Subox - Galvanox Type II. b. ZRC Products Co. - Cold Galvanizing Compound.

P. Dissimilar Metal Protection Coating: 1. Self-priming, coal-tar coating with minimum 59% solids by volume. Apply at 3-mil dry

film thickness. a. Carboline - Bitumastic Black Solution. b. Tnemec - 46-465 H.B. Tnemecol.

Q. Grout, Nonshrink: 1. Five-Star Products, U.S. Grout. 2. Por-rock. 3. Sauereisen.

R. Slip-Resistant Stair and Platform Nosings: 1. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 2. Safe-T-Metal Co., Inc. 3. Wooster Products, Inc.

2.03 METAL FABRICATIONS: A. General:

1. Provide all items and related accessories as required to complete construction and installation.

2. Provide anchorage accessories as required to securely anchor items to substrate. B. Ladders:

1. Galvanized steel. 2. Side rail dimension 1/2" x 2" (12 x 50 mm) minimum. 3. Rungs, round or square bars 7/8 inch (21 mm) minimum. Punch rungs through side rails

and weld. Maximum rung spacing of 12 inches (300 mm) oc. Provide nonslip surface on top of each rung.

4. Size to support concentrated load of 300 pounds (136 kg).


055001-4 81799_8320_055001

5. Minimum Clearance From Centerline of Rung to Wall or Obstruction: 7 inches (175 mm).

6. Minimum Ladder Width: 16 inches (400 mm) between side rails. C. Ladder Safety Cages:

1. Provide ladder safety cages for ladders longer than 20 feet (6 m). 2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet (6

m) o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. between primary hoops. a. Primary Hoops: 1/4" x 4" (6.4 mm x 100 mm) flat bar hoops. b. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4" x 2" (6.4 mm x 50 mm) flat bar hoops. c. Vertical Bars: 3/16" x 1-1/2" (4.8 mm x 38 mm) flat bars secured to each primary

and secondary hoop. d. Galvanize exterior and interior ladder cages, including fasteners, unless otherwise

indicated. D. Alternating Tread Stair:

1. Galvanized steel per ASTM A123. 2. Pitch: 68 degrees from horizontal. 3. Treads: Alternating at each side of a center stringer. Tread shall have a nonskid surface.

Tread risers shall be equally spaced within 3/16-inch (4.7 mm) for adjacent treads and 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) for nonadjacent treads.

4. Handrails: 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) o.d. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Lapeyre Stair; Harahan, Louisiana. b. Other manufacturers with approved equal products.

E. Gratings and Grating Treads: 1. (Aluminum) (Stainless steel) (Galvanized steel). 2. Nominal 1-1/4-inch (31.75-mm) depth, with serrated or slip-resistant top surface. 3. Support minimum uniform load of 200 psf (976 ksm). 4. Provide individual grating sections sized to allow removal by hand. 5. Provide hold-down clips. 6. Furnish with frames and support items. 7. Provide separate abrasive cast aluminum slip-resistant nosings; Wooster, Type 120 or

approved equal. F. Stairs, Steel Pan:

1. Fabricate as indicated. 2. Treads: Minimum 14-gage (1.9-mm) steel pans with self-furring metal lath welded in

pan. 3. Risers: Minimum 14-gage (1.9-mm). Fabricate risers to accommodate separate cast

nosings where indicated. 4. Landings: Minimum 10-gage (3-mm) pans with angle supports as required. 5. Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly to support a 1,000-pound (453-kg)

concentrated moving load of 100 psf (488 ksm), whichever produces the greatest stress. 6. Fabricate and design stair components in accordance with NAAMM Metal Stairs

Manual. 7. Provide separate abrasive cast aluminum slip-resistant nosings; Wooster, Type 101,

Alumogrit or approved equal. 8. Contractor's Option: Provide factory-manufactured stair system in lieu of fabricated

stairs, subject to approval by Engineer. G. Stairs, Steel Pan, Factory Manufactured:


81799_8320_055001 055001-5

1. Comply with the following minimum requirements: a. General arrangement with rise, run, landing dimensions, handrail configurations,

similar to stairs indicated. b. Design auxiliary framing required for stairs. c. Fabricate and design stair and landing assembly in accordance with NAAMM Metal

Stairs Manual and AISC Manual of Steel Construction for loads specified. d. Stringers: Minimum 3/16-inch (4.5-mm) steel plate. e. Treads: Minimum 14-gage (1.9-mm) pans. f. Risers: Minimum 14-gage (1.9-mm). g. Landings: Minimum 10-gage (3-mm) pans with angle supports as required. h. Form surface of nosings with Wooster Type 101, Alumogrit, or approved equal. i. Provide stairs which will accept concrete fill thickness indicated. j. Modify standard railings to meet code requirements specified and details indicated. k. Acceptable Manufacturers:

(1) Alfab, Inc. (2) American Stair, Inc. (3) Sharon Companies Ltd.

H. Handrails, Railings, and Guardrails: 1. 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD minimum, 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) maximum steel pipe, galvanized

for exterior use. 2. Form to profiles indicated. 3. Mount to provide gap from walls of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Set mounting brackets and posts not over 6 feet (1.80 m) and to be capable of

withstanding a 200-pound (90-kg) force applied in any direction at any point. 5. Return ends of all wall-mounted rails to wall. 6. Make all rails with smooth joints and without projections, to permit a hand to slide along

entire length. 7. Furnish all handrails complete with brackets. 8. Where pickets or posts are indicated to be set in sleeves, provide steel sleeves having a

minimum wall thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm). 9. Provide 4-inch (100 mm) height kick plates (toeplates) at all landings and platforms. 10. Comply with ADA requirements.

I. Support Angles, Members, and Loose Lintels: 1. Fabricate of ASTM A36 steel. Size as indicated. 2. Galvanize units in exterior wall. Prime coat interior units.

J. Guard Posts: 1. Extra-strength steel pipe, 6-inch (150-mm) (8-inch) (200-mm) diameter. 2. Length to provide minimum 42-inch (1,050-mm) projection aboveground, or as

indicated, with minimum 36-inch (900-mm) embedment into concrete. 3. Fabricate with welded on wing anchors. 4. Fill with 3,000 psi concrete, round top.

K. Supports for folding partition and grille supports, ceiling-hung toilet partitions, and miscellaneous support items. 1. Fabricate from ASTM A36 steel.

L. Stainless Steel Fabrications: 1. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, (Type 304), stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 2. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, (Type 304). 3. Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP (304).


055001-6 81799_8320_055001

4. From to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.

5. Hem exposed edges. 6. Preassemble fabrications in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping, handling, and installation limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

7. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction.

8. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install fabrications.

9. Weld joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed. a. Use welding procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of

adjoining surfaces. 10. Thickness: (14) gage, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Finish: (Dull Satin Finish, No. 6).

a. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. b. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish

indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. c. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. M. Embedded Anchors:

1. Fabricated of ASTM A36 steel. 2. Size and shape as indicated.

N. Provide all fabricated items complete with attachment devices as required to install.

2.04 SHOP-PROTECTIVE COATINGS: A. Galvanize all items to be embedded in exterior walls, concrete, or attached to exterior surface.

Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A653. B. Prepare surfaces and apply shop primer to all ferrous metal except where indicated to be set in

or on concrete. Shop primer shall be a high-solids alkyd primer with minimum 50% solids by volume. 1. Apply two shop coats to metals that will be inaccessible after erection. 2. Do not prime stainless steel, aluminum, copper, brass, or bronze unless specifically

indicated. 3. Remove scale, rust, and deleterious materials before priming.

a. Remove contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1. b. Clean off rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-6 or SP-11.

4. Immediately after surface preparation, prime in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniform dry film thickness of 1.5-mil minimum.

C. Provide Dissimilar Metal Protection Coating: 1. When dissimilar metals come in contact. 2. When metal or aluminum is anchored to or in contact with concrete or masonry.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION: A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation. B. Coordinate installation of embedded anchors with other trades.


81799_8320_055001 055001-7

3.02 FABRICATION: A. Form to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp angles, smooth curves. B. Drill or punch holes for temporary field connections and attachment of Work by other trades.

Smooth edges of holes for proper securement of fasteners. C. Make permanent shop connections with continuous fillet-type welds. Grind exposed welds

smooth. D. Conceal fastenings where practicable. E. Shop-fabricate in as large assemblies as practicable. F. Meet requirements specified in SECTION 055013 - STEEL, for fabricating items of structural

nature or use. G. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS.

3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Set Work level, true to line, and plumb. B. Shim and grout as necessary. C. Weld field connections and grind smooth. D. Where practicable, conceal fastenings. E. Secure metal to wood with lag screws of adequate size, with appropriate washers. F. Secure metal to concrete or concrete masonry units with embedded expansion anchors, setting

compounds, caulking and sleeves, or setting grout. Use expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or screws for light-duty service.

G. Meet structural requirements of SECTION 055013 - STEEL, for erecting items of structural nature or use.

H. Do not field-splice fabricated items unless size requires splicing. I. Weld all splices. J. Install all handrails with brackets:

1. Wherever pickets or posts are indicated to be set in sleeves, set with nonshrink grout unless indicated as removable.

2. Where setting is required for exterior use, hold nonshrink grout back 1/4-inch (6 mm) from surface and fill flush with sealant, unless indicated as removable.

K. After installation, touch up scratched or abraded surfaces. Use primer as used in shop for primed metal or galvanizing repair paint for galvanized metal.


81799_8320_055013 055013-1

SECTION 055013 - STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of the structural steel and other steel or metal

items as defined in AISC Manual, Code of Standard Practice. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete: SECTION 033000


1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Manual of Steel Construction - (Allowable Stress Design.) (Load Resistance Factor

Design). b. Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards.

2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.4 - Stainless Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. C5.4 - Recommended Practices for Stud Welding. c. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. e. QC1 - Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A1 - Carbon Steel Tee Rails. b. A6 - General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and

Sheet Piling. c. A36 - Carbon Structural Steel. d. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. e. A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. f. A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. g. A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. h. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. i. A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and

Strip. j. A193 - Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature

Service. k. A264 - Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. l. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. m. A312 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. n. A325 -High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. o. A449 - Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. p. A490 - Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. q. A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes. r. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. s. A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip

Commercial Quality. t. A572 - High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel, Grade 50. u. A588 - High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345MOA) minimum

yield point to 4-inch (100 mm) thick.

SECTION 055013 - STEEL: continued

055013-2 81799_8320_055013

v. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. w. A786 - Hot-Rolled Carbon Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel

Floor Plates. x. A992 - Structural Steel Shapes. y. B695 - Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. z. C1107 – Packaged, Dry Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). aa. F436 - Hardened Steel Washers. bb. F593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. cc. F594 - Stainless Steel Nuts. dd. F959 - Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for Use with Structural

Fasteners. ee. F1554 - Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.

4. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual. b. MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual. c. MBG 533 - Welding Specifications for Fabrication of Steel, Aluminum and

Stainless Steel Bar Grating. 5. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC):

a. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 Bolts or A490 Bolts as endorsed by AISC.

6. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications: a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. b. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. c. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. e. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. f. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) - All applicable OSHA regulations, including, but not limited to 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R - Steel Erection.


1. Fabrication and erection drawings for all Work. Contractor may use a reproduction of Engineer-prepared Contract Drawings for erection drawings such as to indicate information on erection or to identify detail drawing references. Where the drawings are revised to show this additional Contractor information, Engineer's title block shall be replaced with a Contractor's title block, and Engineer's professional seal shall be removed from the drawing. Contractor shall revise these erection drawings for subsequent Engineer revisions to the Contract Drawings.

2. All necessary information for the fabrication, including filler metal for welds, of the component part of the structure, presented on drawings to conform to recognized standard practice, AISC Manual and AWS Code.

3. Drawings indicating stud shear connector spacing regardless of whether connectors are shop-applied or field-applied.

4. Drawings showing each piece including anchor bolts marked for identification to correspond to erection drawings.

5. Manufacturer's literature on products including, but not limited to, grating, stair treads, stair nosings, stud shear connectors, grout, concrete anchors, and protective coatings.


81799_8320_055013 055013-3

6. AWS Certified Welding Inspector Certificates. 7. Qualified welding procedure specifications and procedure qualification test results if

welding processes differ from those prequalified by AWS. C. Mill Tests:

1. Perform for each melt of material used in the fabrication. 2. Furnish (two) copies of each certified mill test to Engineer upon request.

D. High-Strength Connection Bolt and Nut Manufacturer's Inspections Certificate: 1. The Supplier shall certify that bolts, nuts, and washers furnished comply with all of the

requirements of these Specifications, and shall provide complete manufacturer's mill test reports (Manufacturer's Inspections Certificate).

2. For fasteners to be accepted by Contractor, certificate numbers shall appear on the product containers and correspond to the identification numbers on the mill test reports.

3. Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings shall appear on all bolts and nuts.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Welder Qualifications:

1. Welders shall be previously qualified by passing the tests prescribed in the AWS D1.1 or by passing such other tests as Engineer may accept. Welders of stainless steel shall be previously qualified in accordance with AWS D1.6.

2. Welders shall have been tested within the past 12 months, and their qualification shall be considered as remaining in effect unless the welder is not engaged in a given process of welding for a period exceeding 6 months.

3. Submit two certified copies of the qualification records to Engineer as evidence of qualification to the above-mentioned code.

B. Inspection: Material or workmanship may be subject to inspection in the shop and field.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Handle and store all steel and appurtenances as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Store all steel and appurtenances blocked-up off the ground and in orderly stacks. C. Protect all items with shop applied protective coatings from corrosion. Store in an

environment and manner consistent with type of coating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIC MATERIALS: A. Steel: Conform to the following unless otherwise indicated or specified.

1. Wide flange (WF) shapes and tees cut from WF: ASTM A992, Grade 50. 2. M shapes, S shapes, HP (bearing piles), channels, and angles: ASTM A36. 3. Structural plates and bars: ASTM A36.

B. Steel - Conform to ASTM A572, Grade 50 or ASTM A992, Grade 50 unless otherwise indicated or specified.

C. Corrosion-Resistant Steel: Conform to ASTM A588, Grade 50. D. Rail Steel: Conform to No. 1 rail, ASTM A1 of the weight indicated or specified. E. Stainless or Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel: Conform to ASTM A167, (Type 304.),

(Type 304L.), (Type 316.), (Type 316L.) F. Connection Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Compressible Washer-Type, Direct Tension Indicators:

1. Conform to ASTM A325, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated or specified. 2. Be galvanized when connecting galvanized steel. 3. Conform to A325, Type 3, for use with A588, Grade 50.


055013-4 81799_8320_055013

4. Compressible Washer-Type, Direct-Tension Indicators: a. ASTM F959 Type 325 for use with A325 bolts. b. ASTM F959 Type 490 for use with A490 bolts. c. Galvanized for use with galvanized bolts.

5. Nuts: Conform to ASTM A563. 6. Flat and beveled washers: Conform to ASTM F436.

G. Anchor Bolts: 1. Conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36, galvanized finish, unless otherwise indicated to be

stainless steel or high strength. 2. Machine Bolts: Conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 3. Stainless Steel: Conform to ASTM F593, Type 304, with nuts conforming to ASTM

F594. Sleeves shall conform to ASTM A312. 4. High Strength: Conform to ASTM A449 with nuts conforming to ASTM A563. 5. Washers:

a. For ASTM F1554 and A449 Bolts: Conform to F436. b. For Stainless Steel Bolts: Conform to ASTM A167, Type 304, and dimensional

tolerances of F436. H. Handrail: Conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106, Grade B. I. Pipe for Structural Uses: Conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, or ASTM A106,

Grade B. J. Square and Rectangular Tubing Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): Conform to ASTM A500,

Grade B. K. Grating:

1. Main Bars: Conform to ASTM A569. 2. Cross Bars: Conform to ASTM A569.

L. Shear Stud Connectors: Manufacture from cold-finished carbon steel conforming to ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020.

M. Checkered Plate: Conform to ASTM A786 with A36 material and with deformations of the 4-way type.

N. Threaded Rods: Conform to ASTM A36. O. Welding:

1. For ASTM A36 steel, use E70 electrodes for shielded metal arc welding, F7 series electrodes for submerged arc welding, E70T series electrodes for flux-cored arc welding, and ER70S series electrodes for gas metal arc welding. Select "matching" electrodes in accordance with Table 3.1 AWS D1.1.

2. For ASTM A588 steel, use E70 low-hydrogen electrodes for shielded metal arc welding, F7 series electrodes for submerged arc welding, E70T series electrodes for flux-cored arc welding, and ER70S series electrodes for gas metal arc welding. Select "matching" electrodes in accordance with Tables 3.1 and 3.3, AWS D1.1

3. For ASTM A572, Grade 50 steel or ASTM A992 steel, use E70 low-hydrogen electrodes for shielded metal arc welding, F7 series electrodes for submerged arc welding, E70T series electrodes for flux-cored arc welding, and ER70S series electrodes for gas metal arc welding. Select "matching" electrodes in accordance with Table 3.1, AWS D1.1.

4. For ASTM A167 or ASTM A312 stainless steel, use shielded metal arc welding, gas metal arc welding, gas tungsten arc welding, or flux-cored arc welding. Select "matching" electrodes in accordance with Table 3.3 of AWS D1.6.

P. Galvanizing: Conform to ASTM A123 and ASTM A153, where indicated or specified to be galvanized. Nuts, bolts, and washers may be hot-dip galvanized to conform to ASTM A153 or mechanically galvanized to conform to ASTM B695.


81799_8320_055013 055013-5

2.02 STEEL FABRICATION: A. Fabricate all steel to conform to AISC specifications, codes, and standards. B. Permissible variations for sweep, camber, length, and cross section of all steel members shall

conform to ASTM A6, AISC "Manual of Steel Construction, Part 1", AISC "Code of Standard Practice", and AISC "Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards" unless indicated otherwise.

C. Field-measure existing steel and structures where necessary to ensure fabrication fit-up of new steel.

D. Fabricator shall mark all shear connector locations (if field-applied) for composite beams by means of center punch and paint circle or other approved means so that field layout of shear connectors is not required. Do not paint shear connector contact surface.

E. Provide grout holes in base plates having the least dimension greater than 24 inches. Holes shall be as close to center as practicable and minimum of 2 inches in diameter.

F. Shop Milling: 1. Perform at the base of columns and at the top of column base plates, except that rolled-

steel bearing plates of 4-inch thickness or less may be straightened by pressing. 2. Perform on butted ends for bolted or partial penetration-welded column splices. Shop

milling is not required for welded column splices with full penetration welds. 3. Perform at ends of columns which butt against a plate.

G. Welding: 1. All welding shall be shielded metal arc, submerged arc, or flux-cored arc, or gas metal

arc. For gas metal arc welding, the short-circuiting mode of filler metal transfer is not permitted. Other welding processes may be used provided they are qualified by applicable tests as prescribed in the AWS D1.1 (AWS D1.6 for stainless steel) and approved by Engineer prior to use. For the use of any other welding process, Contractor shall prepare and submit to Engineer for approval, a qualified welding procedure specification and the procedure qualification test results. These Submittals shall be deemed Technical Submittals, and welding processes shall be approved for use only after receipt of specific written approval from the Engineer.

2. Conform to AWS Code, AISC Manual, and the AISC Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards.

3. Contractor shall perform fabrication welding inspection in accordance with AWS D1.1. (AWS D1.6 for stainless steel). This welding inspection shall be performed by AWS Certified Welding Inspector(s) (CWI). All such Certified Welding Inspectors shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the provisions of AWS QC1. Only individuals so qualified shall be authorized to perform fabrication/erection or verification inspection of the welding performed under the provisions of AWS D1.1 (AWS D1.6 for stainless steel) and these Contract Documents. Certifications verifying the qualifications of welding inspectors shall be submitted to Engineer as Submittals prior to commencement of structural welding operations or prior to welding inspection performed by an individual welding inspector. Defective welds shall be corrected.

H. Shop Connections: 1. Weld or bolt at Contractor's option except when otherwise indicated or specified. 2. Shop portions of connections may be welded equivalent to any bolted connection

specified if Engineer concurs. 3. Welded connections shall be as indicated or in accordance with acceptable alternative

designs: a. Welds of connection angles to beam webs shall conform with (AISC ASD Manual

Part 4) (AISC LRFD Manual, Part 10, Tables 10-2 and 10-3) with particular regard


055013-6 81799_8320_055013

for minimum web thickness. Provide longer connection angles or reinforce web as required.

b. All butt-joint groove welds shall be complete penetration welds unless otherwise indicated and shall conform to the applicable standards in (AISC ASD Manual, Part 4) (AISC LRFD Manual, Part 8), with special emphasis on maintaining root opening. Accomplish this for single-bevel, butt-joint welds by using backup plates or by chipping out and welding on the opposite side.

c. Prepare weld bevels with a mechanically guided cutting torch or by grinding. d. Remove all run-out tabs.

4. Bolted connections shall conform with (AISC ASD Manual, Part 4) (AISC LRFD Manual, Parts 9 and 10): a. All bolted connections shall be made with3/4-inch bolts, nuts, and washers unless

otherwise indicated or specified. b. Capacity of beam connections shall have a minimum capacity of that specified in

(AISC ASD Manual, Part 4, Table II-A) c. Use the minimum number of rows of bolts for beam connections so that bottom row

is below the centerline of the beam. I. Provisions for Field Connections:

1. Provide with bolted connections unless otherwise indicated or specified. The number of rows and number of bolts indicated on the Drawings or stated in the Specifications is the minimum number of rows or bolts. Provide additional bolts or connection devices, if necessary, to comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926, Subpart R - Steel Erection.

2. Provide for field welding only when so indicated or when detail clearances make bolting impractical.

3. Provide all members to be field-welded with bolted erection connections adequate to resist erection stresses prior to field welding.

J. Comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1926, Subpart R - Steel Erection.

2.03 COLUMN BASE AND EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS: A. Furnish for all columns and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract, (and as

required to install all equipment furnished by others for installation under this Contract unless otherwise indicated).

2.04 HANDRAIL: A. 1-1/2-inch nominal (1.9-inch od) round, black standard-weight pipe. B. Post spacing shall not exceed 6 feet from center-to-center. C. Form and weld all handrail. Grind all welds smooth and even with the surface of the pipe,

including field welds required for erection. D. Carefully form all handrail where change of direction or elevation occurs. E. Handrail posts shall be vertical (plumb) unless otherwise indicated. F. Furnish pipe sleeves for posts of handrail sections indicated to be removable.

2.05 EDGE ANGLES, PLATES, AND LINTELS: A. Furnish around and over openings as indicated. B. Keep plates and edge angles flush at intersections and fillet-weld to give a neat appearance at

the exposed intersecting surfaces. C. Provide lintel length of opening width plus 1'-4" unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication where indicated. E. Properly align, level, and plumb edge angles and plates before concrete is placed.


81799_8320_055013 055013-7

2.06 KICK PLATES: A. Furnish at the edge of uncovered openings and at the edge of walkways and platforms, except

as otherwise indicated. B. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication where indicated.

2.07 STEEL FLOOR GRATING: A. One-piece, resistance-welded, carbon-steel construction without notching of bearing or cross

bars before welding and conforming to NAAMM MBG 531 or 532. B. Main Bearing Bars:

1. Thickness: 3/16-inch; 3/8-inch for heavy duty grating. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Spacing: Not more than 1-3/16 inches on center; 1-3/8 inches on center for heavy duty

grading. 4. Configuration of top surface of main bars unless otherwise indicated:

a. Exterior - Exposed to Weather: Serrated. b. Interior - Not Exposed to Weather: Plain.

C. Cross Bars: 1. Spacing: 4 inches oc. 2. One of the following shapes and minimum sizes:

a. Hexagon: 5/16-inch diameter of inscribed circle; 7/16-inch for heavy duty grating. b. Rectangular: 1/2" x 3/16"; 5/8" x 1/4" for heavy duty grating. c. Square: 1/4-inch with spiral twist; 1/2-inch for heavy duty grating. d. Round: 3/8-inch diameter, 1/2-inch for heavy duty grating.

D. Fabrication: 1. Fabrication shall conform to NAAMM MBG 531; MBG 532 for heavy duty grating, and

MBG 533. 2. Crossbars shall match crossbars of adjacent sections to form a continuous pattern of

straight lines. 3. Provide all openings in grating indicated and as required for installation of all piping,

wiring, and equipment installed under this Contract. 4. Band all openings 4 inches and larger with a metal bar same size as main bearing bar and

extend 4 inches above top of grating. Band bars shall be same depth as bearing bars. Weld to each bearing bar with a 3/16-inch fillet weld 3/4 inch long. Tack weld to all crossbars.

5. Trim-band all locations as follows: a. Open end of grating at head of a ladder. b. Manway opening. c. Hinged sections. d. Grating panels with four crossbars or less. e. Other locations as indicated.

6. Provide kickplates where indicated and at all handrail on floors or platforms 4 foot or more above adjacent floors or ground where persons can pass or machinery is located.

E. Shop Finish: 1. Galvanized

F. Manufacturer: 1. Grating shall be manufactured by one of the following:

a. Tru-Weld Grating, Inc., Wexford, Pennsylvania. b. Amico-Klemp Corporation, Chicago, Illinois. c. IKG-Borden, Clark, New Jersey.


055013-8 81799_8320_055013

d. Approved equal. 2. Fasteners – “G-CLIPS” type fasteners.

2.08 STAIRS: A. General Construction:

1. Stringer sizes indicated are minimum acceptable size. 2. Cross-brace stringers to provide lateral stability where the horizontal run exceeds 12 feet. 3. Provide struts and hangers where indicated or as otherwise required for proper support.

B. Treads: 1. Open-riser type with grating conforming to PART 2 - STEEL FLOOR GRATING, this

Section, and of the same type as specified herein, with main bars 1" x 3/16" unless indicated otherwise.

2. Treads damaged during construction shall be replaced immediately. 3. Provide (cast-abrasive nosings similar to Feralun nosing as manufactured by American

Abrasive Metal Company,) (standard checkered-plate nosing) (nosing as indicated). 4. Bolt tread to each stringer with a minimum of two 3/8-inch bolts.

C. Grating Landings: 1. Landings shall be of grating conforming to PART 2 - STEEL FLOOR GRATING. 2. Provide nosing as specified in PART 2 - STAIRS, this Section, at the head of all stairs.

D. Pan-Filled Stairs: 1. Stairs shall be interlocking construction with risers, treads, and landings constructed of

minimum 12-gage plate. 2. Provide with stiffeners as required. 3. Place temporary wood planking in pans. Planking shall extend the full length, width, and

height of pan and shall be securely anchored.

2.09 CHECKERED PLATE: A. Plate shall be of thickness indicated with surface deformations of the 4-way type. B. Hot-dip galvanize plate after fabrication where indicated. C. Fasten in place with screws spaced at 18 inches with a minimum of one at each corner of each

piece or as otherwise indicated. D. Screws shall be 1/4-inch countersunk stainless steel.

2.10 BUNKER HOPPERS: N/A

2.11 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS: A. General:

1. Conform to specification for Stud Shear Connectors in AISC Manual, Part 5. 2. Use 1/2’’ x 4” long headed-type stud shear connectors unless otherwise indicated. 3. Number and spacing shall be as indicated.

B. Manufacturer: 1. Connectors shall be manufactured by one of the following:

a. KSM Fastening Systems, Moorestown, New Jersey, Division of Erico Fastening Systems, Inc.

b. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc., Lorain, Ohio. c. Blue Arc Welding Stud, Division of Erico Fastening Systems Inc. d. Approved equal.

C. Stud Shear-Connector Welding:


81799_8320_055013 055013-9

1. Conform to AWS C5.4 for stud welding and recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Fillet welding of studs is not approved.

2. Stud shear connectors shall be shop- or field-welded at Contractor's option. Studs that obstruct walking surfaces of beams or joists shall be field welded. Conform to the requirements of 29 CFR 1926, Subpart R - Steel Erection.

3. Stud welding, equipment, and power requirements for stud welding shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Clean stud shear-connector weld area of scale, rust, oil, paint, and any other foreign substance that would inhibit sound welds.

5. All welding ferrules for stud shear-connectors shall be removed from studs and deck prior to placement of concrete.

D. Inspection: 1. Workmanship of the stud shear-connector welding will be verified as follows:

a. Studs shall be at least 1/8-inch shorter after welding. b. Studs shall have a 360o weld fillet at base with no undercut. c. Any stud having a questionable weld will be subjected to a bend test by bending the

stud away from its axis until failure occurs but not exceeding 30o. Failure should occur in the stud, not in the weld. Replace studs that do not bend 30o without failure or otherwise do not meet these Specifications.

2.12 CONCRETE ANCHORS: A. Furnish and install manually expanded and adhesive anchor types. B. Furnish sizes indicated and install to conform to manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Anchors shall be manufactured by one of the following:

1. Drillco National Group, Inc., Long Island City, New York. 2. Hilti Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma. 3. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Wood Dale, Illinois. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Dublin, California.

D. Concrete anchors that are not specifically indicated to be high strength steel or stainless steel shall be carbon steel with surface plating (or galvanizing) in accordance with manufacturer’s standard.

E. Anchors indicated to be high strength steel anchors shall be surface plated (or galvanized) in accordance with manufacturer’s standard.

F. Anchors indicated to be stainless steel shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel per the manufacturer's standard unless specifically indicated to conform to Type 304, 316.

G. Adhesive anchors shall be non-epoxy adhesive type anchors unless indicated to be epoxy adhesive type anchors.

H. Installed adhesive anchors shall not be disturbed or loaded until the anchor has been in place longer than the manufacturer’s cure time for the adhesive.

I. The concrete anchors for the various anchor types shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wedge Type (carbon steel unless indicted to be stainless steel):

a. Hilti Kwik-bolt III. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head Trubolt. c. Simpson Wedge-All.

2. Flush Type (internal plug expansion) Type: a. Hilti HDI Drop-In. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head Multi-Set II. c. Simpson Drop-In.


055013-10 81799_8320_055013

3. Undercut Type (carbon steel unless indicated to be stainless steel): a. Drillco Maxi-Bolt (ASTM A193 Grade B7 for carbon steel). b. Hilti HDA-P Undercut.

4. Adhesive Type – Carbon Steel: a. Hilti HIT HY 150 injection adhesive with HAS Standard ASTM A36 Rods. b. Hilti HVA Capsule adhesive with HAS Standard ASTM A36 Rods. c. Simpson Acrylic-Tie injection adhesive with ASTM A307 (SAE 1018) threaded

rods. 5. Adhesive Type – High Strength Carbon Steel:

a. Hilti HIT HY 150 injection adhesive with HAS Super ASTM A193 B7 Rods. b. Hilti HVA Capsule adhesive with HAS Super ASTM A193 B7 Rods. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head A7 injection adhesive with ASTM A193 Grade B7 (SAE

4140) threaded rods. d. Simpson Acrylic-Tie injection adhesive with ASTM A193 Grade B7 (SAE 4140)

threaded rods. 6. Adhesive Type – Stainless Steel:

a. Hilti HIT HY 150 injection adhesive with HAS SS AISI 304 or 316 SS Rods. b. Hilti HVA Capsule adhesive with HAS SS AISI 304 or 316 SS Rods. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head A7 injection adhesive with AISI 304 or 316 stainless steel

threaded rods. d. Simpson Acrylic-Tie injection adhesive with AISI 304 or 316 stainless steel

threaded rods. 7. Epoxy Adhesive Type – Carbon Carbon Steel:

a. Hilti HIT RE 500 injection adhesive with HAS Standard ASTM A36 Rods. b. Simpson SET injection adhesive with ASTM A307 (SAE 1018) threaded rods.

8. Epoxy Adhesive Type – High Strength Carbon Steel: a. Hilti HIT RE 500 injection adhesive with HAS Super ASTM A193 B7 Rods. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head C6 injection adhesive with ASTM A193 Grade B7 (SAE

4140) threaded rods. c. Simpson SET injection adhesive with ASTM A193 Grade B7 (SAE 4140) threaded

rods. 9. Epoxy Adhesive Type – Stainless Steel:

a. Hilti HIT RE 500 injection adhesive with HAS SS AISI 304 or 316 SS Rods. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head C6 injection adhesive with AISI 304 or 316 stainless steel

threaded rods. c. Simpson SET injection adhesive with AISI 304 or 316 stainless steel threaded rods.

J. Minimum embedment of wedge-type anchors shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

Anchor size Minimum Embedment 1/4” 1-1/8” 3/8” 1-3/4” 1/2” 2-1/4” 5/8” 2-3/4” 3/4” 3-3/8” 7/8” 3-7/8” 1” 4-1/2” 1 1/4” 5-5/8”

K. Minimum embedment for adhesive anchors (i.e., non-epoxy adhesive anchors) shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated:


81799_8320_055013 055013-11

Carbon Steel High Strength Steel Stainless Steel Size See above Hilti HVA See above Hilti HVA See above Hilti HVA 3/8” 1-3/4” 3-1/2” 5-1/4” 5-1/4” 3-1/2” 3-1/2” 1/2” 2-1/8” 4-1/4” 6-3/8” 6-3/8” 4-1/2” 4-1/4” 5/8” 2-1/2” 5” 7-1/2” 7-1/2” 5-5/8” 5” 3/4” 3-3/8” 6-5/8” 10” 10” 6-3/4” 6-5/8” 7/8” 3-7/8” 6-5/8” 11-1/4” 10” 7-7/8” 6-5/8” 1” 4-1/2” 8-1/4” 12-3/8” 12-3/8” 9” 8-1/4” 1-1/4” 6” 12” 15” 15” 12” 12” L. Minimum embedment for epoxy adhesive anchors shall be as follows, unless otherwise

indicated: Size Carbon Steel High Strength Steel Stainless Steel

3/8” 1-3/4” 4-1/2” 3-1/2” 1/2” 2-1/4” 6” 4-1/2” 5/8” 2-7/8” 7-1/2” 5-5/8” 3/4" 3-3/8” 9” 6-3/4” 7/8” 4” 10-1/2” 7-7/8” 1” 4-1/2” 12” 9” 1-1/4” 5-5/8” 15” 11-1/4”

M. Minimum embedment for undercut anchors shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

Inch Size Metric Size (Equiv.)* Drillco Maxi-Bolt Hilti HAD-P 1/4" N.A. 2” N.A. 3/8” M10 3-1/2” 4” 1/2” M12 6” 5” 5/8” M16 7-1/2” 7.5” 3/4" M20 9-1/4” 9.8” 7/8” N.A. N.A. N.A. 1” N.A. 12-1/2” N.A. 1-1/4” N.A. 16” N.A.

* Drillco anchors are available in inch diameters, and the Hilti anchors are available in metric diameters. Inch diameters will be shown on the Drawings. If Hilti anchors are used, the metric equivalents shown in this table shall be provided.

2.13 SHOP-PROTECTIVE COATING: A. Surface Preparation: Prepare all surfaces except galvanized (or otherwise specified) in

accordance with (SSPC-6) (SSPC-SP10) and 1.0 - to 1.5-mil profile depth. B. Apply shop coat of inorganic zinc-rich primer (ethyl silicate base), 3-mil dry-film thickness, to

all steel including connections except for the following surfaces: 1. Where encased in concrete. 2. Covered with gunite. 3. Within 3 inches adjacent to field welds. 4. Top flange and anchors on composite beams.


055013-12 81799_8320_055013

C. The shop applied inorganic zinc rich primer along with the specified surface preparation shall meet the requirements for Class A relative to painted faying surfaces, slip coefficient, hole type, cure time, etc., as required by RCSC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Unless otherwise indicated or specified, submit paint manufacturer's certification that the paint to be incorporated with the specified surface preparation will meet the above stipulated requirements.

D. Manufacturer: 1. Ameron - Dimetcote 9HS. 2. Carboline - Carbozinc 11HS. 3. ICI Devoe - Catha-Coat 304V. 4. International - Interzinc 22HS. 5. Tnemec - Span Prime Ultra IOZ Series 385.

E. Coating shall not exceed specified mil thickness by more than 20%. If this tolerance is exceeded, Contractor and fabricator shall be responsible for corrective action and compatibility with finish coats.

2.14 GALVANIZING: A. Galvanize steel after fabrication where indicated or specified to be galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION: A. Field-check location and elevation of column anchor bolts and footings before erecting

structural steel columns. B. Field-measure existing steel for plumbness and elevation at connecting points. C. Contractor shall submit the method and sequence of erection for acceptance.

3.02 STEEL ERECTION: A. Erect all steel to conform to AISC specifications, codes, and standards; AISC Quality Criteria

and Inspection Standard; or any local, state or federal codes which may exceed such requirements. Comply with applicable OSHA regulations including 29 CFR 1926, Subpart R - Steel Erection.

B. Protect existing structure from weather when connecting steel to existing structure. C. Protect steel and anchor bolt sleeves from entrapped water that can cause damage from

freezing or corrosion. D. Column Base Plates:

1. Prior to setting base plates, clean out sleeves of all foreign material and liquid. 2. Grout under base plates with a flowable nonshrink grout, taking special care not to

disturb their grade and alignment. 3. Flowable nonshrink grout shall conform to ASTM C1107 and be one of the following:

a. Cormix Construction Chemicals, Dallas, Texas - Supreme Grout. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, Nebraska - Crystex. c. Master Builders Company, Cleveland, Ohio - Masterflow 713 Grout. d. Sauereisen Cement Company, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania - Sauereisen F100. e. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, Connecticut - Five Star Grout.

4. Cut off exposed edges of the grout at 45o along the edges of the base plates after grout has acquired its initial set.

5. In hot or cold weather conform to manufacturer's recommendations for temperature control for grouting operations.


81799_8320_055013 055013-13

E. Erection Bracing: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for structural adequacy, design, engineering, and

construction of all erection bracing. 2. Provide all necessary temporary struts, ties, cables, temporary flooring, planking, and

scaffolding in connection with the erection of the structural steel or support of erection machinery.

3. Place as required to maintain proper position against loads from erection equipment, construction material, and wind.

4. Leave bracing in place until sufficient steel connections, concrete slabs, exterior walls, and roof decks are in place to ensure stability of the structure.

F. Connections: 1. Tighten high-strength bolts in slip-critical joints to correct bolt tension in accordance with

AISC Manual, Part 5, " Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." a. Furnish the inspecting wrench and one man to assist the Engineer when inspections

are performed. b. Provide Skidmore-Wilhelm Bolt-Tension calibrator or approved equal for adjusting

inspection wrench in accordance with RCSC, "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", Section 7. Inspection shall be in accordance with Section 10.

c. Three bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each lot supplied shall be tested in a tension measuring device at the jobsite at the beginning of the bolting start-up to demonstrate that the bolts and nuts, when used together, can develop tension not less than that provided in RCSC, "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts", Table 8.1 for the size and grade. The bolt tension shall be developed by tightening the nut.

d. The job-inspecting torque shall be determined in accordance with AISC Manual, Part 5, "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts", Section 10.

e. The minimum number of bolts inspected and any required retightening shall be per RCSC, "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts", Section 10.

f. Comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926, Subpart R - Steel Erection. 2. Section 2c above is also required if bearing connections are used for A325 and A490

bolts. 3. Compressible Washer-Type, Direct-Tension Indicators:

a. The use of compressible washer-type, direct-tension indicators is an acceptable alternative to the requirements of PART 3, paragraph 2.F. - Connections, this Section, in determining specified minimum bolt tension.

b. c. Direct-tension indicators shall be one of the following:

(1) Turnasure, L.L.C., Langhorne, Pennsylvania - Direct-Tension Indicator. (2) Approved equal.

d. Manufacture, install, and store in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM F959.

e. Provide Skidmore-Wilhelm Bolt Tension Calibrator or approved equal to allow Engineer random verification that the direct-tension indicators provide proper bolt tension.


055013-14 81799_8320_055013

4. Where required for connection fit-up, bolt holes may be adjusted in one of the following manners (flame cutting or flame enlargement of holes is not allowed): a. Reamed to AISC allowable maximum size for oversized holes. b. Holes may be filled with weld metal, ground smooth, and field-drilled. c. Other Engineer-approved method.

5. Welded Connections: a. Make welded connections as indicated and leave all erection bolts in place after

completion of welding unless otherwise indicated. b. Reinforce connections when members requiring fillet welds are not in contact. c. Use backup bars or spacer bars on all butt welds where root opening exceeds 1/8-

inch. d. Remove all run-out tabs.

G. Welding and Welders: 1. The requirements for erection welding and welders shall be the same as specified for steel

fabrication. 2. All welds shall be stamped with a mark identifying the welder. Remove welders from

Work after two defective welds. 3. The Contractor shall perform erection-welding inspection in accordance with AWS D1.1.

(AWS D1.6 for stainless steel.) This welding inspection shall be performed by AWS Certified Welding Inspector(s) (CWI). All such Certified Welding Inspectors shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the provisions of AWS QC1. Only individuals so qualified shall be authorized to perform fabrication/erection or verification inspection of the welding performed under the provisions of AWS D1.1 Code (AWS D1.6 for stainless steel) and these Contract Documents. Certifications verifying the qualifications of welding inspectors shall be submitted to Engineer as Submittals prior to commencement of structural welding operations or prior to welding inspection performed by an individual welding inspector. Defective welds shall be corrected.

H. Protect pipe sleeves, other anchorage members, and concrete bases from deleterious materials at all times, and from water which may cause ice damage during freezing weather.

I. Handrail: 1. Form and weld all handrail. Grind all welds smooth and even with the surface of the

pipe. 2. Carefully fit all handrail where change of direction or elevation occurs. 3. Install all rails and posts plumb, level, straight and true, and in alignment. 4. Top rail shall clear all fixed objects by at least 3 inches vertically and horizontally. 5. Furnish and install plates, bolts, and additional items as indicated or required for

fastening to supporting members. J. Grating:

1. Grating installation shall conform to NAAMM MBG 531 or MBG532 and as specified herein.

2. Space fasteners as required to overcome irregularities and maintain grating contact with supports. Minimum anchorage of each panel shall be two fasteners at each end and one fastener at each intermediate support.

3. Where indicated as fixed, and if not galvanized, fasteners shall be 3/16-inch fillet welds, 3/4 inch long.

4. Unless indicated as fixed, or if galvanized, fasten with galvanized clips using welding studs unless otherwise approved. Install per manufacturer's printed instructions.

5. All grating shall be removable unless otherwise indicated.


81799_8320_055013 055013-15

K. Stud Shear Connectors: The requirements for field-installed stud shear connectors shall be the same as specified for shop-installed connectors.

L. Concrete Anchors: 1. Install anchors to conform to manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. The hole tolerances, drill bits, and anchor installation torque shall be as per

manufacturer's printed recommendations.

3.03 FIELD-PROTECTIVE COATINGS: A. Surface Preparation: If grease or oils are present, SP1 - Solvent Cleaning must precede any

other method specified. Prepare all surfaces by SSPC-SP11 and 1-mil profile depth. B. Clean all shop-coated surfaces damaged from rust and mill scale, welding, and abrasion. C. Field-Spotting Coat:

1. Apply to all unpainted, damaged, or cleaned parts of the steel furnished under this Contract including unpainted portions of field-welded and bolted connections.

2. For ferrous metal surfaces with alkyd primer, apply same type of primer as used in the shop and at same mil thickness.

3. For nongalvanized surfaces with inorganic zinc-rich primer, apply epoxy-organic, zinc-rich primer at 3-mil dry-film thickness. a. Ameron - Amercoat 68HS. b. Carboline - Carbozinc 859. c. ICI Devoe - Catha-Coat 303H. d. International - Interzinc 52HS. e. Tnemec - Tnemezinc 90-97.

4. For Repair of Galvanized Surfaces: a. Repair areas in accordance with ASTM A780, Method A2 - Repair using zinc-rich

paints. b. Apply organic zinc-rich primer containing a minimum of 93% zinc in dry film by

weight. Apply in multiple coats (allowing proper recoat time) to achieve 8 mils dry film thickness. Color shall approximately match color of galvanizing. (1) Crown North American Professional Products Co. Inc. - Cold galvanizing

compound. (2) Sentry Chemical Company - Galvonic. (3) Subox, Division of Carboline - Galvanox Type II. (4) ZRC Products Co. - Cold Galvanizing Compound.


81799_8320_099000 099000-1

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 099000 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes coating of exterior and interior surfaces throughout the Project and

which are listed in PART 2, with systems specified on "coating system" sheets at the end of this Section.

B. Coating systems include surface preparation, prime coat (first coat), finish coats (second and third coats), inspection, cleaning, and touch-up of surfaces and equipment. Shop preparation, prime coat, and finish coats to be shop-applied, may be specified elsewhere or referenced to this Section so that a complete system is specified and coordinated. 1. Where surface preparation and first (prime) coat are specified in other Sections to be

shop-applied, such as for structural steel, hollow metal doors or equipment, only the touch-up and finish coats are a part of field painting. Surface preparation is the required degree of preparation prior to application of first (prime) coat regardless if done in shop or field.

2. If materials are provided without shop primer such as miscellaneous steel or sheet metal, then surface preparation, first, second, and third coats are a part of field painting.

3. Concealed surfaces are generally not required to have finish-coats unless otherwise specified, but prime coat should be applied and touched up prior to concealment.

4. Where Equipment and Materials are provided with shop-applied finished coating system, only touch-up is a part of field painting.

5. Refer to applicable Sections to determine whether surface preparation and first coat, or complete coating system, is to be shop-applied.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Shop Painting and Coatings: All applicable Divisions. 2. Factory Prefinished Items: All applicable Divisions.

D. Colors: 1. Color of finish coatings shall match accepted color Samples. 2. When second and finish coats of a system are of same type, tint or use an alternate color

on second coat to enable visual coverage inspection of the third coat. When first and second coats only are specified and are of same or different types, tint or use an alternate color on first coat to enable visual coverage inspection of the second coat.


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. b. Z53.1 - Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D2092 – Guide for Treatment of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for

Painting. b. D4258 - Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. c. D4259 - Abrading Concrete. d. D4260 - Acid Etching Concrete. e. D4261 - Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating.

3. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications: a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Removes oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds,

and other soluble contaminants.

SECTION 099000 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS: continued

099000-2 81799_8320_099000

b. SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Remove loose material. Not intended to remove adherent mill scale, rust, and paint.

c. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Removes loose material. Not intended to remove all scale or rust.

d. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removes all scale, rust, foreign matter. Leaves surface gray-white uniform metallic color.

e. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Two-thirds of every nine square inches free of all visible residues; remainder only light discoloration.

f. SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removes only loose material, remaining surface tight and abraded to give anchor pattern.

g. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning: At least 95% of every nine square inches shall be free of all visible residues.

h. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. i. SP12 – Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by

High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating. j. SP13 – Surface Preparation of Concrete.

4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): a. 61 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects.


1. Schedule of products and paint systems to be used. Schedule shall include the following information: a. Surfaces for system to be applied. b. Surface preparation method and degree of cleanliness. c. Product manufacturer, name, and number. d. Method of application. e. Dry film mil thickness per coat of coating to be applied.

2. Technical and material safety data sheets. 3. Certification(s) by coating manufacturer(s) that all coatings are suitable for service

intended as stated on each coating system sheet. If manufacturer has an equivalent product as that specified, and it is suitable for the intended purpose, Contractor shall submit the recommended product for approval at no increase in cost, and state reasons for substitution.

4. Contractor shall certify in writing to the Engineer/Architect that applicators have previously applied all the systems in this Specification and have the ability and equipment to prepare the surfaces and apply the coatings correctly.

C. Submittals for industrial maintenance coatings shall be prepared by, or have assistance in preparation of, a corrosion engineer or industrial coatings technical representative of the coating manufacturer.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Certification: Coating work shall be performed by an SSPC certified contractor having a

minimum of Category QP 1 certification for work without hazardous paint removal, and Category QP 2 certification for work involving hazardous paint removal.

B. Include on label of container: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name, and number. 2. Type of paint and generic name. 3. Color name and number.


81799_8320_099000 099000-3

4. Storage and temperature limits. 5. Mixing and application instructions, including requirements for precautions which must

be taken. 6. Drying, recoat, or curing time.

C. Sampling of Materials: 1. All materials to be used will be subject to testing for compliance with Specifications. 2. Owner will provide testing.

D. Prepainting Conference: 1. Before Project field painting starts, representatives for the Owner, Contractor, coating

applicator, and coating manufacturer's technical representative shall meet with Engineer/Architect.

2. Agenda for the meeting will include details of surface preparations and coating systems to ensure understanding and agreement by all parties for compliance.

E. A coating report shall be completed daily by Contractor at each phase of the coating system starting with surface preparation. These shall be submitted on the form attached at end of this Section.

F. In the event a problem occurs with coating system, surface preparation, or application, Contractor shall require coating applicator and coating manufacturer's technical representative to promptly investigate the problem and submit results to Engineer/Architect.

G. Specified VOC shall mean unthinned maximum VOC certified by manufacturer. VOC content as a result of thinning shall not exceed that allowed by federal or local environmental regulations.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Delivery of Materials:

1. Deliver in sealed containers with labels and information legible and intact. Containers shall also have correct labels with required information.

2. Allow sufficient time for testing if required. B. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable materials on Project Site. 2. Provide separate area and suitable containers for storage of coatings and related coating

equipment. 3. Dispose of used or leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, and rollers in accordance

with applicable regulations.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection, provide coating

materials that conform to the restrictions of the U.S. EPA and the local and regional jurisdictions. Notify Engineer/Architect of any coating specified herein that fails to conform to the requirements for the location of the Project or location of application.

B. Lead Content: Use only coatings that are totally lead free except for zinc-rich primers which shall not have a lead content over 0.06% by weight of nonvolatile content.

C. Chromate Content: Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium chromate. D. Asbestos Content: Materials shall not contain asbestos. E. Mercury Content: Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. This Project contains some structures of a height in which drifting coatings, if spray-applied,

could contaminate adjacent structures or building surfaces. All containment precautions and


099000-4 81799_8320_099000

application methods shall be taken into consideration and implemented to prevent the above from occurring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Proprietary names and product numbers are specified in most systems for material

identification from these manufacturers: 1. Ameron Protective Coatings Systems Group, Ameron Corp. 2. Carboline Company, Inc. 3. Ceilcote USA, Inc. 4. Devoe Coating Company, Division of ICI. 5. ITW Devcon Futura Coatings, Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings. 7. Keeler & Long, Inc., Division of PPG Industries, Inc. 8. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Industries Inc. 9. Sherwin-Williams. 10. Tnemec Company, Inc. 11. Equivalent coatings (on approval by Engineer/Architect) are acceptable from the

following alternate companies: a. E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc. b. Benjamin Moore Company. c. Coronado Paint Company. d. Rust-Oleum. e. Sigma Coatings USA B.V. f. U.S. Coatings, Inc. g. Kwal-Howells, Inc.

2.02 GENERAL: A. Materials furnished for each coating system must be compatible to the substrate. B. When unprimed surfaces are to be coated, entire coating system shall be by the same coating

manufacturer to assure compatibility of coatings. C. When shop-painted surfaces are to be coated, ascertain whether finish materials will be

compatible with shop coating. Inform Engineer/Architect of any unsuitable substrate or coating conditions.

2.03 COATING SYSTEMS: A. Specified on the "Protective Coating System" sheets at the end of this Section.

2.04 SURFACES TO BE COATED: A. System C-1:

1. Exterior surface of all carbon steel piping. See spec SECTION 485990 – System Requirements for pipe paint colors.

2.05 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED: A. Galvanized steel unless specifically specified otherwise. B. Stainless steel piping and equipment. C. Finish coats are not required on components which are insulated.


81799_8320_099000 099000-5

2.06 COLOR CODING OF PIPING AND PHYSICAL HAZARDS: A. Color Coding of Piping: Exterior and interior by color coding entire pipe.

1. General: a. Coat piping with solid colors as specified for entire length of pipe in exposed

finished and unfinished areas. Exclude areas in pipe chases and furred areas. b. Coat all other piping in colors matching adjacent surfaces. If adjacent area is

unfinished, paint in color determined by Engineer/Architect. c. Identify piping with legend and arrows per Appendix 485990. Apply after

completion of finish coating. 2. Color Scheme per Appendix 485990. 3. Location of Legends and Arrows:

a. Place on piping near connections to Equipment, adjacent to valves or fittings, on both sides of walls penetrated, and at intervals not to exceed 50 feet (15 meters).

b. Place arrows adjacent to or below legends depending upon visibility. Place arrows in direction of flow. For dual-flow piping, indicate both directions.

c. Locate legends to be visible from normal line of vision above floor level. Legend locations subject to approval of Engineer/Architect.

4. Letter Size: a. Block-style letters, all capitals, conforming to ANSI A13.1 and as follows:

Outside Diameter of Minimum Size of Letters Pipe or Covering and Arrows Less than 3/4" (19mm) Approved metal tag or band 3/4" to 1-1/4" (19mm to 32mm) 1/2" (13mm) 1-1/2" to 2" (38mm to 50mm) 3/4" (19mm) 2-1/2" to 6" (64mm to 150mm) 1-1/4" (32mm) 8" to 10" (200mm to 250mm) 2-1/2" (64mm) Over 10" (250mm) 3-1/2" (89mm)

B. Color Coding Physical Hazards: Exterior and interior. 1. General:

a. Paint areas indicated to identify physical hazard areas as required by ANSI Z53.1. b. All colors shall conform to Federal Safety Color Code requirements.

2. Color Coding:

Area or Item Color Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus, Danger or Stop Red Caution - Moving Hazards Orange Caution - Stationary Hazards Yellow or Yellow and Black Stripes Safety Areas and First Aid Equipment Green Housekeeping and Traffic Area Designations White and Black Stripes

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Prepare surfaces for each coating system conforming to SSPC or ASTM surface preparation

specifications listed.


099000-6 81799_8320_099000

1. If grease or oils are present, SSPC-SP1 shall precede any other method specified for metal substrates.

2. Remove surface irregularities such as weld spatter, burrs, or sharp edges prior to specified surface preparation.

B. Depth of profile will be as specified or as recommended by the manufacturer for each system, but in no instance shall it exceed one-third of the total dry film thickness of complete system.

C. Prepare only those areas which will receive the first coat of the system on the same day. 1. On steel substrates, apply coating before rust bloom forms.

D. For new galvanized steel to be coated, if absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D2092, Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.

3.02 APPLICATION: A. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. B. Use properly designed brushes, rollers, and spray equipment for all applications. C. On unprimed surfaces apply first coat of the system the same day as surface preparation. D. Dry film thickness of each system shall meet the minimum specified. Maximum dry film

thickness shall not exceed the minimum more than 20% or coating manufacturer's requirements if less. Where a dry film thickness range is specified, the range shall not be less than or exceeded.

E. Shop and field painting shall remain 3 inches (75mm) away from unprepared surface of any substrate such as areas to be welded or bolted.

F. Environmental Conditions: 1. Atmospheric temperature must be 50oF (10oC) or higher during application, unless

otherwise approved by coating manufacturer. Do not apply coatings when inclement weather or freezing temperature may occur within coating recoat cure times.

2. Wind velocities for exterior applications shall be at a minimum to prevent overspray or fallout and not greater than coating manufacturer's limits.

3. Relative humidity must be less than 85%. The ambient temperature and the temperature of the surface to be painted must be at least 5oF (2.8oC) above the dew point.

4. Provide adequate ventilation in all areas of application to ensure that at no time does the content of air exceed the Threshold Limit Value given on the manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for the specific coatings being applied.

G. Recoat Time: In the event a coating, such as an epoxy, has exceeded its recoat time limit, prepare the applied coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Protection: 1. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted. Remove protective materials when

appropriate. 2. Mask, remove, or otherwise protect finish hardware, machined surfaces, grilles, lighting

fixtures, and prefinished units as necessary. 3. Provide cover or shields to prevent surface preparation media and coatings from entering

orifices in electrical or mechanical Equipment. Where ventilation systems must be kept in operation at time of surface preparation, take precautions to shield intakes and exhausts to prevent the materials from entering system or being dispersed.

4. Provide signs to indicate fresh paint areas. 5. Provide daily cleanup of both storage and working areas and removal of all paint refuse,

trash, rags, and thinners. Dispose of leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, and rollers which cannot be reused in accordance with applicable regulations.

6. Do not remove or paint over Equipment data plates, code stamps on piping, or UL fire-rating labels.


81799_8320_099000 099000-7

3.03 INSPECTION: A. Contractor shall provide and use a wet film gauges to check each application approximately

every 15 minutes in order to immediately correct film thickness under or over that specified. B. Contractor shall provide and use a dry film gauge to check each coat mil (mm) thickness when

dry, and the total system mil (mm) thickness when completed. C. Use holiday or pinhole detector on systems over metal substrates to detect and correct voids

when indicated on system sheet. D. Furnish a sling psychrometer and perform periodic checks on both relative humidity and

temperature limits. E. Check air temperature and temperature of the substrate at regular intervals to be certain surface

is 5oF (2.8oC) or more above the dew point.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRS: A. Remove spilled, dripped, or splattered paint from surfaces. B. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to original condition. This includes surface preparation

and application of coatings specified.


81799_8320_099000 CR 099000 CR-1

COATING REPORT Contract Name: _________________________ Contract No.: ____________________________

Coating Contractor: ______________________ Foreman: _______________________________

Unit or Surface Identification: _______________________________________________________

Unit or Surface Location: Exterior: ____________________, Interior: _____________________

Surface Preparation:

Date _________________; Air Temp ______________oF; Relative Humidity ______________%

Method of Surface Preparation: ______________________________________________________

Profile achieved _________________________ mils (if applicable).

Touch-Up:

Date ____________; Time ____________; Air Temp _________oF; Surface Temp _________oF

Relative Humidity _________________________%; Dew Point _________________________oF

Coating Used _________________________________; Dry Film Obtained ______________mils.

First Coat:



Coating Used _________________________________; Dry Time Before Recoat __________ hrs.

Dry Film Obtained __________________ mils.

Second Coat:



Coating Used _________________________________; Dry Time Before Recoat __________ hrs.

Dry Film Obtained __________________ mils.

Third Coat:



Coating Used _________________________________; Dry Film Obtained ______________mils.

PCSC1 0107

Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company Engineers – Architects – Consultants

Kansas City, Missouri

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEM

System: C-1

SERVICE: Steel & Iron: Surface Temperature to 350oF (177oC) Continuous, 400oF (204oC) Intermittent

Surface Preparation: Shop or Field First Coat: SSPC-SP10 and profile depth 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). Field Touch-Up (of Shop-applied first coat): SSPC-SP6 and profile depth

1.0 mil (0.025 mm) minimum. First Coat: Silicone-alkyd, acrylic, or diffuse aluminum. Aluminum or grey color. Apply at 1.0 to 2.0 mils (0.025 to 0.051 mm) dry film thickness. Second Coat: Same as first coat. System Total: Minimum 2.0 to 3.0 mils (0.051 to 0.076 mm) dry film thickness. Volatile Organic Content: Maximum 5.1 lb/gal (600 g/L).

COATING MANUFACTURER

PRODUCT DESIGNATION

Ameron Carboline ICI Devoe International Keeler & Long Pittsburgh Paints Sherwin-Williams

FIRST COAT TOUCH UP SECOND COAT

Amercoat 874 HS Same as first coat Same as first coat

Thermaline 4900R Same as first coat Same as first coat

HT-4 Same as first coat Same as first coat

Intertherm 875 Same as first coat Same as first coat

Silicone Acrylic Same as first coat Same as first coat KLC7920

Silicone Acrylic Same as first coat Silicone Acrylic 97-710 Series UC46654 Silver Brite HD Same as first coat Same as first coat Rust Res Aluminum B59S2

81799_8320_210000 210000-1

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 210000 - FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the fire protection system, Equipment, devices, and piping.

1. Fire hose cabinets. 2. Standpipe system. 3. Wet pipe sprinkler system.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Summary of Work: SECTION 011100. 2. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: SECTION 210500. 3. Fire Suppression Piping: SECTION 211000. 4. Fire Detection & Gas Monitor Systems: SECTION 283100.

C. All Fire Department connections shall match local fire department threading standards.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicable Standards:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 13 - Sprinkler Systems. b. 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems. c. 24 - Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances.

2. Underwriters' Laboratory (UL): a. List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials. b. 262 - Gate Valves for Fire Protection Service.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. All Equipment, devices, and accessories shall be listed in Underwriters' Laboratories,

Inc., "List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials," or approved "Equipment for Industrial Fire Protection" as published by the Factory Mutual Fire Research.

C. Qualifications of Contractor: 1. The Work performed under this Section shall be done only by a qualified fire protection

contractor whose workmen are experienced and regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems.

2. Contractor shall ensure fire protection contractor employs sprinkler designers capable of preparing system layouts (and hydraulically calculated design).

3. Contractor shall submit in writing satisfactory evidence of qualifications and a minimum of three years continuous prior experience in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Fire Hose Cabinets. 2. Automatic Sprinklers. 3. Gate Valves. 4. Alarm Check Valve. 5. Check Valve.

SECTION 210000 – FIRE PROTECTION: continued

210000-2 81799_8320_210000

6. Fire Department Connection. C. When any Equipment or Material is specified to comply with applicable standards, codes, or

laws, manufacturer's Submittal must clearly state such compliance. D. Working plans conforming to Paragraph 1-9 of NFPA 13.

1. Submit to Engineer prior to beginning work. 2. Submit to Engineer only after and with the clearly marked approval of the authority

having jurisdiction. E. Plans and Specifications conforming to Paragraph 1-10 of NFPA 14.

1. Submit to Engineer prior to beginning work. 2. Submit calculations to Engineer prior to beginning work.

F. Submit "as-constructed" drawings and calculations to Engineer at completion of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE HOSE CABINETS: A. Surface-mounted cabinet sized to accommodate 100 feet of 1-1/2-inch lined hose. B. All steel assembly. C. Door shall be full metal panel with lever handle and cam latch attached with a continuous

hinge. D. Door shall have a 1/3 top horizontal latch side vertical panel of 1/8-inch clear acrylic, a lever

handle with cam latch, and be attached with a continuous hinge. E. Cabinet shall be complete with valve, rack, hose, couplings and nozzle.

1. 1-1/2-inch angle valve with polished cast brass body and solid cast aluminum wheel handle and rack nipple.

2. 1-1/2-inch pin rack, semiautomatic operation, complete with machined brass nipple and cast brass expansion ring couplings.

3. 100 feet of 1-1/2-inch UL listed hose, synthetic jacket, single-ply extruded lining, impervious to mildew, ozone resistant, 300 psi test pressure.

4. 1-1/2-inch machined brass combination fog, straight stream and shut-off nozzle. F. Finish shall be standard of the manufacturer. Submit colors available to Engineer for selection.

2.02 STANDPIPE SYSTEM: A. Conform to NFPA 14 Class II standpipe system. B. Fire hose cabinets shall be as specified in FIRE HOSE CABINETS, this Section. C. Piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 14 and SECTION 211000.

2.03 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM: A. Conform to NFPA 13 occupancy classification as indicated. B. System shall be hydraulically designed by the Contractor. C. System shall be designed by the pipe schedule method by the Contractor. D. System layout shall be as indicated. Drawings show general arrangement diagrammatically.

Contractor shall perform detailed design and routing as conditions dictate. E. System Riser(s) shall be as indicated and where located on the drawings.

1. The main riser control valve shall be post indicator gate valve. 2. Furnish alarm check valve with standard trimmings as a minimum, including two

pressure gauges, one above and one below the seat; a water motor alarm and water flow switch with two contacts, one normally open and one normally closed; alarm shall have a self-draining retard chamber and a properly sized main drain valve.

F. Automatic sprinklers shall be as indicated on the drawings temperature rated.


81799_8320_210000 210000-3

1. Orifice size shall be 1/2-inch minimum. 2. Sprinklers shall be upright where piping is exposed. 3. Sprinklers in finished areas shall be flush pendent type.

G. Piping, fittings, hangers, and related items shall conform to NFPA 13 and SECTION 211000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DESIGN: A. Review and become familiar with the Contract Drawings. B. Prior to start of work, determine that design does not interfere with other work and conforms to

the applicable NFPA standards. 1. If any interferences or noncompliance with NFPA is found, it shall be brought to the

attention of Engineer prior to start of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General:

1. Deliver all Equipment, devices, piping, valves, and related items to the Site in a clean and protected manner.

2. Maintain end seals of pipe, valves, and flange covers in place, removing only as necessary for cleaning, fabrication, erection, or inspection.

3. Exercise care in the handling and storage of all Materials and piping so that contamination by grease, dirt, or injurious foreign matter shall not occur.

4. Cut pipe accurately to measurements to suit field conditions. a. Approved pipe cutters or other methods approved by Engineer shall be used, and all

cuts shall be reamed to remove burrs. b. Any objectionable defects shall be removed by machining, grinding, or chipping.

B. Fire Hose Cabinets. 1. Locate as indicated. 2. Install in accordance with NFPA 14.

C. Standpipe System. 1. Installation, materials, joining of pipe, supports, and related items shall be in accordance

with NFPA 14. 2. Clean the inside of all pipe and fittings free of foreign matter prior to erection, and have

the inside of the pipe and fittings blown out with air furnished by Contractor. D. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System:

1. Installation, materials, joining of pipe, supports, etc. shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.

2. Clean the inside of all pipe free of foreign matter prior to erection and the inside of the pipe and fittings blown out with air furnished by the Contractor.

3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING: A. Standpipe System:

1. Thoroughly flush any underground piping in accordance with NFPA 24. 2. Hydrostatically test the entire standpipe system in accordance with NFPA 14.

a. Contractor shall provide Engineer written notice of testing at least 72 hours prior to tests.

b. Engineer will witness all testing and, if tests are successful, countersign any Test Certificates.


210000-4 81799_8320_210000

c. Make any necessary repairs and repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained. B. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System:

1. Thoroughly flush any underground piping in accordance with NFPA 24. 2. Hydrostatically test the entire wet pipe sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13.

a. Provide Engineer written notice of testing at least 72 hours prior to tests. b. Engineer will witness all testing and, if tests are successful, countersign any Test

Certificates. c. Make any necessary repairs and repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.


81799_8320_210500 210500-1

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Supports and anchorages.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Standards (latest edition):

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. b. B32 - Solder Metal. c. B813 - Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Applications of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube. d. B828 - Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube and Fittings. e. C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink).

2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inch through 48 Inch (76 mm through

1219 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 3. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. A5.8 - Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. b. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. c. Brazing Handbook.

4. ASME International (ASME): a. B1.20.1 - Pipe threads, General Purpose (Inch). b. B16.21 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. c. B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series. d. B31 Series: Code for Pressure Piping. e. 1998 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications." 5. Copper Development Association Inc.

a. Copper Tube Handbook. 1995.

1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION: continued

210500-2 81799_8320_210500

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following and items in other DIVISION 21 Sections as required in

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS. B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Escutcheons.

C. Welding certificates.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: A. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with SECTION 017800 -

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1. B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series. 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

D. Electronic Equipment Compliance: 1. Contractor warrants that all equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, or

firmware provided shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and sequencing). This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the equipment, device, item, system, software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without reference to a manufacturer's name, make, or model number.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.08 COORDINATION:


81799_8320_210500 210500-3

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Provide access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following

requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS: A. Refer to individual DIVISION 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and

joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS: A. Refer to individual DIVISION 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed

below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness

unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F493.

2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS: A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between pipe and sleeve.


210500-4 81799_8320_210500

1. Manufacturers: a. Metraflex Co.

2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.05 SLEEVES: A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain

ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.06 ESCUTCHEONS: A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely

fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

2.07 GROUT: A. Description: ASTM C1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS: A. Install piping according to the following requirements and DIVISION 21 Sections specifying

piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.


81799_8320_210500 210500-5

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. b. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet set screw or spring clips. M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and

roof slabs. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,

and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. (1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required

for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

S. Verify final Equipment locations for roughing-in. T. Refer to Equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.


210500-6 81799_8320_210500

3.02 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B2.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code – Section

IX, using qualified processes and welding operators. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.03 PAINTING: A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in DIVISION 9. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.

3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES: A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.05 GROUTING: A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other

equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout.


81799_8320_210548 210548-1

SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Summary of Work: SECTION 011100. 2. Fire Protection: SECTION 210000. 3. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: SECTION 210500. 4. Fire Suppression Piping: SECTION 211000.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Standards (latest edition):

1. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E488 - Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.

3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): a. 29 CFR - Labor, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration,

Department of Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards," Subpart A - "General," Section 1910.7 "Definition and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory." 2003.

4. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (MSS): a. SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection,

and Application. 5. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA):

a. Metal Framing Standards Publication. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 7. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (SEI/ASCE):

a. 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Refer to SECTION 011100 for Seismic loads and Site Class as Defined in the IBC.

1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK

RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION. B. Product Data: For the following:

SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: continued

210548-2 81799_8320_210548

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC and NFPA 13 unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified Fire Protection Professional Engineer registered in the state of Kansas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


81799_8320_210548 210548-3

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to AKDPS. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

2.02 FACTORY FINISHES: A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of

hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.


210548-4 81799_8320_210548

3.03 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA 13. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

B. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. C. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component. D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. E. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections

or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in SECTION 211000 – FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING for piping flexible connections.


81799_8320_211000 211000-1

SECTION 211000 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the buildings:

1. Automatic wet-type, Class II standpipe systems. 2. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 3. Combined dry-pipe and preaction sprinkler systems. 4. Valves – listed and non-listed. 5. Fittings. 6. Hose stations. 7. Monitors. 8. Flexible connectors.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Fire Protection: SECTION 210000 2. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: SECTION 210500 3. Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment: SECTION

210548 4. Fire Detection & Gas Monitor Systems: SECTION 283100.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Standards (Latest Edition):

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A53/A53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless. b. A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate

and High Temperature Service. c. A536 - Ductile Iron Castings. d. A733 - Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Nipples. e. A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless

Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. f. A865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or

Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints. g. B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. h. B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures: Section 9,

Earthquake Loads. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. b. C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. through 48 In. (75 mm through

1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. c. C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

SECTION 211000 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING: continued

211000-2 81799_8320_211000

e. C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 In. through 24 In. (75 mm through 610 mm) and 54 In. through 64 In. (1,400 mm through 1,600 mm), for Water Service.

f. C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 4. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. A5.8 - Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 5. ASME International (ASME):

a. B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). b. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. c. B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. d. B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. e. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. f. B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. g. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. h. B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. i. B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. j. B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. k. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications." 6. FM Global:

a. Fire Protection Approval Guide. 7. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSSSP):

a. 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. b. 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder-Joint, Grooved and Flared

Ends. c. 123 - Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use with Copper Water

Tube. 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. b. 14 - Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems. c. 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. d. 230 - Fire Protection of Storage. e. 291 - Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants. f. 1961 - Standard on Fire Hose. g. 1963 - Standard for Fire Hose Connections.

10. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 45 - Portable Electric Tools. b. 47 - Semiautomatic Fire Hose Storage Devices. c. 193 -Alarm Valves for Fire-Protection Service. d. 199 - Automatic Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service. e. 213 - Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire Protection Service. f. 219 - Lined Fire Hose for Interior Standpipes. g. 260 - Dry Pipe and Deluge Valves for Fire-Protection Service.


81799_8320_211000 211000-3

h. 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service. i. 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service. j. 346 - Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. k. 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service. l. 401 - Portable Spray Hose Nozzles for Fire-Protection Service. m. 405 - Fire Department Connections. n. 464 - Audible Signal Appliances. o. 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. p. 486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors. q. 668 - Hose Valves for Fire Protection Service. r. 753 - Alarm Accessories for Automatic Water-Supply Control Valves for Fire

Protection Service. s. 789 - Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service. t. 1091 - Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service. u. 1468 - Direct Acting Pressure Reducing and Pressure Restricting Valves. v. 1474 - Adjustable Drop Nipples for Sprinkler Systems. w. 1486 - Quick Opening Devices for Dry Pipe Valves for Fire-Protection Service. x. 1626 - Residential Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service. y. 1726 - Automatic Drain Valves for Standpipe Systems. z. 1767 - Early-Suppression Fast-Response Sprinklers. aa. 1821 - Thermoplastic Sprinkler Pipe and Fittings for Fire Protection Service. ab. Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. B. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the building.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS: A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Fire-suppression system with both standpipe and

sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system is supplied from a standpipe system. B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose stations.

Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.

C. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.

D. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.

E. Preaction Sprinkler System: Double-Interlocked Electric / Pneumatic Release type. Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing air. Actuation of fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers opens deluge valve, permitting water to flow into piping and to discharge from sprinklers that have opened.


211000-4 81799_8320_211000

F. Deluge Sprinkler System: Open sprinklers are attached to piping connected to water supply through deluge valve. Fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers opens valve. Water flows into piping system and discharges from attached sprinklers when valve opens.

G. Combined Dry-Pipe and Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers actuates tripping devices that open dry-pipe valve without loss of air pressure and actuates fire alarm. Water discharges from sprinklers that have opened.

H. All fire-suppression systems shall be monitored and controlled from the fire alarm control panel (FACP) specified in SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION & GAS MONITOR SYSTEMS. Separate, stand-alone control cabinets for fire suppression systems shall not be acceptable.

1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. Design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for fire protection system

specified. Design system in accordance with criteria on Drawings. B. Maximum velocity in any sprinkler pipe shall be 20 feet per second.

1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit each item in this Article in accordance with DIVISION 1. B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialty fittings.

2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints. 3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty

valves and trim. 4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,

finish, and other pertinent data. 5. Hose connections, including size, type, and finish. 6. Hose stations, including size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and length of fire

hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.

7. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.

8. Alarm devices, including electrical data. C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. D. Fire-hydrant flow test report. E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that

have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable.

F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

G. Welding certificates. H. Field quality-control test reports.


81799_8320_211000 211000-5

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer. B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX. C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and

testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 13R. 3. NFPA 14. 4. NFPA 24. 5. NFPA 230.

1.08 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,

including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space

for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: specified herein and subject to compliance with requirements and Owner’s

approval.

2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135, or

ASTM A795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or field-formed threaded ends. 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.


211000-6 81799_8320_211000

4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized where indicated. Include ends matching joining method.

5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A865, hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated. B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795 hot-

dip galvanized-steel pipe. 1. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11. 2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

C. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795, hot-dip galvanized and with factory- or field-formed, square-cut. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:

a. Manufacturers: (1) Central Sprinkler Corp. (2) Ductilic, Inc. (3) National Fittings, Inc. (4) Victaulic Co. of America.

b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD.

c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K (ASTM B88M, Type A), water tube, annealed temper;

with plain ends. 1. Copper fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,

solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.

B. Plain-End, Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,

solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.

2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS: A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping

system. B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum

working pressure at 180oF (82oC). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.


81799_8320_211000 211000-7

C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include CR or phenolic

gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products and Systems, Inc. b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining and threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225oF (107oC). 1. Manufacturers:

a. Lochinvar Corp. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with

combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 225oF (107oC). 1. Manufacturers:

a. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS: A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 175-psig (1200-kPa)

minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged. 3. Option for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-pipe

couplings. B. Manufacturers:

1. US Hose Corporation 2. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 3. Mercer Rubber Co. 4. Metraflex, Inc.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

2.06 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS: A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa)

minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system.

B. Outlet Specialty Fittings: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Ductilic, Inc. c. National Fittings, Inc.


211000-8 81799_8320_211000

d. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. e. Victaulic Co. of America.

2. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.

C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Viking Corp. c. Victaulic Co. of America.

D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and threaded outlet for sprinkler. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. b. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.

1. Manufacturers: a. CECA, LLC. b. Merit.

G. Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

2.07 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES: A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200 kPa) minimum pressure

rating. B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:

1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem, operating nut, and flanged ends.

2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with hand wheel, extension rod, locking device, and cast-iron barrel.

3. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell Fire Protection. b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. c. NIBCO. d. Stockham.

C. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc. 1. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends. 3. Manufacturers:

a. NIBCO. b. Victaulic Co. of America.


81799_8320_211000 211000-9

D. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

a. Manufacturers: (1) Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Manufacturers:

(1) Central Sprinkler Corp. (2) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. (3) Mueller Company. (4) NIBCO. (5) Pratt, Henry Company. (6) Victaulic Co. of America.

E. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Grinnell Fire Protection. e. Hammond Valve. f. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. g. Mueller Company. h. NIBCO. i. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div. j. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. k. Stockham. l. Victaulic Co. of America. m. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

F. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

a. Manufacturers: (1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. (2) Hammond Valve. (3) NIBCO.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends. a. Manufacturers:

(1) Clow Valve Co. (2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. (3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. (4) Hammond Valve. (5) Milwaukee Valve Company. (6) Mueller Company. (7) NIBCO.


211000-10 81799_8320_211000

G. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping. 1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-Vac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.

a. Manufacturers: (1) Milwaukee Valve Company. (2) NIBCO. (3) Victaulic Co. of America.

3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Manufacturers:

(1) Central Sprinkler Corp. (2) Grinnell Fire Protection. (3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. (4) Milwaukee Valve Company. (5) NIBCO. (6) Victaulic Co. of America.

2.08 UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES: A. Ball Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 2-piece copper-alloy body with

chrome-plated brass ball, 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating, blowout-proof stem, and threaded ends.

B. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing type with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.

C. Gate Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends.

D. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.

2.09 SPECIALTY VALVES: A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with

flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Grinnell Fire Protection. c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Star Sprinkler Inc. e. Victaulic Co. of America. f. The Viking Corp.

2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim


81799_8320_211000 211000-11

sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer. a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.

3. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260, differential type; with bronze seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: UL 260, automatic device to maintain correct air

pressure in piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure. (1) Manufacturers:

(a) Central Sprinkler Corp. (b) Grinnell Fire Protection. (c) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (d) Star Sprinkler Inc. (e) The Viking Corp.

4. Deluge Valves: UL 260, cast-iron body, hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type. Include bronze seat with O-ring seals, trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, drip cup assembly piped without stop valves and separate from main drain line, fill-line attachment with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection. a. Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber pressure, globe

valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and connection for actuation device. b. Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and water-pressure

gages; low-air-pressure warning switch; air pressure supervisory switch; air relief valve; air-pressure maintenance device as specified herein; and actuation device. Dry, pilot-line actuator includes cast-iron, operated, diaphragm-type valve with resilient facing plate, resilient diaphragm, and replaceable bronze seat. Valve includes threaded water and air inlets and water outlet. Loss of air pressure on dry, pilot-line side allows pilot-line actuator to open and causes deluge valve to open immediately.

B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum rating. Include female NPS inlet and outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or 90-degree-angle pattern design as indicated. 1. Finish: Rough metal.

a. Manufacturers: (1) Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. (2) Grinnell Fire Protection. (3) Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div. (4) Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check device with threaded ends. 1. Manufacturers:


211000-12 81799_8320_211000

a. Grinnell Fire Protection.

2.10 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS: A. Manual Control Stations: UL listed or FMG approved, hydraulic operation, with union,

NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.11 SPRINKLERS: A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure

rating. B. Manufacturers:

1. Central Sprinkler Corp. 2. Grinnell Fire Protection. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 4. Star Sprinkler Inc. 5. Victaulic Co. of America. 6. The Viking Corp.

C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following: 1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications. 2. UL 1626, for residential applications. 3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.

D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application. 1. Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.

a. Orifice: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8. b. Orifice: 17/32 inch (13.5 mm), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.

E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows: 1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate. 2. Extended-coverage sprinklers. 3. Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature. 4. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon. 5. High-pressure sprinklers. 6. Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection. 7. Open sprinklers. 8. Pendent sprinklers. 9. Pendent, dry-type sprinklers. 10. Quick-response sprinklers. 11. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon. 12. Sidewall sprinklers. 13. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers. 14. Upright sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted. G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.


81799_8320_211000 211000-13

H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

I. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.12 HOSE CONNECTIONS: A. Manufacturers:

1. Central Sprinkler Corp. 2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Grinnell Fire Protection. 4. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated. 5. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 6. Mueller Company. 7. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.

B. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure rating, hose valve for connecting fire hose. Include angle or gate pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65), and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads. 1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type. 2. Finish: Rough metal.

2.13 HOSE STATIONS: A. Manufacturers:

1. American Fire Hose Cabinet Co. 2. Angus Fire, Inc. 3. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 4. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.

B. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass rack nipple, hose rack, and the following: 1. Valve: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure rating, 90-

degree-angle-pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indicated. a. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type.

2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads. 3. Flow-Restricting Devices: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), brass, adjustable for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)

fire hose inlet. 4. Drain Valves: UL 1726. 5. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding, escutcheon for cabinet-mounted

units. C. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) Hose Station: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose valve; hose rack with water-

retention device and pins for folded, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose. 1. Hose-Rack Finish: Red enamel.


211000-14 81799_8320_211000

2. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough metal. 3. Fire Hose: Lined, 100-foot (30-m) length. 4. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream, full fog; for use on

electrical fires. D. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) Hose-Reel Hose Station: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose valve; hose reel with

water-retention device and pins for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose. 1. Hose-Reel Finish: Red enamel. 2. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough metal. 3. Fire Hose: Lined, 100-foot (30-m) length. 4. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to full fog spray or straight stream; full fog for use

on electrical fires.

2.14 MONITORS: A. Manufacturers:

1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 2. Fire-End and Croker Corp. 3. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated. 4. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.

B. Description: Stationary, single-waterway-type monitor for 500-gpm water stream. Include the following features: 1. Waterway: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) minimum, brass or stainless-steel tube. 2. Operation: Lever handle. 3. Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device. 4. Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with locking device. 5. Nozzle: UL 401, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65), brass, adjustable from fog spray to straight stream

to shutoff.

2.15 ALARM DEVICES: A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections. B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator

with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 (DN 20) inlet and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connections. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. c. Grinnell Fire Protection. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. Star Sprinkler Inc. f. Viking Corp.

C. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Potter Electric Signal Company.


81799_8320_211000 211000-15

b. System Sensor. D. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow

detector with 250-psig (1725-kPa) pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. 1. Manufacturers:

a. ADT Security Services, Inc. b. Grinnell Fire Protection. c. ITT McDonnell & Miller. d. Potter Electric Signal Company. e. System Sensor. f. Viking Corp. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Grinnell Fire Protection. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor. d. Viking Corp.

F. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 1. Manufacturers:

a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor.

G. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor.

2.16 PRESSURE GAUGES: A. Manufacturers:

1. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div. 2. Marsh Bellofram.

B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter, dial pressure gauge with range of 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum. 1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.


211000-16 81799_8320_211000

2. Air System Piping: Include retard feature and caption "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION: A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 291. Use results

for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.02 EXAMINATION: A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping

connections before installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction,

framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL: A. Shop-weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and

pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 STANDPIPE SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS: A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Type Standpipe System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working

Pressure: 1. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Threaded-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel

pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. NPS 6 (DN 150): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with square-cut-

grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 3. NPS 8 (DN 200): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with square-cut-

grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. 4. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-

weight steel pipe with square-cut-grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

3.05 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS: A. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working

Pressure: 1. Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller,

including mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.


81799_8320_211000 211000-17

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

B. Standard-Pressure, Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum Working Pressure: 1. Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller,

including mechanical-T and -cross fittings, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Smaller: Threaded-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 75 to DN 150): Grooved-end, galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

3.06 VALVE APPLICATIONS: A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply: 1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where

required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valves are not required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves. b. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves.

3.07 JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe

smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B1.20.1.

B. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. 1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and

grooved-end-pipe couplings. 2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and

rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.

D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping materials. 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges. 3. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.

3.08 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING:


211000-18 81799_8320_211000

A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gauge, and drain at connection to water service.

3.09 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. Refer to SECTION 210000 for basic piping installation. B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate location and

arrangement of piping stub-ups. Designed system must connect to these stub-ups. C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and

reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not

required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints. E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger connections. F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,

sized and located according to NFPA 13. Route discharge to nearby floor or equipment drain. G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes

when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. I. Install drain valves on standpipes. J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.

Drain to floor drain or outside building. K. Install alarm devices in piping systems. L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. 2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.

M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.

N. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

O. Drain dry-type standpipe piping. P. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping. Q. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices. R. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water. S. Install flexible connectors on fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump supply and discharge

connections.

3.10 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,

controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.


81799_8320_211000 211000-19

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water supply sources.

D. Specialty Valves: 1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including

bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection. 2. Dry-Pipe and Preaction Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm

connections, ball drip valves, pressure gauges, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. a. Install Air-Pressure Maintenance Device between building’s Instrument Air piping

and the deluge valve trim. b. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's Instrument Air piping system.

3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge system.

3.11 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS: A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the

following sprinkler types: 1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers

as indicated. 5. Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers. 6. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers

where indicated. 7. Sprinkler Finishes:

a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

3.12 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION: A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling

panels and tiles. B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-

type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.

3.13 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION: A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.


211000-20 81799_8320_211000

C. Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to SECTION 210000 – FIRE PROTECTION for fire hose cabinets.

3.14 HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION: A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction. B. Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise

indicated. C. Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe or substrate. D. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish

matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are specified in SECTION 210000 - FIRE-PROTECTION.

E. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to substrate.

3.15 CONNECTIONS: A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain

or outside building. E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and

accessories. F. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping. G. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in DIVISION 26. H. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm. I. Ground equipment according to DIVISION 26. J. Connect wiring according to DIVISION 26. K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.16 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION: A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.

3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


81799_8320_211000 211000-21

3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 4. Start and run excess-pressure pumps. 5. Start and run air compressors. 6. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter. 7. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance"

Chapter. 8. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 9. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 10. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.18 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

3.19 DEMONSTRATION: A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. END OF SECTION 211000

81799_8320_253005 253005-1

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

SECTION 253005 – INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section applies to the complete field installation of instrumentation and control devices

specified in this Section and required for a complete operational package. In general, work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Furnish, install, and calibrate all instruments, meters, gauges, switches, controllers,

thermometers, indicators, and transmitters as specified. 2. Provide instrumentation as required to properly monitor and control the mechanical

systems supplied in a fully automatic mode. This includes startup, operation, and shutdown.

3. Design, furnish, field install and test all skid mounted instruments required to properly operate the system as specified.

4. Furnish all materials required for complete installation of shipped-loose instrumentation, coordinating the physical arrangement and mechanical connections with equipment and structures also furnished by this Contract.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Design, fabricate, assemble, test and install equipment and materials in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommended procedures and to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI/ASME). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. Factory Mutual (FM). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 5. Instrument, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 9. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. The Measurement, Control & Automation Association (MCAA). 12. Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA). 13. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications:

1. All equipment and materials furnished shall have an acceptable history of satisfactory reliable service in similar use for a period of at least three years at comparable pressure, temperature, voltage and design stress level.

2. Equivalent newly developed equipment with less than three years actual service will be considered from established manufacturers, if it has been adequately tested, meets the requirements of this Contract, and is approved by the Engineer.

SECTION 253005 – INSTRUMENTATION: continued

253005-2 81799_8320_253005

B. Factory Tests: 1. Conduct all standard factory tests and all tests required by the applicable codes and

standards. 2. Conduct laboratory analysis of tubing materials as specified below. 3. Submit certificates of completion of factory tests as compliance submittals.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Submittals required shall include the following:

1. Master device list or bill of material accounting for all instruments, control devices and accessories provided by this Contract. List shall include at least the following data for each device: a. Tag number. b. Description. c. Manufacturer and model number (or part number). d. Corresponding data sheet or specification sheet number.

2. Data or specification sheets for each instrument or device provided by this Contract. These sheets shall be the actual sheets used for ordering and/or fabrication, and shall include the final bidder's own sheets where applicable. Bidder shall provide an index for all data sheets (may be the Instrument List, if approved). Sheets shall include all technical data regarding the devices described, including at least the following: a. Tag number. b. Description. c. Manufacturer. d. Complete model, catalog, or part number, as applicable. e. Scale range (including units of measure) and set point. f. Complete electrical information, including current and voltage ratings, contact

action (SPST, DPDT, etc.), and signal/communication features. g. Complete mechanical, pneumatic, or process interface details. h. Description of accessories or options provided. i. The source and/or destination of the instrument. j. Related P&ID drawing or control logic diagram. k. Physical location. l. Installation detail. m. Remarks. n. Instruction Books.

3. Dimensioned outline drawings for each type of device provided. One drawing may be used for all devices of the same type, but the drawing shall specifically list the tag number of each device to which it applies.

4. Instruction books for installation, operation, calibration and maintenance for each instrument and device.

5. Drawings for each instrument rack provided under this Contract, including at least the following: a. Construction materials and features, bracing, brackets, device mounting methods

and dimensions. b. Mounting locations for all major devices to be mounted on the instrument rack, to

include tubing and piping installed on the instrument rack, shown properly connected to all applicable devices with fittings, valves, etc., as required.


81799_8320_253005 253005-3

c. Listing of each mounted instrumentation and control device by tag number. d. Wiring diagrams which identify terminal numbers in the associated terminal boxes

for field cables. e. Drawings of typical installations will be acceptable provided that the individual

applications are listed. 6. Certified test reports for all tubing materials (except copper) in accordance with ASTM

A450, Section 22(b), including at least the following: a. ASTM specification and grade. b. Chemical analysis. c. Hardness test. d. Tensile properties.

7. Factory calibration certificates for all instruments furnished, unless requirement is waived by the Engineer.

8. Storage requirements for all instrumentation and control devices furnished.

1.05 DEVICE TAGGING: A. Device tags shall be stainless steel minimum 0.040 inch thickness with correct Engineer’s tag

number and servic e description stamped, engraved, or laser etched clearly into the metal. B. Device tags shall be permanently attached with minimum 18 gauge stainless steel wire (not

with string or tape) to the stem or case of each device. C. Inscribed with the tag number as assigned in the Instrument List.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Packing and Shipping:

1. Protect instruments during shipment from moisture and physical abuse which may cause: a. Damage to delicate meter movements, mechanisms, and electronics. b. Corrosion. c. Reduced normal operating life.

2. Protect all finished instrument connections with suitable end covers to prevent entrance of foreign material.

3. Protect instrument threads, stems and handwheels from damage. B. Prior to shipment tag each device furnished under this Contract with the assigned tag number. C. Clearly indicate on each package the list of devices (using the assigned tag numbers) contained

within the package.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: A. All equipment and material shall be suitable for the temperature, pressure, voltage, and design

stress levels to which they will be subjected. B. Instruments will be specified below defining the type, manufacturer, model, materials, features,

operating conditions, options, and accessories for each instrument. Design requirements shall be appropriate for the equipment provided. Specific Engineer approval is required for other manufacturers.

C. Instruments, control devices, and accessories furnished by this Contract shall not contain mercury.


253005-4 81799_8320_253005

D. Ship equipment as completely assembled as possible, consistent with shipping facilities and construction requirements at the Owner's station site. Optimize shop fabricated assemblies to reduce overall costs.

E. Furnish with all necessary auxiliary systems required for a complete overall workable mechanical and electrical system conforming with the intent of these specifications.

F. Furnish complete, coordinating the physical arrangement and electrical connections with equipment and structures also furnished by this Contract.

G. Furnish new equipment of manufacturer's standard design as far as is consistent with the intent of these specifications.

H. Field instruments and devices shall be furnished complete with all materials, accessories, and any special tools or operator interface units required for installation, calibration, and continuing operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

I. All instrumentation and analyzer enclosures shall be supplied with NEMA 4X enclosures unless installed in an electrically classified hazardous area. If installed in electrically classified hazardous area, the enclosure shall meet the requirements of the hazardous area.

J. General Requirements for Instrument Material: 1. Use new, unused, first-quality materials free of defects. 2. Use materials suitable for their application, and for the mechanical and electrical stresses

to which they will be subjected. 3. Furnish as required for complete installation ready for operation.

2.02 TRANSMITTERS: A. General: Unless specifically noted otherwise, transmitters employed to deliver process

information to the Owner’s control system or other remote controlling/recording devices shall satisfy the following: 1. Each transmitter shall be selected and adjusted for the service and operating conditions

required and shall be designed to operate at the maximum conditions expected. 2. Transmitters shall contain a 4-20mA output. 3. Devices shall be designed to operate continuously under the ambient conditions specified. 4. Furnish transmitter mounting brackets suitable for either surface or piping mounting. 5. Furnish any power supply, transformer, rectifier, or other device required to interface

with the control system. 6. Where available as a standard option, provide transmitters with local indication of the

measured parameter in engineering units. DP flow will be calculated within the Owner’s PLC. Local indication for these applications shall be in inches of water. Linearization (or square-rooting) of the flow signal will be performed in the control system, unless the requirement is waived by the Engineer.

7. Provide pressure and differential pressure transmitters with diaphragm seals to protect sensitive components from corrosive process fluids. Diaphragm seal material shall be specifically suited for long-term service in the process environment for which it is provided.

8. Transmitters used for measuring differential pressure shall be furnished with five valve manifolds mounted to be mounted directly on the transmitter. a. Manifold shall be mounted to pipe stand, instrument rack, or other specified rigid

device. b. Transmitter shall be mounted to manifold in such a manner that the transmitter can

be removed for service, without dismounting the manifold.


81799_8320_253005 253005-5

9. Coplanar, integral manifolds are required to be used. Other types of manifolds may be used with Owner and Engineer approval.

B. Gage and absolute pressure transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051T Series In-Line or Engineer approved equal and shall have at least the following specifications: 1. Ultra or Classic performance class as indicated. 2. Stainless steel mounting bracket for either 2 inch pipe or panel mounting. 3. Factory assembled to model 306 integral 2 valve manifold with 316 stainless steel

materials of construction and meeting the requirements of ASME B31.1 power and piping code.

4. Calibration certificate. C. Differential pressure transmitters that are used for measuring differential pressure or flow shall

be Rosemount 3051C Series Coplanar or Engineer approved equal and shall have at least the following specifications: 1. Ultra or Classic performance class as indicated. 2. Factory assembled to Model 305 integral 5 valve manifold with 316 stainless steel

materials of construction and meeting the requirements of ASME B31.1 power and piping code. Furnish manifold with stainless steel mounting bracket and bolts for either 2 inch pipe or panel mounting. In natural gas applications, five-valve natural gas configuration shall be used on the manifold.

3. Calibration certificate. D. Differential pressure level transmitters shall be Rosemount 3051L Series Liquid Level or

Engineer approved equal and shall have at least the following specifications: 1. 316 stainless steel diaphragms are preferred. Other types may be used with Engineer

approval. 2. 316 stainless steel ANSI flanges for process connection and material. 3. Calibration certificate.

E. Radar level transmitters shall be Rosemount 5400 Series or Engineer approved equal and shall have at least the following specifications: 1. Two integral signal relays or intrinsically safe certification for hazardous areas. 2. 2-inch or 4-inch rasied-face flanged process connection. 3. Calibration certificate.

F. Temperature transmitters used for control loops and monitoring shall be Rosemount 3144P Series or Engineer approved equal and shall have at least the following specifications: 1. Dual sensor input. 2. Aluminum field mount housing. 3. Universal “L” mounting bracket for 2 inch pipe mounting - stainless steel bracket and

bolts. 4. Calibration certificate.

2.03 SENSING, MEASURING, AND ANALYZING COMPONENTS: A. Level: In conjunction with the appropriate transmitter as previously specified, provide for

level measurement as follows: 1. Tank Head Type Level Detectors (differential pressure transmitters):

a. Application: May be used for all non-slurry applications. b. Wetted materials of construction shall be in accordance with 2.01 of this Section. c. Install in accordance with Part 3 of this Section and in accordance with the

Instrument Installation Details of this Section. d. Accuracy: Better than 0.1% of span.


253005-6 81799_8320_253005

B. Flow: In conjunction with the appropriate transmitter as previously specified, provide for flow measurement as follows: 1. Differential Pressure Flow Measurement: Appropriate for the application, with wetted

parts materials as specified, and in accordance with the following, as applicable: a. Flow nozzles shall be flanged, with accuracy of ±0.5 percent of flow rate.

Straightening vanes shall be provided if required to achieve the specified accuracy. b. Maximum pressure drop associated with differential pressure technologies shall be

subject to approval.

2.04 PROCESS SWITCHES: A. General:

1. Transmitters with software switches shall be used wherever possible, unless specifically approved otherwise by Engineer.

2. Switch Elements: a. Interrupting Rating: 120Vac, 5 amperes or 125Vdc, 5-amperes unless otherwise

noted or approved. b. Enclosure: NEMA 4X unless otherwise noted. Provide threaded conduit connection,

1/2-inch or 3/4-inch size. c. Mercury-wetted switches are not allowed.

3. All switches shall be DPDT if available based on manufacturer's standard instrument design.

4. To the extent that switch setpoints are known, provide instrument ranges such that the setpoint is between 1/3 and 2/3 of the total adjustment range unless otherwise specified.

5. Switch setpoints shall be field-adjustable. However, the adjustment means shall be enclosed or otherwise made tamper resistant.

6. Wetted materials shall be suitable for the application, and as specified. 7. Switch deadband shall not exceed 5% of the adjustment range.

B. Limit Switches: 1. Type B:

a. Proximity switches. b. Rated for 120 volt, 5 ampere service. c. Manufacturer, Type:

(1) General Equipment and Manufacturing Co., GO Systems 80 Series unless otherwise specified.

2. Limit switch enclosures: Stainless steel, NEMA 4X.

2.05 GAUGE GLASS: A. Tubular, as follows:

1. P648X Glass: 3/4-inch Pyrex red line tubular. 2. Length: As specified to maximum 36 inches per section; use multiple overlapping

sections as specified; allow 1-inch visibility overlap between sections. 3. Gauge Valves: Type 56 offset with 3/4-inch union tank connection, carbon steel W/SS

trim. 4. Guard Rods: Four rods with holders. 5. Drain Valve: 1/2-inch globe-type needle valve, carbon steel W/SS trim.

2.06 PRESSURE GAUGES: A. Gauge Pressure:


81799_8320_253005 253005-7

1. Manufacturers: Ashcroft or approved equal. 2. ASME B40.1 grade 2A, 1 percent accuracy. 3. Select scale range so that normal operating pressure is between 1/3 and 2/3 of full scale. 4. Element:

a. Bourdon tube or bourdon coil (helix). 5. Materials:

a. 316L SS bourdon tube and socket. b. Phenolic case with blow out protection and shatterproof glass face.

6. 4-inch dial size, weatherproof.

2.07 SOLENOID VALVES: A. General:

1. Coils: a. Type: Class H, fungus-proof, rated for ambient temperatures to 66oC (150oF). b. Duty: Rated for continuous energization. c. Voltage: 120Vac, 60 hertz. d. Direct acting solenoid valves are preferred. Use of pilot operated valves must be

approved by the Owner and Engineer. 2. Explosion-proof construction where required by applicable codes or the detailed

specifications. 3. Maintained, screw-type, manual operator. 4. NEMA 4X enclosure or better.

2.08 THERMOCOUPLES: A. Type A Pipe Thermocouples:

1. Type A1 dual-element thermocouples shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: a. Element: Type E No. 18 AWG chromel-constantan wires with compacted ceramic

insulation in 304 stainless steel sheath (other types of thermocouple elements may be used subject to Engineer approval). Spring loaded. Ungrounded junction.

b. Head: Universal type with screwed cover and chain and terminal connector. Provide 304 stainless steel extension nipple as required for head to clear insulation by at least 2 inches.

c. Shall conform to standard limits of error in accordance with ANSI MC96.1-1992. 2. Well: As specified under Thermowells.

B. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs): 1. RTD sensors shall be Rosemount 68 Series with thermowell or Engineer-approved equal.

Note: Immersion length and lead length as required. a. Element: Platinum, 100 ohms at 0oC, 3-wire. b. Sheath: 1/8-inch OD, 316 SS. c. Temperature Range: -180o to 250oC. d. Shall conform to standard limits of error in accordance with ANSI MC96.1-1992. e. Lead Wiring: Fiberglass insulated with flexible SS armored tubing, wires with bare

ends. f. Mounting: Tube fitting.

C. Thermowells: 1. Well type: Tapered.


253005-8 81799_8320_253005

2. Well length: Such that it is inserted sufficiently into the process to provide an accurate measurement. Insertion length for piping shall be such that the end of the thermowell is between 1/3 and 1/2 of the pipe internal diameter.

3. Lagging extension: Provide minimum ¾” wrench flats beyond any insulation. 4. Material: 316SS or as required for corrosive services. 5. Process Connection: NPT unless specified otherwise.

2.09 PRESSURE-SENSING INSTRUMENT ACCESSORIES: A. General: Pressure-sensing instrument accessories are sometimes required to complete the

installation of pressure-sensing instruments. B. Siphon tube: Ashcroft coil pipe type 1098 installed per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Pulsation dampener: Ashcroft type 1106S with stainless steel construction and adjustable

dampening rates. D. Condensate chamber:

1. Vickery-Simms model 4B4-XX, or Engineer approved equal. 2. Size: 4”. 3. Material A106, Grade B carbon steel. 4. Connections:

a. Process: 1” x 3” integral nipple. b. Instrument: ¾”, 9000 lbs. Socket weld.

2.10 TUBING: A. General:

1. Tubing materials shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1, Paragraph 122.3. B. Tubing shall be as follows:

1. Seamless 316H stainless steel tubing ASME SA213, Grade TP316, fully annealed and suitable for bending. Hardness not greater than Rockwell B90 (B80 or less preferred). Tubing to be free of scratches and suitable for bending and flaring. a. 3/8-inch O.D. tube shall have a minimum of .049-inch wall thickness. b. 1/2-inch O.D. tube shall have a minimum of .049-inch wall thickness.

2. Seamless copper tubing ASTM B75 fully annealed and suitable for bending. a. 1/4-inch O.D. tube shall have a minimum of .028-inch wall thickness. b. 3/8-inch O.D. tube shall have a minimum of .035-inch wall thickness. c. 1/2-inch O.D. tube shall have a minimum of .049-inch wall thickness.

3. Tubing size and material shall be as indicated on the Instrument Installation Details. C. Manufacturer:

1. Swagelok

2.11 FLEXIBLE INSTRUMENT TUBING: A. General: Flexible instrument tubing shall be nylon or corrugated hose braided and reinforced,

with permanently attached male pipe thread ends. B. Manufacturer, Type:

1. Swagelok C. Braid: 316 or 321 stainless steel. D. Fittings: 316 stainless steel. E. Length: Nominally 36 inches unless otherwise noted.

2.12 TUBING FITTINGS:


81799_8320_253005 253005-9

A. Tubing fitting material shall be as follows: 1. 316 stainless steel for all stainless tubing installations. 2. Brass for all copper tubing installations.

B. Tubing fitting type shall be as follows: 1. Grip-type flareless for the following installations:

a. The process fluid temperature is less than or equal to 800° F. 2. Threaded or socket weld to grip-type flareless tubing fitting adapters shall be used to

interface piping to tubing systems. 3. Tubing fitting size shall match the tubing size. 4. All tubing fittings provided by this Contract shall be by the same manufacturer (from the

Approved Vendor and Supplier List). C. Manufacturer:

1. Swagelok

2.13 TUBING SUPPORTS: A. Tubing support material shall include structural angles, channels, clips, rods, anchors,

turnbuckles, modular support systems, etc., as required in ANSI/ASME B31.1, Paragraphs 121 and 122.3 for the tubing as specified.

B. Support materials shall be galvanized steel. Provide any insulators or other accessories to protect dissimilar metals from each other and as required by the manufacturer.

C. Vibration: Provide approved vibration isolating materials to prevent tube surface damage due to rubbing on supports or other tubes.

D. Tubing supports shall be designed to allow for thermal expansion. E. Tubing shall be secured to supports using removable tube clips and clamps. F. Tubing support intervals shall not exceed 3 feet or shall be continously supported in tube tray,

as required to protect the tubing from damage.

2.14 INSTRUMENT SHUTOFF VALVES: A. General:

1. Definition: Instrument shutoff valves are located in the process sensing line and air supply lines at or near the instrument, and are used to isolate the instrument for normal maintenance or calibration. Shutoff valves are separate from and in addition to the "root" valve, or primary isolating valve, which is located at the point of connection to the process piping or equipment and is used only for maintenance of the instrument shutoff valve and connecting tubing.

2. Body sizes: Same as connecting tubing or piping. 3. End connections:

a. Tubing systems: Use integral tube fittings (preferred) or use adapter tubing fittings. Fittings shall be as specified above.

b. Piping systems: As required for service. B. Type A1 Instrument Air Supply Shutoff Valves:

1. General: a. Type: Ball valve. b. Body: Bronze, rated 400 psig at 150°F (minimum). c. Packing: Reinforced Teflon. d. Seats: Reinforced Teflon. e. Trim: 316 stainless steel ball and stem. f. Connections: ½” FNPT.


253005-10 81799_8320_253005

2. Manufacturer, Type: a. Apollo, Series 70-100. b. NIBCO, Series 580 and 585. c. Approved equal.

C. Type A2 Instrument Air Signal Shutoff Valves: 1. General:

a. Type: Needle valve. b. Body: Forged brass, rated 3,000-pound (minimum). c. Packing: Teflon. d. Seats: Metal-to-metal. e. Trim: 316 stainless steel, with regulating tip. f. Connections: Size to match tubing. g. Valve Orifice: 0.170-inch (minimum).

2. Manufacturer, Type: a. Parker V4L Series. b. Whitey B-1R Series. c. Approved equal.

D. Type A3 Process Fluid Instrument Shutoff Valves: 1. General:

a. Body: 2500-pound ANSI 316 stainless steel. b. Packing: PTFE. c. Seats: Metal-to-metal. d. Trim: Stainless steel, with free-swiveling ball end stem.

2. Manufacturer, Type: a. Anderson Greenwood & Co., PT7 or M25 series. b. Rosemount 306. c. Approved equal.

2.15 INSTRUMENT MANIFOLD VALVES: A. General:

1. Definition: Instrument manifold valves are located in the process sensing lines at, near, or directly bolted to an instrument, and are used to isolate the instrument for normal maintenance or calibration.

2. Shop or field fabrication of manifold instrument valves using individual instrument valves and tubing or piping is not acceptable.

3. Include all necessary flange bolts and flange seals. 4. Provide 2 inch pipe mounting bracket. 5. Provide metal-to-metal seats. 6. Include plugged test connection on each process sensing line for calibration without

removing manifold instrument valve. B. Manifold Instrument Valves for differential pressure transmitters:

1. General: a. Body: 316 stainless steel. b. Packing: PTFE. c. Trim: Stainless steel.

2. Manufacturer, Type: a. Anderson Greenwood & Co., M4T or IMST (preferred) series. b. Rosemount 305.


81799_8320_253005 253005-11

c. Approved equal. C. Manifold Instrument Valves for gauge or absolute pressure transmitters: Same as Instrument

Shutoff Valve type A3.

2.16 INSTRUMENT BLOWDOWN VALVES: A. General:

1. Definition: Instrument blowdown valves are located on the dirt leg in the process sensing line at or near the instrument, and are used to clear the sensing line of accumulated dirt, scale or other debris.

2. Body sizes: Same as connecting tubing or piping. 3. End Connections:

a. Tubing systems: Use integral tube fittings (preferred) or use adapter tubing fittings. Fittings shall be as specified above.

b. Piping systems: As required for service. B. Type B1 Blowdown Valve for instrument air supply service: Same as Instrument Shutoff

Valve Type A1. C. Type B2 Blowdown Valve for service less than 800 psig and 800 ºF:

1. General: a. Body: 2,500-pound ANSI 316 stainless steel. b. Packing: PTFE. c. Trim: Metal-to-metal seats with stainless-steel stem. d. Connections: Integral grip-type tube fitting or adapter tubing fitting ends sized to

match tubing. 2. Manufacturer, Type:

a. Swagelok, N series.

2.17 BLOWBACK VALVES: A. General:

1. Definition: Blowback valves are located in the process sensing line between the instrument shutoff valve and the root valve. They are 4-way selector ball valves used to clear process sensing line by applying air pressure toward the process connection. At the same time they block the sensing line from the blowback valve to the instrument, and then vent the process sensing line before it is reconnected to the instrument.

2. Valves shall be constructed and connected tubing installed to prevent any high-pressure air from being transmitted to the instrument, either from the air source directly or from a plugged sensing line that fails to clear.

3. General Construction: a. Body: All bar stock. Material specified below. b. Trim: 316 stainless steel with Teflon seats c. Connections: ½ - inch grip-type tube fittings. d. Rotation: 270°. e. Include three-position factory-engraved nameplate. Engravings shall read

“INSTRUMENT-VENT-BLOWBACK.” B. Type D1 Blowback Valve:

1. Body Material: Brass. 2. Manufacturer and type shall be Swagelok Model B-45XV58-2917.

C. Type D2 Blowback Valve: 1. Body Material: 316 stainless steel


253005-12 81799_8320_253005

2. Manufacturer and type shall be Swagelok Model SS-45XVS8-K-2917.

2.18 INSTRUMENT STANDS AND INSTRUMENT RACKS: A. General:

1. Instrument stands and instrument racks are used to provide a mounting means for field installed instruments and their accessories. These accessories may include at least the following: a. Shutoff valves. b. Blowdown valves. c. Blowdown tubing or piping. d. Process sensing tubing. e. Heated instrument enclosure. f. Others devices as indicated or specified on the Instrument Installation Details.

B. Instrument stands and instrument racks: 1. General:

a. The difference between instrument stands and instrument racks is defined below. For the purpose of this specification, the term instrument stand shall be used to represent either an instrument stand or instrument rack.

b. Instrument stands shall be either a single horn for mounting one instrument or dual horn for mounting two instruments.

c. Instrument stands shall be constructed to allow the instrument to be mounted 4’-6” from grade or platform elevation to centerline of the instrument.

d. Dual horn instrument stands shall be constructed to allow a minimum of 18 inches between the center lines of the instruments.

2. Instrument racks shall be used for mounting a minimum of three instruments to a maximum of six instruments. a. Instrument racks shall be constructed to allow the instruments to be mounted 4’-6"

from grade or platform elevation to centerline of instrument. b. Instrument racks shall be constructed to allow a minimum of 18 inches between the

center lines of the instruments. 3. Manufacturer, Type:

a. Cellex Versastand. b. O’Brien Saddlepak. c. Approved equal.

2.19 INSTRUMENT ENCLOSURES:

A. Transmitters installed outdoors shall be equipped with heated instrument enclosures for low temperature operation per the Site Conditions in Section 011100.

2.20 INSTRUMENT AIR ACCESSORIES: A. General: Instrument air accessories are required to complete the installation of instrument air to

air users. Refer to the Instrument Installation Details for their typical use and location. B. Pressure regulating valve (PRV) shall be Fisher 67 CFR self-contained, spring-loaded

diaphragm type combination filter-regulator with integral relief valve, outlet pressure gauge and drain cock.

C. Instrument air filter shall be suitable for oil and liquid removal. Minimum rated air flow at 100 psig shall be 11 scfm. Filtration efficiency shall be 99.99% or greater at .6 microns.


81799_8320_253005 253005-13

1. Manufacturer, Type: a. Balston Type 92 housing with 100-12-BX filter tube. b. Deltech Engineering Model 110, with manual drain valve. c. Approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL: A. Perform all Work necessary to install, connect, tube, pipe, and make instruments and controls

ready for successful operation. B. Provide all required equipment, materials, scaffolding, rigging, and tools. C. Provide all labor, including expert and common, specialized personnel, fitters, electricians,

instrument technicians, and welders and see to attendance of such personnel. D. Perform all welding and fabrication required to complete the piping and tubing to the

instruments as required and specified. E. Install stainless steel instrument tags with engraved tag number as specified. F. Mount, connect, tube, and pipe instruments and control devices in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. G. Instrument installation requirements are indicated on the Instrument Installation Details. H. Coordinate all installation activities involving other contracts with those contractors. Identify

restraints caused by others which affect performance of the Work. Resolve such restraints where possible, and notify Engineer when additional action is required.

3.02 TUBING AND PIPING: A. Fabricate and erect each process sensing line from the root valve to the instrument. B. Fabricate and erect all signal and transmission lines between the transmitting and receiving

devices. C. Tubing and piping arrangements shall be as indicated. Install offsets, fittings, unions, vents,

drains, and supports as required to make a complete installation. Arrangements may deviate from those required if such deviations are required to avoid interferences with other Work or to provide a neat installation, provided that the functional intention is preserved.

D. Install unions or flanges for each instrument or control device to allow convenient removal as follows: 1. Install so lines may be broken for maintenance, valves removed, and equipment

disconnected. 2. Install in lines previously erected without such unions or flanges but, in the opinion of

Engineer, cannot be properly maintained without them. 3. Install flanges with bolt insulator kits or dielectric insulated unions for joining dissimilar

piping materials, such as copper to iron or steel. Install such insulating devices in positions which receive axial loads only, with no bending loads.

E. Support tubing as follows: 1. Support individual copper tubing continuously along the entire length. 2. Support stainless-steel tubing either continuously or from individual supports with

spacing not to exceed the following distances: a. For 1/4-inch O.D. tubing, use 3-foot maximum spacing. b. For 3/8-inch O.D. tubing, use 4-foot maximum spacing. c. For 1/2-inch O.D. tubing, use 5-foot maximum spacing.

3. Supports shall allow for thermal expansion of tubing and equipment.


253005-14 81799_8320_253005

4. Provide approved vibration isolating materials as required to prevent tube surface damage because of rubbing on supports.

F. Fabricate and erect tubing and piping in accordance with the requirements of the Power Piping Code, and in accordance with the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code if under the jurisdiction of that code.

G. Tubing and piping shall be installed in a rectangular form either perpendicular to, or parallel to the building structure, the floor, or the major equipment except in cases required or approved by Engineer.

H. Tubing and piping shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 7'-6" over passageways and walkways except in cases required or approved.

I. Assemble grip-type flareless tube fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Verify fitting pull-up with the manufacturer's gap inspection gauge.

J. Clean and blow out all tubing with compressed air prior to connecting to instruments. K. Verify that the tubing systems are tight and do not leak. Repair any leaks found.

3.03 INSULATION OF TUBING AND PIPING: A. Provide insulation to tubing and piping as indicated on the Instrument Installation Details or as

required to meet Personnel Burn Protection (insulation skin temperature not to exceed 140oF).

3.04 VALVES IN TUBING: A. Install instrument shutoff valve or instrument manifold valve for each device as indicated on

the Process & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) or as recommended by manufacturer. Type of valve shall be as indicated.

B. Install blowdown valves for each remote-mounted device as indicated on the Instrument Installation Details (not required for line-mounted or vacuum service devices). Type and quantity of valves shall be as indicated on the P&IDs.

3.05 INSTRUMENT STANDS AND INSTRUMENT RACKS: A. Install instrument stands where required to support new or replacement field devices. NOTE:

New instrument stands shall be installed such that they conserve floor space, avoid obstructing walkways or equipment access Areas, and/or to improve operation and maintenance if approved.

B. Install instrument stands with mounting plates, floor stands, other instrument supports and mounting brackets as required.

C. Freestanding instrument stands shall be suitably braced and attached to the floor or supporting structure to provide a rigid mount for the instruments. Furnish and install one inch of grout under concrete floor-mounted instrument stands.

D. Instrument stands and other mountings in boiler areas or other platform grating areas shall be attached to structural steel or rigid structures. For instrument stands on platforms, weld baseplates to framing steel. Furnish all anchors, channels, and related items, as may be required for proper support. Do not support instrument stands from grating or handrails.

E. Mounting plates and miscellaneous supports shall be attached to structural steel or rigid structures.

F. Instruments shall be mounted in a manner that assures their protection against physical damage, weather, heat, and vibration.

G. Instruments shall be mounted to provide easy access for calibration and repair or for disconnection, removal, and replacement.


81799_8320_253005 253005-15

H. Mount instrument blowdown valves to the instrument stand with mounting plates, brackets, and clips.

I. Remove and reinstall any instrument mounting as directed by Engineer to avoid interferences, to improve operation or maintenance, or to correct unsuitable mounting conditions.

3.06 TESTING: A. Test all instrumentation to ensure satisfactorily operation. B. Calibration:

1. Calibrate and provide calibration documentation for all instrumentation listed in the Instrument List.

2. Following complete installation, piping, and wiring of the instrument, calibrate instrument using calibration procedures outlined below.

3. Instrument calibration may be witnessed by Engineer, or any other person assigned by Owner. Provide to Owner daily calibration work schedule.

4. Calibration Procedures: a. Calibrate in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Power all transmitters from system power supplies before calibration. c. Calibrate pressure devices as follows:

(1) Apply process input to the device with certified tester. (2) Adjust zero and span. (3) Check readings or output of device at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% of input value.

d. Calibrate temperature devices as follows: (1) Use water bath, oil bath, or furnace as applicable, and certified test

thermometers. (2) Adjust zero and span as applicable.

e. Calibrate level devices as follows: (1) Level transmitters or indicators:

(a) Apply the process input to the device. (b) Adjust zero and span. (c) Check readings or output of device at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% of input

value. f. Calibrate switches as follows:

(1) Apply process input and adjust switch actuation points. (2) Confirm switch make and break with an electrical continuity check. (3) Adjust dead band if applicable. (4) Verify repeatability of switch actuation points after adjustments are

completed. g. Calibrate transmitters as follows:

(1) Apply power, input signal, and process input, as applicable. (2) Adjust zero and span. (3) Calibrate as specified for the applicable process measurement.

h. Stroke control valves as follows: (1) Check valve for proper direction of response; i.e., increasing air to positioner

increases valve opening or vice versa. (2) Adjust limit switches to actuate at values required. Confirm switch make or

break with an electrical continuity check. (3) Adjust air supply PRV on valve to output pressure desired.

i. Stroke control drives as follows:


253005-16 81799_8320_253005

(1) Apply the electrical input signal to the drive. (2) Check damper positions at 0, 50, and 100% of input value. (3) Adjust limit switches to actuate at the values required.

j. Attach an Engineer-approved calibration label to all devices after preoperational calibration.

k. Submit final calibration sheets to Engineer in accordance with DIVISION 1. END OF SECTION 253005

81799_8320_253005_Appendix A

Instrument List

ITEM TAG

DATA SHEET

NUMBER CONN. NPD PID DRAWING PARENT TAG PARENT TYPE PRESS. (PSIG) TEMP. (°F) SUPPLY BY INSTALL BY NOTES

00AAU-LG-001 - 1" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.2981 5.8320

(Target Board) Shand & Jurs Model 92302-18-

19-02

00AAU-LIT-002 4600 4" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.8320 5.8320

00AAU-PIT-003 2201 1/2" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-004-1"-00SAL01-0" Pipe Run 145 120 5.8320 5.8320

00AAU-TE-001 - Later 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.2981 5.8320

00AAU-TIT-002 1201 1" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.8320 5.8320

00AAU-TW001 - 1" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.2981 5.8320

00AAU-TW-002 1020 1" 81799_MMAAU001 00AAU-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 120 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PI-055 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACI001 00ACI-TNK-001 Equipment 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PI-060 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACI001 00ACI-100-3/4"-00SAL01-0" Pipe Run 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PIT-050 2201 1/2" 81799_MMACI001 00ACI-030-3"-01SAS02-0" Pipe Run 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PI-052 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACI002 00ACI-TNK-002 Equipment 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PI-063 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACI002 00ACI-060-3"-01SAS02-0" Pipe Run 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACS-PI-110 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACS001 00ACS-001-1-1/2"-03CBS04-0" Pipe Run 480 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACS-PIT-100 2201 1/2" 81799_MMACS001 00ACS-001-1-1/2"-03CBS04-0" Pipe Run 480 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACI-PI-061 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACS002 00ACI-151-2"-01SAS02-0" Pipe Run 145 165 5.8320 5.8320

00ACS-PI-083 2001 1/2" 81799_MMACS002 00ACS-TNK-001 Equipment 480 165 5.8320 5.8320

01CWM-PI-102 - 1/2" 81799_MMCWM001 01CWM-003-150 MM--0" Pipe Run 80 230 5.1210 5.8320






01CWM-PI-111 2001 1/2" 81799_MMCWM003 01CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0" Pipe Run 80 230 5.8320 5.8320










02CWM-TI-111 1041 1" 81799_MMCWM003 01CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0" Pipe Run 80 230 5.8320 5.8320










01CWM-TIT-001 1201 1" 81799_MMCWM003 01CWM-001-8"-01CSG01-0" Pipe Run 80 230 5.8320 5.8320






1 of 4 Rev 0

81799_8320_253005_Appendix A

Instrument List

ITEM TAG

DATA SHEET










































00DOC-LS-150 - 4" 81799_MMDOC001 00DOC-TNK-001 Equipment 5 210 5.8220 5.8220

00DOC-LD-151 - 4" 81799_MMDOC001 00DOC-TNK-001 Equipment 5 210 5.8220 5.8220

00FGS-PI-001 2001 1/2" 81799_MMFGS006 00FGS-055-2"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320

00FGS-PI-220 2001 1/2" 81799_MMFGS004 00FGS-008-8"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320

00FGS-PIT-211 2201 1/2" 81799_MMFGS002 00FGS-004-8"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320

00FGS-TIT-212 1201 - 81799_MMFGS002 00FGS-004-8"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320

00FGS-TW-212 1020 1" 81799_MMFGS002 00FGS-004-8"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320

01FGS-FT-200 - (SEE NOTES) 3" FLNG 81799_MMFGS005 01FGS-002-4"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 175 120 5.8320 5.8320 MODEL: Endress+Hauser 83F80-AD2SACJCABBQ

2 of 4 Rev 0

81799_8320_253005_Appendix A

Instrument List

ITEM TAG

DATA SHEET




00FPW-PI-760 - 1/2" 81799_MMFPW001 00FPW-210-4"-01CSS01-0" Pipe Run 150 120 5.2820 5.8320




00LOT-FQ-001 - 2" 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-017-2"-01SAS02-2" Pipe Run 145 210 5.1210 5.8310 Relocated from 00LOT-SKD-001

00LOT-LG-300 - 1" 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.2980 5.8320


19-02

00LOT-LIT-300 4600 4" 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320

00LOT-TIT-301 1201 - 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320

00LOT-TE-302 - - 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320 Supplied on heater sheath

00LOT-TW-301 1020 1" 81799_MMLOT001 00LOT-TNK-001 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320



19-02



19-02



00LOT-TE-322 - - 81799_MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-002 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320 Supplied on heater sheath

00LOT-TIT-311 1201 - 81799_MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-003 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320

00LOT-TIT-321 1201 - 81799_MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-002 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320 Supplied with tank heater assembly

00LOT-TW-311 1020 1" 81799_MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-003 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.8320

00LOT-TW-321 1020 1" 81799_MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-002 Equipment 0 psi-g 210 5.8320 5.832001LOT-PI-111 - 1/2" 81799_MMLOT003 01LOT-005-200 mm--0" Pipe Run 145 210 5.1210 5.8320

01LOT-PI-112 - 1/2" 81799_MMLOT003 01LOT-006-200 mm--0" Pipe Run 145 210 5.1210 5.8320





01BAG-PDIS-001 - - 81799_MMSCR001 01BAG-FTR-001A Equipment 0 psi-g 100 5.1210 5.8320


01BAG-PDIS-003 - - 81799_MMSCR001 01BAG-FTR-001B Equipment 0 psi-g 100 5.1210 5.8320


01SCR-NOX - - 81799_MMSCR001 01SCR-002-1800 MM--4" Pipe Run 7 900 5.1210 5.8320

01SCR-NOX - - 81799_MMSCR001 01SCR-ABS-001 Equipment 7 900 5.1210 5.8320

01SCR-DPT-503 - - 81799_MMSCR001 01SCR-ABS-001 Equipment 7 900 5.1210 5.8320



01SCR-TIT-501 - - 81799_MMSCR001 01SCR-ABS-001 Equipment 7 900 5.1210 5.8320









3 of 4 Rev 0

81799_8320_253005_Appendix A

Instrument List

ITEM TAG

DATA SHEET

NUMBER CONN. NPD PID DRAWING PARENT TAG PARENT TYPE PRESS. (PSIG) TEMP. (°F) SUPPLY BY INSTALL BY NOTES02SCR-DPT-501 - - 81799_MMSCR001 02SCR-ABS-001 Equipment 7 900 5.1210 5.8320















4 of 4 Rev 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

2324

ofProj. No.: 81799 Contract No.:

SEE LIST SEE LIST

Rating Type

Process Fluid Velocity

Material Treatments Coating Finish

Shank type

Bore Diameter

Material

Tip Diameter

Design Max Press Design Max. Temp

Pressure Max

Flow Max.

Density

1/2"

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST NPT

0 SMK 8/5/2015No.

2Date

ISSUED FOR BID0RevisionBy

INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION

Thermowell

Coffeyville

102 Dwg. No: COC-IS-1020Code:C8320 Sheet 1

Rev.:

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Rosemount

0091 A

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Process Conn.Size

Instr. Conn. Size

Insertion Length (U) Lagging Extension (T)

Rating Type

Fluid Phase

Temperature Min. Oper. Max

Tag Number

Service/Description

Area Classification

Manufacturer

Model Number

ANSI Piping Code

P&ID

Line Size

Line Number

Schedule Material

GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

THERMOWELL

NOTES:

1. Provide thermocouple assembled to thermowell.

2. Provide a permanently attached stainless steel tag engraved with instrument tag number for each instrument.

of

0

- 210

000AAU-TNK-001UREA TANK TEMPERATURE

NATURAL GAS

LUBE OIL

MMAAU001

MMFGS002

MMLOT001 210

120

8"

-

175

0

120

0

0 00LOT-TW-311 WASTE LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-003 - LUBE OIL 210

00FGS-004-8"-01CSS01-0"

00LOT-TNK-001

00LOT-TNK-002

FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE

SERVICE LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

NEW LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

MMLOT002

0

0

0

0

00FGS-TW-212

Thermowell

02

No. By Date Revision Code: 102 Dwg. No: COC-IS-1020 Rev.:0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID 2Proj. No.: Sheet81799 Contract No.: C8320

CONN SIZEDESCRIPTION FLUID

MAX TEMP (°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG)

9 2

1" 9 2

NOTESU INCH T INCHREV TAG NUMBER P&IDLINE/EQUIPT

NUMBERLINE SIZE

1"

1" 9 -

9 2

1" 4 -

1"

Coffeyville

-

00LOT-TW-321

00LOT-TW-301

UREA00AAU-TW-002

LUBE OIL


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

4041

of

Measure Type or App.

Pressure Min. Oper. Max

Service/Description

Area Classification

Manufacturer

Model Number

ANSI Piping Code

P&ID

Line Size

Line Number

Schedule Material

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Ashcroft

Socket Material

Figure Interval Minor Grad. Nom. Accuracy

Element Type Material

Ring Construction Material

Body Style Material

Dial Type Size Color

Fluid Phase

Temperature Max.


Type

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

50 CI 60 L 025 50/300 °F XNH

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

4-1/2" diameter


Temperature Gauge

Coffeyville

Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320Rev.: 0COC-IS-1041Code:

10 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID104 Dwg. No:No. By

Sheet 3Date Revision

Snubber Type Material

Flushing Conn. Qty. Size Plug

Process Conn. Size Rating Type

DIAPHRAGMSEAL

OPTIONS

Type/Construction Quantity/Location

Upper Housing Matl. Fill Fluid

Capillary Length Capillary Material

Diaphragm Type

Movement Dampening

Siphon Type Material

Flushing Ring/Lower Housing Material

Size Material

50 300degF

Conn. Arrangement Burst Pressure

Blow Out Protection Over Range Protection

Instrument Range Min. Max.

GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

Tag Number


2. Provide stainless steel thermowell with this instrument (see model number on COC-IS-1020).

NOTES:

SEE LIST

GAUGE

Lens Material

Mounting

SEE LIST

Vacuum Pulsation

Process Conn. Size Rating Type SEE LIST

of

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

0

0

0

MMCWM003

RADIATOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE


MMCWM003

MMCWM003

01CWM-TI-112

01CWM-TI-113

01CWM-TI-115

01CWM-TI-114

01CWM-TI-121

01CWM-TI-122

01CWM-TI-123

01CWM-TI-124

0

0

0

0

0 MMCWM003

RADIATOR INLET TEMPERATURE

0

01CWM-TI-111

MMCWM003

MMCWM003

MMCWM003


03


DESCRIPTION FLUIDMAX

TEMP (°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG) U INCH

1"

1" 2.5

2.5

2.5

1" 2.5

1"

MMCWM003

MMCWM003 01CWM-013-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-014-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-015-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-012-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0"

4"

4"

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

230

230

230

230

230

80

80

80

1"

1"

1"

1"

1"

80

80

80

80

80

80

230

230

2.5

2.5

REV TAG NUMBER P&IDLINE/EQUIPT

NUMBERLINE SIZE

1"

80

80






230

230

230

230

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

CONN SIZE

2.5

2.5

2.5

-

-

-

1"

1"

1"

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

1"

1"

1"

2.5

2.5

2.5

1"

1"

1"

80

80

80

01CWM-022-4"-01CSG01-0"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

01CWM-023-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-024-4"-01CSG01-0"

230

230

230

230

230

230

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

Temperature Gauge


Coffeyville

0 4" 80

0

0 4"

4" 230

230

80

80

02CWM-TI-123 MMCWM003 02CWM-023-4"-01CSG01-0"

02CWM-TI-124 02CWM-024-4"-01CSG01-0"

MMCWM003

02CWM-TI-125 02CWM-025-4"-01CSG01-0"

MMCWM003 230




02CWM-TI-122


0

MMCWM003 02CWM-022-4"-01CSG01-0"

0


0 RADIATOR INLET TEMPERATURE



02CWM-TI-114


0

MMCWM003 02CWM-014-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

80RADIATOR INLET TEMPERATURE


02CWM-TI-111


0

MMCWM003 01CWM-025-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

MMCWM003 02CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

01CWM-TI-125 RADIATOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE



01CWM-021-4"-01CSG01-0"

NOTES

4"

2.5

1"

80

804"

4"

2.5

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

T INCH -

-

-

-

-

ofDwg. No: COC-IS-1041 Rev.: 0No. By Date Revision Code: 104

81799 Contract No.: C8320 Sheet 3 3

Coffeyville

0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID Proj. No.:

Temperature Gauge


1" 2.5 -

0 03CWM-TI-125 RADIATOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE

MMCWM003 03CWM-025-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-024-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80

1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-023-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-022-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80

1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-021-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1" 2.5 -

0 03CWM-TI-115 RADIATOR INLET TEMPERATURE

MMCWM003 03CWM-015-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80

1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-014-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1" 2.5 -


MMCWM003 03CWM-013-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80

-


MMCWM003 03CWM-012-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1" 2.5 -

NOTES


MMCWM003 03CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80FLUID

MAX TEMP

(°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG)

CONN SIZE U INCH T INCHREV TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID

LINE/EQUIPT NUMBER

LINE SIZE

1" 2.5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23 Accuracy

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

5253

ofByNo.

0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BIDDate Revision

TRANSMITTER

Type

Mounting

Electrical Conn. Size Type

Housing Style Material Paint


Power Supply

OPTIONSTransient Protection

Calibration Datasheet

Rating Type

THERMOWELL

Shank type Material

Bore Diameter Tip Diameter

Process Fluid Velocity

Material Treatments Coating Finish

Process Conn.Size Rating Type SEE LIST (If Applicable)

Instr. Conn. Size

Insertion Length (U) Lagging Extension (T) SEE LIST (If Applicable) SEE LIST (If Applicable)

Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320 Sheet 2


Temperature Transmitter

Coffeyville

1

1. Provide assembled to thermowell.

NOTES:

Dwg. No:

GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

ELEMENT

HEAD


Terminal Block

Electrical Connection Size Type

Extension Type Size Length

Spring Loaded

Sheath Material

Type

Body Style Material Paint

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Rosemount

3144P D5 A1 E5 M5

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Rev.: 0COC-IS-1201Code: 120

Tag Number

Service/Description

Area Classification

Manufacturer

Model Number

ANSI Piping Code

P&ID

Line Size

Line Number

Schedule Material

Pressure Max

Flow Max.

Density


Fluid Phase

Single/Double or Other

Thermowell Conn. Size Rating Type

Temperature Min. Oper. Max

Calibrated Range Min. Max.

Output Response Time

Local Display Communication

Installed Length (X)

RTDWires

Material

Resistance

SEE LIST SEE LIST

T/CType

Grounding Junction

of

Coffeyville

Temperature Transmitter


MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-0020

MMFGS003

MMLOT001

WASTE LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

SERVICE LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

00LOT-TIT-321

LUBE OIL

LUBE OIL

- 0UREA

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

NATURAL GAS

LUBE OIL

8"

8"

10"

-

8"

8"

8"

8"

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

1"

1"

1"

9 2

9 -

9 2

1"

1"

1"

2.5 -

2.5 -

4 -

1"

1"

1" 9 -

2.5 -

2.5 -

1" 2.5 -

1" 2.5 -

Supply with 1020 thermowell







MAX TEMP

(°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG) NOTESU INCH T INCHREV TAG NUMBER P&ID

LINE/EQUIPT NUMBER

LINE SIZE

02


-

-

230

230

230

230

120

230

230

120

210

210

210

80

0

80

0

0

0

0

0

0

RADIATOR BANK OUTLET TEMPERATURE

80

80

80

80

150

0

0

03CWM-002-8"-01CSG01-0"

MMAAU001

MMCWM003

03CWM-TIT-002

00FGS-TIT-212

00LOT-TIT-301

00LOT-TIT-311

01CWM-002-8"-01CSG01-0"

02CWM-001-8"-01CSG01-0"

02CWM-002-8"-01CSG01-0"

0

0

0

MMCWM003

MMCWM003

MMCWM003

MMCWM003

MMCWM003

FUEL GAS TEMPERATURE 00FGS-004-10"-01CSS01-0"

NEW LUBE OIL TANK TEMPERATURE

00LOT-TNK-001

MMLOT002 00LOT-TNK-0030

01CWM-001-8"-01CSG01-0"

00AAU-TNK-001

03CWM-001-8"-01CSG01-0"


01CWM-TIT-001

00AAU-TIT-002


RADIATOR BANK INLET TEMPERATURE


UREA TANK TEMPERATURE


01CWM-TIT-002

02CWM-TIT-002

02CWM-TIT-001

03CWM-TIT-001

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

4041

of

Measure Type or App.

Pressure Min. Oper. Max

Service/Description

Area Classification

Manufacturer

Model Number

ANSI Piping Code

P&ID

Line Size

Line Number

Schedule Material

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Ashcroft

Socket Material

Figure Interval Minor Grad. Nom. Accuracy

Element Type Material

Ring Construction Material

Body Style Material

Dial Type Size Color

Fluid Phase

Temperature Max.


Type

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

45 1279 SS 04 L

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

4-1/2" diameter


Pressure Gauge

Coffeyville

Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320Rev.: 0COC-IS-2001Code:

10 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID104 Dwg. No:No. By

Sheet 3Date Revision

Snubber Type Material



DIAPHRAGMSEAL

OPTIONS


Upper Housing Matl. Fill Fluid

Capillary Length Capillary Material

Diaphragm Type

Movement Dampening

Siphon Type Material

Flushing Ring/Lower Housing Material

Size Material

SEE LIST SEE LIST

Conn. Arrangement Burst Pressure

Blow Out Protection Over Range Protection


GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

Tag Number


NOTES:

SEE LIST

GAUGE

Lens Material

Mounting

SEE LIST

Vacuum Pulsation

Process Conn. Size Rating Type SEE LIST

of

0 02CWM-PI-113 RADIATOR INLET PRESSURE MMCWM003 02CWM-013-4"-01CSG01-0"

4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80


4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80


4" WATER/GLYCOL

230 80

0

0

0

MMACS002

RADIATOR INLET PRESSURE


MMCWM003

MMCWM003

00ACI-PI-060

00ACI-PI-052

00ACS-PI-110

00ACI-PI-063

00ACI-PI-061

00ACS-PI-083

01CWM-PI-111

01CWM-PI-112

0

0

0

0

0 MMACI001

INSTRUMENT AIR RECEIVER PRESSURE

0

00ACI-PI-055

MMACI002

MMACS001

MMACS001

WET IA RECIEVER PRESSURE

03


DESCRIPTION FLUID

MAX TEMP

(°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG) RANGE

1/2"

1/2" 0/200

0/200

0/500

1/2" 0/200

1/2"

MMACI001

MMACI002 00ACI-TNK-002

00ACI-060-3"-01SAS02-0"

00ACS-001-1-1/2"-03CBS04-0"

00ACI-100-3/4"-00SAL01-0"

00ACI-TNK-001

-

3"

INSTRUMENT AIR

INSTRUMENT AIR

80

80

480

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

80

80

145

480

80

80

80

80

0/500

0/100

REV TAG NUMBER P&IDLINE/EQUIPT

NUMBERLINE SIZE

1/2"

145

145

STARTING AIR HEADER PRESSURE

INSTRUMENT AIR PRESSURE TO ENGINES 1-3

SERVICE AIR PRESSURE

INSTRUMENT AIR BACKUP PRESSURE

STARTING AIR RECEIVER PRESSURE

165

165

165

165

INSTRUMENT AIR

COMPRESSED AIR

CONN SIZE

0/100

0/100

0/100

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

0/100

0/100

0/100

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

0/100

0/100

0/100

1/2" 0/100

1/2" 0/100

1/2" 0/100

4"

4"

4"

01CWM-011-4"-01CSG01-0"

01CWM-012-4"-01CSG01-0"

165

165

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

00ACS-TNK-001

2"

-

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

4"

STARTING AIR

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

WATER/GLYCOL

Pressure Gauge


80

Coffeyville

01CWM-PI-125

01CWM-PI-124 MMCWM003 01CWM-024-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

MMCWM003 01CWM-025-4"-01CSG01-0"

0


0 RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE

RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE

RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE

01CWM-PI-122


0

MMCWM003 01CWM-022-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

80RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE

RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE 4"

01CWM-PI-114


0

MMCWM003 01CWM-013-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

MMCWM003 01CWM-014-4"-01CSG01-0"

0

01CWM-PI-113 RADIATOR INLET PRESSURE



00ACI-151-2"-01SAS02-0"

NOTES

1-1/2"

0/200

1/2"

145

1453/4"

-

0/200

STARTING AIR

INSTRUMENT AIR

165

of

1/2" 1/2001750 00FGS-PI-220 FUEL GAS TO EH PRESSURE MMFGS004 00FGS-008-8"-01CSS01-0"

8" FUEL GAS 120

104 Dwg. No: COC-IS-2001 Rev.: 0Contract No.: C8320 Sheet 3 381799

No. By Date Revision Code:0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID Proj. No.:

Coffeyville


Pressure Gauge

FUEL GAS 120 175 1/2" 0/2000 00FGS-PI-001 PB FUEL GAS PRESSURE MMFGS006 00FGS-055-2"-01CSS01-0"

2"

WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1/2" 0/1000 03CWM-PI-125 RADIATOR OUTLET PRESSURE MMCWM003 03CWM-025-4"-01CSG01-0"

4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL

230 80 1/2" 0/1000 03CWM-PI-115 RADIATOR INLET PRESSURE MMCWM003 03CWM-015-4"-01CSG01-0"

4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"

WATER/GLYCOL


4"FLUID

MAX TEMP (°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG)

CONN SIZE RANGE NOTESREV TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID

LINE/EQUIPT NUMBER

LINE SIZE

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526 Accuracy27282930313233343536373839404142434445464748

of0

Electrical Conn. Size TypeInstrument Range Min. Max.

MaterialLine SizeLine NumberSchedule

COC-IS-2201Code: 220Date Revision

Calibrated Range Min. Max.Output Response TimeLocal Display CommunicationPower Supply

Diaphragm Type Size Material

Performance Class / Diagnostics

Transient ProtectionCalibration Datasheet

DIAPHRAGMSEAL Flushing Ring/Lower Housing Material

Design Max. Temp SEE LIST SEE LIST

0

In-Line Pressure Transmitter

1/2"Process Conn. Size Material Type

SEE LIST

SEE LISTSEE LIST

Rosemount3051T G 4 A 2B

SEE LIST SEE LISTSEE LIST

165

Vacuum PulsationDesign Max Press

14 NPT Female

Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320 Sheet 2


Pressure Transmitter

Coffeyville

1

GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

Rev.:

Fluid Phase

Pressure Min. Oper. Max PressMax Temp

Tag NumberService/DescriptionArea ClassificationManufacturerModel NumberANSI Piping CodeP&ID

0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BIDBy

NOTES:1. Provide a permanently attached stainless steel tag engraved with instrument tag number for each instrument.

No.

Type Measurement Type or App.Element Type Material

Fill FluidWetted O-ring Material

Housing Style Material PaintMounting

SEE LIST SEE LIST

TRANSMITTER

OPTIONS

MANIFOLDVALVE


TypeSize RatingBody Material Trim PackingProcess Conn. Size Rating TypeInstrument Conn. Size


Upper Housing Matl. Fill FluidCapillary Length Capillary Material

Dwg. No:

MountingRating Type

SEE LIST


of 2

COC-IS-2201 Rev.: 0

175

0

0

MMACS001STARTING AIR HEADER PRESSURE

FUEL GAS PRESSURE (LOW)

Coffeyville


Pressure Transmitter

0

0

00ACS-PIT-100

00FGS-PIT-211

00ACI-PIT-050

00AAU-PIT-003

INSTRUMENT AIR HEADER PRESSURE

120

UREA SUPPLY HEADER PRESSURE

00FGS-004-8"-01CSS01-0"

1"00AAU-004-1"-00SAL01-0"

2

No. By Date Revision Code: 220 Dwg. No:

0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320 Sheet


MAX TEMP

(°F)

MAX PRESS (PSIG) NOTES

CALIB RANGEREV TAG NUMBER P&ID

LINE/EQUIPT NUMBER

LINE SIZE

1/2"

1/2"

1/2" 0-150

0-150

0-500

1/2" 0-500

145UREA

1-1/2"

MMAAU001

MMACI001

00ACS-001-1-1/2"-03CBS04-0"

3"

STARTING AIR

NATURAL GAS

INSTRUMENT AIR

MMFGS002

00ACI-030-3"-01SAS02-0"

8"

145

480165

165

120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22 Accuracy

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

4142

of

Accuracy

SENSOR

Type Antenna

Orientation

Housing Style Material

Housing Style Material Paint Aluminum

TRANSMITTER

OPTIONS

Sensor Range Min

150lb

Max

SEE LIST

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

SEE LIST

Rosemount

5402 A H1 E5 4S PV CA Q4

SEE LIST SEE LIST

SEE LIST

No.

Line Size


Schedule Material


Level - Non Contact (Ultrasonic, Radar, etc)

Coffeyville

GENERAL

PROCESS CONDITIONS

Fluid Phase

Material Buildup

Density

Tag Number

Service/Description

Area Classification

Manufacturer

Model Number

ANSI Piping Code

P&ID

Moisture

Vibration

By

NOTES:


Date Revision0 SMK 8/5/2015 ISSUED FOR BID

Type High Frequency Radar

Paint

Local Display Communication Yes

Mounting Bracket

Transient Protection

Calibration Datasheet

Power Supply

Performance Class / Diagnostics

Max.

Beam Angle Tank Sealing

Power Supply Signal Cable Length

Insertion Length

Wetted Material

Inactive Length

Process Conn Size Rating Type

Electrical Conn Size Type

4"

Mounting

Electrical Conn. Size Type

Line Number

4-20mA ±.1" 1 sec

1/2" 14 NPT

SEE LIST SEE LIST

Calibrated Range Min. Max. SEE LIST SEE LIST

Output Response Time

Instrument Range Min.

Proj. No.: 81799 Contract No.: C8320 Sheet 2Rev.: 1COC-IS-4600Code:

1460 Dwg. No:

of

0

0

0

MMLOT002

MMLOT002

WASTE LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL

00LOT-LIT-300

UREA TANK LEVEL XMTTR

SERVICE LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL

NEW LUBE OIL TANK LEVEL

00LOT-TNK-002

00AAU-TNK-001

00LOT-LIT-310

00LOT-LIT-320

00AAU-LIT-002 120

210

210

210 0

0

0

12



MAX TEMP

MAX PRESS NOTES

INST RANGE

CALIB RANGEREV TAG NUMBER P&ID

LINE/EQUIPT NUMBER

LINE SIZE

4"

4"

LATER LATER

LATER LATER

4" LATER LATER

4" LATER LATER

0

MMLOT001

00LOT-TNK-003

4"

4"

LUBE OIL

LUBE OIL

UREA

LUBE OIL

MMAAU001

00LOT-TNK-0010

4"

4"

Level - Non Contact (Ultrasonic, Radar, etc)


Coffeyville

81799_8320 260100-1

DIVISON 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 260100 – ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section applies to the complete shop installation of power, control and instrumentation

wiring and other electrical systems to be supplied under this Contract and required for a complete operational package. In general, work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Design, furnish, shop install and test all equipment and materials required to electrically

connect all components furnished for a complete functional system. 2. Design, furnish, shop install and test all control panels required to properly operate the

system as specified. Furnish, shop install and test all internal control panel wiring and components.

3. Size, furnish, shop install, connect and test any DC power supplies, voltage reducing transformers, fuses, circuit breakers or other devices to develop any different voltage power systems required for a complete operational system.

4. Size, furnish, shop install and test all wiring and conduit required to electrically connect individual components on a skid. Design skid wiring to facilitate connection to the plant control system by Others.

5. Ground all skid mounted electrical equipment as specified. Electrically connect all grounds into a skid ground system to allow field connection to the plant ground grid.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Pipe Freeze Protection: SECTION 260507. 2. Alternating Current Electric Motors: SECTION 260551.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Design, construct, assemble and test all electrical equipment furnished to conform with, but not

limited to, all applicable sections of the following standards. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 3. Factory Mutual (FM). 4. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA). 5. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 8. Local and state ordinances.

B. Use electrical materials conforming with, but not limited to, all applicable sections of the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Factory Mutual (FM). 3. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). 4. National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Electrical one-line diagram indicating power distribution for skidded equipment. B. Bill of materials indicating manufacturer, style, type, and catalog number of all electrical

equipment and instruments supplied.

SECTION 260100 – ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT: continued

81799_8320 260100-2

C. Electrical load list. D. Schematic diagrams. E. Control panel and terminal box wiring diagrams. F. Wiring diagram shall indicate connections for incoming power and connections for

Control/instrumentation interface. G. Circuit breaker directory indicating each item or control scheme served.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: A. All Equipment and Materials shall be new, unused, first-quality materials free of defects B. All primary current-carrying parts shall be high conductivity copper. C. Silverplate or tinplate all primary current connections and joints. Plating shall be done after all

drilling and cutting operations are completed. D. All Equipment and Materials shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). E. All Equipment conductor termination provisions shall be UL listed for 90°C conductors, unless

specified otherwise. F. All Work including Equipment and Materials in hazardous (classified) or corrosive locations

shall conform to NEC requirements for the specified area. This Contract is responsible for identifying, conforming to, and furnishing properly rated NEMA materials for all classified and corrosive areas on the skid.

G. Requirements for Electrical Equipment: 1. All equipment and material shall be suitable for the temperature, pressure, voltage, and

design stress levels to which they will be subjected. 2. Ship equipment as completely assembled as possible, consistent with shipping facilities

and construction requirements at the Owner's station site. Optimize shop fabricated assemblies to reduce overall costs.

3. Factory wire all panels and install control devices in panels wherever possible. 4. Furnish with all necessary auxiliary systems required for a complete overall workable

mechanical and electrical system conforming with the intent of these specifications. 5. Furnish complete, coordinating the physical arrangement and electrical connections with

equipment and structures also furnished by this Contract. 6. Furnish new equipment of manufacturer's standard design as far as is consistent with the

intent of these specifications. 7. Furnish with all necessary material required for complete field assembly and installation

which shall be performed by Others. 8. Furnish equipment of dead front construction and designed for heavy-duty power plant

operation. 9. Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for each major piece of equipment and

each instrument or control device mounted on the equipment.

2.02 SYSTEMS TO BE INSTALLED: A. Power systems as required. B. Grounding system. C. Control systems. D. Instrumentation systems. E. Heat tracing.

2.03 CONTROL PANELS AND TERMINAL BOXES:


81799_8320 260100-3

A. General Construction: 1. Control panels and terminal boxes shall meet the requirements of NEMA 12 gasketed

enclosures for indoors, NEMA 4X for corrosive areas and outdoor enclosures suitable for wash down or NEMA 7 for hazardous areas. Construct NEMA 4X control panels of 11-gauge stainless steel with stainless steel doors and hinges.

2. Provide interior panels for mounting auxiliary equipment and terminal blocks as required. Local control cabinets and associated panel inserts used for mounting of devices shall be suitably reinforced structurally to limit vibration. Access doors, where applicable, shall be provided with stiffening members to prevent warping.

3. Provide full height hinged and gasketed access doors to allow easy access for maintenance of all items.

4. Panel and Large Terminal Box Doors: a. Full length, minimum 11-gage stainless steel flush type with full-length piano hinge

and three-point latch. b. Chrome-plated handle on each door. c. Provide a print pocket to store all panel drawings. d. Neoprene door gaskets.

5. Construct with no bolt heads or fastenings visible from the exterior. 6. Construct with 1/4-inch radius corners. 7. Panels and cabinets shall be sized as required for a good arrangement of devices for best

functional operation, and adequate room for servicing devices mounted in the interior. 8. Cabinets shall be designed to maximize heat dissipation from the equipment contained

within as well as heat from external sources. 9. If required, provide exhaust fans, louvers, filters, heaters, thermostats, etc., according to

the recommendations of the various component manufacturers for continuous operation without loss of function or reduced normal life under the ambient conditions specified in Section 011100.

10. If required, provide interior brackets and hinged equipment racks or panels for mounting components.

11. Interior support shelves shall be supported from side panels or the top of the panel with rigid strut system. Threaded rod hangers are not acceptable.

12. Furnish with sufficient number of lifting eyes to facilitate ease in handling of equipment. 13. All panels and cabinets shall be designed with bottom entry conduits only. 14. Small terminal boxes shall be furnished with bolted covers.

2.04 CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES: A. General:

1. All conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel (RGS). All conduit connections to rotating, vibrating and pipe mounted equipment shall be with liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

2. All fittings and couplings shall be heavy-Duty Cast Malleable Iron or Aluminum and shall be full-threaded type. Split or set screw types are not allowed.

3. The conduit system shall conform to NEC, and shall be watertight. B. Conduit Support System:

1. Use galvanized steel conduit clamps to support all exposed metallic conduit. 2. Fabricate from structural steel or manufactured framing members equal to "Unistrut"

P-1000 series as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation unless otherwise specified. 3. Provide galvanized or cadmium-plated members for indoor and hot dipped galvanized

members for outdoor installations.


81799_8320 260100-4

4. Use noncorrosive metal, galvanized metal, or cadmium-plated metal for nuts, bolts, washers, and other small accessories.

5. Construct with sufficient rigidity to hold conduits in permanent and neat alignment. 6. Paint all cuts or welding of supports with an organic zinc rich primer.

2.05 WIRE, CABLE AND ACCESSORIES: A. Wire and Cable:

1. 600 volt power and control cable shall be XLPE insulated with a flame retardant jacket of CPE or thermosetting low smoke zero halogen cable. Instrument cable shall be minimum of #16 twisted shielded pair with XLPE insulation, aluminized tape mylar shielded with drain wire and flame retardant CPE or thermosetting low smoke zero halogen jacket.

2. PVC cable insulation and jackets are not allowed. 3. Provide all wiring necessary for all equipment specified unless indicated otherwise,

including internal wiring for all spare equipment. Wire out to external terminal blocks all spare contacts from relays and other devices.

4. Interior panel wire shall be type SIS. Wire shall be class B stranded copper and shall have thermosetting EPR or XLPE insulation. Wire shall meet the requirements of UL 44. Size all wire in conformance with NEC, but not smaller than listed in the following table:

Type of Circuit Minimum Wire Size Instrumentation 16 AWG Control 14 AWG Power supply 12 AWG

5. Wire with no splices and with all connections made on equipment studs or terminal blocks. Bring all wiring requiring field connections out to terminal blocks conveniently grouped in one location to receive external cables. Wire all spare contacts on control switches, relays, contactors and starters to external terminal blocks. Not more than two wires shall be terminated at any one connection point.

6. Install internal wiring in horizontal and vertical wiring troughs or channels with removable covers for easy accessibility to interior panel wiring.

7. Label all wires at each end with plastic slipover marker sleeves. "Suflex" or approved equal, machine printed to indicate wire number and destination terminal as indicated on Contractor Drawings.

8. Supply internal ground bus and connect all internal grounds to bus. Provide bolted connection for external ground connection to bus.

B. Connectors: 1. General Requirements:

a. Designed and sized for specific cable being connected. b. Solderless, pressure-type connectors constructed of noncorrosive tin-plated copper. c. Rated current-carrying capacity equal to or greater than the cable being connected. d. Application tooling for connectors shall contain die or piston stops to prevent over-

crimping and cycling or pressure relief to prevent under-crimping. Dies of all application tooling shall provide dot or wire size coding for quality control verification. All tooling shall be manufactured by the connector manufacturer.

2. Power Connectors: a. Noninsulated ring-tongue type.


81799_8320 260100-5

b. Ring tongue sized to match terminal stud size. Oversized ring tongue terminals will not be permitted.

c. Brazed barrel seam. d. Application tooling designed to crimp the wire barrel (conductor grip) with a one-

step crimp. e. Acceptable manufacturer's cross-reference chart is listed at end of this Article.

3. Control, Instrument and Specialty Cable Connectors: a. Vinyl or nylon preinsulated ring tongue. b. Post lug for I/O cards with compression style terminal blocks. c. Sized to match terminal stud size. Oversized terminals will not be permitted. d. Have insulation grip sleeve to firmly hold to cable insulation. e. Insulation grip sleeve shall be funneled to facilitate wire insertion and prevent

turned-back strands. f. Application tooling designed to crimp the wire barrel (conductor grip) and the

insulation grip sleeve or ring with a one-step crimp. g. Acceptable manufacturer's cross-reference chart is listed immediately below.

Acceptable Connector Manufacturer's Cross-Reference Chart

Size Amp Special Thomas Panduit Type (AWG or MCM) Industries & Betts Corp. 3M Control 22-18 PIDG RA18 PN18 MNG-18 16-14 PIDG RB14 PN14 MNG-14 12-10 PIDG RC10 PN10 MNG-10 Power 12-10 Solistrand C10 P10 M10 (600V and 8 Solistrand D8 P8 M8 Below) 6 Solistrand E6 P6 M6

C. Motor Lead Termination/Splice: 1. Splices shall be made using compression-type connectors bolted together. The

compression-type connectors shall be properly sized for the cables. Reference acceptable connector manufacturer's cross-reference chart.

2. Splice to be covered with heat-shrinkable tubing connector insulators. 3. Splicing shall be done in accordance with the instructions provided with the Minnesota

Mining and Manufacturing (3M) 5300 Series Motor Connector Kit, Raychem Brand MCK or RVC Motor Connector Kit.

D. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon self-locking type. 2. Normal service temperature range of –40 to 85°C. 3. Weather-resistant, UV-resistant type for outdoor use. 4. Conforms to Military Specifications MIL-S-23190D. 5. AMP Special Industries "AMP-TY," Dennison Manufacturing Company "BAR-LOK,"

Panduit Corporation "PAN-TY" or Thomas & Betts "TY-RAP," or Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing 3M Brand cable ties.

E. Terminal Blocks: 1. For mounting in terminal boxes, control cabinets and termination panels, provide as

specified in this Section: a. Designed and sized for the cables being terminated. b. Phenolic block rated 600V.


81799_8320 260100-6

c. Compression type terminal blocks shall not be permitted. d. Rated current carrying capacity equal to or greater than the cable being terminated. e. Marking strip on blocks for power, control and instrument cables. f. Identify each terminal on each block by stamping or marking a unique designation

permanently on the block. g. States Company Type NT Model M-250, or Phoenix Contact Type OTTA 6-T, or

Engineer-approved equal for control and instrument cables. General Electric Type EB-27 for current transformer circuits.

h. Fuse disconnecting terminal blocks shall be Phoenix Contact type UK 5-HESILA 250.

i. Mount terminal blocks in one or more vertical rows. Location of terminal blocks and arrangement of external circuits shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

j. Group terminal blocks to conveniently receive Owner's cables. k. Provide a minimum 6 inches of clear space for field cabling between parallel rows

of terminal strips, between terminal strips and devices, and between terminal strips and inside wall of control panel.

l. Provide 15% extra terminals.

2.06 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: A. General:

1. The electrical equipment and accessories to be furnished shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, all incoming line and circuit protective devices, motor starters, pushbutton stations, selector switches and control stations, counters, auxiliary relays, indicating lights, and the local control cabinets and associated panel inserts for the mounting thereof.

2. Motor Starters and Contactors: a. Starters shall be circuit breaker combination, full-voltage magnetic type, 3-pole,

with three overload relays and external manual reset. b. Contain fused, individual control transformer for supplying 120-volt ac control

power to each motor starter coil, and its associated equipment. Both primary leads to each transformer shall be fused; one secondary lead shall be fused, and the other secondary lead shall be grounded.

3. Circuit Breakers/Fuses: a. Molded case, manually operated, and trip-free from the handle. b. All breakers shall contain inverse-time thermal overload protection and

instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection. c. Include external handle which clearly indicates when breaker is "on," "off," or

"tripped." Handle shall be lockable in the "off" position. d. Fuses for instrument power feeds shall be as listed below.

(1) Instrument loads less than 3 amps shall be terminal block mounted with disconnect levers as specified in this section.

(2) Instrument loads 3 amps or greater shall be miniature, ferrule type fuses similar to Gould Shawmut type OTM.

4. Miscellaneous Equipment: a. Control and interposing relays shall be of the industrial, heavy-duty type control

relays, rated 300 volts with contacts rated at least 10 amperes. Relays connected to 480-volt primary circuits shall be rated 600 volts.


81799_8320 260100-7

b. Control stations and indicating lights shall be of the oiltight type, flush head type with guard ring and with contact blocks as required for the control scheme for each unit.

c. Indicating lights and pushbuttons shall be rated NEMA 4 indoor and NEMA 4X for outdoor and wash down area. Lights shall be Allen-Bradley Type 800H or Engineer-approved equal.

d. DC power supplies shall be sized, furnished, shop installed in the control panel and tested by Contractor as required to properly operate the individual components supplied.

5. Lights and Receptacles: a. If required for proper maintenance, all enclosed panels or cabinets shall be supplied

with receptacles, lights (fluorescent for indoor and incandescent for outdoor) and light switches to provide adequate lighting to allow plant operations and maintenance staff to operate and maintain components mounted within the cabinets.

2.07 GROUNDING: A. General:

1. Size, furnish, shop install and connect a complete ground system directly connected with copper conductor to all electrical devices mounted on the skid.

2. Bare copper conductors shall be solid copper for #4 AWG and smaller and class B stranded copper for larger than #4 AWG.

3. Connect ground system to two (2) NEMA 2-hole ground pads on opposite corners to allow a 4/0 AWG bare copper field connection to the plant ground grid.

4. Ground all metal tanks per NEC. 5. Connect skid frame members to the skid ground system. All cabinets which are installed

on the skid shall have their frames electrically connected together with copper ground cable and two connections on opposite ends of the entire skid provided to connect to the station ground system. This system shall provide the grounds for the various components and enclosures.

6. Each cabinet and sub-panel shall be provided with a drilled and tapped copper bar ground bus securely attached to the cabinet frame.

7. Ground all conduit termination per NEC. 8. Connections shall be made using compression-type connectors. 9. Ground connections shall be bolted to equipment using silicon bronze bolts and lock

washers.

2.08 NAMEPLATES: A. General:

1. Provide nameplates for all devices mounted on or inside the control panel, they shall be as follows:

2. Fabricated from laminated matte finish white plastic with black core and 1/16-inch thick. 3. Size:

a. 1-1/2 inches high and 6 inches long for "Master" nameplates, such as for control panels, equipment enclosures, etc.

b. 1 inch high and 3 inches long for individual device nameplates. 4. Engraving:

a. Gothic style. b. 3/8-inch-high characters with 45-mil line width on "Master" nameplates. c. 3/16-inch-high characters with 30-mil line width on individual device nameplates.


81799_8320 260100-8

d. Engraving designations shall be as indicated or approved by Engineer. 5. Internal device nameplates shall be attached with a permanent adhesive. No double-sided

tape allowed. Nameplates on exterior panel surfaces shall be attached with slotted screws.

2.09 TESTING: A. Test all electrical Equipment and Materials upon completion of shop installation to ensure that

the Equipment and Material operates satisfactorily, was shop installed properly and conforms to Contract Documents.

B. All Equipment and Materials shall be tested thoroughly to ensure the total system operates as specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION 260100

81799_8320 260507-1

SECTION 260507 - PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Contract shall design, furnish and install the pipe freeze protection system as required for

a complete and fully operational system and as required to meet the following specifications. B. This Section includes pipe freeze protection equipment and installation including, but not

limited to, the following: 1. Heat Trace Cable. 2. Heat Trace Power Distribution Panel. 3. Power Switching Panel. 4. Monitor-Control Panel. 5. Junction Boxes. 6. Temperature Transmitters.

C. The following heat tracing systems shall be furnished and installed under this Contract for outdoor piping systems: 1. Lube Oil – Maintain at 70⁰F. 2. Urea piping – Maintain at 40⁰F. 3. Drain tank and drain piping at the Fuel Gas Conditioning Area – Maintain at 40⁰F. 4. Service water piping – Maintain at 40⁰F. 5. SCR condensate drain system – Maintain at 40⁰F.

D. The following heat tracing systems are furnished by Others and are being installed under this Contract: 1. SCR sample tubing between each engine SCR and NOx controller.

E. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment: SECTION 260100. 2. Pipe and Pipe Insulation: DIVISION 48.

F. All heat trace system components shall be purchased as a system from a single manufacturer.


1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. National Electrical Code (NEC).

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. 506 - Specialty Transformers. b. 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. c. 515 – Standard for Electrical Resistance Heat Tracing for Commercial and

Industrial Applications. 3. Factory Mutual System (FM). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).

a. C57 Series - Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors. b. 515 – The testing, Design, Installation, and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance

Trace Heating for Industrial Applications. 5. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).


1. As-constructed drawings showing actual locations of all heat tracing junction boxes, and control devices.

SECTION 260507 – PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEM: continued

260507-2 81799_8320

2. Line lists including but not limited to the following: a. Heater length. b. Control panel starting and continuous load amps.

3. Schematic Power and control schematic diagrams. 4. Bills of material. 5. Instruction books. 6. Technical data for all components. 7. Mounting details for all components. 8. Control Panels: Provide schematic and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Factory Tests: Conduct manufacturer's standard tests on all system components to assure that

all devices, components, and systems are in proper working order before shipment. Submit test reports as specified in DIVISION 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: The system shall include the following items: A. Panels:

1. Power Distribution Panel. 2. Power Switching Panel. 3. Monitor/Control Panel.

B. Individual pipe and ambient air temperature transmitters. C. Heat trace power junction boxes. D. Parallel-circuit heating cable, 208 V, self-regulating type with ground braids. E. 480-120/208V three-phase Transformer of required size. F. Other items necessary for a complete system.

2.02 TRACING: Heating cable shall be selected and installed to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. All heating cable shall be: 1. Parallel circuit self-regulating type manufactured by one of the following:

a. Raychem “BTV" or "QTV" Trace with ground braids. b. Nelson Electric - "LT-W" with ground braids. c. Thermon - "PSX-MC" with ground braids. d. Heat Trace Products - 27XX Series with ground braids.

2. Liquidtight termination fittings for direct connection to junction boxes. 3. The heating cable for installation in Class 1 Div II area shall be shall be UL listed for that

service.

2.03 CONTROL PANELS: A. General Requirements:

1. Control panels shall be wall-mounted NEMA 12 enclosures. B. Power distribution panels shall be Tyco Thermal Controls DigiTrace or Owner-approved equal

and contain the following Equipment: 1. Circuit breaker panelboard rated 120/208Vac, mounted within the control panel. Branch

breakers shall provide ground-fault protection. 2. Circuit breaker interrupting rating not less than 22,000A rms. 3. Size circuit breakers for specific loads. Spares shall be 40A with Ground Fault

Protection.


81799_8320 260507-3

C. The monitor/control panel shall be Tyco Thermal Controls DigiTrace or Owner-approved equal and contain the following: 1. Front Panel Indications: Power on, Central Processing Unit running, heat-trace common

alarm, low battery. 2. Display: Minimum 40 character display to indicate system status alarm and temperatures

from all temperature transmitters. 3. Automatically display all alarm messages. 4. One spare normally closed relay to indicate heat trace common alarm status.

D. Nameplate: 1. Phenolic type, fabricated from laminated matte finish white plastic with black core. 2. Size:

a. 1-1/2 inches high and 6 inches long for "Master" nameplates, such as for control panels, equipment enclosures, and similar items.

b. 1 inch high and 3 inches long for individual device nameplates. 3. Engraving:

a. Gothic style. b. 3/8-inch-high characters with 45-mil line width on "Master" nameplates. c. 3/16-inch-high characters with 30-mil line width on individual device nameplates. d. Engraving designations shall be as indicated or approved by Owner. e. Nameplates shall be attached with a permanent adhesive. No double-sided tape

allowed.

2.04 TRANSFORMERS: A. Dry type with kVA rating as indicated. B. Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation. C. Encapsulated core and coils. D. Winding Material: Copper. E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company. 2. Eaton Cutler-Hammer. 3. Square D.

F. Noise level not to exceed NEMA ST1 standards as follows: 1. 0-9 kVA - 40 dB. 2. 10-50 kVA - 45 dB. 3. 51-150 kVA - 50 dB. 4. 151-300 kVA - 55 dB. 5. 301-500 kVA - 60 dB.

G. Class H insulation with 115oC maximum temperature rise in 40oC ambient under continuous full load operation.

H. 480-120/208V, 3-phase, 60-hertz, delta-wye connected with taps as follows: 1. Minimum of six (6) 2-1/2% full-capacity taps, 2 above (FCAN) and 4 below (FCBN)

480V. I. 480-120/240V, single phase, 60 hertz with taps as follows:

1. Minimum of four (4) 2-1/2% full-capacity taps, 2 above (FCAN) and 2 below (FCBN) 480 volts.

2.05 POWER JUNCTION BOXES: A. Double Entry Power Connection Kit Raychem JBM, or single entry if not a dual system. B. Junction boxes for installation in Class 1 Div II shall be approved for that service.


260507-4 81799_8320

2.06 INDIVIDUAL PIPE TEMPERATURE AND AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

A. Furnish as indicated. B. NEMA 4X enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Parallel Circuit, Jacketed Heating Cable:

1. Install two cables per pipe. 2. Cut to length as required for pipe lengths. 3. Secure to metal pipe with high-temperature glass tape. 4. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 5. Wrap all valves and pumps. 6. No spiraling is allowed. 7. Terminate heater cable to allow monitoring of entire heater circuit. 8. No tees in heater cable will be allowed. 9. Turn over excess cable to Owner after completion of installation. 10. No splicing allowed.

B. Post caution signs to identify the presence of electrically heated lines, along each line at visible locations not to exceed 25-foot intervals.

C. Control Panels, Power Junction Boxes, and Temperature Transmitters: 1. Install at required locations. 2. Install on wall or column. 3. Install floor-mounted control panels on concrete pads furnished by this Contract.

3.02 TESTING A. All heater cables shall be meggered. The following separate field megger readings shall be

taken on each self-regulating heater cable: 1. Received at jobsite before installation. 2. After installation, but before insulation is applied. 3. After insulation has been installed.

B. All three of the above field megger readings shall be greater than 20 megohms. Otherwise, the heater cable is not acceptable and shall be replaced.

C. Field megger tests shall be recorded for each heater cable, and certified reports shall be submitted to the Owner.


81799_8320 260551-1

SECTION 260551 - ALTERNATING CURRENT ELECTRIC MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes alternating current electric motors required to drive the equipment

furnished under this Contract. B. Except as otherwise specified in the driven equipment Divisions, all alternating current motors

other than valve and gate motor operators (and special application motors shall be as specified in this SECTION.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment: SECTION 260100. 2. Vertical In-Line Pumps: SECTION 485422.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Design, fabricate, assemble, and test equipment and materials to conform to the following

codes and standards: B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):

1. 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C50.41 Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations. 2. 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 3. 112 - Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 4. 429 - Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of Sealed Insulation Systems for

AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-Wound, Pre-Insulated Stator Coils for Machines 6900V and below.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. MG 2 - Safety Standard for Construction, and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use

of Electric Motors and Generators. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 1004 - Standard for Electric Motors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in SECTION 013300.

1. Submittals required include, but are not limited to, the following items: 2. Outline drawing for each group of identical motors. 3. Nameplate data for each group of identical motors rated 460 volts and below, including

the following data: 4. Manufacturer's name and serial number. 5. Manufacturer's type and frame designation. 6. Horsepower output. 7. Time rating. 8. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed. 9. Insulation system designation. 10. Temperature rise and method of measurement. 11. RPM at rated load. 12. Frequency. 13. Number of phases.

SECTION 260551 - ALTERNATING CURRENT ELECTRIC MOTORS: continued

260551-2 81799_8320

14. Rated-load amperes. 15. Voltage. 16. Code letter for locked-rotor kVA. 17. Design letter for polyphase integral-horsepower motors. 18. Nominal efficiency for motors rated 1 through 199 horsepower. 19. Service factor. 20. For motors equipped with thermal protectors, the words "thermally protected." 21. For motors to be installed for inverter service, the words “inverter duty.”

B. Additional data for each group of identical motors rated above 100 horsepower: 1. Acceleration time with connected load. 2. Allowable locked rotor time. 3. Starting capabilities. 4. Thermal limit curve, superimposed on time-current curves during acceleration of the

driven equipment at rated voltage and at minimum specified starting voltage. 5. Torque and speed curves. 6. Perform the following factory tests on each motor rated 460 volts and below in

conformance with NEMA MG 1 and IEEE 112: a. No-load current and speed at normal voltage and frequency. b. High potential test. c. Other standard factory tests.

7. For each 460-volt motor rated 200 horsepower and larger, certificate of completion of factory tests.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Motors rated 460 volts and below shall be as manufactured by one or more of the following:

1. General Electric Company. 2. WEG Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. U.S. Electrical Motors. 5. ABB Baldor. 6. TECO-Westinghouse. 7. Engineer-approved equal.

2.02 GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: A. Motors shall be continuous-duty (unless otherwise specified) powerhouse type suitable for a

powerhouse environment where moderately abrasive conductive dusts and high humidity are present.

B. Motors shall be self-ventilated. C. Motors shall be designed for full voltage starting. D. Motors shall be suitable for operation at an altitude specified in SECTION 011100. E. Indoor motors shall be suitable for continuous operation at an ambient temperature specified in

SECTION 011100 unless otherwise specified. F. All motors shall have squirrel-cage rotors. G. The nameplate horsepower rating of each motor at 1.0 service factor shall equal or exceed the

horsepower required to drive the connected equipment under the design conditions specified and within normal operating ranges. For each motor furnished, the nameplate horsepower


81799_8320 260551-3

rating multiplied by the service factor shall equal or exceed the horsepower required to drive the connected equipment under any operating condition.

2.03 MOTORS RATED 1/2-HORSEPOWER AND SMALLER: A. Rated 115 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. B. Service factor of 1.0. C. The torque characteristics of each motor at all voltages from 90 to 110% rated voltage shall be

as required to accelerate the motor and driven equipment to full speed without damage to the motor or the driven equipment.

D. All windings shall be copper. Aluminum windings will not be accepted. E. Insulation shall be Class B or Class F, with Class B temperature rise in accordance with

NEMA MG 1. F. Enclosures shall be fabricated of steel. G. Horizontal motors shall be mounted on a common baseplate with the driven equipment. H. Manual reset thermal overload protection shall be furnished integral to each motor. I. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated. J. Enclosures for indoor service shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated. K. Enclosures for outdoor service shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated, dust ignition-proof,

with an external surface temperature limiting device wired into the motor power leads.

2.04 MOTORS RATED 3/4- THROUGH 200 HORSEPOWER: A. Rated 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. B. Service factor of 1.15 for all enclosures except for explosion-proof or dust ignition-proof

enclosures which shall have a service factor of 1.0. C. Enclosures shall be fabricated of cast iron or steel. D. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated or totally enclosed fan cooled. E. Enclosures for outdoor service shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated or totally enclosed fan

cooled. F. Bearings shall be antifriction type, and shall have an ABMA L-10 rating life of not less than

80,000 hours at rated speed, and under the radial and/or thrust loadings encountered within normal operating ranges. The thrust loading corresponding to an ABMA L-10 rating life of 5,000 hours at rated speed shall not be exceeded under any operating condition of the motor or the driven equipment.

G. Bearings shall be insulated when required to allow for inverter duty operation or to prevent bearing or shaft damage due to stray shaft currents.

H. Each horizontal motor shall be mounted on a common baseplate with the driven equipment, or shall be furnished with separate sole plates and sub-sole plates to permit removal of the motor without disturbing the alignment of the driven equipment.

I. Furnish space heaters for all outdoor motors rated 25 horsepower and above. Space heaters shall be rated 120 volts, single phase, 60 hertz.

J. Additional requirements for motors rated 3/4- through 200 horsepower: 1. The torque characteristics of each motor at all voltages from 90 to 110% rated voltage

shall be as required to accelerate the motor and driven equipment to full speed without damage to the motor or the driven equipment.

2. Insulation shall be Class F, with Class B temperature rise at rated horsepower in accordance with NEMA MG 1 unless specified elsewhere.

3. Where combined motor and driven equipment sound levels are specified for items of equipment, systems, or areas, motor sound levels shall be coordinated with driven equipment sound levels to meet the overall sound levels specified. The motor "A"


260551-4 81799_8320

weighted sound pressure level shall not in any event exceed 90 dB when measured at a reference distance of 1 meter per IEEE 85.

4. The efficiency of each horizontal single-speed motor shall not be less than that indicated in Table 12-11 of NEMA MG1.

K. Motors shall be of special high efficiency and high power factor design, including the following design features: 1. Low loss lamination steel. 2. Increased stator and rotor length. 3. Increased winding cross section. 4. High efficiency cooling fan design. 5. Optimized slot configuration and air gap.

L. Unless otherwise specified, the efficiency of each motor shall meet or exceed all NEMA Premium Requirements for energy efficiency, with efficiency values certified by NEMA MG1.12.53, both A and B Standards.

M. Information submitted with the proposal for each motor shall include minimum guaranteed efficiency based on tests performed in accordance with IEEE 112, Method B, with accuracy improvement by segregated loss determination including stray load loss measurement. Information submitted with the proposal shall include percent efficiency and percent power factor at full load, 3/4-load, and 1/2-load.



81799_8320_283100 283100-1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION & GAS MONITOR SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of fire and gas alarm

system equipment. It shall include but not be limited to alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, auxiliary control devices, monitoring modules and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. All Sections of DIVISION 26. 2. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: SECTION 210500. 3. Fire-Suppression Piping: SECTION 211000

1.02 REFERENCES A. Applicable Standards shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. National Electrical Contractors’ Association (NECA): a. 1 – Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

2. National Electrical Manufactueres’ Association (NEMA): a. 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC) b. 72 – National Fire Alarm Code

4. Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL): a. 38 – Standard for Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems b. 268 – Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems c. 268A – Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application d. 464 - Standard for Safety Audible Signal Appliances – latest Edition e. 486A-486B – Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors f. 639 – Standard for Safety Intrusion-Detection Units g. 864 – Standard for Safety Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems h. 1604 - Standard for Safety Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and II, Division

2, and Class III Hazardous (Classified) Locations

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building (HVAC) automation control system. B. PCS: Facility programmable logic controller (PLC) based Plant Control System which includes

monitoring, control, and alarm functions. C. FACP: Fire alarm control panel. D. LED: Light-emitting diode. E. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. F. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. Furnish and install the door access control. Coordination of the access control with the fire

detection system.

SECTION 283100 – FIRE DETECTION & GAS MONITOR SYSTEMS: continued

283100-2 81799_8320_283100

B. Furnish and install the video surveillance system. C. Termination of the multi-mode fiber connection in the sub-FACP.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Zone Descriptions

1. Power Block Building a. Electrical Room b. Battery Room c. Mechanical Room d. Riser Room e. Engine Halls f. Control Room g. Comm Room h. Conference Room i. Break Room j. Offices k. Locker Rooms, Janitor Closet, Toilet, Closet

B. Fire alarm and detection system: 1. The fire alarm system shall monitor the manual pull stations, fire detectors, gas detectors,

heat detectors, overhead door “closed door” detection, and suppression systems and control the notification appliances in the PCS.

2. Sequence of Operations shall be as indicated on Drawing FA100. 3. Any ALARM, TROUBLE, or SUPERVISORY condition shall initiate an alert from the

FACP to the PCS. Plant operators shall be capable of clearing only TROUBLE or SUPERVISORY conditions before the time delay has expired.

4. Activation of an addressable manual break glass pull station, and/or a detector, and/or a water flow switch in a zone as defined above shall initiate an ALARM condition. On an ALARM condition the following operations shall occur: a. Strobes and/or horn/strobes shall operate throughout the entire plant alerting the

occupants. b. An alarm signal shall be sent to the FACP indicating the zone originating the signal. c. A “smoke” signal shall be provided from the FACP to the respective air handling or

HVAC system serving the zone associated with the manual glass pull station, detector, or water flow switch. A manual signal shall be provided on the FACP for smoke clearing of each individual HVAC system or engine hall by firefighters. The “smoke signal” action shall override the operation of the HVAC BAS system serving the zone where the ALARM signal originates.

d. A zone common alarm signal shall be sent to the PCS from the FACP. e. A zone common alarm signal in either engine hall shall be sent from the FACP to

the PCS upon any ALARM condition in either engine hall. f. Door close signals to all of the overhead doors UL rated release devices located in

the zone to release (close) the door. 5. A device malfunction, loss of signal, or loss of power supply shall cause the system to

enter the TROUBLE condition. 6. Any ALARM, TROUBLE, or SUPERVISORY condition shall initiate an alert from the

FACP to the PCS. Plant operators shall be capable of clearing only TROUBLE or SUPERVISORY conditions before the time delay has expired.

C. Gas Monitor Detection System:


81799_8320_283100 283100-3

1. Activation of a gas monitor at 10% of LEL in an engine hall shall initiate an ALARM condition and notification in the FACP. On a 10% of LEL ALARM condition the following operations shall occur: a. All horn/strobes shall operate throughout the zone which is serviced by the gas

monitor. b. For an activation of a gas monitor in the Power Block Building engine hall, a 10%

of LEL signal shall be sent from the FACP to the PCS. 2. Activation of a gas monitor at 20% of LEL in the engine hall shall initiate an ALARM

condition and notification in the FACP. On a 20% of LEL ALARM condition the following operations shall occur: a. All horn/strobes shall operate throughout the entire Power Block Building. b. For an activation of a gas monitor in the Power Block Building engine hall, a 20%

of LEL signal shall be sent from the FACP to the PCS to shut down the engines in the engine hall with the ALARM condition and close the fire safe fuel gas valves serving each engine hall.

3. Activation of a hydrogen monitor at 10% of LEL in a battery room shall initiate an ALARM condition. On an ALARM condition the following operations shall occur: a. All horn/strobes shall operate throughout the entire facility. b. A 10% of LEL signal shall be sent from the FACP to the PCS.

4. A device malfunction or loss of signal shall cause the system to enter the TROUBLE condition.

1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NFPA 72. B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct Smoke Detectors. 5. Infrared / ultraviolet flame detectors. 6. Water flow switch

C. Gas alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. Gas monitors

1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Colors for detection and annunciation devices

located in occupied spaces shall be subject to approval. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at least 4 years

of current experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems. Professional Engineer shall be registered in Kansas as a Fire Protection Engineer.

b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III. c. The Registered Professional Engineer may perform all required items under this

specification. The NICET Fire Alarm Technician shall perform only the items allowed by the specific category of certification held.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.


283100-4 81799_8320_283100

3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and

sizes. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and

for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code. 6. Batteries: Size calculations for UPS. 7. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power

calculation, and single-line connection diagram. 8. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.

Show size and route of cable and conduits. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner’s manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Engineer for review.

G. Documentation: 1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. a. Hard copies on paper to Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supervisor certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level II. Installers certified

by NICET as Fire Alarm Level II. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment (excluding FACP):

a. Edwards Systems Technology Inc. b. Faraday, LLC. c. Federal Signal Corporation. d. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a GE-Honeywell Company. e. Fire-Lite Alarms; a GE-Honeywell Company. f. Gamewell Company (The). g. Grinnell Fire Protection; a Tyco International Company. h. Harrington Signal, Inc.


81799_8320_283100 283100-5

i. NOTIFIER; a GE-Honeywell Company. j. Protectowire Company, Inc. (The). k. Radionics; a division of Detection Systems, Inc.; a member of the Bosch Group. l. SAFETECH International, Inc. m. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; a Cerberus Division. n. Silent Knight; a GE-Honeywell Company. o. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company. p. Vision Systems – VESDA; a member of Vision Systems Group (Air sampling

smoke detection equipment) 2. Wire and Cable:

a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

2.02 FACP A. General Description:

1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.

b. Temperature sensors and gas monitors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment. B. Manufacturer

1. Simplex Grinnell. 2. NOTIFIER. 3. Approved equal.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands. 3. FACP addressible points interaction matrix will be shown on the Contract Drawings.

D. Circuits: 1. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A. 2. Actuation of alarm notification appliances shall occur within 10 seconds after the

activation of an initiating device. 3. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical

equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause mechanical equipment to shut down.

E. System Outputs: 1. All system outputs for PCS communication or for ventillation control shall be provided

as Form C contacts or adjustable Form A/B contacts with the following ratings: a. Minimum voltage rating: 30VDC/120VAC. b. Minimum current rating: 5 Amps.

F. Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.


283100-6 81799_8320_283100

2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.

3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

G. Gas Detection Alarm Verification: 1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the

detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

H. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in one or more of the following: temporal pattern, complying with ANSI S3.41; 60 beats per minute, march-time pattern; 120 beats per minute, march-time pattern.

I. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated ac UPS power supply.

J. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote annunciators after initiating devices are restored to normal.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

K. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset time delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

L. Primary Power: external 120VAC power supply. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal shall be powered by the FACP power supply.

1. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."

M. Secondary Power: Integral battery system for each FACP; sized, installed, and tested in accordance with NFPA 72. Batteries shall be sealed lead-acid.

N. Communications: 1. FACPs placed in both buildings shall communicate via fiber-optic cable in accordance

with NFPA 72. Contractor shall furnish and install communications cards and, if required, media converters, to allow for direct serial connection between FACPs. All functionality, ALARM, SUPERVISORY, and TROUBLE signals shall annuniciate at both FACPs.

2. Communications shall be 50/125µm (OM2). O. Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories. 2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system

wiring external to the building housing the FACP. P. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass

cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate


81799_8320_283100 283100-7

response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.03 GAS MONITORS & TRANSMITTERS A. Application:

1. All natural gas monitors shall meet the following requirements for an infrared combustible sensor/transmitter type; explosion-proof enclosure; condulet mounting.

2. Natural gas monitors shall be capable of 0 – 100% LEL gas detection. 3. Monitors shall be factory set to provide an external alarm signal at 10% of LEL and 20%

of LEL for natural gas (methane). B. Sensor/Transmitter Requirements:

1. Catalytic Bead Type Combustible Sensor/Transmitter: a. The catalytic bead type combustible sensor must have a demonstrated resistance to

degradation of silicones and reduced sulfur gases. b. The catalytic combustible sensor/transmitter shall detect for an above 100%LEL

condition (over-range). This condition must be indicated on the front panel LCD. c. The interconnect wiring from the combustible transmitter to the sensor shall be a 5-

wire cable. 2. Infrared Combustible Sensor/Transmitter:

a. The infrared combustible sensor must be capable of calibration without gas. The sensor/transmitter must be capable of performing a full calibration by zero adjustment only.

b. The sensor/transmitter shall detect for an above 100% LEL condition (over-range). This condition must be indicated on the front panel LCD.

c. The sensor/transmitter shall not contain a flashback arrestor / frit. d. The sensor/transmitter must allow for a gas check without alternate calibration / gas

check fittings or cap. 3. Electrochemical (Toxic and Oxygen) Sensors/Transmitters:

a. The electrochemical sensor/transmitters shall not require the periodic addition of reagents.

b. The interconnect wiring from the electrochemical transmitter to the sensor shall be a 5-wire cable.

C. Sensor/Transmitter Operating Requirements: 1. Operating Voltage – The sensor/transmitter can operate between 7-30 VDC. 2. Sensor/transmitter electronics shall consist of one PCB. This PCB shall offer

expandability to allow for optional LED’s and relays. 3. The single PCB shall not require tools for installation or removal. 4. The single PCB must be self-aligning in the enclosure. 5. Sensor/transmitter shall require the following wiring configurations:

a. 3-wire cable for all combustible units (configured with or without LED or relay options).

6. Sensor/transmitter shall allow for optional reset connector for resetting latched alarms. 7. Set-up and start-up of the sensor/transmitter will be so that the enclosure need not be

opened during this process. 8. Sensor/transmitter shall be factory calibrated, ready for use out of the box. A gas check is

all that is required to ensure proper operation. 9. Sensor/transmitter shall contain no pots, jumpers or switches. 10. Sensor/transmitter output signal shall be 4 to 20mA. The combustible sensor/transmitter

will be a sourcing type of signal capable of operating into a 600-ohm load. The toxic gas or oxygen sensor/transmitter will operate on a 2-wire or 3-wire current loop.


283100-8 81799_8320_283100

D. Sensor/Transmitter Display: 1. There will be a local display indicating the gas type being monitored and the

concentration of gas present. The display will alternate between the gas type (1 second) and gas concentration (5 seconds). The display will be an integral part of the sensor/transmitter enclosure. The display will be visible from a minimum of 5 feet and will be present always, and will not require being turned on or off. This readout will be three, one half-inch (3 1/2") digit Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD).

2. Sensor/transmitter display shall indicate all diagnostic check/fault conditions with a scrolling message detailing the condition. Error codes shall not be used.

3. Sensor/transmitter will display 3 levels of alarm. Alarm levels will be adjustable by means of a hand held infrared controller.

E. Smart Sensor Technology: 1. Sensors shall be contained in sensor modules mounted external to the main enclosure. All

sensor modules shall have the capability of replacement while the unit is under power (hazardous areas) without the need for tools.

2. Sensor modules shall contain all relevant sensor information within the module. This information shall include sensor manufacturer date, gas type, gas range, calibration data, and default relay parameters.

3. Sensor module shall store all calibration data so that the module may be calibrated off site and installed in the field without the necessity of re-calibration. The sensor module shall not require a battery or power source to store this data.

F. LED / Relay Options: 1. Sensor/transmitter shall have LED’s, viewable from 50 feet, minimum. The LED’s shall

operate as follows: a. Solid green LED – normal operation (measure mode). b. Solid amber LED – 10% of LEL alarm condition. c. Blinking red LED – fault condition. d. Solid red LED – 20% of LEL alarm condition.

2. Sensor/transmitter shall have relays. Relays shall be compatible with the FACP signal voltage and shall be single-pole, double-throw and consist of three for alarm levels and one for fault. All relay contact activation will be monitored. If the relay cannot activate for any reason, the trouble relay will change state. All relays shall be field selectable through a non-intrusive hand-held wireless remote control unit (Controller). Selectable features include: a. Alarm level. b. Latching / Non-latching. c. Upscale / Downscale. d. Normally-opened / Normally-closed. e. Energized / De-energized.

G. Other Features: 1. Sensor/transmitter shall allow for full range scaling of the 4-20mA output signal. 2. Sensor/transmitter will be capable of storing and displaying average, minimum and

maximum gas concentrations over selected periods of time. 3. The sensor/transmitter will give an indication of when sensor is nearing the end of its

useful life by means of the front panel LCD. This indication that the sensor is nearing its useful life will be based on the sensor output. It shall not be based on the time the sensor was in service.

4. The sensor/transmitter units can be located remote from a monitor/readout unit by up to 4,000 feet via proper gauge wire.

H. Sensing Element Warranty:


81799_8320_283100 283100-9

1. All sensing elements (sensors) will have a minimum useful life of one year. The supplier will provide replacement sensors at no charge for any sensor that does not meet the minimum requirement.

I. Sensor Enclosure Parameters: 1. General-purpose Sensor/Transmitter:

a. Sensor/transmitter will be a plastic enclosure designed to meet NEMA 4X requirements.

2. Explosion-proof Sensor/Transmitter: a. The sensor/transmitter shall be in a 316 stainless steel enclosure suitable for location

in Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D classified areas. b. The enclosure shall have a minimum of four entries, allowing for flexible mounting

options for sensor, power, signal, and optional relay wiring. c. The enclosure shall offer a means to mount without using an entryway.

J. Sensor/Transmitter Single Condulet Mounting: 1. Sensor/transmitter will be mounted in a single condulet. The back portion of the

enclosure shall be separate from the electronics, allowing for mounting and wiring of the unit without the electronics present.

K. Sensor/Transmitter Remote Sensor Mounting: 1. The sensor portion of the sensor/transmitter unit will be capable of being able to be

remotely mounted from the electronics and display. The separate sensor enclosure will be able to be mounted up to one hundred (100) feet from the main enclosure.

2. The sensor housing for the explosion-proof gas monitor will be in an enclosure suitable for location in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D classified areas.

3. A two twisted pair cable will connect the sensor housing and the calibration electronics. 4. The readout portion of the sensor/transmitter shall have a display of the concentration of

gas present. The display will be visible from a minimum of 5 feet and will be present at all times. It will not be required to be turned on or off. This readout will be three, one half inch (3 -1/2") digit Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD).

L. Installation and mounting hardware: 1. A mounting strap shall be used which mounts the sensor/transmitter to a wall or similar

structure. 2. The mounting strap shall attach to the sensor/transmitter via two tapped and threaded

holes on the rear of the sensor/transmitter. There shall be no brackets or clamps to secure this strap to the sensor/transmitter.

M. Approvals: 1. The explosion-proof infrared monitor shall have UL Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C,

and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G approval. N. Non-intrusive Calibration Capability:

1. All sensor/transmitters can be calibrated without opening any enclosures. 2. By means of a non-intrusive hand held wireless remote control unit, the

sensor/transmitter will enter the calibration mode. The display of the sensor/transmitter will instruct the user on when to apply zero and span gas. The sensor/transmitter will automatically adjust its internal settings to the proper calibration values without further intervention by the user. Upon completion of a successful calibration, the sensor transmitter will exit the calibration mode. Date stamp of last successful calibration will be retained in the sensor/transmitter internal memory, with capability to be displayed on LCD. If calibration is unsuccessful for any reason, the display must show an unsuccessful calibration attempt and revert to its previous calibration settings. Use of flashlight type devices, magnets or clamp-on devices to achieve calibration is not acceptable. The


283100-10 81799_8320_283100

acceptable method uses a transmitter, which employs a digitally encoded infrared light beam.

3. A non-intrusive hand held wireless remote control will let the user perform sensor zeroing, calibration and setting the multiplex address, and activate all functions and features of the sensor/transmitter. The sensor/transmitter will not be affected by low level ambient light either natural or man-made.

O. Manufacturer Capability Requirements – As a minimum, the Gas Monitoring Equipment manufacturer must meet the following requirements.

1. The manufacturer must be capable of supplying all equipment used to check or calibrate the sensor/transmitter units.

2. The manufacturer must be capable of providing on site service with factory trained personnel.

3. The manufacturer must be capable of providing on site training for owner/operator.

2.04 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in

contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism pull lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Outdoor Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.05 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. General Description:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

b. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 10 feet (3 m) according to UL 464. c. Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20

deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be

settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C).


81799_8320_283100 283100-11

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm)

smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. C. Ionization Smoke Detector:

1. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot (0.0016 and 0.0056 percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

D. Coordinate paragraph and subparagraphs below with Drawings for power supply and FACP connections.

E. Beam-Type Smoke Detector: Each detector shall consist of a separate transmitter and receiver, and shall have the following features:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Adjustable Sensitivity: At least six sensitivity levels, settable at the receiver, measured as

percent of obscuration. 3. Two selectable alarm delay settings, allowing each to be associated with a corresponding

sensitivity. F. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a laser-based

photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control unit. 1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Pipe Network: CPVC tubing draws air from sampling holes to detector. Tubing shall be

as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be UL 1887 listed.. 3. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam. Sensitivity

adjustable to a minimum of three preset values. 4. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static pressure of 0.1-inch

wg (25 Pa) at all sampling ports. 5. Control Unit: Single or multizone unit as indicated. Provides same system power supply,

supervision, and alarm features as specified for the central FACP plus separate trouble indication for airflow and detector problems.

6. Signals to the Central FACP: Any type of local system trouble is reported to the central FACP as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to the central FACP as separately identified zones. Alarm levels less than 0.625 % obscuration per foot shall report as a supervisory signal. Alarms levels greater than 0.625% obscuration per foot shall report as alarm signals.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011

percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 2. Ionization Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions.

b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot (0.0016 and 0.0056 percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

3. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP.


283100-12 81799_8320_283100

5. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector.

The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X. 6. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.06 HEAT DETECTORS A. General: UL 521 listed. B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57

deg C) or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 3. Application: Unfinished room.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 90 deg F (36 deg C).

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Finish: Outer assembly furnished to cover sensing elements and wiring, suitable for a

finished (painted walls and suspended ceiling) room. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP. 4. Application: Finished room.

D. Heat Detector, Linear Fixed-Temperature Type 1. Mounting: Non-metallic fastener. 2. Shall communicate normal or alarm condition to the FACP. 3. Application: GSU Transformers

a. Suitable for temperatures exceeding up to and exceeding 105°C 4. Acceptable Products

a. Technoswitch Protectowire Model No. PW356-EPR

2.07 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system

connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly. B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the bell. 10-inch (254-mm) size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are weatherproof where indicated.


81799_8320_283100 283100-13

C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. E. Horns (non-engine hall applications): Electric-vibrating-polarized type, red housing, 24-V dc;

with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured at 10 feet (3 m), reverberant from the horn.

F. Horns (located in engine halls): low current, high performance, high decibel type, ratcheted swivel stainless steel mount and hardware, UL 464 listed, sound-pressure level 109 dBA measured at 10 feet (3m) per IEC 268, 24-V dc, integral matching ransformer with tap ranges matched to the acoustical rating of the horn, GRP UV stable corrosion-free flamepath housing, frequency response 400Hz to 8kHz.

G. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: 110 candela. 2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

H. Voice/Tone Speakers: 1. UL 1480 listed. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 4. Mounting: Flush, semi-recessed, or surface mounted; bidirectional as indicated. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker

location.

2.08 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble

indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush and/or Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls

with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

2.09 SYSTEM PRINTER A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.

2.10 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or

other device requiring protection. 1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of the device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.11 WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,

Article 760, and Division 26 requirements. 1. Strobe circuits shall be wired Class A. 2. Speaker circuits shall be wired Class A.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: 1. Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG and/ or size recommended by system

manufacturer.


283100-14 81799_8320_283100

2. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FHJR, and complying with requirements in UL 1709 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

3. Signaling Line Circuits continuing alarms, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be Class A.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 90 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multi-conductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN

conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of the duct. B. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.

Install on flush-mounted back boxes. C. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-

flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. D. Visual strobes shall be located throughout the zones as shown on the plans. E. Combination Visual strobes and horn units shall be located throughout the zones as shown on the

plans. F. Smoke, gas, photoelectric, ionization and infrared/ultra-violet detectors shall be located

throughout the zones as shown on the plans. G. Manual pull stations shall be located throughout the zones as shown on the plans.

3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NFPA70. 2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway. 1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system

shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. Conduit shall be a minimum 3/4 inch EMT.

2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.


81799_8320_283100 283100-15

E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals in accordance with NFPA 70 and

NFPA 72. B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP. C. Label power supply breaker "FIRE ALARM." D. Label air sampling piping in accordance with NFPA 72 and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the

form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.

Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at Level II. a. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.

3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72. a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.

5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.05 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.

C. Adjust VESDA smoke detection alert/action and alarm levels to account for normal background levels after minimum 30 days of normal building zone operation.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices.


81799_8320_485715 485715-1

SECTION 485715 - PIPING EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide all piping specials in accordance with the Specifications and the following:

1. Furnish, install, and test all specials complete and ready for operation. 2. Furnish complete with all necessary miscellaneous pipe, valves, unions, fittings,

auxiliaries, and isolating valves required, whether indicated on the drawings or not. 3. Furnish accessories such as gauge glasses, pressure gauges, and other instruments of

equal quality to those similar items which are specified in DIVISION 25. 4. Furnish electric motors in general conformance with the requirements of DIVISION 26,

and the specific requirements which are specified herein. 5. Insulate and cover in accordance with the pipe system to which they attach. 6. Include all necessary supports, foundations, and equipment pads including anchor bolts,

grout, shims, dowels, and concrete as required by the manufacturer, as specified, and as indicated on the Drawings. All supports, foundations, and Equipment pads are subject to Engineer's approval.

7. Support all piping connected to the specials with necessary hanger material conforming to SECTION 485940. Support the pipe to provide forces and moments which are acceptable to the specials manufacturer.

B. Piping specials are designated as shown below: 01BAH-SSS-999A 01 Engine Number (00 for Common systems) BAH System Designation SSS Special Tag 999 Special Number A Special Number Suffix

These designations are used in the Specifications and Drawings.

C. Piping connected to specials which must vary from the Drawings because of requirements peculiar to the particular Equipment furnished, shall be furnished and installed as required to make a complete and workable installation without additional cost to Owner; this requirement shall include changes required in the piping systems because of design changes made by the manufacturer between the time of design and the time of installation, and because of Equipment furnished of different manufacturer or type than that specified.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Codes and Standards:

1. Design, fabricate, assemble, install, and test Equipment and Materials in accordance with, but not limited to, the following codes and standards: a. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

(1) B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping. (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): (1) B16.25 – Butt-Welding Ends. (2) B16.34 – Valves, Flanged and Butt-Welding End. (3) B16.5 – Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. (4) B31.1 – Code for Pressure Piping – Power Piping.

SECTION 485715 – PIPING EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED: continued

485715-2 81799_8320_485715

(5) S1.4 – Specifications for Sound Level Meters. (6) ANSI/FCI 70-2 – Control Valve Seat Leakage.

c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): (1) A216 – Carbon Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-

Temperature Service. (2) A217 – Martensitic Stainless Steel and Alloy Steel Castings for Pressure

Containing Parts Suitable for High Temperature Service.


1. A list of all piping specials by special number showing the manufacturer and the manufacturer's model or figure number as applicable.

2. Detail drawings and manufacturer's descriptions for each piping special as follows: a. Drawings showing general arrangement detail dimensions and all clearances

required for installation, operation, and maintenance. b. Details of all external connections which must be made. c. Electrical connection drawings for all Equipment requiring electrical connections

complete with schematic diagrams of internal wiring. d. Static and dynamic loadings. e. Certificates of completion of factory tests. f. Operation and maintenance data. g. An 8-1/2 x 11-inch drawing of the nameplate. h. Instruction books. i. Storage and installation instructions.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Experience:

1. All equipment and material furnished shall have an acceptable history of satisfactory reliable service for a period of at least three years at comparable temperature, pressure and design stress levels.

2. Newly developed equipment with less than three years' actual service will be considered from established manufacturers if it has been adequately tested, meets the requirements of this Contract, and is approved by the Engineer.

B. Factory Tests: 1. Conduct all standard factory tests and all tests required by the applicable codes and

standards. 2. Submit certificates of completion of factory tests as Submittals.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Suitably protect all Equipment and Material for storage at the jobsite. Seal all openings and do

not remove until Equipment is ready for connection. B. Tag all piping specials, including all components shipped loose, with the special number. C. Where spare, replacement, or additional parts are required for the piping specials, these items

shall be delivered to Owner immediately upon receipt at the jobsite. Parts shall be packaged and sealed for long-term storage and be securely and visibly labeled as to part, function, and name of Equipment to which they apply.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SECTION 485715 – PIPING EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED: continued

81799_8320_485715 485715-3

2.01 LIST AND DESCRIPTION OF PIPING SPECIALS: A. See attached Piping Specials List.


SPECIALS DATA SHEETS

Table of Contents Revision

S-1 Y-Type Strainers 0

S-4 Cartridge Filters 0

S-5 Air Coalescing Filters 0

S-7 Air Traps 0

S-11 Expansion Joints (Metal) Stainless Bellows 0

S-13 Flexible Metal Hoses 0

S-14 Flexible Rubber Hoses 0

S-31 Air Cocks 0

S-32 Water Hose Bibbs 0

S-34 Emergency Eyewash and Safety Shower Stations 0

S-44 Safety Valve or Relief Valve or Emergency Vent (Pressure) 0

S-51 Pressure - Regulating Valves 0

S-71 Weather Covers 0

S-72 Rupture Disk 0

S-75 Quick Connects 0

S-78 Electric Heaters 0

S-79 Fire Department Connections 0

Coffeyville Municipal Light Power

Project # 81799

Page 1 of 24 Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.


Rev Date By Checked

0 08/05/15 MRS VFR

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Zurn (Wilkins).

B. Armstrong.

C. Tyco (Yarway).

D. Mueller.

E. Leslie.

F. Tate Andale.

G. Approved Equal

2. Special Features Required:

A. Body rating shall be as listed in the table below. Flow arrow shall be cast in the body.

B. Baskets shall be stainless steel with the mesh as specified below.

C. Provide two baskets per strainer.

E. Provide blowdown connection with valves and piping the same size. Provide valve as specified in SECTION 485925.

F. Provide 1 inch plugged drain connection for basket strainers unless noted otherwise.

3. Installation Requirements:

A. Install as indicated and per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Strainers shall be installed with blowdown valves piped to a safe discharge point.

4. Design Parameters:

A. Design and furnish in accordance with the following schedules:

Body Basket Element

Nominal Pipe

Size (in)

Design

Pressure (psig)

Design

Temp. (°F)

Design

Flow Rate

(gpm) Fluid

ASTM Body

Material

Pressure

Class (lbs) Conn Type

Nominal

Blowdown

Conn. Size

(in)

ASTM

Material

Mesh

Opening

Size (in)

0 00FGS-STN-001 Y-Type 8 175 120 8400 SCFM Fuel Gas A216-WCB 150 Flanged 2 304 SS 0.062 MMFGS002

NOTES:

EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET S-1

Y-Type Strainers

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No.

Type or

Description

Design Conditions

P&ID No. Remarks


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 08/05/15 MRS VFR


A. Pall (Series 2618).

B. 3L Filters.

C. Allen Filter, Inc.

D. Keene Corporation.

E. Approved Equal.


A. Filter shall be single cartridge.

B. Each filter shall include, as a package, the following:

1. Full flow filter cartridges with a particle retention size rating of 5 microns.

2. Automatic air vent in upper compartment.

4. Cover lifting device.

5. One internal pressure relief valve for each compartment.

6. Two 1/2 inch NPT drains, one for inlet compartment and one for outlet compartment. Provide nipples and caps for drain connections.

7. One 2/3 inch NPT vent

C. The duplex arrangement shall include:

1. 3 inch crossover lines for inlet and outlet.

D. Filter housings shall be stamped and rated per ASME code.

E. Provide three sets of replacment filtering cartridges for each filter.



Nominal Pipe

Size (in)

Design Pressure

(psig)

Design Temp.

(°F)

Mesh

Size

Design Flow

Rate Fluid

Clean Filter

DP (psid)

Maximum

DP (psid) Conn Type Supply By Const. By

0 00LOT-FTR-001 1 3 145 210 - 60 gpm Lube Oil 5 10 Flanged 00LOT-030-3"-01SAS02-2" 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT002

0 00LOT-FTR-002 1 3 145 210 - 60 gpm Lube Oil 5 10 Flanged 00LOT-030-3"-01SAS02-2" 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT002

NOTES:


Cartridge Filters

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev. Tag No. No. Req'd

Pipeline Conditions Filter Element

Line No. P&ID No. Remarks


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 08/05/15 MRS VFR


A. Hankison Aerolescer Filters.

B. Engineer-approved equal.


A. Air coalescing filters shall have 1/2-inch NPT connections on inlet and outlet for pressure gauge connections. Connections shall be plugged.

B. Provide 1-inch NPT plugged drain connection.

C. Furnish with sufficient spare filter to refill each filter three times.

D. 5 psi maximum pressure drop at the rated capacity.

E. Air discharged from filter in normal operation shall contain a maximum of 0.1 ppm of oil by weight.



Nominal Pipe

Size (in)

Design Pressure

(psig)

Design Temp.

(°F)

Design Flow

Rate (scfm) Fluid

Clean Filter DP

(psid)

Maximum DP

(psid) Conn Type

0 00ACI-FLT-001 1 2" 145 165 350 Instrument Air 2 5 150# Flanged 00ACI-151-2"-01SAS02-0" MMACS001

Emergency

ACS to ACI

backup.

NOTES:


Air Coalescing Filters

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev. Tag No. No. Req'd

Pipeline Conditions Filter Element

Line No. P&ID No. Remarks


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Armstrong.

B. Sarco

C. Nicholson.

D. Engineer-Approved Equal


A. Air Traps

1. Body shall be of the material and rating listed in the respective Piping Material Specification.

2. Trap shall be constructed so that the entire operating element may be removed and replaced without removing the body from the line.

3. Trap shall have integral strainer. If integral strainer is not available, provide independent strainer of same body material and pressure class as strainer.

4. Trap shall be capable of discharging the capacity listed below at a pressure differential of one-half the maximum differential listed in the table below.

5. The trap shall be supplied with an external indicator that shows whether or not the trap is functioning.

6. Trap shall be capable of discharging two times the actual maximum condensate load listed below.

7. Valve and seat shall be hardened stainless steel.


A. Install traps with inlet and outlet shutoff valves as shown on the drawings and as specified in this Section and Section 485925.

B. Piping shall provide easy access to trap, allow repair or replacement with removal of a small amount of pipe, and provide adequate flexibility.

Nominal

Line

Size (in) Sch Fluid

ASTM

Material PM Spec

Conn.

Type

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp

(°F)

Design

Pressure

Differential (psi)

Design

Capacity

(lb/hr)

0 00ACI-TRP-001 1 Inverted Bucket 1/2 10S Condensate / Air A216-WCB 00SAL01 Flanged 145 165 125 - MMACI001 5.8320 5.8320

0 00ACI-TRP-002 1 Inverted Bucket 1/2 10S Condensate / Air A216-WCB 00SAL01 Flanged 145 165 125 - MMACI002 5.8320 5.8320

0 00ACS-TRP-001 1 Inverted Bucket 1/2 STD Condensate / Air A216-WCB 03CBS04 Flanged 480 165 435 - MMACS002 5.8320 5.8320

NOTES:

Constr. By Remarks


Air Traps

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev P&ID No. Supply ByTag No. No. Req'd

Type or

Description

Line Body Design Conditions


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Marquette Coppersmithing Co., Inc. - Marflex - Omega

B. Adsco-Corruflex.

C. Flexonics.

D. Pathway.

E. Atlantic.

F. Sola-Flex.

G. Ametek.


A. Control units where piping cannot be properly anchored. Units shall be complete with all required hardware to assure maximum axial movements are not exceeded.

B. Weld end preparations shall be machined and flanges shall be sized and drilled as required by corresponding Piping Material Specifications.

C. ASTM A312 Gr 304 stainless steel corrugations with stainless steel liners.

D. Provide single-ply double bellows.


A. Length of space in pipeline must equal design installation length of expansion joint.

B. The two sections of pipe which attach to either end of the expansion joint must be in alignment with each other.

C. Install as shown on the Drawings with all mating piping properly anchored and guided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Install in accordance with Installation Manual WDAAA116758 - Installation of Flexible Bellows and Hoses.

Rev Tag Number Fluid

Nominal

Diameter

Comp End

Prep

Flow Rate

(scfm)

Axial

Compress

(in)

Axial

Expand (in)

Lateral

Deflection

(in)

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp

(°F)

Reference

Drawing

Reference

Drawing

POS/Item No. Supply By

Construct

By P&ID No. Remarks

001BAG-EJ-001 Combustion Air DN600 Flanged LATER LATER LATER LATER 15 167 4V60B0082-2 0060B008202 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001


001SCR-EJ-001 Exhaust Gas DN800 Flanged LATER LATER LATER LATER 7 900 4V60B0133 0060B013303 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001


001SCR-EJ-003 Exhaust Gas DN1200 Flanged LATER LATER LATER LATER 7 900 DAAE067768 PAAE132512 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001






Expansion Joints (Metal) Stainless Bellows

Description

ISSUED FOR BID


Project # 81799



Rev Tag Number Fluid

Nominal

Diameter

Comp End

Prep

Flow Rate

(scfm)

Axial

Compress

(in)

Axial

Expand (in)

Lateral

Deflection

(in)

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp

(°F)

Reference

Drawing

Reference

Drawing

POS/Item No. Supply By

Construct

By P&ID No. Remarks

















Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. US Hose Corporation

B. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

C. Metraflex

D. Marquett Coppersmithing Co.


A. Flexible hose shall be annular 304 stainless steel corrugated metal hose with braided stainless steel wire covering.

B. Hose shall meet the pressure and temperature ratings listed in the table below.

C. Screwed end connections shall have one swivel end and floating flange connections shall be provided with one fixed and one floating flange.

3. Installation Requirements

A. Install metal hose with piping anchored and guided according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Installing in a tight bend is discouraged.



B. All DIN style flanges shall be manufacturered to PN40.

Fluid

Nominal

Diameter Installation Movement

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp.

(°F)

0 01AAU-FXH-101 Mech. Grip Urea 3/8" Straight Intermittent 145 120 Later Later Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001



0 00ACI-FXH-001 Flng / Thrd Instrument Air 2" Straight Intermittent 145 165 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001 Single Braid

0 00ACI-FXH-002 Flng / Thrd Instrument Air 2" Straight Intermittent 145 165 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001 Single Braid

0 01ACI-FXH-001 Threaded Instrument Air DN28 Straight Intermittent 145 165 4V60B0009 009460976 360 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001



0 01ACI-FXH-110 Mech. Grip Instrument Air 1/2" Straight Intermittent 145 165 Later Later Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001



0 00ACS-FXH-001 Flng / Thrd Starting Air 3/4" Straight Intermittent 480 165 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS001 Double Braid

0 00ACS-FXH-002 Flng / Thrd Starting Air 3/4" Straight Intermittent 480 165 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS001 Double Braid

0 01ACS-FXH-001 Flanged Starting Air DN65 Straight Intermittent 480 165 4V60B0097 PAAF026869 700 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001



0 01BAG-FXH-300 Flanged Condensate DN22 Straight Intermittent 15 167 4V60B0009-5 009460409 Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001



0 01CWM-FXH-111 Flanged Cooling Water 2" Straight Intermittent 145 230 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM003





Flexible Metal Hose

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No.

Comp. End

Prep

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Drawing

Reference Drawing

POS/Material No. Supply By

Construction

By P&ID No. Remarks

Overall Length

of Hose


Project # 81799



Fluid

Nominal


Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp.

(°F)Rev Tag No.

Comp. End

Prep

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Drawing

Reference Drawing


Construction

By P&ID No. Remarks

Overall Length

of Hose



























0 01FGS-FXH-001 Floating Flng. Fuel Gas DN100 Straight Intermittent 175 120 DBAC840071 PAAF194424 Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 01FGS-FXH-002 Floating Flng. Fuel Gas DN32 Straight Intermittent 175 120 DBAC779116 PAAF193734 Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 01FGS-FXH-300 Floating Flng. Fuel Gas DN48 Straight Intermittent 175 120 4V35A1224 PAAF008734 1000mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 01FGS-FXH-401 Floating Flng. Fuel Gas DN100 Straight Intermittent 175 120 V60B0092 PAAF026865 1235 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 02FGS-FXH-001 Flanged Fuel Gas DN100 Straight Intermittent 175 120 DBAC840071 PAAF194424 Later 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005


0 02FGS-FXH-300 Flanged Fuel Gas DN48 Straight Intermittent 175 120 4V35A1224 PAAF008734 1000mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 02FGS-FXH-401 Flanged Fuel Gas DN100 Straight Intermittent 175 120 V60B0092 PAAF026865 1235 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005



0 03FGS-FXH-300 Flanged Fuel Gas DN48 Straight Intermittent 175 120 4V35A1224 PAAF008734 1000mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 03FGS-FXH-401 Flanged Fuel Gas DN100 Straight Intermittent 175 120 V60B0092 PAAF026865 1235 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMFGS005

0 00FGS-FXH-101 Flanged Fuel Gas 1/2" Straight Intermittent 175 120 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS006




Project # 81799



Fluid

Nominal


Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp.

(°F)Rev Tag No.

Comp. End

Prep

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Drawing

Reference Drawing


Construction

By P&ID No. Remarks

Overall Length

of Hose














0 00FGS-FXH-120 Flanged Fuel Gas 1-1/4" Straight Intermittent 175 120 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS006

0 01SCR-FXH-402 Flanged Exhaust DN100 Straight Intermittent 7 900 Later Later 1235 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001



0 01WSW-FXH-100 LATER Service Water DN18 Straight Intermittent 150 120 4V60B0095 PAAE039298 1300 mm 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW002



0 01WSW-FXH-301 LATER

Condensate/Servic

e Water4" Straight Intermittent 80 230 N/A N/A 9" 5.8320 5.8320

MMWSW002


Condensate/Servic


MMWSW002


Condensate/Servic


MMWSW002


Condensate/Servic


MMWSW002


Condensate/Servic


MMWSW002


Condensate/Servic


MMWSW002

NOTES:


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR

1. Acceptible Manufacturers:

A. All Flexible Rubber Hose to be supplied by Wartsila.


A. Install hose as detailed on Drawing.

B. Install hose with piping anchored and guided according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Fluid Nominal Diameter

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp.

°F

0 01CWM-FXH-001 Flanged Cooling Water DN50 80 230 3V60D0025 006190043 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM001




0 01CWM-FXH-005 Flanged Cooling Water DN150 80 230 V60D0025 006190122 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM001



0 01CWM-FXH-008 Mech. Grip Cooling Water DN12 80 230 DBAA197884 PAAE095802 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM001






0 01CWM-FXH-014 Hose Clamps Cooling Water DN48 80 230 4V35A1224-2 0035A122402 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM001





























Flexible Rubber Hose

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No.

Comp. End

Prep

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Drawing

Reference Drawing

POS/Material No.

Construction

By P&ID No. RemarksSupply By


Project # 81799



Fluid Nominal Diameter

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp.

°FRev Tag No.

Comp. End

Prep

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Drawing

Reference Drawing

POS/Material No.

Construction

By P&ID No. RemarksSupply By


0 01LOT-FXH-001 Flanged Lube Oil DN200 145 210 3V60B0081 006190277 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT003


















NOTES:


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Coupling:

1. Dixon Valve (Model AB-7)

2. McMaster-Carr

3. Approved Equal

B. Cock Valve:

1. Crane (Model 9200 series)

2. Apollo

3. Approved equal.


A. Provide coupling half on each valve.

B. Air cocks shall be 3/4-inch quick-change coupling with intergral 3/4" bronze shufoff valve which automatically closes when coupling is not in use.

C. Coupling shall have nipple with 3/4-inch male pipe threads.


A. Furnish air cocks to be installed per standard detail at building column locations indicated.

B. Furnish 2 additional air cocks to be turned over to Owner.



PM Spec

Line Size

(in.)

Pressure Class

(lbs)

Design Press

(psig) Design Temp (°F)

0 00ACI-HB-101 1 00SAL01 3/4 150 145 165 00ACI-101-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMACI001 5.8320 5.8320 E9 MECH



0 00ACI-HB-104 1 00SAL01 3/4 150 145 165 00ACI-104-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMACI001 5.8320 5.8320 E5 EH



NOTES:

Building Column

Locations Remarks


Air Cocks

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Supply By

Construction

ByRev Tag No. No. Req'd

Pipeline Conditions

Line No. P&ID No.


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Coupling:

1. Dixon Valve (Model AB-7)

2. McMaster-Carr

3. Febco Hose Bib Vacuum Breaker (Model 765)

4. Approved Equal

B. Cock Valve:

1. Crane (Model 9200 series)

2. Apollo

3. Approved equal.


A. Hose bibb shall be 3/4" malleable iron coupling attached to 3/4" bronze valve.

B. Hose bibb shall be 3/4" hose bibb vacuum breaker attached to 3/4" valve with hose threads.


A. Furnish hose bibbs listed below to be installed per standard detail at locations indicated.

B. Furnish 2 additional hose bibbs to be turned over to Owner.



PM Spec

Adapter Size

(in.)

Pressure Class

(lbs)

Design Press


0 00WSW-HB-111 1 00SAL01 3/4 150 150 120 00WSW-111-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320 E9 MECH

0 00WSW-HB-112 1 00SAL01 3/4 150 150 120 00WSW-112-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320 E8 MECH

0 00WSW-HB-113 1 00SAL01 3/4 150 150 120 00WSW-113-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320 E5 EH



NOTES:

Building Column

Locations Remarks


Water Hose Bibbs

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Supply By

Construction

ByRev Tag No. No. Req'd

Pipeline Conditions

Line No. P&ID No.


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Bradley

B. Haws

C. Speakman Co.

D. Engineer-Approved Equal


A. Eyewash shall be equipped with a stay open hand- and foot-operated ball valve and stainless steel bowl.

B. Shower head shall be 10-inch deluge type with hand-open stay-open ball valve.

C. Provide flow control to assure safe, steady and adequate flow to the eyewash spray.

D. Equip the unit with an identification sign.

E. Each station shall be equipped with an internal flow switch.



B. Tie into water supply with galvanized pipe.

Nominal

Piping

Connection

Size (in)

(in.) Fluid Type

Design Press

(psig)

Design Temp

(°F)

0

00WSW-ESW-

001 1 1-1/4 Water 150 120 00WSW-115-1 1/4"-00SAL01-0" MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320

0

00WSW-ESW-

002 1 1-1/4 Water 150 120 00WSW-106-1-1/4"-00SAL01-2" MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320

0

00WSW-ESW-

003 1 N/A Water 150 120 N/A MMWSW002 5.8320 5.8320

NOTES:

Supply with electric water heater (Haws

Model 9325); Haws Model 8330 Eyewash &

Safety Shower

Haws Model 8710 Enclosed Eyewash &

Safety Shower

Haws Model 7500EB Portable Eyewash

RemarksRev Tag No. No. Req'd Line No. Supply By

Construction

By

Pipeline Conditions

P&ID No.


Emergency Eyewash and Safety Shower Stations

Description

ISSUED FOR BID


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Consolidated (1900, 1982, 1990, 19000 Series)

B. Farris

C. Crosby

D. Shand & Jurs

D. Approved Equal


A. Drill and face flanges to match the pipeline connection size and class listed.

B. Provide adaptors if required.

C. Valves shall pass full flow at 25% overpresure for liquid service and 10% overpressure for steam, air, and gas service.

D. Provide valves with closed bonnets to completely enclose spring.

E. Provide drain connections.

F. Provide internal bonnet vents or external vent to exhaust line.

H. Provide all valves with operating lifting gear.

I. Valves designated as "O"-Ring Seat Seal Valves shall be provided with PTFE "O-ring" seats for steam and water service between 40 and 500F (4 oC - 260

oC).

J. Balance bellows valves shall be provided whenever backpressure excceds 40% of the design inlet pressure setpoint.





Valve

Outlet

Connectio

n

ASTM

Material

O-Ring

Seat

Valves

(Yes/No)

Flow

Rate

(SCFM)

Set

Press

(psig)

Maximum

Over-pressure

(% of Set

Pressure)

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Operatin

g

Pressure

(psig)

Desig

n

Temp

(°F)

Operating

Temp

(°F)

Relieving

Temp

(°F)

Constant

Back-

pressure

(psig)

Variable

Back-

pressure

(psig) Class

Nom

Size

(in)

End

Conn

Preferred

Nominal

Size (in)

0 00ACI-SRV-001 Instrument Air A351-CF8M Yes - 135 10 145 125 165 100 100 0.5 0 150 1 MNPT 1-1/2 MMACI001 5.8320 5.8320 Consolidated 1982

0 00ACI-SRV-002 Instrument Air A351-CF8M Yes - 135 10 145 125 165 100 100 0.5 0 150 1 MNPT 1-1/2 MMACI002 5.8320 5.8320 Consolidated 1982

0 00ACI-SRV-003 Instrument Air A351-CF8M Yes 1000 145 10 145 125 165 100 100 0.5 0 150 1-1/2 Flanged 3 MMACS001 5.8320 5.8320 Consolidated 1900

0 00ACS-SRV-001 Starting Air A216 WCC Yes - 450 10 480 435 165 100 100 0.5 0 300 1-1/2 MNPT 2 MMACS002 5.8320 5.8320 Consolidated 1982

0 00FGS-SRV-455 Fuel Gas A216 WCC Yes 100 5 10 175 0.2 120 100 100 0.5 0 150 1 Flanged 2 MMFGS006 5.8320 5.8320 Consolidated 1900

0 00LOT-EV-001 Lube Oil 316 SS No - 0.5 10 1 0 150 100 100 0.5 0 150 6 Flanged 6 MMLOT001 5.2980 5.8320



NOTES:

Const.

By Remarks/Model No.


SAFETY VALVE OR RELIEF VALVE OR EMERGENCY VENT (Pressure)

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

P&ID No. Supply ByRev Tag No. Fluid

Body Pipeline Conditions Valve Inlet Connection


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Fisher Company.

B. Cla-Val.

C. Approved equal.


A. Valve shall be designed to conform with the Piping Material Specification in which it is to be installed and per SECTION 485925.

B. Pressure regulating valves shall be pilot-operated type.

C. Valves shall have replaceable seats and disc with adjustable handwheel or screw.


A. Install valves as indicated and per manufacturer's recommendations.



Pressure

Class

(lbs)

Valve

Size (in)

Body

Material Fluid

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp

(°F)

Inlet

Pressure

Range

(psig)

Outlet

Pressure

Range

(psig)

Setpoin

t (psig)

Design

Flow

(scfm)

Diaph

Materia

l

0 00ACI-BPRV-001 1 Flanged 150 3/4

A351-

CF8M

Instrument

Air 145 165 90-125 80-100 85 100 EPDM 00ACI-100-3/4"-00SAL01-0" MMACI001 5.8320 5.8320

0 00ACI-PRV-002 1 Flanged 150 2

A351-

CF8M

Instrument

Air 145 165 90-125 80-100 85 250 EPDM 00ACI-060-3"-01SAS02-0" MMACI002 5.8320 5.8320

0 00ACS-PRV-101 1 Flanged 300 3/4

A216-

WCB Starting Air 480 165 390-480 115-135 125 250 EPDM 00ACS-151-1-1/2"-03CBS04-0"MMACS001 5.8320 5.8320

0 00FGS-PRV-012 1 Flanged 150 4

A216-

WCB Fuel Gas 175 120 110-175 85-150 90 8400 Nitrile 00FGS-007-6"-01CSS01-0" MMFGS004 5.8320 5.8320

0 00FGS-PRV-054 1 Flanged 150 1-1/2

A216-

WCB Fuel Gas 175 120 110-150 1-3 2 12 Nitrile 00FGS-054-2"-01CSS01-0" MMFGS006 5.8320 5.8320

Fisher 299H with

3/4" orifice

0 00FGS-PRV-101 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-

WCB Fuel Gas 175 120 1-3 0.25-1 0.5 1 Nitrile 00FGS-101-1/2"-01CSS01-0" MMFGS006 5.8320 5.8320

0 00FGS-PRV-102 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-103 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-104 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-105 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-106 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-107 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-108 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-



Pressure-Regulating Valves

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No. Qty. End Prep

Body Pipeline Conditions

P&ID No.

Supply

By

Construct

By Remarks

Design Parameters

Line No.


Project # 81799



0 00FGS-PRV-109 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-110 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-111 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-112 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-113 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-114 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-115 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-116 1 Flanged 150 1/2

A216-


0 00FGS-PRV-120 1 Flanged 150 1-1/4

A216-

WCB Fuel Gas 175 120 1-3 0.25-1 0.5 0.6 Nitrile 00FGS-116-1/2"-01CSS01-0" MMFGS006 5.8320 5.8320

NOTES:

1) As required for service intended.


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. N/A


A. Install one cover per Rupture Disk as indicated on drawing MD410.


A. Design and furnish in accordance with the following schedules.

Fluid

Design

Pressure


0 01SCR-WC-001 Exhaust Gas 7 900 MMSCR001 5.8320 5.8320









NOTES:


Weather Covers

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No.

Pipeline Conditions

P&ID No. Supply By Construction By Remarks


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR


A. Fike Europe


A. Install as indicated on drawings and per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Supply each with a weather cover per Drawing MD410.



Fluid

Design Pressure

(psig) Design Temp (°F) Nominal Diameter

0 01SCR-RD-001 Flanged Exhaust Gas 7 900 DN1400 DBAC864755 MMSCR001 5.1210 5.8320

0 01SCR-RD-002 Flanged Exhaust Gas 7 900 DN1200 WDAAA27348 MMSCR001 5.1210 5.8320








NOTES:

Construction By


Rupture Disks

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

RemarksSupply ByRev Tag No. End Conn.

Pipeline Conditions

Reference Dwg P&ID No.


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 8/5/2015 MRS VFR

1. Acceptible Manufacturers:

A. Kamlok

B. Approved Equal


A. Use seal materials acceptable for service and approved by Engineer.

B. Shall not couple if the valve is open to prevent accidental spills.

C. Valve opens to flow when locked in place & closes securely when unlocked.

D. Provide caps for each male fitting.

E. Caps shall be stainless steel with rubber gasket & shall be attached to connection via chain.


A. Male end to be mounted on installed piping.



PM Spec Line Size (in) Fluid Line Number

Design Pressure

(psig) Design Temp (⁰F)

0 00AAU-QC-001 1 01SAS02 3 Urea 00AAU-001-3"-01SAS02-2" 145 120 MMAAU001 5.8320 5.8320 Supply Male End Only

0 00LOT-QC-001 1 01SAS02 3 Lube Oil 00LOT-030-3"-01SAS02-2" 145 210 MMLOT002 5.8320 5.8320 Supply Male End Only

0 00LOT-QC-002 1 01CSS01 3 Lube Oil 00LOT-025-3"-01CSS01-0" 145 210 MMLOT002 5.8320 5.8320 Supply Male End Only

0 01LOT-QC-100 1 N/A 40 mm Lube Oil N/A 145 210 MMLOT002 5.1210 5.8320 Supply Male End Only



0 01LOT-QC-300 1 01CSS01 1-1/2 Lube Oil 01LOT-300-1-1/2"-01CSS01-0" 145 210 MMLOT002 5.8320 5.8320 Supply Male End Only









NOTES:


Quick Connects

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Rev Tag No. No. Req'd

Pipeline Conditions

P&ID No. Supply By Construction By Remarks


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 08/05/15 MRS VFR


A. Chromalox

B. Watlow

C. Gaumer

D. CCI Thermal

E. Engineer-approved equal


A. Heater shall be designed such that it shall maintain the temperature of the fluid inside tank at the required setpoint. Heater sizing shall be based on tank design conditions listed below.

B. Heater power supply shall be 3-phase, 480 VAC, 60 Hz. If an alternative power supply is required, the heater supplier shall furnish appropriate transformer.

C. Heater shall be furnished with complete control system, including on-off switch, heater run indication, ground fault indication, element high temp alarm, and element high high temp shutdown.

D. Heater shall be furnished with dual RTD for element temperature sensing. All required RTD cable for connecting the RTD to the overtemperature controller shall be included with the heater.

E. Heater control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4X Stainless Steel.

F. Heater terminal housing and control panel shall each be furnished with anti-condensation heater.

G. Heater internal elements shall be removable from the housing such that the heater element may be removed and replaced without draining the tanks.



B. If required, heater shall be installed with seller-supplied supports inside the tank.



Capacity (gal) Diameter/Height

Orientatio

n Fluid

Insulation

Thk. (in)

Shell Thk.

(in)

Min. Dry

Bulb Temp.

(F)

Heater

Design

Setpoint

(F) Conn Type

Connection

Size (in)

ASTM

Material Rating

0 00LOT-HTR-001

Electric

Immersion 10000 net 10'-4" / 18' Vertical

SAE

Motor Oil

2" (R = 3.4

per in) 1/4 0.6 70 Flanged 3 CS 150# MMLOT001 For New Lube Oil Tank

0 00LOT-HTR-002

Electric

Immersion 6000 net 8'-5" / 16' Vertical

SAE

Motor Oil

2" (R = 3.4

per in) 1/4 0.6 70 Flanged 3 CS 150# MMLOT002 For Service Lube Oil Tank

NOTES:

Rev Tag No.

Type or

Description P&ID No. Remarks

Tank Design Conditions Heater Design


Electric Heaters

Description

ISSUED FOR BID


Project # 81799



Rev Date By Checked

0 08/05/15 SMK MRS


A. Guardian Fire Equipment

B. Croker

C. Potter Roemer

D. Engineer-approved equal


A. Each FDC inlet connection shall have a locking cap. Locking caps are to be ordered through the local fire department.

B. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that inlet connections meet local fire department specifications as to shape, size, operating directions, and threading details of nozzles.

C. Each inlet connection shall include clapper valve or other means of preventing backflow through the adjacent connections.

D. FDC shall be designed and constructed in accordance with requirements of NFPA 1963.



B. Install in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and IFC 912 as applicable.

C. FDC shall be mounted to the wall on the exterior street side of the appropriate building.

D. FDC shall be clearly labeled in accordance with IFC 912.4.



Rev. Tag No. System Type

System

Demand Inlet Conn. Size

Number of

Inlet

Conns.

Outlet

Conn.

Size

Pipeline

Design

Pressure

Pipeline

Design

Temp. P&ID Remarks

0 00FPW-FDC-001

Auto Sprinkler &

Standpipe 1000 gpm 2-1/2" 4-way 6" 150 psig 120 °F MMFPW001 For PB

NOTES:


Fire Department Connections

Description

ISSUED FOR BID

Stillwater Energy Center

Project # 75644


81799_8320_485790 485790-1

SECTION 485790 - DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Equipment and Materials furnished by Others for erection and installation by this Contract are

described in this Section. B. The erection and installation requirements for the Equipment and Materials described in this

Section are specified in SECTION 485961. C. Some items provided by others for installation by this Contract have been given identification

numbers to more clearly identify the item. The identification numbers are used in the description of the items and are indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 DRAWINGS: A. Drawings of the structures and of the Equipment showing the general arrangement and erection

and installation requirements may be examined at the office of Owner, Coffeyville Municipal Light & Power.

B. Drawings of the Equipment and Material will be supplied to the Successful Bidder after the award of the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: A. All equipment will be delivered by truck. This Contract is responsible for receiving, unloading,

and storing all equipment provided by Others and listed herein. B. Any anchor bolts, gaskets, flanges, or other accessories not specifically mentioned as being

provided by Others shall be provided by this Contract. See SECTION 055013 for anchor bolts specifications.

C. Appendix 485790 lists reference drawings for each piece of Equipment.

2.02 CONTRACT 5.1210 - WÄRTSILÄ: A. General:

1. Please note Contractor shall provide all piping mating flanges to Wartsila furnished equipment for the cooling water system for Piping Material Specification 01CSG01.

2. All anchor bolts and other components required to anchor Wartsila equipment and steel shall be supplied and installed by C8320. Anchor bolts shall be post-installed drill-in anchors.

B. Charge Air Filter (XXBAG-FTR-001A & -001B) – Filter housing equipped with bag filters to remove particulate and debris from the engine combustion air. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

C. Compact Gas Ramp (XXFGS-SKD-001) – Skid-mounted pressure regulating valves and fuel gas control equipment that precisely control and regulates fuel gas flow at the inlet to the engine. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets. Installation manual will be provided.

D. Dosing Unit (XXSCR-SKD-003) –Panel that regulates the Compressed Air and Urea mixture for NOx control.

E. Double LOT Pump (00LOT-SKD-001) – Skid-mounted redundant pumps to transfer new and service lube oil from the lube oil tanks to each Engine and between tanks. Pumps will be rated for 30 gpm. Pumps will be furnished skid-mounted with all required piping, valves, strainers,

SECTION 485790 – DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS: continued

485790-2 81799_8320_485790

and instrumentation. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets. Pump skid shall be insulated and heat traced by this Contract.

F. Engine (XX-ENG-001) –Wärtsilä W18V50SG 18.759 MW natural gas, spark-ignited reciprocating engines. This engine will be installed by Wärtsilä, but it will be the responsibility of Contractor to assist with final alignment and close openings allowing for entry into the building. This shall be accomplished by replacing the wall panels on the west side of the building between column rows 2 and 3. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing wall panels after engines have been installed.

G. Engine Auxiliary Area Platforms – Grated platforms, steel supports, stairs, ladders, and handrail for access to all components on the Engine Auxiliary Module.

H. Engine Auxiliary Module (EAM) (XX-SKD-001) – Skid-mounted piping, valves, and pumps that provide interconnections to Engine for Compressed Air, Lube Oil, and Cooling Water Systems. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets. Installation manual will be provided.

I. Engine Platforms – Set of platforming, ladders, and stairs that allow access for plant personnel to all elevated Equipment and top of Engines. Anchor bolts shall be post-installed drilled anchors furnished and installed under this Contract. Steel will be supplied by Wärtsilä with erection to be performed under this Contract.

J. Exhaust Gas (NOx) Analyzer (XXSCR-PNL-002) – Collects and analyzes exhaust gas samples from the SCR. Analysis results are used to control the amount of compressed air and urea injected to the Dosing Units.

K. Exhaust Gas Module (EGM) (XX-SKD-003) – Skid-mounted piping and equipment that provide interconnections for the Exhaust Gas, Fuel Gas, Lube Oil, and Cooling Water Systems. EGM will be mounted on steel supports supplied and installed under this Contract. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets. Installation manual will be provided.

L. Expansion Vessel (XXCWM-TNK-1) –1200-liter vessel mounted on the EGM that will allowing for expansion of Cooling Water due to heating. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

M. Exhaust Gas Module Support Steel – Steel structure for support of the EGMs. Anchor bolts shall be post-installed drilled anchors furnished and installed under this Contract.

N. Exhaust Gas Outlet Duct (XXSCR-001-1600 MM—4”) – Alloy steel transition piece duct located between the EGM and Mixing Duct. Contract 8320 is to furnish and install 4” insulation on this duct. Counter-flanges will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

O. Exhaust Gas Silencer (XXSCR-SLR-001) – Silences Exhaust Gas airflow and exhausts to atmosphere. Silencer will not require insulation and will be mounted on steel supports furnished and installed by this Contract. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

P. Generator Duct – Steel duct with support steel that mounts on the generator air discharge to direct warm air toward building roof vent.

Q. Lube Oil Cooler (XXLOT-HEX-001) – Plate and frame heat exchanger to facilitate cooling of the engine lubricating oil by the cooling water system. Lube Oil Cooler will mount directly to the EAM via flanges furnished by Wärtsilä with all required bolting and gaskets.

R. Maintenance Water Tank (00CWM-TNK-001) –2,700-gallon tank used for storage of water and addition of glycol and corrosion inhibitor. Piping and pump mounted on the tank will allow for filling and emptying of the engines. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.


81799_8320_485790 485790-3

S. Mixing Duct (XXSCR-002-1600 MM—4”) – Alloy steel duct that facilitates mixing of the compressed air-urea-exhaust gas mixture prior to entering the SCR. Compressed air-urea injection port inlets into this duct. Contract 8320 is to furnish and install 4” insulation on this duct. Counter-flanges will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

T. Radiator (XXCWM-RAD-001, -002, -003, -004, -005) – Fin-fan radiators will be used to provide cooling for the Cooling Water. These will be mounted outside the building to the east on structural steel installed by this Contract. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

U. Selective Catalytic Reducer (SCR) (XXSCR-ABS-001) – Houses catalyst plates to facilitate the reaction between the urea and NOx from the Engine Exhaust Gas to reduce NOx emissions from the facility. SCR will be mounted on steel supports installed under this Contract. 4 inches of insulation will be provided and installed by this Contract. Provide removable insulation on platform sides of SCR to allow removal of catalyst. Counter-flanges bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets. Installation manual is provided.

V. Urea Supply Pump (00AAU-SKD-001) – Duplex reciprocating pump skid designed to provide 40% urea solution to all Dosing Units. Pump skid shall be insulated and heat traced by this Contract.

W. W50SG Pipe Rack (XX-SKD-005) – Pipe rack containing header piping and connections to the Engine Auxiliary Modules for Compressed Air, Fuel Gas, Lube Oil, and Cooling Water Systems. Counter-flanged bored for standard ASME pipe sizes will be provided by Wärtsilä along with all required bolting and gaskets.

2.03 CONTRACT 5.2820 – FIRE WATER PUMPS: A. Shipped loose for installation under this Contract:

1. Electric Fire Water Pump (00FPW-PMP-001) – Electric-driven UL-listed fire pump with output of 100 gpm at 55 psig TDH, including pressure maintenance pump with output of 1 gpm at 55 psig TDH.

2.04 CONTRACT 5.2710 – AIR COMPRESSORS (ASPS): A. Instrument Air Compressor (00IA-CPR-001A & B) – 328 scfm rotary screw air compressors

that output 125 pisg air required for engine control valves and dilution of the urea inlet to the SCRs. Both compressors will be furnished with integral VFDs.

B. Instrument Air Dryer (00IA-DRY-001 & -002) – External heated blower dual-tower desiccant air dryers that will provide 611 scfm of dry instrument air at a Pressure Dewpoint (PDP) of -40°F.

C. Starting Air Compressor Skid (00ACS-XM-001 & -002) – 133 cfm duplex reciprocating compressor skids that will provide 435 psig air required charging the system to start the engines.

2.05 CONTRACT 5.2752 – FUEL GAS FILTER/COALESCER (MET WELD): A. Gas Filter/Coalescer (00FGS-FTR-001) – Skid-mounted redundant Filter/Coalescer and Drains

Tank with all required piping, valves, and instrumentation. Access platforms shall be shipped loose for erection under C8320. Insulation and heat trace shall be furnished and installed under Contract 8320 in accordance with the Contract Drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.06 CONTRACT 5.2753 – FUEL GAS DEWPOINT HEATER (AETHER):


485790-4 81799_8320_485790

A. Fuel Gas Dewpoint Heater Skid (00FGS-SKD-002) – Skid-mounted gas-fired indirect water bath heater. Skid will be furnished with all required piping, valves, controls, and instrumentation. Equipment will be shipped with all required insulation installed.

2.07 CONTRACT 5.2980 –SHOP FABRICATED TANKS (UIG): A. General:

1. All anchor bolts required to anchor the tank shall be supplied by C8220. Anchor bolts are cast-in-place anchors installed by Others.

2. Insulation for tanks shall be provided per SECTION 485945 and Equipment List. 3. Tank immersion heaters for tanks shall be provided by C8320 per SECTION 485715.

B. New Lube Oil Tank (00LOT-TNK-001) – 10,000-gallon bayonet-heated vertical atmospheric steel tank for storage of new lubricating oil. Tank will be fabricated of A36 carbon steel and measure 18’-0” tall with a 10’-4” diameter. Tank shall be insulated under this Contract.

C. Service Lube Oil Tank (00LOt-TNK-002) – 6,000-gallon bayonet-heated vertical atmospheric steel tank for storage of lubricating oil during engine maintenance activities. Tank will be fabricated of A36 carbon steel and measure 16’-0” seam-to-seam with a 8’-5” diameter. Tank shall be insulated under this Contract.

D. Waste Lube Oil Tank (00LOT-TNK-003) – 6,000-gallon heated atmospheric steel tank for storage of waste lubricating oil awaiting disposal and shipment off-site. Tank will be fabricated of A36 carbon steel and measure 16’-0” tall with a 8’-5” diameter.

2.08 CONTRACT 5.2981 –FRP TANKS (THORPE): A. General:

1. All anchor bolts required to anchor the tank shall be supplied by C8220. Anchor bolts are cast-in-place anchors installed by Others.

B. Urea Tank (00AAU-TNK-001) – 20,000-gallon vertical atmospheric fiber-reinforced plastic tank for the storage of 40% urea. Tank will measure 24’-6” tall with a 12’-0” diameter. Equipment will be shipped with all required insulation installed.

2.09 CONTRACT 5.2982 – PRESSURE VESSELS (SPVG): A. General:

1. All anchor bolts and other components required to anchor the tank shall be supplied and installed by C8320. Anchor bolts shall be post-installed drill-in anchors.

B. Wet Air Receiver (00ACI-TNK-001) – 1,060-gallon vertical ASME pressure vessels. The wet receiver acts as a pressure resevoir for the instrument air dryers to allow for dryer regeneration without running the compressors. Receiver will be fabricated of carbon steel and measure roughly 13’-4” tall with a 4’-0” diameter.

C. Instrument Air Receiver (00ACI-TNK-002) – 1,060-gallon vertical ASME pressure vessels. The receiver acts as a pressure resevoir for the instrument air system to allow for plant operation without running the compressors. The dry receiver acts as a pressure resevoir for the instrument air system to limit the compressor runtime. Receiver will be fabricated of carbon steel and measure roughly 13’-4” tall with a 4’-0” diameter.

D. Starting Air Receiver (00ACS-TNK-001) – 2,520-gallon vertical ASME pressure vessel for 435 psig Compressed Air required to start the Engines. Receiver will be fabricated of carbon steel and measure roughly 20’-4” tall with a 5’-0” diameter.

2.10 CONTRACT 5.4520 – PLANT STRUCTURAL STEEL: A. General:

1. All steel will be galvanized.


81799_8320_485790 485790-5

2. Anchor bolts and equipment mounting bolts will not be provided for any structural steel. C8320 is responsible for all anchor and mounting bolts unless noted otherwise.

3. Bolts for connecting steel will be included in steel supply. 4. Steel structures which have post-installed drill-in anchors supplied and installed by

C8320 are as follows: a. Miscellaneous Aux Steel

5. Steel structures which have cast-in-place anchors supplied and installed by C8220 are as follows: a. Charge Air Filter Steel b. Pipe Bridge Support Steel c. Pipe Rack Support Steel d. Radiator Support Steel e. SCR Support Steel f. Silencer and Stack Support Steel

6. The following ducts will be furnished: a. Charge Air Inlet Ducts b. SCR Outlet Ducts

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT APPLICABLE.


Equipment List

1210Charge Air Filter XXBAG‐FTR‐001A, ‐001B (XX=01‐03) 6 0" N 8320 8410Compact Gas Ramp XXFGS‐SKD‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 N/ADosing Unit XXSCR‐SKD‐003 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Double LOT Pump 00LOT‐SKD‐001 1 2" N 8320 8410Engine / Generator XX‐ENG‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Engine Auxiliary Area Platform 3 0" N 8320 N/AEngine Auxiliary Module (EAM) XX‐SKD‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Engine Platforms 1 0" N 8320 N/AExhaust Gas (NOx) Analyzer XXSCR‐PNL‐002 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Exhaust Gas Module (EGM) XX‐SKD‐003 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Expansion Vessel XXCWM‐TNK‐1 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 N/A

Exhaust Gas Module Support Steel 3 0" N 8320 N/AExhaust Gas Outlet Duct XXSCR‐001‐1600 MM‐‐4" (XX=01‐03) 3 4" N 8320 N/AExhaust Gas Silencer XXSCR‐SLR‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 N/AGenerator Duct 3 0" N 8320 N/ALube Oil Cooler XXLO‐HEX‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Maintenance Water Tank 00CWM‐TNK‐001, ‐002 1 0" N 8320 8410Cooling Water Transfer Pump 1 0" N 8320 8410

Mixing Duct XXSCR‐002‐1600 MM‐‐ 4" (XX=01‐03) 3 4" N 8320 N/AMobile Lube Oil Pump 1 0" N 8320 8410Oil Mist Separator Unit XX‐SKD‐004 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410Radiator XXCWM‐RAD‐00L (XX=01‐03; L=1‐5) 15 0" N 8320 8410Selective Catalytic Reducer (SCR) XXSCR‐ABS‐001 (XX=01‐03) 3 4" N 8320 N/AUrea Supply Pump 00AAU‐SKD‐001 1 2" Y 8320 8410W50SG Pipe Rack XX‐SKD‐005 (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 8410

2710Instrument Air Compressor 00IA‐CPR‐001A, ‐001B 2 0" N 8320 8410Instrument Air Dryer 00IA‐DRY‐001, ‐002 2 0" N 8320 8410

Engines (Wartsila)

Air Compressors

Wiring By

Supplier Contract Number Description Tag No.

Ins. Thick.

Heat Trace

Install ByQty

Coffeyville Municipal Light PowerProject # 81799

Page 1 of 3 Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.Revision 0

Equipment List

Wiring By


Ins. Thick.

Heat Trace

Install ByQty

Starting Air Compressor Skid 00ACS‐XM‐001, ‐002 2 0" N 8320 8410Starting Air Compressor 00ACS‐CMP‐001A, ‐001B, ‐002A, ‐002B 4 0" N 8320 8410

2752Fuel Gas Filter/Coalescer (Skid) 00FGS‐SKD‐001 1 2" Y 8320 8410Fuel Gas Filter/Coalescer 00FGS‐FLT‐001 1 2" Y 8320 8410Drain Tank 00FGS‐TNK‐001 1 2" Y 8320 8410

2753Fuel Gas Dewpoint Heater Skid (Vendor Insulated) 00FGS‐SKD‐002 1 2" N 8320 8410Fuel Gas Dewpoint Heater (Vendor Insulated) 00FG‐HTR‐001 1 2" N 8320 8410

2820Electric Fire Water Pump 00FPW‐PMP‐001 1 0" N 8320 8410Pressure‐Maintenance Pump 00FPW‐PMP‐002 1 0" N 8320 8410

2980New Lube Oil Tank 00LOT‐TNK‐001 1 2" N 8320 8410Service Lube Oil Tank 00LOT‐TNK‐002 1 2" N 8320 8410Waste Lube Oil Tank 00LOT‐TNK‐003 1 0" N 8320 N/A

2981Urea Tank (Vendor Insulated) 00AAU‐TNK‐001 1 2" N 8320 8410

2982Wet Air Receiver 00ACI‐TNK‐001 1 0" N 8320 N/AInstrument Air Receiver 00ACI‐TNK‐002 1 0" N 8320 N/AStarting Air Receiver 00ACS‐TNK‐001 1 0" N 8320 N/A

4520Miscellaneous Aux Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/APipe Bridge Support Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/APipe Rack Support Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/ARadiator Support Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/ASCR Support Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/ASilencer and Stack Steel ‐ 0" N 8320 N/A

FRP Tanks

Pressure Vessels

Plant Structural Steel

Fuel Gas Filter Coalescer

Shop Fabricated Tanks

Fuel Gas Dewpoint Heater

Fire Water Pumps



Equipment List

Wiring By


Ins. Thick.

Heat Trace

Install ByQty

Charge Air Inlet Ducts XXBAG‐001‐36"‐‐0" (XX=01‐03) 6 0" N 8320 N/ASCR Outlet Duct XXSCR‐004‐64"‐‐0" (XX=01‐03) 3 0" N 8320 N/A

8320Engine Water Treatment Skid 00WSW‐SKD‐001 1 0" N 8320 8410InstrumentsPiping SpecialsValves See Valve Lists and Data Sheets

See Instrument ListSee Piping Specials Lists

Mechanical Installation



Equipment Reference Files ListEquipment or

MaterialSupplier Qty

Delivery Date

Document Type Name and Description Reference File Rev Rev Date

Dimensional Drawing CAF Left Assembly DBAD494967 B 5/11/2015Dimensional Drawing CAF Right Assembly DBAD494968 B 5/11/2015Dimensional Drawing Charge Air Silencer DBAD552559 ‐ 4/8/2013

Dimensional Drawing Compact Gas Ramp W50SG DBAD487678 A 6/17/2015Device List Compact Gas Ramp W50SG ‐ Device List DBAD487964 ‐ 6/25/2015

Process Flow Diagram Compact Gas Ramp W50SG DBAD487965 ‐ 6/25/2015

Dimensional Drawing Reducing Agent Dosing Unit DBAD510657 ‐ 5/20/2015

Dimensional Drawing Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (Double) DBAD487679 A 6/17/2015Process Flow Diagram Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (Double) DBAD487966 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (Double) ‐ Device List DBAD487968 ‐ 6/25/2015

Layout Engine Hall, Plan DBAD448600 B 7/2/2015Dimensional Drawing Engine Foundation DBAD488800 ‐ 5/18/2015Dimensional Drawing Engine Drawing DBAD492671 ‐ 4/23/2015Dimensional Drawing Generating Set DBAD492687 ‐ 10/24/2014Dimensional Drawing Spring Element for 46/50 Engine DBAD506021 B 5/22/2013

Assembly Drawing Auxiliary Area Platform ‐ Railing Arrangement DBAD495250 A 6/12/2015Assembly Drawing Auxiliary Area Platform ‐ Sleeve Arrangment DBAD495258 A 6/12/2015Assembly Drawing Auxiliary Area Platform ‐ General Arrangment DBAD495261 A 6/12/2015Assembly Drawing Auxiliary Area Platform ‐ Frame Arrangement DBAD495266 A 6/12/2015Assembly Drawing Auxiliary Area Platform ‐ Grating Arrangement DBAD495270 A 6/12/2015

Dimensional Drawing W50SG EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 ‐ 3D Views DBAD487663 A 6/24/2015Dimensional Drawing W50SG EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 ‐ Plan Views DBAD487664 A 6/24/2015Dimensional Drawing W50SG EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 LT Preheater DBAD487665 A 6/24/2015Dimensional Drawing W50SG EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 HT Preheater DBAD487666 A 6/24/2015

Device List W46/50 EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 ‐ Device List DBAD487944 ‐ 6/25/2015Process Flow Diagram W46/50 EAM 1‐C EL v 2.2 DBAD487945 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List EL LT Preheating Unit for W46‐50 ‐ Device List DBAD487947 ‐ 6/25/2015Process Flow Diagram EL LT Preheating Unit for W46‐50 DBAD487948 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List EL HT Preheating Unit for W46/50 ‐ Device List DBAD487949 ‐ 6/25/2015Process Flow Diagram EL HT Preheating Unit for W46/50 DBAD487950 ‐ 6/25/2015

Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Sleeve Arrangement Sub Level DBAD495473 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Railing Arrangement Upper Level DBAD495477 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ General Arrangement DBAD495480 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Railing Arrangement Sub Level DBAD495482 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Grating Arrangement DBAD495492 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Frame Arrangement DBAD495499 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Connection Details DBAD495506 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Sleeve Arrangement Upper Level DBAD495507 A 6/3/2015Assembly Drawing Engine Platform ‐ Foot Location Plan DBAD495514 A 6/3/2015

Manufacturing Drawing Exhaust Gas Ventilation Fan DBAD289376 A 2/20/2015Assembly Drawing Exhaust Gas System Engine Wise DBAD459022 A 5/29/2015

Dimensional Drawing W50SG EGM 1‐C DBAD487671 ‐ 5/13/2015Assembly Drawing W50SB EGM 1‐C EGM Lifting and Installation DBAD487672 ‐ 5/15/2015

Process Flow Diagram W50SG EGM 1‐C DBAD487956 ‐ 6/25/2015Device List W50SG EGM 1‐C ‐ Device List DBAD487957 ‐ 6/25/2015Device List Exhuast Gas Ventilation Unit (US) DBAD487958 ‐ 6/26/2015

Process Flow Diagram Exhaust Gas Ventilation Unit (US) DBAD487959 ‐ 6/26/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Access Platform DBAD495280 A 2/18/2015

Assembly Drawing EBM Support Structure ‐ Longitudinal Section Views DBAD502951 ‐ 6/1/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Support Structure ‐ Connection Details DBAD502952 ‐ 6/1/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Support Structure ‐ Foundation Bolt Plan DBAD502953 ‐ 6/1/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Support Structure ‐ Plan View DBAD502954 ‐ 6/1/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Support Structure ‐ 3D View DBAD502955 ‐ 6/1/2015Assembly Drawing EGM Support Structure ‐ Transversal Section Views DBAD502957 ‐ 6/1/2015

Dimensional Drawing Expansion Vessel, 1200 L (317 gal) DBAD487676 A 6/13/2015Process Flow Diagram Expansion Vessel 1200 L DBAD487960 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List Expansion Vessel 1200 L ‐ Device List DBAD487961 ‐ 6/25/2015

Layout JB‐001 Layout and Assembly 26615032 A 4/27/2015Connection Diagram Connection Diagram 26815024 A 4/27/2015

P&ID FG Filter Coalescer Skid P&ID 36815059 ‐ 3/30/2015Outline Drawing FG Filter Coalescer Filter Outline 56815076 ‐ 4/22/2015

BOM FG Coalescing Filter Skid Bill of Materials 66115018 ‐ 7/15/2015

Legend Main Flow Diagram Symbols DBAD505988 ‐ 5/26/2015Analysis Piping Equivalency Analysis DBAD505991 D 12/3/2013Legend ISO 146147 Symbols DBAD505995 A 5/30/2003Legend Wartsila Symbols DBAD505997 A 5/30/2003

Additional drawings will be provided as they become available


General 5.1210

LATER


LATER

Expansion Vessel 5.1210 3

Fire Water Pumps 5.2820 1

Fuel Gas Dewpoint Heater Skid

Engine Auxiliary Area Platform

5.1210 3

Double LOT Pump 5.1210 1


EGM Support Steel 5.1210 3

Charge Air 5.1210 3


5.1210 3


Compact Gas Ramp




Dosing Unit 5.1210 3


Engine Platforms 5.1210 1

Engine 5.1210 3

Engine Auxiliary Module (EAM)

5.1210 3

5.2753 1

LATER


Exhaust Gas Outlet Duct

5.1210 3Additional drawings will be provided as they become available

LATER

Exhaust Gas Module (EGM)

5.1210 3


Exhaust Gas Silencer 5.1210 3 DBAD443601Additional drawings will be provided as they become available

Fuel Gas Filter/Coalescer Skid

5.2752 1

Exhaust Gas (NOx) Analyzer

5.1210 3



Equipment Reference Files ListEquipment or

MaterialSupplier Qty

Delivery Date

Document Type Name and Description Reference File Rev Rev Date

Legend IEC Symbols DBAD505998 A 5/30/2003

Generator Duct 5.1210 3 Assembly Drawing ABB 46/50 Generator Outlet Duct DBAA1744795 C 12/5/2003P&ID Diagram, P&ID (AC/WC) 55‐75 KW (VSD) 23700347 C 8/11/2010

General Arrangement General Arrangement, Air Cooled (R55075) 23701352 E 8/12/2010

Sequence of Operations Sequence of Operations ‐ Air/Gas/CNG CompressorsSequence of Operations ‐ Air/Gas/CNG Compressors

‐ ‐

General Arrangement General Arrangement EH6004H000A 47539758 6/23/2015 BFlow Diagram Flow Diagram EH6004H000A 47539760 6/24/2015 B

Lube Oil CoolerDimensional Drawing Maintenance Water Tank 10m3 / 2641 Gallons DBAD487685 A 6/25/2015Process Flow Diagram Maintenance Water Tank 10 m3 DBAD487971 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List Maintenance Water Tank 10 m3 ‐ Device List DBAD487972 ‐ 6/25/2015

Dimensional Drawing Mixing Unit DBAD496028 ‐ 5/20/2015Manufacturing Drawing Nitrogen Oxide Measurement Exhaust Sampling Pipe DAAF297860 ‐ ‐

Dimensional Drawing Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (mobile) DBAD487681 A 6/25/2015Device List Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (mobile) ‐ Device List DBAD487969 ‐ 6/25/2015

Process Flow Diagram Lube Oil Transfer Pump Unit (mobile) DBAD487970 ‐ 6/25/2015

New Lube Oil Tank 5.2980 1 Tank Fabrication Drawing 00LOT‐TNK‐001 Tank Fabrication Drawing 15T2‐9085 A 6/25/2015

Dimensional Drawing Oil Mist Separator Open DN150, Double DBAD487677 ‐ 5/13/2015Process Flow Diagram OM Separator ‐ Open DN150 Double DBAD487962 ‐ 6/25/2015

Device List OM Separator ‐ Open DN150 Double ‐ Device List DBAD487963 ‐ 6/25/2015

Dimensional Drawing 5 Fan Cooling Radiator DBAD494948 ‐ 5/22/2015

Dimensional Drawing SCR Reactor DBAD496027 ‐ 5/21/2015Assembly Drawing SCR System Engine wise DBAD524941 ‐ 6/6/2015Installation Manual SCR + OXI DBAD536563 ‐ 2/3/2015Maintenance Manual SCR + OXI DBAD536565 ‐ 2/25/2015Operation Manual SCR + OXI DBAD536566 ‐ 2/20/2015

Dimensional Drawing Support For SCR Reactor DBAD538949 ‐ 7/9/2014

Service Lube Oil Tank 5.2980 1 Tank Fabrication Drawing 00LOT‐TNK‐002 Tank Fabrication Drawing 15T2‐9086 A 6/26/2015

General ArrangementDual WP101L Comp Pkg, Motors 40 HP, Baseframe, Controller Demisters & Filtration

101L‐840BB2‐110 ‐ ‐

P&ID System P&ID C15024 Dual WP101LSystem P&ID_C15024 Dual WP101L

‐ ‐

Dimensional Drawing Pump Unit DBAD510624 ‐ 5/21/2015

Tank Dwg Urea Storage Tank 00AAU‐TNK‐001 37‐0102‐01 sht 1 A 6/16/2015Tank Dwg Urea Storage Tank 00AAU‐TNK‐001 37‐0102‐01 sht 2 ‐ 2/25/2015

O&M Mnaul Thorpe O&M Manual Thorpe O&M Manual 0 ‐Dimensional Drawing W50SG Pipe Rack v 2.2 ‐ 3D View DBAD487667 A 6/24/2015Dimensional Drawing W50SG Pipe Rack v 2.2 ‐ Plan View DBAD487668 A 6/24/2015Dimensional Drawing W50SG Pipe Rack v 2.2 Pipe Rack Installation DBAD487669 A 6/24/2015

Device List W50SG Pipe Rack v 2.2 Device List DBAD487954 ‐ 6/25/2015Process Flow Diagram W50SG Pipe Rack v 2.2 DBAD487955 ‐ 6/25/2015

Waste Lube Oil Tank 5.2980 1 Tank Fabrication Drawing 00LOT‐TNK‐003 Tank Fabrication Drawing 15T2‐9087 A 6/26/2015

LATER



Starting Air Compressor Skid

5.2710 2

Starting Air Receiver 5.2982 1

5.1210 1


Radiator 5.1210 15Additional drawings will be provided as they become available




LATER


3Oil Mist Separator

Unit5.1210

Instrument Air Receiver

5.2980 2

Urea Tank 5.2981 1

Selective Catalytic Reducer

5.1210 3

Mobile Lube Oil Pump 5.1210 1

Mixing Duct 5.1210 3

Maintenance Water Tank

Instrument Air Dryer 5.2710 2

Instrument Air Compressor

5.2710 2

W50SG Pipe Rack 5.1210 3


Urea Supply Pump 5.1210 1Additional drawings will be provided as they become available



81799_8320_485901 485901-1

SECTION 485901 - PIPING MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, fittings, and associated material required to

complete the piping systems as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Piping material for this Contract shall be in accordance with this Section and the Piping Material Specifications (PM Specs) included at the end, and as part, of this Section.

B. The Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID) define the scope of piping to be furnished and/or installed by Contractor.

C. Piping Plan drawings define the scope of piping 2 ½ inch and larger for all systems and for piping 2 inch and smaller for systems with a design temperature of 300 degrees F or greater.

D. The PM Specs and specifications included in this Contract are intended to be complementary to the Plan drawings, however may include additional or more descriptive requirements. If the Contractor considers there to be a discrepancy between these specifications, including the PM Specs, and the Plan drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing for clarification.

E. If there is a discrepancy between drawings and other Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as outlined below: 1. Specification 2. Process and Instrumentation Diagram 3. Piping Plan, Section, and Elevation 4. Detail Drawing 5. Line List This order of precedence is maintained for instances of plural or omitted documents.

F. Contractor is responsible for confirming the correct quantity and size for all bolting materials as well as the size, configuration, and rating of all gasketing materials.

G. Where final or certified manufacturer drawings are not yet available on all equipment furnished by Others for equipment connecting to pipe installed by Contractor, piping connection locations may vary (up to 2 feet in all directions) and pipe connection sizes may vary (one pipe size larger or smaller) from that indicated in the Drawings. Where final equipment drawings are not available, holds will be placed on piping in the vicinity of equipment connections on the issued for construction drawings. Contractor shall assume for Bid purposes that all holds will be removed by the Issued for Construction drawing issue.

H. Contractor shall provide reducers and connecting pipe lengths as required to connect to all Equipment. Contractor shall factor in equipment connection point variations into bid price. No change in Contract price or schedule will be allowed for drawing revisions associated with such variations. Issued for Construction Plan drawings will define equipment connection holds.

I. Pipe 2-inches and smaller with design temperatures less than 300 degrees F are not shown on the Plan drawings and shall be field routed by Contractor based on the P&ID drawings and as specified.

J. Contractor is responsible for the coating of piping materials as specified herein and as specified in Section 485935.

SECTION 485901 - PIPING MATERIALS: continued

485901-2 81799_8320_485901

K. Provide one complete set of spare gaskets consisting of at least one gasket of each size, material, and pressure rating, but not less than 5% of the total number for each size, type, and pressure rating.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Pipe shall be in conformance with the applicable provisions

of the following standards which establish the minimum level of quality required. When an exception to a standard is specified, the Specifications shall govern. 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. B16.1 - Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. b. B16.3 - Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings. c. B16.5 - Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. d. B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. e. B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves. f. B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded. g. B16.12 – Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings. h. B16.18 - Cast Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. i. B16.20 – Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. j. B16.21 – Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. k. B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. l. B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. m. B16.47 – Large Diameter Steel Flanges – NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch

Standard. n. B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping. o. B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. p. B36.19 – Stainless Steel Pipe. q. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A53/A53M - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless. b. A74 – Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. c. A105/A105M - Carbon Steel Forging for Piping Applications. d. A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. e. A134 - Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc) - Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over). f. A139 – Electric Fusion (Arc) Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over). g. A153/A153M – Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. h. A179/A179M - Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and

Condenser Tubes. i. A182/A182M - Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and

Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service. j. A193/A193M - Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Material for High-

Temperature Service. k. A194/A194M - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-

Temperature Service.


81799_8320_485901 485901-3

l. A234/A234M - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

m. A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

n. A283/A283M – Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. o. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. p. A312/A312M - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. q. A320/A320M – Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. r. A333/A333M – Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service. s. A335/A312M - Seamless Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. t. A350/A350M – Forgings, Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel, Requiring Notch

Toughness Testing for Piping Components. u. A352/A352M – Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing

Parts Suitable for Low-Temperature Service. v. A420/420M – Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-

Temperature Service. w. A536/A536M - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings x. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. y. A671 - Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower

Temperatures. z. A672 - Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate

Temperatures. aa. A691 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric Fusion-Welded for High-Pressure

Service at High Temperatures. bb. B695 – Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron

and Steel. cc. D229 - Test Methods for Rigid Sheet and Plate Materials Used for Electric

Insulation. dd. F 2329 – Zinc Coating, Hot Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy

Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a. C110/A21.10 - Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 inches through 48 inches, for Water and Other Liquids.

b. C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

c. C115/A21.15 - Flanged Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. d. C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined

Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. e. C153/A21.53 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings 3 Inches Through 24 Inches and 54

Inches Through 64 Inches For Water Service. f. C200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger. g. C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. h. C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 inches through 144

inches.


485901-4 81799_8320_485901

i. C208 - Dimensions for Steel Water Pipe Fittings. j. C606 – Grooved and Shouldered Joints. k. M11 - Steel Pipe - Design and Installation.

4. Federal Specifications (FS): a. HH-G-156 - Gasket Material, General Purposes; Rubber Sheets, Strips, and Special

Shapes. 5. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS):

a. SP6 - Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges. b. SP44 - Steel Pipe Line Flanges.

6. Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI): a. ES-5 - Cleaning of Fabricated Pipe. b. ES-22 - Recommended Practice for Color Coding of Piping Materials. c. ES-24 - Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material Requirements.

7. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications: a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. b. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. c. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. e. SP8 - Pickling. f. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. g. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 9. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM).

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Submittals required shall include:

1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts on materials being supplied annotated with the PM Spec to which it applies.

2. Complete details of pipe, fittings, connections, mechanical connections, gaskets, bolting materials, and fabrication procedures.

3. Pipe fabrication drawings with layout with spool piece numbers and spool piece details sheets with bill of material.

4. Color code for random-length pipe shipped to the jobsite. 5. Certificates of completion of factory tests. 6. Factory test reports. 7. Welding procedures and welding certifications. 8. For protective shop coatings submit complete material and application specifications

including surface preparation procedure, data sheets, dry film thickness for each coat, material safety data sheets.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Factory Tests:


81799_8320_485901 485901-5

1. Conduct all standard factory tests and all tests required by the applicable codes and standards.

2. Conduct the following special test on piping and accessories: a. Electrostatic pinhole detection test on all rubber-lined and epoxy-lined pipe. b. Mill test on steel defining chemical properties and yield and ultimate strength.

3. Submit certificates of completion of factory tests as Submittals.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Ship all random-length pipe to the jobsite painted with a continuous colored stripe indicating

schedule number and material. Color code shall be in general conformance with PFI ES-22. B. Ship all gaskets to the jobsite tagged with size, material, and pressure rating. C. Ship spare gaskets separately packaged and tagged as spare parts. D. Ship all random length pipe to jobsite with protective end caps to prevent the entrance of dirt

and debris.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Design, fabricate, and test Equipment and Materials in accordance with the manufacturer's

procedures and the applicable codes and standards listed in ARTICLE 1.02, this Section. B. All carbon steel materials shall be coated in accordance with SECTION 485935 to prevent rust

during shipping, storage, and erection. B.C. All carbon steel piping and fittings that are to be installed outdoors shall be hot-dipped

galvanized. Field coating repairs and welded connections of galvanized components shall be cold-galvanized.

2.02 PIPING DESIGN TABLESPIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (PM SPECS): A. The PM Specs tabulate the valve and piping materials to be used for each specific design. B. The PM Specs to be used for each pipeline shall be indicated on the Contract Drawings. C. The PM Specs may contain “OR” statements. For material of pipe and fittings only, use of the

word “OR” on a PM Spec defines that either option is acceptable. For material of pipe and fittings only, Contractor may substitute, if approved by Owner, with the other acceptable options listed on the PM Spec. Contractor will be responsible for any dimensional changes required based on Contractor’s substitution.

2.03 PIPE: A. Schedule Pipe shall conform to the ASTM material specifications, size, and nominal wall

thickness indicated on the PM Specs. Schedule pipe shall meet the dimensional standards set forth in the references listed in Article 1.02 of this Section.

2.04 STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL FITTINGS: A. Screwed fittings 2-inch and smaller shall be as follows:

1. Class 150 malleable iron screwed fittings conforming to ASME B16.3, or Class 2000, Class 3000, or Class 6000 forged-steel threaded fittings conforming to ASME B16.11.

2. Galvanized when used with galvanized pipe.


485901-6 81799_8320_485901

B. Socket weld fittings 2-inch and smaller shall be as follows: 1. Class 3000, Class 6000, or Class 9000 forged-steel socket-welded fittings conforming to

ANSI/ASME B16.11. 2. Of the same material as the pipe to which they connect.

C. Malleable-iron unions 2-inch and smaller shall be as follows: 1. Class 150 malleable-iron unions with a ground joint of bronze to iron. 2. Galvanized when used with galvanized pipe. 3. Used only on piping systems which allow screwed piping joints.

D. Forged steel flanges used as unions 2-inch and smaller shall be as follows: 1. Forged-steel socket-weld flanges with raised faces for use with the gaskets defined by the

PM Spec. 2. Have the same pressure and temperature ratings as the forged-steel valves in the system. 3. Of the same material as the pipe to which they connect.

E. Dielectric unions 2-inch and smaller shall be as follows: 1. Have nylon bushings and NBR rubber gaskets. 2. Used wherever copper pipe is joined to iron or steel pipe or equipment.

F. Steel butt welding fittings shall be as follows: 1. Wrought steel conforming to ASME B16.9. 2. Of the same material and schedule as the pipe to which they connect. 3. Cast fittings are not acceptable. 4. Elbows shall be long radius unless otherwise indicated.

G. Custom radius bends shall be as follows: 1. Used only when specified or indicated. 2. True to specified dimensions and configurations. 3. Made in accordance with the requirements specified in SECTION 485935.

H. Steel pipe flanges shall be as follows: 1. Raised face, forged steel conforming to ASME B16.5, except where flat faced flanges are

specified. 2. Slip-on or weld neck as indicated on the drawings for Class 150 and weld neck type only

for Class 300 and higher. 3. Constructed of the same ANSI material group as the pipe to which they connect. 4. Have surface finish in accordance with MSS SP-6.

a. Use MSS SP-44 for flanges 24-inch through 36-inch diameter in classes 150 to Class 900.

5. Flat face when connected to the following: a. Class 125 cast-iron valves or fittings. b. Fiberglass pipe or fittings. c. HDPE pipe or fittings. d. Equipment having flat face flanges.

6. Large bore flanges, NPS 26 to 60, all classes, shall conform to the dimensional standards of ASME B16.47 Series A.

2.05 FLANGE BOLTING MATERIALS: 1. Type 1 bolted joints shall be consistent with the following:


81799_8320_485901 485901-7

a. ASTM A307 Grade B, carbon steel stud-bolts threaded the entire length. b. ASTM A563 Grade A, carbon steel heavy hexagon nuts. c. Bolts and nuts shall be galvanized as indicated below.

2. Type 2 bolted joints shall be consistent with the following: a. ASTM A193/A193M Grade B7, alloy steel stud-bolts threaded the entire length. b. ASTM A194/A194M Grade 2H, carbon steel heavy hexagon nuts.

3. Type 3 bolted joints shall be consistent with the following: a. ASTM A193/A193M Grade B16 alloy steel stud-bolts threaded the entire length. b. ASTM A194/A194M Grade 7 alloy steel heavy hexagon nuts.

4. Heavy Hex Head Bolts shall be provided for drilled and tapped bolt holes of single flange (lugged) valve bodies in accordance with ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (inch series). Materials of construction shall be per Type as defined on the Piping Design TablePM Spec. Hex Head Cap Screws shall not be galvanized.

5. Protective surface treatment of nuts and bolts shall be in accordance with the following: a. Galvanized - Fasteners and associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized

according to ASTM F 2329 or mechanically deposited according to ASTM B695 with average thicknesses defined herein:

ASTM Standard Specification

Fastener and Nuts Size 3/8 inch and smaller

Fastener and Nuts Size Larger than 3/8 inch

F 2329 1.5 mils 1.7 mils B 695 Class 40 Class 50

2.06 GASKETS: A. General:

1. Spiral-wound gaskets shall be used on raised faced flanges only. 2. For gasket material other than spiral-wound:

a. 1/16-inch-thick for all nominal pipe sizes 10 inches and smaller, except where specified otherwise.

b. 1/8-inch-thick for all nominal pipe sizes 12 inches and larger. c. Full-faced for flat-faced flanges, punched holes for bolts and pipe openings. d. Ring type for raised-faced flanges

B. Spiral-wound gaskets shall be as follows: 1. Spiral-wound sealing face with pre-formed metal winding, reinforced with an outer gauge

ring and inner ring. 2. Gasket inner rings shall comply with ASME B16.20 requirements that the inside

diameter of the inner ring not protrude into the flange bore greater than 0.06 inch. Where required, Contractor shall special order gasket inner rings for slip-on, threaded, and other flanges where standard inner ring gaskets would protrude beyond the inner flange face.

3. Have a nominal thickness of 0.175-inch with a 1/8-inch-thick gauge ring. 4. Materials shall be consistent with the following:

a. Outer gauge ring shall be carbon steel.


485901-8 81799_8320_485901

b. Metal winding and inner ring material shall match connecting pipe flange material, except for carbon steel pipe flanges, in which case type 304 stainless steel material shall be used on the winding and inner ring.

c. Gasket shall have a soft, flexible, industrial grade graphite filler. 5. For piping design temperatures:

a. Up to 900°F use: (1) Flexitallic Style CGI with type 304 stainless steel winding and soft, flexible,

industrial grade graphite filler and carbon steel outer gauge ring and type 304 stainless steel inner ring (use type 316L stainless steel with 316L stainless steel piping systems), or approved equal by Engineer.

C. NBR gaskets (also known as Buna-N, or Nitrile) shall be as follows: 1. NBR gaskets shall only be used with flat faced flanges. 2. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:

a. Minimum: -20°F b. Maximum: 250°F

3. Minimum Compressive Stress: 200 psi 4. Tensile Strength 2,000 psi min. per ASTM D412 5. For flat faced flanges:

a. Heavy-duty commercial grade nitrile. b. Hardness Durometer Shore A 60, ± 5 c. Garlock Sealing Technologies Style 9122 or approved equal.

D. PTFE gaskets shall be as follows: 1. For use only with flange classes 125, 150, and 300. 2. For raised faced flanges:

a. Ring type. b. Microcellular PTFE with rigid inner core. c. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:

(1) Minimum: -40°F (2) Maximum: 500°F

d. Minimum Compressive Stress: 500 psi e. Garlock Sealing Technologies Style 3545 or approved equal.

3. For flat faced and non-metallic flanges: a. 100% pure PTFE bonded to EPDM inner core. b. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:

(1) Minimum: -40°F (2) Maximum: 300°F

c. Minimum Compressive Stress: 250 psi d. Garlock Sealing Technologies Style 370 or approved equal.

E. EPDM gaskets shall be as follows: 1. EPDM gaskets shall only be used with flat faced flanges. 2. Commercial quality with smooth surface 3. Hardness Durometer, Shore A 55-65. 4. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:

a. Minimum: -40°F


81799_8320_485901 485901-9

b. Maximum: 300°F 5. Minimum Compressive Stress: 200 psi 6. Tensile strength 1,000 psi min. per ASTM D412. 7. Garlock Rubber Technologies Style 8314 or approved equal.

F. Neoprene gaskets shall be as follows: 1. Neoprene gaskets shall only be used with flat faced flanges. 2. Commercial grade 3. Hardness Durometer, Shore A 55-65. 4. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:


5. Minimum Compressive Stress: 200 psi 6. Tensile strength 2,000 psi min. per ASTM D412. 7. Garlock Rubber Technologies Style 7986 or approved equal.

G. Viton gaskets shall be as follows: 1. FKM Fluoroelastomer type B per ASTM D1418 (Terpolymers of VF2/HFP/TFE) for

Chemical Process plant, Power Utility Seals & Gaskets Grade with 68% fluorine content. 2. Hardness Durometer, IRHD: 72 ± 5 per 3. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:

a. Minimum: -40°F (Viton GFLT only) b. Maximum: 400°F

4. Tensile Strength 1,200 psi min. per ASTM D412 5. American Seal & Packing Style 992 or approved equal.

H. Red rubber gaskets (also known as SBR) shall be as follows: 1. Red rubber gaskets shall only be used with flat faced flanges. 2. Natural vulcanized tan smooth gum rubber. 3. 1/8-inch-thick full-faced for all nominal pipe sizes. 4. May be segmented dove tail for flanges size 42 inch and larger. 5. Hardness Durometer Shore A 70-80. 6. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:


7. Minimum Compressive Stress: 200 psi 8. Tensile Strength 700 psi min. per ASTM D412 9. Garlock Sealing Technologies Style 22, or approved equal.

I. Blended Gaskets 1. Blended gasket material shall be an asbestos-free homogeneous combination of aramid

fibers and select fillers with a NBR (nitrile) rubber elastomeric binder. 2. Material shall be acceptable for water, air, aliphatic hydrocarbons, oils and gasoline. 3. Temperature Continuous Operating Requirements:


4. Minimum Compressive Stress: 500 psi 5. For raised faced flanges:


485901-10 81799_8320_485901

a. Garlock Sealing Technologies “BLUE-GARD 3000” or b. Approved equal.

J. Insulating Flange Material: 1. Insulating flange material shall be furnished and installed where indicated by "IF" on the

P&IDs. 2. Insulating flange assembly shall be manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. (PSI)

or approved equal. 3. Gaskets shall be as follows:

a. For Fuel Gas and Fuel Oil service and all services over 300 deg F: (1) Gasket shall be LineBacker Type “E” by PSI or approved equal. Gasket

material shall be epoxy glass G-10 with molded Viton sealing element on each face. Minimum dielectric strength shall be 500 VPM conforming to ASTM D229.

b. For all services with a design temperature up to 300 deg F, except Fuel Gas and Fuel Oil: (1) Gasket shall have a minimum dielectric strength of 500 VPM conforming to

ASTM D229. (a) For raised faced flanges: Shall be Garlock Sealing Technologies Style

3000 or approved equal. (b) For flat faced flanges: Shall be Garlock Sealing Technologies Style

370 or approved equal. c. For all water services with a design temperature 200 deg F or less:

(1) Gasket shall have a minimum dielectric strength of 500 VPM conforming to ASTM D229. (a) For raised faced flanges: Shall be Garlock Sealing Technologies Style

3000 or approved equal. (b) For flat faced flanges: Shall be Garlock Sealing Technologies Style 22

or approved equal. 4. Insulating washers shall be PSI Products Inc. epoxy glass G-10, 1/8-inch thick

(minimum) or approved equal. Provide insulating washers on both mating flanges and include steel backup washers on each. Minimum dielectric strength shall be 400 VPM. Steel washer OD and ID shall match those of the insulating washer, having a thickness tolerance of +/- 10 mils.

5. Insulating sleeves shall be PSI Products Inc. epoxy glass G-10 or approved equal, with 1/32-inch wall thickness and length as required to match flange thickness of two flanges plus gasket insulation. Sleeve shall provide "full" insulation of studs, and minimum dielectric strength shall be 400 VPM.

6. Flange assemblies shall provide a minimum resistance of 1,000 ohms measured between each stud and both flanges (when dry).


485901 APPENDIX A

PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

81799_8320_485901 Appendix A 485901 Appendix A-1

PROJECT: 81799

NAME: Coffeyville Generation Facility 2

PM Spec

Number

Description

00PDH01 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe with DR of 17

00SAL01 ASTM A312-TP304, Annealed Finish Pipe

00SAL02 ASTM A312-TP304, Annealed Finish Pipe

00SSW01 304L Stainless Steel Tubing for Steam and Chemical Feed Systems

01CSG01 Carbon Steel Pipe with Grooved Ends and Class 150 Valves

01CSS01 ASTM A106 Small Bore Pipe and ASTM A53 Large Bore Pipe

01SAS01 ASTM A312 Gr. TP304 Stainless Steel Pipe with Metal Seat Valves

01SAS02 ASTM A312 Gr. TP304 Stainless Steel Pipe with Soft Seat Valves

03CBS04 ASTM A106 Grade B Pipe

REV. ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION

0 08/05/2015 ISSUED FOR BID

81799

Piping Material Specification 00PDH01

High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe with DR 17

Rev Description Date By Checked

0 ISSUED FOR BID 08/05/2015 SMK MRS

COPYRIGHT 2015 BURNS & McDONNELL ENGINEERING COMPANY, INC.

Valves and flanges may not be the limiting components relative to pressure-temperature capability of this piping specification. This piping specification shall only be utilized where specified by Burns & McDonnell. Any other use shall require the party using it to confirm suitability for those purposes.

This document contains information which is confidential and proprietary to Burns & McDonnell. It shall not be reproduced in whole or in part or released to any third party without the prior written consent of Burns & McDonnell.

SERVICE: Low Pressure Water Systems, Low Temperature Plant Drains, Sanitary Drains, Storm Sewers

MATERIAL:

RATING CLASS: 150, 150 PSI, 200 P DESIGN CODE: Undefined

TEMPERATURE LIMIT: 33 to 125 ºF STRESS RELIEF: Undefined

NOMINAL CORROSION ALLOWANCE:

0 in EXAMINATION: Undefined

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg

End Prep Description Commodity Option (Note)

CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping2 - 30 in DR 17 TF Pipe , ASTM D3350 , Fusion Plain End , IPS , Cell Cl of 445474C

(PE4710) , Per ASTM D3035Default NTPIPAFZ0AAAA

A0PJAA9AZ

FITTINGS

45 Degree Direction Change2 - 8 in DR 17 TF 45° elbow, molded , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End ,

ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710) , Molded per ASTM D3261 , per ASTM D3035

Default MND4AS9PJAAAAAQZ

4 - 8 in EDR 17 TF 45° elbow, fab 2-seg , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710)

1 cut MND6AS9PJAAAAARZ


Default MND6AS9PJAAAAARZ

90 Degree Direction Change2 - 8 in DR 17 TF 90° elbow, molded , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End ,


Default MND7AS9PJAAAAAQZ


2 cut MND9AS9PJAAAAARZ


Default MND9AS9PJAAAAARZ

Cap2 - 8 in DR 17 TF Cap , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM D3350

, Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710) , Molded per ASTM D3261 , per ASTM D3035

Default MNFJAS9PJAAAAAQZ

10 - 30 in EDR 17 TF Cap , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Fabricated with a Pressure Rating Equal to or Greater than DR 17, per ASTM F2206

Default MNFJAS9PJAAAAAUZ

Lateral3 - 24 in EDR 17 TF Lateral , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM

D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Fabricated with a Pressure Rating Equal to or Greater than DR 17, per ASTM F2206

Default MNDZAS9PJAAAAAUZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change4 - 8 in 2 - 6 in DR 17 TF Concentric Reducer , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End

, ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Molded per ASTM D3261, per ASTM D3035

Default MNBCAS9PJAAAAAQZ

10 - 24 in 8 - 18 in EDR 17 TF Concentric Reducer , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Fabricated with a Pressure Rating Equal to or Greater than DR 17, per ASTM F2206

Default MNBCAS9PJAAAAAUZ

Tee2 - 8 in DR 17 TF Tee, molded , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End ,


Default MNE0AS9PJAAAAAQZ

10 - 30 in EDR 17 TF Eq. Tee , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End , ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Fabricated with a Pressure Rating Equal to or Greater than DR 17, per ASTM F2206

Default MNDJAS9PJAAAAAUZ

CITY OF COFFEYVILLEProject # 81799

Burns & McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.Revision 0

Page 2 of 5

Pipe Spec 00PDH01Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Tee - Reducing Tee4 - 24 in 2 - 18 in EDR 17 TF Red. Branch Tee , ISCO Industries, HDPE Fittings , Fusion Plain End ,

ASTM D3350 , Cell CL of 445474C (PE4710), Fabricated with a Pressure Rating Equal to or Greater than DR 17, per ASTM F2206

Default MNDRAS9PJAAAAAUZ

VALVES

Check Valve3 - 12 in 200 PSI FFFE Swing Chk Vlv , AWWA C508 , 200 PSI , FF , Bltd Bonnet , Cast Gray

Iron , Bronze trim , Epoxy Lined, Gasket requiredDefault VCSCAALARFFA

AWV1ADAACZ

14 - 24 in 150 PSI FFFE Swing Chk Vlv , AWWA C508 , 150 PSI , FF , Bltd Bonnet , Cast Gray Iron , Bronze trim , Epoxy Lined, Gasket required

Default VCSCAALAKFFAAWV1ADAACZ

Gate Valve3 - 12 in 150 FFFE Gate Vlv , AWWA C509 , 200 psig , FF - , Handwheel , Cast or Ductile

Iron , -, Gasket requiredDefault VGRAAGAQFFZF

AWZZZZZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange2 - 24 in 150 FFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 Default FBLABLDFFACG

ZZZ

26 - 36 in 150 FFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 Default FBLABHDFFACGZZZ

Flange2 - 36 in 150 FFLFE x

Loose flange, lap joint

Backup Ring , Ductile Iron , ASME B16.1 CL125 Default FEUAS8ATPNAAAZZZZ

GASKETING

Gaskets0.5 - 10 in 150 FFFE/

FFLFENon Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Ethylene Propylene-Diene Monomer (EPDM) , THK 1/16" (1.6 mm)

Default GNMAM2DFFABVA1JZ

2 - 36 in 150 FFLFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Chloroprene (Neoprene, CR) with Fabric Insert full face, 55 75 Durometer, 1/16" thick

Default GNMAB7DFFABWA1KZ

2 - 36 in 150 FFLFE/ FFFE

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Chloroprene (Neoprene, CR) with Fabric Insert full face, 55 75 Durometer, 1/16" thick


2 - 36 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Chloroprene (Neoprene, CR) with Fabric Insert full face, 55 75 Durometer, 1/16" thick


3 - 36 in 150/ 150B

FFLFE/ FFFE

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Multi-Swell 3760 , THK 1/16" (1.6 mm)

Default GNMAM2DFFAWHA1JZ

3 - 12 in 150/ 200 PSI

FFLFE/ FFFE



12 - 24 in 150 FFFE/ FFLFE

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Ethylene Propylene-Diene Monomer (EPDM) , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)

Default GNMAM2DFFABVA1FZ

14 - 24 in 150/ 150 PSI

FFLFE/ FFFE



26 - 36 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Multi-Swell 3760 , THK 1/16" (1.6 mm)







Page 3 of 5

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00PDH01

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

BOLTING

Bolt Sets0.5 - 24 in 150 FFFE/

FFLFEStd Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H

Default LS1AP2AX5BACZ

0.5 - 4 in 150 FFFE/ FFLFE

Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A307 Grade B , Full Thread , Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563-A

Default LS1AP2AAIBCDZ

2 - 36 in 150 FFLFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A307 Grade B , Full Thread , Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563-A





2 - 36 in 150 FFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A307 Grade B , Full Thread , Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563-A


3 - 12 in 150/ 200 PSI

FFLFE/ FFFE



3 - 36 in 150/ 150B

FFLFE/ FFFE



14 - 24 in 150/ 150 PSI

FFLFE/ FFFE



26 - 36 in 150 FFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A307 Grade B , Full Thread , Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563-A







Page 4 of 5

Pipe Spec 00PDH01Revision 08/5/2015

Legend

BLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endFFLFE Flat-face lap-flanged endLoose flange, lap joint

Loose flange, lap joint

PSE Plain Small EndT TeeTF Fusion plain endWN Weld Neck

Notes

36" T

30" E T

24" E E T

20" E E E T

18" E E E E T

16" E E E E E T

14" E E E E E E T

12" E E E E E E E T

10" E E E E E E E E T

8" E E E E E E E E E T

6" E E E E E E E E E E T

4" E E E E E E E E E E E T

3" E E E E E E E E E E E E T

2" E E E E E E E E E E E E E T

1 1/2" E E E E E E E E E E E E E E T

1" E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E T

3/4" E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E T

90º Branch Connection Table

36" 30" 24" 20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4"

HEADER



Page 5 of 5

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00PDH01

81799

Piping Material Specification 00SAL01

NPS 1/2 IN to 2 IN: ASTM A312-TP304, Annealed Finish






SERVICE: City Water, Instrument Air, Service Air, Aux Circ Water, Closed Cooling Water, Comp Air, Circ Water, Fire Protection, Nitrogen, Plant Drains, Plant Drains - Oil, Pot Water, Raw Water, Serv Water, Demin Water

MATERIAL:

RATING CLASS: 150 DESIGN CODE: ASME-B31.1 - 2012

TEMPERATURE LIMIT: -20 to 180 ºF STRESS RELIEF: ASME-B31.1 -2012 Power Piping


0 in EXAMINATION: ASME-B31.1 - 2012

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping0.5 - 2 in S-10S PE Pipe , ASME-B36.19M , PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) ,

SMLS, AnnealedDefault PPPABRPEAT1A

BHZ

FITTINGS

45 Degree Direction Change0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS 45 Deg. Elbow , Vic-Press Type P591 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312

Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OE45APBCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS x VPE 45 Deg. Elbow , Vic-Press Type P543 , CALC , Vic-Press x Victaulic PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

Type 1 OE45APCCAPBAT1ZZZZ


Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OE90APDCAPAA

T1ZZZZ


Type 1 OE90APECAPBAT1ZZZZ

Cap0.5 - 2 in CALC VPE Cap , Vic-Press Type P540 , CALC , Victaulic PE , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OCAPAPMCAPC

AT1ZZZZ

Coupling0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Cplg. , Vic-Press Type P597 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OCPLAPFCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS x VPE Cplg. , Vic-Press Type P561 , CALC , Vic-Press x Victaulic PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

Type 1 OCPLAPGCAPBAT1ZZZZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in CALC VPS Con. Reducer , Vic-Press Type P594 , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default BRECAPIPAAT1Z

ZZZ

Tee0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Equal Tee , Vic-Press Type P592 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312

Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OETEAPKCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in CALC VPS Red. Tee , Vic-Press Type P593 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default ORTEAPJCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

Union0.75 - 2 in CALC VPS Union , Vic-Press Type P584 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400) , Threaded UnionDefault OUNOAPLCAPAA

T1AAQZ

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400) , Metal Seat -, Gasket requiredRFFE VBBAAADRFXCA

RLADGZZZZ

CITY OF COFFEYVILLE Project # 81799


Page 2 of 4

Pipe Spec 00SAL01Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400) , -, Gasket requiredDefault VCPCAAADRFZA

RLZZZZZZZ

Gate Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A182

Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , - -, Gasket requiredDefault VGRAAADRFZFA

RLZZZZZZZ

Globe Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A182

Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , -, Gasket requiredDefault VLRAAADRFZFA

RLZZZZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304

(UNS S30400)Default FBLABLDRFAT1Z

ZZZ

Flange - Socket Weld0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE x

SWESW Flg. , Vic-Press Type P565 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

Default FSWAPADRFAT1ZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE x SWE

SW Flg. , Vic-Press Type P595 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

FFFE FSWAPBDFFAT1ZZZZ

GASKETING

Gaskets0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Gaskets for ASME

B16.5 Flanges , CL 150 , RF , 304 SS , w/flexible graphite fillerDefault GSWAB9DRFAZ

HA1MZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.21 , CL 150 , FF , PTFE - Default GSWAB7DFFADEZZZZ


Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.21 , CL 150 , FF , PTFE - Default GSWAB7DFFADEZZZZ

BOLTING

Bolt Sets0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread,

Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2HDefault LS1AP2AX5BACZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H



Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H




Page 3 of 4

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00SAL01

Legend

BLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endSWE Socket welded endT TeeVPE Victaulic® plain endVPS Victaulic, pressfit swageWN Weld Neck

Notes

2" T

1 1/2" E T

1" E E T

3/4" E E E T

1/2" E E E E T


2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 4 of 4


81799

Piping Material Specification 00SAL02

NPS 1/2 IN to 2 IN: ASTM A312-TP304, Annealed Finish






SERVICE: MATERIAL:

RATING CLASS: 150, CALC DESIGN CODE: ASME-B31.3

TEMPERATURE LIMIT: -20 to 250 ºF STRESS RELIEF: Undefined


0 in EXAMINATION: Undefined

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE


SMLS, AnnealedDefault PPPABRPEAT1A

BHZ

NIPPLES

Nipple0.75 - 2 in S-10S VPE x

MGENipple , Vic-Press Type P587 , Victaulic PE x MGE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) , 4" Long

Default ONIPAPHPAAT1A1MZ

FITTINGS


Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OE45APBCAPAA

T1ZZZZ


Male grooved end x Plain end

OE45APCCAPBAT1ZZZZ


Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OE90APDCAPAA

T1ZZZZ



OE90APECAPBAT1ZZZZ

Cap0.5 - 2 in CALC VPE Cap , Vic-Press Type P540 , CALC , Victaulic PE , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OCAPAPMCAPC

AT1ZZZZ

Coupling0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Cplg. , Vic-Press Type P597 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OCPLAPFCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS x VPE Cplg. , Vic-Press Type P561 , CALC , Vic-Press x Victaulic PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)


OCPLAPGCAPBAT1ZZZZ

0.75 - 2 in CALC MGE Cplg. , Victaulic® Style 77DX , CALC , MGE , ASTM A890 Grade "EW" Victaulic end OCPLAPQCAMGAT2ZZZZ

0.75 - 2 in CALC MGE Cplg. , Victaulic® Style 77DX , CALC , MGE , ASTM A890 Grade "T" Victaulic grooved rigid end

OCPLAPQCAMGAT3ZZZZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in CALC VPS Con. Reducer , Vic-Press Type P594 , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default BRECAPIPAAT1Z

ZZZ

Tee0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Equal Tee , Vic-Press Type P592 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312

Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)Default OETEAPKCAPAA

T1ZZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in CALC VPS Red. Tee , Vic-Press Type P593 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400)Default ORTEAPJCAPAA

T1ZZZZ



Page 2 of 5


First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Union0.75 - 2 in CALC VPS Union , Vic-Press Type P584 , CALC , Vic-Press , ASTM A312 Grade

TP304 (UNS S30400) , Threaded UnionDefault OUNOAPLCAPAA

T1AAQZ

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Ball Vlv , Vic-Press Type P569 , CALC , Vic-Press - , Lever , ASTM

A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Metal Seat -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VBBAPBCAPAXC

ARLADGZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Metal Seat -, Gasket required

RFFE VBBAAADRFXCARLADGZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in CALC VPS Ball Vlv , Vic-Press Type P589 , CALC , Vic-Press - , Lever , Brass , Press Ends Style 304/316 -, Gasket is not required

Victaulic end VBBAPCCAPAXCAFBA1BZZZZ

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400) , -, Gasket requiredDefault VCPCAAADRFZA

RLZZZZZZZ

Gate Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A182

Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , - -, Gasket requiredDefault VGRAAADRFZFA

RLZZZZZZZ

Globe Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A182

Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , -, Gasket requiredDefault VLRAAADRFZFA

RLZZZZZZZ

Globe Valve - Y Globe Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv Y Pattn , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM

A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , - -, Gasket requiredY pattern VLYAAADRFZFA

RLZZZZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default FBLABLDRFARL

ZZZ


SWESW Flg. , Vic-Press Type P565 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

Default FSWAPADRFAT1ZZZZ


SW Flg. , Vic-Press Type P595 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400)

FFFE FSWAPBDFFAT1ZZZZ

GASKETING


B16.5 Flanges , CL 150 , RF , 304 SS , w/flexible graphite fillerDefault GSWAB9DRFAZ

HA1MZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.21 , CL 150 , FF , PTFE - Default GSWAB7DFFADEZZZZ

BOLTING





Page 3 of 5

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00SAL02

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

BOLTING

Bolt Sets0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread,




Page 4 of 5


Legend

BLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endMGE Male grooved endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endSWE Socket welded endT TeeVPE Victaulic® plain endVPS Victaulic, pressfit swageWN Weld Neck

Notes

2" T

1 1/2" E T

1" E E T

3/4" E E E T

1/2" E E E E T


2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 5 of 5

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00SAL02

81799

Piping Material Specification 00SSW01

304L Stainless Steel Tubing






SERVICE: Cold Reheat Sample Tubing, Low Pressure Steam Sample Tubing, Cond and Demin Water Sample Tubing, Chemical Feed

MATERIAL:

RATING CLASS: DESIGN CODE: ASME-B31.1 - 2012




First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping0.25 in 0.028"

tubingPlain end, tubing

Tube , Gen manu , Plain end, tubing , ASTM A213 Grade TP304L (UNS S30403) , SMLS, Annealed, .028" Min Wall

Default PPTAP2PTAJODANZ

0.375 in 0.035" tubing

Plain end, tubing


Default PPTAP2PTAJODAOZ

0.5 in 0.049" tubing

Plain end, tubing


Default PPTAP2PTAJODAJZ

0.625 - 0.75 in

0.065" tubing

Plain end, tubing


Default PPTAP2PTAJODAKZ

FITTINGS

90 Degree Direction Change0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE 90o elbow, union , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE ,

ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)Default MNCQAP3AMAR

QZZZZ

Cap0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE Cap , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE , ASTM A182

Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)Default MNFJAP3AMARQ

ZZZZ

Cross0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE Eq. Cross , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE , ASTM

A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)Default MNEEAP3AMAR

QZZZZ

Plug0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE Plug , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE , ASTM A182

Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)Default MNFIAP3AMARQ

ZZZZ

Union0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE Tubing union , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE ,

ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)Default MNYRAP3AMAR

QZZZZ

0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE x FTE

Tubing union , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE x FTE , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

FTE MNYRAP3AQARQZZZZ

0.25 - 0.75 in NULL SWGLKE x MTE

Tubing union , Swagelok® (including Whitey Company) , SWGLKE x MTE , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

MTE MNYRAP3APARQZZZZ



Page 2 of 3

Pipe Spec 00SSW01Revision 08/5/2015

Legend

Blank Branch TypeBLE Beveled Large EndFTE Female threaded endMTE Male threaded endPlain end, tubing

Plain end, tubing

PSE Plain Small EndSWGLKE Swagelok® compression tubing endWN Weld Neck

Notes

3/4"

5/8"

1/2"

3/8"

1/4"


3/4" 5/8" 1/2" 3/8" 1/4"

HEADER



Page 3 of 3

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 00SSW01

81799

Piping Material Specification 01CSG01

Carbon Steel Pipe with Grooved Ends






SERVICE: MATERIAL:

RATING CLASS: 150 DESIGN CODE: ASME-B31.3



0.02 in EXAMINATION: Undefined

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping0.5 - 2 in S-80 PE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , PE, ASTM A106-B Default PPPABQPEACRZ

ZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , MGE, ASTM A53-B , ERW Default PPPABQMGADLAACZ

NIPPLES

Nipple0.5 - 2 in S-80 PE Nipple , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A106-B , 4" Long , SMLS 4.0" PE ONIPABQPGACR

A1AZ

0.5 - 2 in S-80 PE Nipple , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A106-B , 6" Long , SMLS 6.0" PE ONIPABQPGACRA1BZ

0.5 - 2 in S-80 PE Nipple , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A106-B , 3" Long , SMLS Default ONIPABQPGACRA1CZ

FITTINGS

45 Degree Direction Change0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE 45 Deg. Elbow , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OE45AB2SSWAC

GZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE 45 Deg. LR Elbow , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASME SA234 Grade WPB - Default BE4LABMMGACJZZZZ


GZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - 1D bend BE9SABMMGACKZZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE 90 Deg. LR Elbow , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - Default BE9LABMMGACKZZZZ

Cap0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cap , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OCAPAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE Cap , ASME B16.9 , MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - Default BCAPABMMGACKZZZZ

Coupling0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OCPLAB2SSWAC

GZZZ

Coupling - Reducing Coupling0.5 - 2 in 0.125 - 1.5 3000 SWE Red. Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OCPRAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

Latrolet0.5 - 2 in 0.5 - 2 Not in

CatalogNot in Catalog

45 Deg Latrolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OL45AP2SISACGZZZ



Page 2 of 6

Pipe Spec 01CSG01Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-80 PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGCAM8PGAC

KZZZZ

3 - 8 in 2 - 6 in S-40 MGE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - Default BRECABMMGACKZZZZ

Reducer - Eccentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-80 PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGEAM8PGAC

KZZZZ

3 - 8 in 2 - 6 in S-40 MGE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A536-65/45/12 , GALV, AWWA C606 Roll-Grooved

Default BREEABMMGACKZZZZ

Sockolet3 - 8 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x

3000BE x SWE Sockolet, MSS SP-97, CL 3000, IRE x SWE , ASME SA105 Default OSOCAM9SISAB

AZZZZ

Tee0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Equal Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OETEAB2SSWAC

GZZZ

2.5 - 8 in S-40 MGE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - Default BTEEABMMGACKZZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 3000 SWE Red. Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default ORTEAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

3 - 8 in 2.5 - 6 in S-40 MGE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9, MGE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB - Default BTERABMMGACKZZZZ

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 SWE Ball Vlv , Gen Mfr , CL 150 , SWE , FP , Lever , ASTM A105 , Type 316

SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Default VBBAVADSWKCACGDABZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB, ASME B16.10, CL 150, RF-, Lever , ASTM A105, Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket required

RFFE VBTAAADRFXCACGDABZZZZ

2.5 - 3 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A216-WCB , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket required

Default VBTAAADRFXCACDDABZZZZ

4 - 8 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket required

Default VBTAAADRFXGACDDABZZZZ

Butterfly Valve2.5 - 8 in NULL MGE Butterfly Valve, 300 psi working pressure, Male Grooved Ends, ductile

iron PPS coated body and disc, EPDM seal, Victaulic VIC-761, Gasket is not required

Default VBDBWKLZZGMUBOKZZZZUM

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 1500 SWE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , Gen Mfr , CL 1500 , SWE , Welded Bonnet , ASTM

A105 , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VCPCACBPSWC

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 8 in Not in Catalog

Not in Catalog

Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A216-WCB - -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAADRFAACDZZZZZZZ

Gate Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Gate Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM

A105 , OS&Y , Solid Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Integral Stellited Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGRACBMSWAFACGDACZZZZ



Page 3 of 6

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01CSG01

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Gate Valve2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel ,

ASTM A216-WCB , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat -, Gasket required

Default VGRAAADRFAFACDDAEZZZZ

8 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat -, Gasket required

Default VGRAAADRFAAACDDAEZZZZ

Globe Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Globe Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM

A105 , OS&Y, 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem, Stelited Disc, Integral Stellited seat, Gasket is not required

Default VLRACBMSWAFACGDACZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , OS&Y, 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem, Stelited Disc, Removable Stainless Steel Seat with Stellite facing, Gasket required

Default VLRAAADRFAFACDDABZZZZ

8 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , OS&Y, 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem, Stelited Disc, Removable Stainless Steel Seat with Stellite facing, Gasket required

Default VLRAAADRFAAACDDABZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange0.5 - 8 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FBLABLDRFACG

ZZZ

Flange2.5 - 12 in 150 x S-

40RFFE x MGE

Flange adapter, AWWA C606, CL 150, RFFE x MGE , ASTM A536-65/45/12, GALV, AWWA C606 Roll-Grooved

Default MFPOAC2ATAOAYDABNZ_01


SWESW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FSWABLDRFAC

GZZZ

GASKETING


B16.5 Flanges , CL 150 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)

Default GSWAB9DRFADAA1FZ

0.5 - 8 in 150 RFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Gaskets for ASME B16.5 Flanges , CL 150 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)


BOLTING

Bolt Sets0.5 - 8 in 150 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Heavy Hex

Nuts ASTM A194 2HDefault LS1AP2AX5BABZ

0.5 - 8 in 150 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H

Default LS1AP2AX5BABZ

CLAMPS

Clamps2.5 - 8 in MGE Mechanical Clamp , AMERICAN Mechanical Joint gasket , MGE , ASTM

A395-DuctileDefault MFVEAQ3GFAH9

ZZZZ_01



Page 4 of 6




Page 5 of 6

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01CSG01

Legend

Blank Branch TypeBE Beveled endBLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeMGE Male grooved endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endSWE Socket welded endT TeeWN Weld Neck

Notes

30" T

24" E T

20" E E T

18" E E E T

16" E E E E T

14" E E E E E T

12" E E E E E E T

10" E E E T

8" E E E T

6" E E E T

4" E E T

3" E T

2 1/2" E E T

2" T

1 1/2" E T

1" E E T

3/4" E E E T

1/2" E E E E T


30" 24" 20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 6 of 6


81799

Piping Material Specification 01CSS01

NPS 2-1/2 IN to 30 IN: CL150 RFFE ASTM A53-ANPS 1/2 IN to 2 IN: CL150 RFFE ASTM A106-B






SERVICE: Low Pressure Steam, Water Systems, Oil Systems, Fuel Gas Systems

MATERIAL:




0.02 in EXAMINATION: ASME-B31.1 - 2012

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping0.5 - 2 in S-80 PE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A106-B , SMLS Default PPPABQPEACRA

AG

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , BE , ASTM A53-A , SMLS Default PPPABQBEADKAAGZ

12 - 30 in S-STD BE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , BE , ASTM A53-A , SMLS Default PPPABQBEADKAAGZ

NIPPLES


A1AZ



FITTINGS


GZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE 45 Deg. LR Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BE4LABMBEACKZZZ

12 - 30 in S-STD BE 45 Deg. LR Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BE4LABMBEACKZZZ


GZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB 1D bend BE9SABMBEACKZZZ


12 - 24 in S-STD BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB 1D bend BE9SABMBEACKZZZ



CGZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BCAPABMBEACKZZZZ

12 - 30 in S-STD BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BCAPABMBEACKZZZZ



Page 2 of 8

Pipe Spec 01CSS01Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS


GZZZ

Coupling - Reducing Coupling0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OCPRAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

Elbolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x

3000BE x SWE Elbolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OEBLAP2SISAC

GZZZ

12 - 30 in 0.5 - 2 in S-STD x 3000

BE x SWE Elbolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OEBLAP2SISACGZZZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-80 BE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BBE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGCAM8BEAC

KZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x S-80

BE x PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGCAM8BPACKZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BRECABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 30 in 12 - 28 in S-STD BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BRECABMBEACKZZZ


KZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x S-80

BE x PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGEAM8BPACKZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BREEABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 30 in 12 - 28 in S-STD BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BREEABMBEACKZZZ

Sockolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x SWE Sockolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OSOCAM9SISAC

GZZZ

12 - 30 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x SWE Sockolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OSOCAM9SISACGZZZ


GZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTEEABMBEACKZZZ

12 - 30 in S-STD BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTEEABMBEACKZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default ORTEAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTERABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 30 in 12 - 24 in S-STD BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTERABMBEACKZZZ

Thredolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x FTE Threadolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x FTE , ASTM A105 Default OTHLAM9SIFAC

GZZZZ



Page 3 of 8

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01CSS01

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Thredolet12 - 30 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x FTE Threadolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x FTE , ASTM A105 Default OTHLAM9SIFAC

GZZZZ

Weldolet6 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A105 Default BWELAM9BEAC

GZZZ

22 - 30 in 2.5 - 6 in S-STD x S-40

BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A105 Default BWELAM9BEACGZZZ

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 SWE Ball Vlv , ValvTechnologies , CL 150 , SWE - , Lever , ASTM A105 ,

Metal Seat, Gasket is not requiredDefault VBBAVADSWXC

ACGADGZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 SWE Ball Vlv, Flowserve, CL 150, SWE-, Lever , ASTM A105-, RTFE Seat, Fire Safe per API 607, Gasket is not required

SWE VBBAFADSWXCACGZZZAAXZ

2.5 - 3 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A216-WCB , Metal Seat, Gasket required

Default VBLAAADRFXCACDADGZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB, ASME B16.10, CL 150, RF-, Wrench, short , ASTM A216-WCB-, RTFE Seat, Fire Safe per API 607, Gasket required

Full port VBTAAADRFXEACDZZZAAXZ

2.5 - 3 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A216-WCB , Soft Seat, Gasket required

Type 1 VBLAAADRFXCACDADHZZZZ

4 - 12 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Drive, gear operator , ASTM A216-WCB , Metal Seat, Gasket required

Default VBLAAADRFXBACDADGZZZZ

4 - 12 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , Soft Seat, Gasket required

Type 1 VBLAAADRFXAACDADHZZZZ

6 - 12 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB, ASME B16.10, CL 150, RF-, Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB-, RTFE Seat, Fire Safe per API 607, Gasket required

Full port VBTAAADRFXGACDZZZAAXZ

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A105 , -,

Gasket is not requiredDefault VCPCACBMSWA

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 10 in 150 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A216-WCB -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAADBEAACDZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 RFTBE Wafer Chk Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RFTBE , Between Flanges , ASTM A216-WCB -, Gasket required

Wafer VCWSAAADRTGACDZZZZZZZ

12 - 30 in 150 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A216-WCB -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAADBEAACDZZZZZZZ

Gate Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Gate Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE - , Handwheel , ASTM A105 , -,

Gasket is not requiredDefault VGRACBMSWZF

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VGRAAADBEZFACDZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , - -, Gasket required

RFFE VGRAAADRFZFACDZZZZZZZ

8 - 10 in 150 BE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VGRAAADBEZAACDZZZZZZZ

8 - 30 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , - -, Gasket required

RFFE VGRAAADRFZAACDZZZZZZZ


Default VGRAAADBEZAACDZZZZZZZ


A105 , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VLRACBMSWAF

ACGZZZZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Globe Vlv Y Pattn , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , Y pattern VLYACBMSWAF



Page 4 of 8


ASTM A105 , - -, Gasket is not required ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAFACDZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAADRFAFACDZZZZZZZ

8 - 10 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAAACDZZZZZZZ

8 - 30 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAADRFAAACDZZZZZZZ

12 - 30 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAAACDZZZZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange0.5 - 24 in 300 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 300 FBLABLIRFACGZ

ZZ

0.5 - 24 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FBLABLDRFACGZZZ

0.5 - 24 in 150 FFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FBLABLDFFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 300 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 300 FBLABHIRFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FBLABHDRFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 150 FFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FBLABHDFFACGZZZ


SWESW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 300 FSWABLIRFACG

ZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE x SWE

SW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FSWABLDRFACGZZZ


SW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FSWABLDFFACGZZZ

Flange - Weld Neck2.5 - 10 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 300 FWNABLIRFACG

ZZZ

2.5 - 10 in 150 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABLDRFACGZZZ

2.5 - 10 in 150 FFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FWNABLDFFACGZZZ

12 - 24 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 300 FWNABLIRFACGZZZ

12 - 24 in 150 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABLDRFACGZZZ

12 - 24 in 150 FFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FWNABLDFFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 300 FWNABHIRFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 150 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 150 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABHDRFACGZZZ

26 - 30 in 150 FFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A105 FFFE FWNABHDFFACGZZZ

Orifice Flange1 - 2 in 300 RFFE x BE

x SWEWN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)

Default FO5ABDIRFACGAAQZ

1 - 2 in 300 RFFE x BE x SWE

WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 , Two taps are oriented 90 degrees apart (orifice flange)

Orifice flange with two taps, 90o

FO5ABDIRFACGAATZ



Page 5 of 8

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01CSS01

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FLANGES

Orifice Flange2.5 - 10 in 300 RFFE x BE



2.5 - 10 in 300 RFFE x BE x SWE



FO5ABDIRFACGAATZ


WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)





FO5ABDIRFACGAATZ

GASKETING

Gaskets0.5 - 24 in 150 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2DRFAW

GZZZZ

0.5 - 24 in 300 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 300 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2IRFAWGZZZZ

0.5 - 10 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 , THK 1/16" (1.6 mm)

Default GNMAM2DFFAWGA1JZ

1 - 24 in 300 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 300 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2IRFAWGZZZZ

2.5 - 24 in 150 RFFE/ RFTBE

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2DRFAWGZZZZ

12 - 24 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)

Default GNMAM2DFFAWGA1FZ





26 - 30 in 150 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2DRFAWGZZZZ





26 - 30 in 150 RFFE/ RFTBE

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , BLUE-GARD® 3000 Default GNMAM2DRFAWGZZZZ

BOLTING



0.5 - 24 in 150 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H




1 - 24 in 300 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H




Page 6 of 8


2.5 - 24 in 150 RFFE/ RFTBE



12 - 24 in 150 FFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B7 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 2H






26 - 30 in 150 RFFE/ RFTBE















Page 7 of 8

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01CSS01

Legend

BE Beveled endBLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endFTE Female threaded endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endRFTBE Raised-face thru-bolted end without bolt holesS SockoletSWE Socket welded endT TeeW WeldoletWN Weld Neck

Notes

30" T

24" E T

20" E E T

18" E E E T

16" E E E E T

14" E E E E E T

12" E E E E E E T

10" W W W W E E E T

8" W W W W W E E E T

6" W W W W W W E E E T

4" W W W W W W W W E E T

3" W W W W W W W W W W E T

2 1/2" W W W W W W W W W W E E T

2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S T

1 1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S E T

1 1/4" E

1" S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E T

3/4" S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E E T

1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E E E T


30" 24" 20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 8 of 8


81799

Piping Material Specification 01SAS01

NPS 1/2 IN to 20 IN: CL150 RFFE ASTM A312-TP304






SERVICE: Low Pressure Demineralized Water, Chemical Feed Systems as approved by a Process Engineer

MATERIAL:





First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE


SMLSDefault PPPABRPEAT1A

AG

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Pipe , ASME-B36.19M , BE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) , EFW

Default PPPABRBEAT1AAD

NIPPLES

Nipple0.5 - 2 in S-40S PE Nipple , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS

S30400) , 4" Long , SMLS4.0" PE ONIPABQPGAT1

A1AZ

0.5 - 2 in S-40S PE Nipple , ASME-B36.19M , PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) , 6" Long , SMLS

6.0" PE ONIPABRPGAT1A1BZ

0.5 - 2 in S-40S PE Nipple , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) , 3" Long , SMLS

Default ONIPABQPGAT1A1CZ

FITTINGS

45 Degree Direction Change0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE 45 Deg. Elbow , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400)Default OE45AB2SSWAR

LZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE 45 Deg. LR Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default BE4LABMBEAYNZZZZ



LZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

1D bend BE9SABMBEAYNZZZZ



90 Degree Reducing Elbow3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE 90 Deg. Red. Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304

(UNS S30400)Default BE9RABMBEAYN

ZZZZ

Cap0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cap , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS

S30400)Default OCAPAB2SSWA

RLZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BCAPABMBEAYNABAZ

Coupling0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS

S30400)Default OCPLAB2SSWAR

LZZZ

Coupling - Reducing Coupling0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default OCPRAB2SSWA

RLZZZZ



Page 2 of 6

Pipe Spec 01SAS01Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-40S PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS

S30400)Default OSGCAM8PGAY

NZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-10S x S-40S

BE x PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default OSGCAM8BPAYNZZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BRECABMBEAYNABAZ

Reducer - Eccentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-40S PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS

S30400)Default OSGEAM8PGAY

NZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-10S x S-40S

BE x PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default OSGEAM8BPAYNZZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BREEABMBEAYNABAZ

Sockolet2.5 - 20 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x SWE Sockolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400)Default OSOCAM9SISAR

LZZZZ

Tee0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Equal Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default OETEAB2SSWAR

LZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default BTEEABMBEAYNZZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default ORTEAB2SSWA

RLZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default BTERABMBEAYNZZZZ

Weldolet6 - 20 in 2.5 - 10 in S-10S BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) ,

SMLSDefault BWELAM9BEARL

ABA

VALVES

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A182

Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VCPCACBMSWA

ARQZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A351-CF8M -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 BE Tilting Disc Chk Vlv, ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A351-CF8M, Gasket is not required

Type 4 VCSDAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ


A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , OS&Y , Solid Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Integral Stellited Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGRACBMSWAFARQDACZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGSAAADBEAFAR9DAEZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket required

RFFE VGSAAADRFAFAR9DAEZZZZ



Page 3 of 6

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01SAS01

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Gate Valve8 - 20 in 150 BE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Drive, gear

operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGSAAADBEABAR9DAEZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket required

RFFE VGSAAADRFAAAR9DAEZZZZ


A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VLRACBMSWAF

ARQZZZZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Globe Vlv Y Pattn , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , - -, Gasket is not required

Y pattern VLYACBMSWAFARQZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAFAR9ZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAADRFAFAR9ZZZZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAAAR9ZZZZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAADRFAAAR9ZZZZZZZ

FLANGES


(UNS S30400)300 FBLABLIRFARLZ

ZZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FBLABLDRFARLZZZ


SWESW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FSWABLDRFARLZZZ


SW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FF , ASTM A350 Grade LF2 Class 1 FFFE FSWABLDFFACRZZZ

Flange - Weld Neck2.5 - 20 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)300 FWNABLIRFARL

ZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FWNABLDRFARLZZZ


x SWEWN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)

Default FO5ABDIRFARLAAQZ


WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Two taps are oriented 90 degrees apart (orifice flange)


FO5ABDIRFARLAATZ


WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)





FO5ABDIRFARLAATZ

GASKETING



Page 4 of 6


Gaskets0.5 - 2 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Multi-Swell 3760 , THK

1/16" (1.6 mm)Default GNMAM2DFFAW

HA1JZ




Default GSWAB9IRFADAA1FZ

1 - 20 in 300 RFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Gaskets for ASME B16.5 Flanges , CL 300 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)


BOLTING


Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 Gr.7Default LS1AP2AX6BBCZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B16 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 Gr.7

Default LS1AP2AX6BBCZ

0.5 - 20 in 300 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B16 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 Gr.7


1 - 20 in 300 RFFE Std Blt & 2 Hex Nut , Gen manu , ASTM A193 Grade B16 , Full Thread, Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A194 Gr.7




Page 5 of 6

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01SAS01

Legend

BE Beveled endBLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endS SockoletSWE Socket welded endT TeeW WeldoletWN Weld Neck

Notes

20" T

18" E T

16" E E T

14" E E E T

12" E E E E T

10" W W E E E T

8" W W W W W E T

6" W W W W W E E T

4" W W W W W W W E T

3" W W W W W W W W E T

2 1/2" W W W W W W W W E E T

2" S S S S S S S S S S S T

1 1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S E T

1" S S S S S S S S S S S E E T

3/4" S S S S S S S S S S S E E E T

1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S E E E E T


20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 6 of 6


81799

Piping Material Specification 01SAS02

NPS 1/2 IN to 20 IN: CL150 RFFE ASTM A312-TP304






SERVICE: Low Pressure Demineralized Water, Chemical Feed Systems as approved by a Process Engineer

MATERIAL:





First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE


SMLSDefault PPPABRPEAT1A

AG

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Pipe , ASME-B36.19M , BE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS S30400) , EFW

Default PPPABRBEAT1AAD

NIPPLES

Nipple0.5 - 2 in S-40S PE Nipple , ASME-B36.19M , PE , ASTM A312 Grade TP304 (UNS

S30400) , 4" Long , SMLS4.0" PE ONIPABRPGAT1

A1AZ


6.0" PE ONIPABRPGAT1A1BZ


Default ONIPABRPGAT1A1CZ

FITTINGS



LZZZ





LZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

1D bend BE9SABMBEAYNZZZZ



90 Degree Reducing Elbow3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE 90 Deg. Red. Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304

(UNS S30400)Default BE9RABMBEAYN

ZZZZ

Cap0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cap , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS

S30400)Default OCAPAB2SSWA

RLZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BCAPABMBEAYNABAZ

Coupling0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS

S30400)Default OCPLAB2SSWAR

LZZZ

Coupling - Reducing Coupling0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default OCPRAB2SSWA

RLZZZZ



Page 2 of 7


First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Latrolet2.5 - 20 in 0.5 - 2 in S-10S x

3000BE x SWE 45 Deg Latrolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A182

Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)Default OL45AM9SISARL

ZZZZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-40S PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS

S30400)Default OSGCAM8PGAY

NZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-10S x S-40S

BE x PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default OSGCAM8BPAYNZZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BRECABMBEAYNABAZ

Reducer - Eccentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-40S PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS

S30400)Default OSGEAM8PGAY

NZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-10S x S-40S

BE x PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default OSGEAM8BPAYNZZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400) , SMLS

Default BREEABMBEAYNABAZ

Sockolet2.5 - 20 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x SWE Sockolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F

304 (UNS S30400)Default OSOCAM9SISAR

LZZZZ

Tee0.5 - 2 in 3000 SWE Equal Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default OETEAB2SSWAR

LZZZ

2.5 - 20 in S-10S BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default BTEEABMBEAYNZZZZ

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)Default ORTEAB2SSWA

RLZZZ

3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A403 Grade WP304 (UNS S30400)

Default BTERABMBEAYNZZZZ

Weldolet3 - 20 in 2.5 - 18 in S-10S BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) ,

SMLSDefault BWELAM9BEARL

ABA

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in 150 SWE Ball Vlv , ValvTechnologies , CL 150 , SWE , FP , Lever , ASTM A182

Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Default VBBAVADSWKCARQDABZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 SWE Ball Vlv , ValvTechnologies , CL 150 , SWE , FP , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Gear, side mounted handwheel Type 2

VBBAVADSWKGARQDABZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing -, Gasket required

RFFE VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 150 BE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE - , Lever , ASTM A351-CF8M , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Default VBTAAADBEXCAR9DABZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 150 BE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE - , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Gear, side mounted handwheel Type 2

VBTAAADBEXGAR9DABZZZZ



Page 3 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01SAS02

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Ball Valve2.5 - 4 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Wrench, short , ASTM

A351-CF8M , RTFE Seat -, Gasket requiredRFFE VBTAAADRFXEA

R9AEFZZZZ

6 - 16 in 150 BE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE - , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , Type 316 SS Ball, RTFE Seat, Type 316 SS Shaft, PTFE Packing, Gasket is not required

Default VBTAAADBEXGAR9DABZZZZ

6 - 16 in 150 RFFE Ball Vlv SP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF - , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , RTFE Seat -, Gasket required

RFFE VBTAAADRFXGAR9AEFZZZZ

Butterfly Valve3 - 4 in 150 RFTBEHT Bfly Vlv Lug Type , API 609 Cat B , CL 150 , RFTBEHT , Lever , ASTM

A351-CF8M , Type 316 SS Disc, RTFE Seat, 17-4 PH SS Double Offset Shaft, RTFE Stem Seal, RTFE backed with Type 316 SS bearings, Gasket required

Default VYLAA2DRHCAR9DABZZZZ

6 - 20 in 150 RFTBEHT Bfly Vlv Lug Type , API 609 Cat B , CL 150 , RFTBEHT , Worm Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , Type 316 SS Disc, RTFE Seat, 17-4 PH SS Double Offset Shaft, RTFE Stem Seal, RTFE backed with Type 316 SS bearings, Gasket required

Default VYLAA2DRHGAR9DABZZZZ

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A182

Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VCPCACBMSWA

ARQZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A351-CF8M -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 BE Tilting Disc Chk Vlv, ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A351-CF8M, Gasket is not required

Type 4 VCSDAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ


A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , OS&Y , Solid Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Integral Stellited Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGRACBMSWAFARQDACZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGSAAADBEAFAR9DAEZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket required

RFFE VGSAAADRFAFAR9DAEZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 BE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Drive, gear operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket is not required

Default VGSAAADBEABAR9DAEZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 RFFE Gate Vlv SP , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , OS&Y , Flexible Wedge , 11.5 - 16% Chrome Stem , Stellited Disc and Seat Facing , Removable SS Backseat, Gasket required

RFFE VGSAAADRFAAAR9DAEZZZZ


A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VLRACBMSWAF

ARQZZZZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Globe Vlv Y Pattn , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600) , - -, Gasket is not required

Y pattern VLYACBMSWAFARQZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAFAR9ZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 6 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAADRFAFAR9ZZZZZZZ

8 - 20 in 150 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , BE , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAADBEAAAR9ZZZZZZZ



Page 4 of 7


First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Globe Valve8 - 20 in 150 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 150 , RF , Bltd Bonnet , Bevel Gear

Operator , ASTM A351-CF8M , -, Gasket requiredRFFE VLRAAADRFAAA

R9ZZZZZZZ

FLANGES


(UNS S30400)300 FBLABLIRFARLZ

ZZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FBLABLDRFARLZZZ


SWESW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

300 FSWABLIRFARLZZZ


SW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FSWABLDRFARLZZZ


SW Flg., ASME B16.5, CL 150, FF , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

FFFE FSWABLDFFARLZZZZ

Flange - Weld Neck2.5 - 20 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304

(UNS S30400)300 FWNABLIRFARL

ZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

Default FWNABLDRFARLZZZ

2.5 - 20 in 150 FFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 150 , FFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

FFFE FWNABLDFFARLZZZZ


x SWEWN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)





FO5ABDIRFARLAATZ


WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400) , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)





FO5ABDIRFARLAATZ

GASKETING

Gaskets0.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2DRFAW

IZZZZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 RFTBEHT Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2DRFAWIZZZZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 RFFE/ RFTBEHT

Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , RF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2DRFAWIZZZZ

0.5 - 20 in 300 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 300 , RF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2IRFAWIZZZZ

0.5 - 20 in 150 FFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2DFFAWIZZZZ


Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 150 , FF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2DFFAWIZZZZ

1 - 20 in 300 RFFE Non Metal Flat Gskt , Garlock , CL 300 , RF , Gylon® 3545 Default GNMAM2IRFAWIZZZZ



Page 5 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01SAS02

BOLTING














Page 6 of 7


Legend

BE Beveled endBLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFFFE Flat-face flanged endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endRFTBEHT Raised-face thru-bolted end with threaded bolt holesS SockoletSWE Socket welded endT TeeW WeldoletWN Weld Neck

Notes

20" T

18" E T

16" E E T

14" E E E T

12" E E E E T

10" W W E E E T

8" W W W E E E T

6" W W W W E E E T

4" W W W W W W E E T

3" W W W W W W W W E T

2 1/2" W W W W W W W W E E T

2" S S S S S S S S S S S T

1 1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S E T

1" S S S S S S S S S S S E E T

3/4" S S S S S S S S S S S E E E T

1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S E E E E T


20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 7 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 01SAS02

81799

Piping Material Specification 03CBS04

NPS 1/2 IN to 36 IN: CL300 RFFE ASTM A106-B






SERVICE: Extraction Steam (Intermediate Pressure), Condensate, Sluice Water, Intermediate Pressure Feedwater Heater Drips, High Pressure Fuel Oil Systems, Intermediate Pressure Fuel Gas

MATERIAL:




0.02 in EXAMINATION: Undefined

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

PIPE

Piping0.5 - 2 in S-40 PE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , PE , ASTM A106-B , SMLS Default PPPABQPEACRA

AGZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , BE , ASTM A106-B , SMLS Default PPPABQBEACRAAGZ

12 - 36 in S-STD BE Pipe , ASME B36.10M , BE , ASTM A106-B , SMLS Default PPPABQBEACRAAGZ

NIPPLES


A1AZ



FITTINGS


GZZZ




GZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB 1D bend BE9SABMBEACKZZZ


12 - 24 in S-STD BE 90 Deg. Elbow 1D , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB 1D bend BE9SABMBEACKZZZ


90 Degree Reducing Elbow3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE 90 Deg. Red. Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BE9RABMBEACK

ZZZ

14 - 24 in 12 - 20 in S-STD BE 90 Deg. Red. Elbow , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BE9RABMBEACKZZZ



Page 2 of 7

Pipe Spec 03CBS04Revision 08/5/2015

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS


CGZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BCAPABMBEACKZZZZ

12 - 36 in S-STD BE Cap , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BCAPABMBEACKZZZZ


GZZZ

Coupling - Reducing Coupling0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Cplg. , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default OCPRAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

Elbolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x

3000BE x SWE Elbolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OEBLAP2SISAC

GZZZ

12 - 36 in 0.5 - 2 in S-STD x 3000

BE x SWE Elbolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OEBLAP2SISACGZZZ

Latrolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in S-40 x

3000BE x SWE 45 Deg Latrolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OL45AP2SISACG

ZZZ

12 - 36 in 0.5 - 2 in S-STD x 3000

BE x SWE 45 Deg Latrolet , Gen manu , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OL45AP2SISACGZZZ

Reducer - Concentric Size Change0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in S-40 PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , PE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGCAM8PGAC

KZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-40 BE x PE Con. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGCAM8BPACKZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BRECABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 36 in 12 - 30 in S-STD BE Con. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BRECABMBEACKZZZ


KZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 1 - 2 in S-40 BE x PE Ecc. Swage , MSS SP-95 , BLE / PSE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default OSGEAM8BPACKZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BREEABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 36 in 12 - 30 in S-STD BE Ecc. Reducer , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BREEABMBEACKZZZ

Sockolet2.5 - 36 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x SWE Sockolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x SWE , ASTM A105 Default OSOCAM9SISAC

GZZZ


GZZZ

2.5 - 10 in S-40 BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTEEABMBEACKZZZ

12 - 36 in S-STD BE Equal Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTEEABMBEACKZZZ



Page 3 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 03CBS04

First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

FITTINGS

Tee - Reducing Tee0.75 - 2 in 0.5 - 1.5 in 3000 SWE Red. Tee , ASME B16.11 , CL 3000 , SWE , ASTM A105 Default ORTEAB2SSWA

CGZZZ

3 - 10 in 2.5 - 8 in S-40 BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTERABMBEACKZZZ

14 - 36 in 12 - 30 in S-STD BE Red. Tee , ASME B16.9 , BE , ASTM A234 Grade WPB Default BTERABMBEACKZZZ

Thredolet2.5 - 10 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x FTE Threadolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x FTE , ASTM A105 Default OTHLAM9SIFAC

GZZZZ

12 - 36 in 0.5 - 2 in 3000 BE x FTE Threadolet , MSS SP-97 , CL 3000 , IRE x FTE , ASTM A105 Default OTHLAM9SIFACGZZZZ

Weldolet6 - 10 in 2.5 - 4 in S-40 BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A105 Default BWELAM9BEAC

GZZZ

14 - 36 in 12 - 30 in S-STD BE Weldolet , MSS SP-97 , BE , ASTM A105 Default BWELAM9BEACGZZZ

VALVES

Ball Valve0.5 - 2 in 300 SWE Ball Vlv , ValvTechnologies , CL 300 , SWE - , Lever , ASTM A105 ,

Metal Seat, Gasket is not requiredDefault VBBAVAISWXCA

CGADGZZZZ

2.5 - 3 in 300 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Lever , ASTM A216-WCB , Metal Seat, Gasket required

Default VBLAAAIRFXCACDADGZZZZ

4 - 12 in 300 RFFE Ball Vlv LP FB , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Drive, gear operator , ASTM A216-WCB , Metal Seat, Gasket required

Default VBLAAAIRFXBACDADGZZZZ

Check Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Pistn Lft Chk Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , ASTM A105 , -,

Gasket is not requiredDefault VCPCACBMSWA

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 10 in 300 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , ASTM A216-WCB -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAAIBEZACDZZZZZZZ

12 - 36 in 300 BE Swing Chk Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , ASTM A216-WCB -, Gasket is not required

Default VCSCAAAIBEZACDZZZZZZZ

Gate Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Gate Vlv , Powell , CL 800 , SWE - , Handwheel , ASTM A105 , -,

Gasket is not requiredDefault VGRACBMSWZF

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 300 BE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VGRAAAIBEZFACDZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 300 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , - -, Gasket required

RFFE VGRAAAIRFZFACDZZZZZZZ


Default VGRAAAIBEZAACDZZZZZZZ

6 - 36 in 300 RFFE Gate Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , - -, Gasket required

RFFE VGRAAAIRFZAACDZZZZZZZ


Default VGRAAAIBEZAACDZZZZZZZ


A105 , -, Gasket is not requiredDefault VLRACBMSWAF

ACGZZZZZZZ

0.5 - 2 in 300 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAAIRFZFACDZZZZZZZ



Page 4 of 7


First Size/ NPD

SecondSize

Sch/Rtg


CommodityCode

VALVES

Globe Valve0.5 - 2 in 800 SWE Globe Vlv Y Pattn , Powell , CL 800 , SWE , Bltd Bonnet , Handwheel ,

ASTM A105 , - -, Gasket is not requiredY pattern VLYACBMSWAF

ACGZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 300 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAAIBEZFACDZZZZZZZ

2.5 - 4 in 300 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Handwheel , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAAIRFZFACDZZZZZZZ

6 - 10 in 300 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAAIBEZAACDZZZZZZZ

6 - 12 in 300 RFFE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , RF - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket required

RFFE VLRAAAIRFZAACDZZZZZZZ

12 in 300 BE Globe Vlv , ASME B16.10 , CL 300 , BE - , Bevel Gear Operator , ASTM A216-WCB , -, Gasket is not required

Default VLRAAAIBEZAACDZZZZZZZ

FLANGES

Blind Flange0.5 - 24 in 300 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FBLABLIRFACGZ

ZZ

26 - 36 in 300 RFFE Blind Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FBLABHIRFACGZZZ


SWESW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 600 , RFFE , ASTM A105 600 FSWABLLRFACG

ZZZZ


SW Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , ASTM A105 Default FSWABLIRFACGZZZ

Flange - Weld Neck2.5 - 10 in 600 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 600 , RFFE , ASTM A105 600 FWNABLLRFACG

ZZZ

2.5 - 10 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABLIRFACGZZZ

12 - 24 in 600 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 600 , RFFE , ASTM A105 600 FWNABLLRFACGZZZ

12 - 24 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.5 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABLIRFACGZZZ

26 - 36 in 600 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 600 , RFFE , ASTM A105 600 FWNABHLRFACGZZZ

26 - 36 in 300 RFFE x BE WN Flg. , ASME B16.47 Sr A , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 Default FWNABHIRFACGZZZ







FO5ABDIRFACGAATZ


WN Ori Flg0.5"SW tap , ASME B16.36 , CL 300 , RFFE , [409] , ASTM A105 , Two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart (orifice flange, orifice tap, or bleed ring)





FO5ABDIRFACGAATZ

GASKETING

Gaskets



Page 5 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 03CBS04


B16.5 Flanges , CL 300 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)



Default GSWAB9LRFADAA1FZ

1 - 24 in 300 RFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Gaskets for ASME B16.5 Flanges , CL 300 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)


26 - 36 in 300 RFFE Sp. Wound Gskt , ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Gaskets for ASME B16.47 Series A Flanges , CL 300 , RF , Flexitallic CGI, 304 SS, Flex Graph Filler, CS-OR, 304-IR , THK 1/8" (3.2 mm)










BOLTING



















Page 6 of 7


Legend

BE Beveled endBLE Beveled Large EndE Reducing TeeFTE Female threaded endPE Plain endPSE Plain Small EndRFFE Raised-face flanged endS SockoletSWE Socket welded endT TeeW WeldoletWN Weld Neck

Notes

36" T

30" E T

24" E E T

20" E E E T

18" E E E E T

16" E E E E E T

14" E E E E E E T

12" E E E E E E E T

10" W W W W W E E E T

8" W W W W W W E E E T

6" W W W W W W W E E E T

4" W W W W W W W W W E E T

3" W W W W W W W W W W W E T

2 1/2" W W W W W W W W W W W E E T

2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S S T

1 1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S S E T

1" S S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E T

3/4" S S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E E T

1/2" S S S S S S S S S S S S S S E E E E T


36" 30" 24" 20" 18" 16" 14" 12" 10" 8" 6" 4" 3" 2 1/2" 2" 1 1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2"

HEADER



Page 7 of 7

Revision 08/5/2015

Pipe Spec 03CBS04

Rev Date By Checked Description

0 8/5/2015 SMK MRS ISSUED FOR BID

Line List (Const. By 5.8320)

81799

COFFEYVILLE GENERATION FACILITY 2

Copyright 2015

Line Number Pressure Testing

UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp

Ins Thk Service DesignPress(psig)

DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

00 AAU 001 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 002 2" 00SAL01 T 2" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 003 1" 00SAL01 T 2" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 004 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 004 1" 00SAL01 T 2" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 004 3/4" 00SAL01 T 2" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 301 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Urea 145 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00100 AAU 302 4" 01SAS02 N 0" Urea 145 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00101 AAU 100 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00102 AAU 100 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00103 AAU 100 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU00101 AAU 100 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU001,

MMSCR00102 AAU 100 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU001,

MMSCR00103 AAU 100 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMAAU001,

MMSCR00200 ACI 032 2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA00100 ACS 304 1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA00101 ACI 001 18 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00101 ACI 102 3/4" N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00101 ACS 001 65 mm N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00102 ACI 001 18 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00102 ACI 102 3/4" N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00102 ACS 001 65 mm N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00103 ACI 001 18 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00103 ACI 102 3/4" N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00103 ACS 001 65 mm N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA00100 ACI 060 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMACI00200 ACI 060 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMACI00200 ACS 122 4" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMACS00201 ACI 002 15 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMFGS00502 ACI 002 15 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMFGS00503 ACI 002 15 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001,

MMFGS005

Page 1 of 14COFFEYVILLE KANSASProject # 81799




UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

01 ACI 100 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACA001, MMSCR001

01 SCR 200 250 mm N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMACA001, MMSCR001





00 ACI 001 1/2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 001 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 001 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 002 1/2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 002 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 002 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 010 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 011 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 012 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 015 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 021 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 022 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 030 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 100 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 100 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 101 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT, PNEUMATIC -, 175

psi-gN 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001

00 ACI 102 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT, PNEUMATIC -, 175 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001


N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001


N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001


N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001


N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001

00 ACI 301 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 302 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 304 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

00 ACI 305 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 315 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00100 ACI 050 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001,

MMACI00200 ACI 151 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI001,

MMACS00100 ACI 060 1/2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00200 ACI 060 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00200 ACI 122 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00200 ACI 311 1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACI00200 ACI 151 1" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACI 151 1-1/2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACI 451 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 001 1-1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 001 1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 001 3/4" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 002 1-1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 002 1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 002 3/4" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 010 1-1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 151 1" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 PNEUMATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 151 1-1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 PNEUMATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 151 1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 PNEUMATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 151 2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 PNEUMATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 300 1" 03CBS04 N 0" Oily water sewer 480 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 301 1" 03CBS04 N 0" Oily water sewer 480 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00100 ACS 010 1-1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 HYDROSTATIC 720 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS001,

MMACS00200 ACS 331 1/2" 03CBS04 N 0" Starting air 480 165 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS00201 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 001 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 001 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 002 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 002 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 010 1-1/2" 00SAL02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 011 40 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 100 1-1/2" 00SAL02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 101 1-1/2" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM001





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

01 CWM 101 6" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 102 1-1/2" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00101 CWM 102 6" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 001 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 002 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 010 1-1/2" 00SAL02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 011 40 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 100 1-1/2" 00SAL02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 101 1-1/2" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 101 6" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 102 1-1/2" 01SAS02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00102 CWM 102 6" 01SAS02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00100 CWM 014 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM001,

MMCWM002, MMCWM004

01 CWM 001 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM001, MMCWM003




01 CWM 014 2" 01CSS03 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM001, MMDOC001

02 CWM 014 2" 01CSS03 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM001, MMDOC001

03 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 001 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 001 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 002 1-1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 004 150 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 010 1-1/2" 01SAS01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 011 40 mm P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 100 1-1/2" 01SAS02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 101 1-1/2" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM002





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

03 CWM 101 6" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 102 1-1/2" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 102 6" P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMCWM00203 CWM 001 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM002,

MMCWM00303 CWM 002 8" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM002,

MMCWM00300 CWM 030 1-1/2" 00SAL02 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM002,

MMCWM00403 CWM 014 2" 01CSS03 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM002,

MMDOC00101 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 011 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 011 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 012 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 012 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 013 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 013 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 014 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 014 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 015 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 015 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 021 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 021 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 022 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 022 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 023 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 023 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 024 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 024 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 025 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00301 CWM 025 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 011 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 011 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 012 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 012 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 013 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 013 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM003





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

02 CWM 014 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 014 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 015 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 015 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 021 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 021 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 022 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 022 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 023 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 023 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 024 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 024 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 025 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00302 CWM 025 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 001 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 002 1" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 011 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 011 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 012 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 012 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 013 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 013 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 014 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 014 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 015 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 015 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 021 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 021 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 022 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 022 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 023 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 023 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 024 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 024 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 025 1/2" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00303 CWM 025 4" 01CSG01 P 0" Cooling water 80 230 HYDROSTATIC 120 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00300 CWM 304 1" 01CSS03 N 0" Cooling water 80 230 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM00400 WSW 030 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMCWM004,

MMWSW002





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

01 FGS 300 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMFGS005

01 FGS 302 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 150, 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMFGS005


02 FGS 302 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMFGS005


03 FGS 302 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMFGS005

01 BAG 300 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMSCR001



01 WSW 301 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMDOC001, MMWSW002



00 FGS 001 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00100 FGS 001 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00100 FGS 003 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00100 FGS 003 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS001,

MMFGS00200 FGS 003 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00200 FGS 003 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00200 FGS 202 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00200 FGS 004 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS002,

MMFGS00400 FGS 004 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS002,

MMFGS00400 FGS 006 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00400 FGS 006 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00400 FGS 008 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00400 FGS 008 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT, PNEUMATIC -, 210

psi-gN 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004

00 FGS 008 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00400 FGS 054 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

00 FGS 008 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8310, 5.8320

5.8320 MMFGS004, MMFGS005

00 FGS 008 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004, MMFGS005

00 FGS 054 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004, MMFGS006

00 FGS 054 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004, MMFGS006

00 FGS 008 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00501 FGS 002 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00501 FGS 301 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00501 FGS 401 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00501 FGS 402 5/8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00501 FGS 403 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00502 FGS 002 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00502 FGS 300 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00502 FGS 401 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00502 FGS 402 5/8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00502 FGS 403 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00503 FGS 002 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00503 FGS 300 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00503 FGS 401 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00503 FGS 402 5/8" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00503 FGS 403 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00500 FGS 054 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 054 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 055 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 055 1-1/4" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 055 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 055 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 101 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 102 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 103 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 104 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 105 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 106 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 107 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 108 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 109 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 110 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 111 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS006





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

00 FGS 112 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 113 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 114 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 115 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 116 1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 PNEUMATIC 210 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FGS 455 2" 01CSS01 N 0" Fuel gas 175 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS00600 FPW 001 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 210 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 230 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 231 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 232 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 233 1" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 233 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 234 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 234 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 234 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW00100 FPW 001 8" 01CSS01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMFPW001,

MMWSW00100 LOT 001 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 007 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 007 2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 007 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 009 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 009 2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 017 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 017 2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 017 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 018 1/2" 01CSS01 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 018 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 300 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 305 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00100 LOT 009 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT001,

MMLOT00200 LOT 018 3" 01CSS01 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT001,

MMLOT00200 LOT 017 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT001,

MMLOT00300 LOT 001 3" 01SAS02 T 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 001 3" 01SAS02 T 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 019 3" 01CSS01 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 020 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT002





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

00 LOT 020 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 025 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 030 3" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 301 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 302 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 303 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 304 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 330 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 331 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 340 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 341 4" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 401 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 402 1/2" 01SAS02 T 2" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00200 LOT 019 3" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT002,

MMLOT00300 LOT 020 3" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT002,

MMLOT00300 LOT 017 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00300 LOT 020 2" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 002 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 003 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 004 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 005 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 005 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 006 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 006 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 007 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 008 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 010 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 011 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 100 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 101 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 300 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00301 LOT 400 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 175 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 002 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 003 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 004 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 005 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 005 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 006 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT003





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

02 LOT 006 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 007 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 008 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 010 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 011 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 100 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 101 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 300 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00302 LOT 400 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 002 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 003 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 004 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 005 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 005 25 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 006 200 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 006 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 007 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 008 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 010 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 011 40 mm N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 100 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 101 6" 01SAS02 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 300 1-1/2" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00303 LOT 400 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Lube oil 145 210 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMLOT00301 AAU 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 ACI 101 3/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 ACI 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 ACI 102 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 ACI 110 1/2" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 BAG 001 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00101 BAG 002 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 001 1600

mmH 4" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001

01 SCR 002 1400 mm

H 4" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR001

01 SCR 002 1600 mm


01 SCR 002 1800 mm


01 SCR 004 48" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 004 64" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR001





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

01 SCR 010 64" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 201 6 mm T 2" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - E 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 300 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 301 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 301 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 302 1/2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 302 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 303 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 303 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 320 1/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00101 SCR 401 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 AAU 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 ACI 101 3/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 ACI 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 ACI 102 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 ACI 110 1/2" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 BAG 001 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00102 BAG 002 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 001 1600


02 SCR 002 1400 mm


02 SCR 002 1600 mm


02 SCR 002 1800 mm


02 SCR 004 48" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 004 64" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 010 64" N 0" Fuel gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 201 6 mm T 2" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - E 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 300 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 301 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 301 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 302 1/2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 302 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 303 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 303 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 320 1/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00102 SCR 401 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00103 AAU 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Urea 145 120 HYDROSTATIC 220 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 ACI 101 3/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR002





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes

03 ACI 101 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 ACI 102 3/8" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 ACI 110 1/2" 00SSW01 N 0" Instrument air 145 165 PNEUMATIC 175 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 BAG 001 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00203 BAG 002 36" N 0" Combustion air 15 120 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 001 1600


03 SCR 002 1400 mm


03 SCR 002 1600 mm


03 SCR 002 1800 mm


03 SCR 004 48" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 004 64" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.4520 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 010 64" N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 201 6 mm T 2" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - E 5.1210 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 300 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 301 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 301 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 302 1/2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 302 2" 01SAS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 303 2" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 303 6" 01CSS01 T 2" Flue gas 7 300 ISLT - E 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 320 1/4" 00SSW01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00203 SCR 401 6" 01CSS01 N 0" Flue gas 7 900 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMSCR00200 WSW 101 2" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW001,

MMWSW00200 WSW 105 1-1/2" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 105 2" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 106 1-1/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 106 1-1/4" 00SAL01 N 2" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g E 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 110 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 110 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC,

ISLT-, 225 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002

00 WSW 111 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC, ISLT

-, 225 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002


-, 225 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002


-, 225 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002





UnitNo

SysCode

LineSeqNo

NomDiam

Pipe Spec

InsPurp


DesignTemp(ºF)

Type TestPress

HT SupplyCont.

Inst.Cont.

P&ID Drawing Notes


-, 225 psi-g

N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002

00 WSW 115 1-1/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00200 WSW 302 1" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00201 WSW 010 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00201 WSW 100 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00201 WSW 302 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00202 WSW 010 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00202 WSW 100 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00202 WSW 301 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW00203 WSW 010 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00203 WSW 100 18 mm N 0" Water 150 120 HYDROSTATIC 225 psi-g N 5.1210 5.8320 MMWSW00203 WSW 302 3/4" 00SAL01 N 0" Water 150 120 ISLT - N 5.8320 5.8320 MMWSW002




81799_8320_485925 485925-1

SECTION 485925 – LOW PRESSURE VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide all valves with actuators required to complete the piping systems as indicated on the

Drawings. B. The valves required include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger indicated either on the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) or the valve lists. Valves which are listed on the valve list and not indicated as furnished by Others will be furnished by this Contract.

2. Valves 2 inches and smaller indicated on the P&IDs or connection list. 3. Valves for all vent and drain connections on equipment furnished by Others and installed

by this Contract as indicated on the P&IDs or SECTION 485790. 4. Valves for all piping vent and drain connections as specified herein. 5. Valves for all strainer blowdown connections as specified in SECTIONS 485715 and

485935. 6. Instrument root valves for all instrument connections, except connections for temperature

wells, as specified herein. C. All instrument shutoff, manifold, and blowdown valves are specified in DIVISION 25.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Equivalent SI units or grades may be used wherever English

units are used in the Specification. Exceptions to the following standards have been made through these Specifications. When an exception to a standard is specified, the Specifications shall govern. 1. Valves:

a. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (1) B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and

800. (2) B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. (3) B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. (4) B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End. (5) B31.1 - Power Piping.

b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): (1) A48/A48M - Gray Iron Castings. (2) A105/A105M - Carbon Steel, Forgings for Piping Applications. (3) A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. (4) A182/A182M - Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings,

and Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service. (5) A216/A216M - Carbon Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion Welding for

High-Temperature Service. (6) A217/A217M - Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure

Containing Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service. (7) A350/A350M – Forgings, Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel, Requiring Notch

Toughness Testing for Piping Components. (8) A351/A351M - Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) for

Pressure-Containing Parts. (9) A352/A352M – Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-

Containing Parts Suitable for Low-Temperature Service.

SECTION 485925 – LOW PRESSURE VALVES: continued

485925-2 81799_8320_485925

(10) A743/A743M - Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion-Resistant, for General Applications.

(11) A744/A744M - Castings, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion-Resistant, for Severe Services.

(12) B26/B25M - Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. (13) B61 - Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

c. American Petroleum Institute: (1) API609 - Butterfly Valves: Double Flanged, Lug- and Wafer-Type.

2. Motor Operators: a. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):

(1) 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. (2) 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

b. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): (1) 43 - Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. (2) 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.

c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): (1) MG1 - Motors and Generators. (2) MG2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection,

Installation, and Use of Electric Motors and Generators. (3) MG13 - Frame Assignments for Alternating-Current Integral-Horsepower

Induction Motors. d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

(1) 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Valve Submittals required shall include the following:

1. A valve list for all valves 2-1/2 inches and larger showing the following: a. Tag Number. b. Manufacturer. c. Pressure and Temperature Ratings. d. Body Material. e. Trim Materials. f. Manufacturer's model or figure number. g. Storage and installation instructions.

2. A valve list for all valves 2 inches and smaller showing the following: a. The type of valve to be used for each service. b. Manufacturer, pressure and temperature rating, body material, trim material, and

manufacturer's model or figure number for each type of valve. 3. A cross-section drawing for each different model or figure number valve indicating the

following: a. Details and features of construction. b. Materials of construction. c. Weld end preparation.

C. Pneumatic and Motor operator Submittals required shall include the following: 1. Outline drawing of motor operator which indicates:

a. Dimensions of actuator and components. b. Clearance required for installation, operation, and maintenance. c. Bill of materials.


81799_8320_485925 485925-3

2. Wiring diagrams which indicate: a. Complete physical orientation of all wiring internal to the Equipment. b. Conventional-type wiring diagram with each wire or wire bundle shown by a line,

or a point-to-point-type wiring diagram with individual wire destinations listed at the location of each termination.

c. Identification of all device and Equipment terminals, and all internal and external connection terminal blocks.

3. Valve motor operator data sheets which include the following motor information: a. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. b. Horsepower and torque output. c. Time rating and the allowable number of starts per hour under valve operating

conditions. d. Temperature rise and method indicated. e. Maximum ambient temperature. f. Insulation class. g. Rpm and rated load. h. Frequency. i. Number of phases. j. Voltage. k. Rated load ampere. l. Locked rotor amperes. m. Service factor. n. Acceleration time. o. Opening and closing times.



2. Motor operators shall be factory installed on valves and test operated to verify proper operation prior to shipment.

3. If requested, submit certificates of completion of factory tests.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Ship valves with accessories completely assembled to the Project Site. B. Ship valves 2-1/2-inch and larger tagged with the valve number shown on the Drawings. Tag

Class 1500 and Class 2500 valves 2-inch and smaller to show the piping system in which the valves are to be used.

C. Ship all valves with suitable end covers to prevent entrance of foreign material into valve body and enclosures on motor operators to prevent moisture damage, mechanical and electrical injury, and accumulation of dirt, dust, and other foreign matter.

D. Protect valve threads, stems, and handwheels from damage. E. Provide suitable rust-preventive compound for outdoor storage on exposed machined surfaces

and unpainted iron and steel. F. Provide grease packing or oil lubrication in all bearings and similar items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:


485925-4 81799_8320_485925

A. Valves: 1. Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves shall be

manufactured by the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger:

(1) Class 150 to Class 400: Anchor/Darling, Atwood-Morrill, Crane, Dewrance, Newco, Nibco, Pacific, Powell, Edward-Vogt, Stockham, Velan, or Walworth.

(2) Class 600 to Class 2500: Anchor/Darling, Atwood-Morrill, Crane, Dewrance, Newco, Pacific, Powell, Edward-Vogt, R-P&C, Velan, or Walworth.

b. 2 Inches and Smaller: (1) Class 600: Hancock, Newco, Edward-Vogt, R-P&C, Smith, Velan, or

Waeco. (2) Class 1500 to Class 2500: Anchor/Darling, Conval, Hancock, Edward-Vogt,

R-P&C, Velan, Waeco, or Yarway. 2. Class 150 Stainless Steel Gate, Globe, and Swing Check Valves shall be manufactured by

the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger: Anchor/Darling, Crane, Jenkins, Newco, Pacific, Powell,

Stockham, Velan, or Walworth. b. 2 inches and smaller: Crane, Jenkins, Newco, Pacific, Powell, Stockham, Velan, or

Walworth. 3. Class 125 and Class 250: Cast Iron Gate, Globe, and Swing Check Valves shall be

manufactured by the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger: Crane, Jenkins, Newco, Nibco, Powell, or Walworth.

4. Class 150 and Class 200 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Lift Check Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. 2 inches and smaller: Crane, Jenkins, Newco, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, or

Walworth. 5. Class 150 to Class 600 Carbon Steel Lubricated Plug Valves shall be manufactured by

the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger: Nordstrom, Walworth, or Worcester. b. 2 inches and smaller: Nordstrom, Walworth, or Worcester.

6. Class 150 to Class 600 Carbon Steel Nonlubricated Plug Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger: Aloycoseal, Durco, Stockham, or Tufline. b. 2 inches and smaller: Aloycoseal, Durco, Stockham, or Tufline.

7. 2-Inch and Smaller Ball Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. Class 150 and Class 300 carbon steel, metal seat: Jamesbury, Nibco, Velan, WKM

(Cooper-Cameron), or Worcester. b. Class 150 to Class 600 carbon steel, soft seat: Hills-McCanna, ITT, Jamesbury,

KTM (OMNI), Newco, Nibco, Powell, Smith, Stockham, Velan, WKM (Cooper-Cameron), or Worcester.

c. Class 150 brass or bronze: Hills-McCanna, Jamesbury, KTM (OMNI), Newco, Nibco, Powell, Smith, Stockham, WKM (Cooper-Cameron), or Worcester.

d. Class 150 stainless steel: Jamesbury, ITT, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, Velan, or Worcester.

8. 2-1/2-Inch and Larger Ball Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. Class 150 and Class 300 carbon steel, metal seat: Jamesbury, Nibco, Velan, WKM

(Cooper-Cameron), or Worcester.


81799_8320_485925 485925-5

b. Class 150 to Class 600 carbon steel, soft seat: Hills-McCanna, ITT, Jamesbury, KTM (OMNI), Newco, Nibco, Powell, Smith, Stockham, Velan, WKM (Cooper-Cameron), or Worcester.

c. Class 150 stainless steel: Jamesbury, ITT, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, Velan, or Worcester.

9. Class 150 Cast Iron Butterfly Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. 2-1/2 inches and larger: Centerline, Crane, Dezurik, Dresser, Jamesbury, Keystone,

Henry Pratt, Norris, Powell, Stockham, Weco, Nibco, Clow, or Ultraflow. 10. Class 150 and Class 300 Carbon Steel High Performance Butterfly Valves shall be

manufactured by the following: a. 2 inches and larger: Posi-Seal, Dezurik, Flowseal, Jamesbury, Contromatics

(Litton), Crane, Durco, Centerline, Fisher, Dynalok (ITT), Norris, WKM (Cooper-Cameron), Pliaxseal, or Clow.

11. 2-1/2-Inch and Larger Carbon Steel Three-Way Valves shall be manufactured by the following: a. Class 150 and Class 300: Atwood-Morrill, Gimpel, or Schutte & Koerting. b. Class 600 to Class 2500: Anchor/Darling, Atwood-Morrill, Gimpel, or Schutte &

Koerting.

2.02 VALVES: A. Design and construct all valves to conform to the Piping Material Specifications and Valve

List. B. Design, fabricate, assemble and test valves and materials in accordance with the codes and

standards listed in PART 1, this Section. C. Valve body materials shall be as specified in the Piping Material Specifications. D. Furnish Ball Valves as follows:

1. Metal seat for services at or above 150 psig saturated steam. 2. All other services shall be soft seal (reinforced TFE). 3. Fuel gas and lube oil system ball valves shall meet API 607. 4. This section shall govern if there is a discrepancy with the ball valve requirements in the

Piping Material Specifications. E. High Performance Butterfly Valves shall conform to the Valve List and have the following

features: 1. Valve trim material shall be manufacturer's standard recommended trim for the pressure

and service involved. 2. End connections shall be standard ASME B16.5 flange drilling pattern or lug. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, valve operator shall be as follows:

a. Latching lever for Class 150, 4 inches and smaller. b. All other valve sizes shall have a worm gear operator having the following features:

(1) Totally enclosed with position indicator. (2) Designed to hold valve in intermediate position without creep. (3) Crank or handwheel.

F. Three-way valves shall conform to the globe and angle specifications and Valve List and have the following features: 1. Valve body shall be an in-line design with inlet and bypass on the same centerline unless

indicated in the Valve List to be an off-set design. 2. Valve shall have equalizing line and valve conforming to the requirements of the Piping

Design Table in which the valve is used.


485925-6 81799_8320_485925

G. Material Specifications ASTM A743/A743M and A744/A744M may be substituted for Alloy 20 valve castings in lieu of ASTM A351/A351M-CN7M.

2.03 ACTUATORS: A. General:

1. Design, fabricate, and test motor operators in accordance with the codes and standards listed in PART 1 this Section.

2. Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the replacement or field modification of incorrect operators.

B. Design and Furnish Handwheel Operators as Follows: 1. Sized so the maximum allowable handwheel rim pull for opening and closing valves is 80

pounds. 2. Design pressure for valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be as indicated on the Contract

drawings for the line in which the valve is installed. 3. Differential pressure for 2 inches and smaller shall be assumed twice the valve pressure

class, unless otherwise noted. C. Design and Furnish Chainwheel Operators as indicated in the Valve List and as follows:

1. Complete with chainwheel, roller chain guides, and sufficient length of rustproof, smooth weld, solid-link chain such that the bottom of the loop is 3 feet above the floor or grating.

2. Designed with an impact-type chainwheel which allows free movement before engagement.

D. Pneumatic Operators shall be as indicated on the Valve List and as follows: 1. General:

a. Constructed for the site conditions in the area where they will be installed as defined in SECTION 011100.

b. Have opening and closing limit switches wired to alert control system of valve position.

c. Equipped with direct position readout at the valve by means of a mechanical dial-position indicator showing percent of valve opening.

d. Pneumatic Actuators shall be equipped with an appropriately sized solenoid valve to control air flow to and from the valve.

e. Limit switch makeup sequences shall be subject to approval. 2. Pneumatic Acuators shall be as follows:

a. Sized to meet the following design criteria listed in the Valve List: (1) Line valve is installed. (2) Line design pressure (psig). (3) Line design temperature (oF). (4) Maximum open/closing time (sec). (5) Stem position.

3. Acceptable pneumatic actuator manufacturers are Neles-Jamesbury, Bray, Flowserve or engineer approved equal.

E. Motor Operators shall be as indicated on the Valve List and as follows: 1. General:

a. Constructed to NEMA 4 weatherproof class as a minimum for all enclosures including motors.

b. Constructed for the site conditions in the area where they will be installed as defined in SECTION 011100.


81799_8320_485925 485925-7

c. Equipped with 120Vac, single-phase, 60-Hertz space heater in both limit switch and motor compartments. Power for this heater shall be derived using a control-power transformer for valves requiring 480V power.

d. Provided with integral-reversing starter complete with control-power transformer. Transformer shall be sized to operate starter, two local indicating lights, motor space heater, and limit switch compartment heater, and to provide 50V-amperes of control power for external loads. Operator controls shall be internally wired to terminal board complete for Owner's external connections. Remote push button control station and indicating light will be furnished by Others.

e. Have two integral or close-coupled indicating lights. One red light shall indicate valve is open, and one green light shall indicate valve is closed. Both lights shall be on, in mid-travel.

f. Have opening and closing torque switches wired to trip motor if excessive torque is generated in either direction of travel. Closing torque switch shall be wired to trip motor when a predetermined torque is reached which corresponds to required seating thrusts for wedge gate or globe valves as determined by the valve manufacturer.

g. Have a permanently mounted handwheel that is automatically disengaged whenever motor is energized. Operator shall be capable of complete manual valve actuation whenever motor drive is not energized even in the event that motor is fused or otherwise fails. However, simultaneous manual and motor operation shall not be possible. Manual operation shall meet the requirements for handwheel or chainwheel operators above.

h. Have self-locking wormset gearing. i. Equipped with direct position readout at the valve by means of a mechanical

dial-position indicator showing percent of valve opening. j. Motor operators shall have complete internal wiring to terminals and have motor

leads brought into the limit switch compartment directly to the terminal board without use of external conduit.

k. Oil bath or grease lubricated. l. Have lost-motion hammerblow mechanism for unseating valves in both motor drive

and manual operation modes. m. Equipped with thrust compensator or belleville-spring mechanism as required and

as recommended by the actuator manufacturer for the specified service in high-speed or high-temperature applications.

n. Limit switch makeup sequences shall be subject to approval. 2. Motors: Electric motors for valve motor operators shall be as follows:

a. Sized to meet the following design criteria listed in the Valve List: (1) Line valve is installed. (2) Line design pressure (psig). (3) Line design temperature (oF). (4) Maximum open/closing time (sec). (5) Stem position.

b. 460Vac, 3-phase, 60-hertz. c. Totally enclosed nonventilated (TENV). d. High-starting-torque type, specifically designed for valve actuator service. e. Sized to actuate valve against full specified operating pressure with motor terminal

voltage variations of +10% unless otherwise specified.


485925-8 81799_8320_485925

f. Have Class B insulation with a maximum continuous temperature rating of 120oC for 40oC environment.

g. 15-minute duty rating or three successive open/close cycles, whichever is greater. 3. Acceptable motor actuator manufacturers are Rotork, Limitorque, EIM or engineer

approved equal. 4. Rotork Valve Motor Operators: In addition to the above requirements, the following

requirements shall apply only to Rotork valve motor operators: a. Furnished with Add-on Pak 1. b. The following switch functions shall be provided for each direction of travel:

(1) Position limit switch (single). (2) Twin end of travel auxiliary switches. (3) Three switches can be adjusted to operate at any point between full open and

full closed. c. Provide capability of bypassing opening torque switch to prevent nuisance tripping

due to high transient torque requirements during beginning of unseating. Where backseating of the valve is recommended by the valve manufacturer, provide similar closing torque switch bypass.

5. Limitorque Valve Motor Operators: In addition to the above requirements, the following requirements shall apply only to Limitorque valve motor operators: a. Provide rotor type, four-train-geared limit switches. Each switch shall have two

normally open and two normally closed contacts. 6. EIM Valve Motor Operators: In addition to the above requirements, the following

requirements shall apply only to EIM valve motor operators: a. Provide two-train-geared position drum-type limit switches. b. Provide two additional intermediate limit switches that can be set independently to

actuate at any desired valve position. c. All limit switches shall be furnished with two normally open and two normally

closed contacts each. F. Furnish lockable valves as indicated in the Valve List, on the Contract Diagrams, and as

follows: 1. Valve locks will be provided by the Owner and will be devices placed on valves which

enable the valve to be locked in either the open or closed position as required. a. Furnished valves shall be compatible with a padlock-type device that fits down over

the stem and body to lock it into position as manufactured by Russwin or approved equal.


Rev Date By Checked Description

0 8/5/2015 ANS MRS ISSUED FOR BID

Manual Valve List (Const By 5.8320)

81799

COFFEYVILLE GENERATION FACILITY 2

Copyright 2015

Valve Tag Num Body Type ValveSize

PressClass

Body Material Type End Prep

Service DesignPress(psig)

DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.

Pipe Spec Commodity Code P&ID Drawing Notes

00AAU-V-001 Check valve 3" 150 ASTM A351-CF8M BE Urea 145 120 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VCSCAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ

MMAAU001

00AAU-V-002 Ball valve 3" 150 ASTM A351-CF8M RFFE Urea 145 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBTAAADRFXEAR9AEFZZZZ

MMAAU001

00AAU-V-003 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

RFFE Urea 145 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 00SAL01 VBBAAADRFXCARLADGZZZZ

MMAAU001



MMAAU001


RFFE Urea 145 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 00SAL01 VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

MMAAU001


SWE Urea 145 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBBAVADSWKCARQDABZZZZ

MMAAU001

00AAU-V-502 Ball valve 1/2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)


MMAAU001

00ACI-V-001 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

RFFE Instrument air 145 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

MMACI001



MMACI001

00ACI-V-011 Ball valve 3" 150 ASTM A351-CF8M BE Instrument air 145 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBTAAADBEXCAR9DABZZZZ

MMACI001 WITH CHAINWHEEL


MMACI001 WITH CHAINWHEEL



MMACI001


MMACI001


MMACI001


MMACI001


MMACI002


MMACI002

00ACI-V-100 Ball valve 3/4" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

RFFE Instrument air 145 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 00SAL01 VBBAAADRFXCARLADGZZZZ

MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI001





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.




MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI002

00ACI-V-153 Check valve 2" 800 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

SWE Instrument air 145 165 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VCPCACBMSWAARQZZZZZZZ

MMACI001



MMACI001

00ACI-V-201 Globe valve 2" 800 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

SWE Instrument air 145 165 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VLYACBMSWAFARQZZZZZZZ

MMACI002



MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI002



MMACI002



MMACI002



MMACI001



MMACI001

00ACI-V-402 Globe valve 1/2" 800 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)


5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VLRACBMSWAFARQZZZZZZZ

MMACI002

00ACI-V-405 Globe valve 1/2" 800 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)



MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI002


RFFE Instrument air 145 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBBAAADRFXCARLADGZZZZ

MMACI001



MMACI001



MMACI002





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.




MMACS001

00ACS-V-001 Ball valve 1-1/2" 300 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Starting air 480 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VBLAAAIRFXCACDADGZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-002 Ball valve 1-1/2" 300 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Starting air 480 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VBLAAAIRFXCACDADGZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-011 Check valve 3/4" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VCPCACBMSWAACGZZZZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-012 Check valve 3/4" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VCPCACBMSWAACGZZZZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-121 Globe valve 1-1/2" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VLRACBMSWAFACGZZZZZZZ

MMACS002

00ACS-V-122 Globe valve 4" 300 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VLRAAAIRFZFACDZZZZZZZ

MMACS002 WITH CHAINWHEEL

00ACS-V-151 Globe valve 1-1/2" 300 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VBBAVAISWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-152 Globe valve 2" 300 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VLRAAAIRFZFACDZZZZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-202 Globe valve 1" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel


MMACS001

00ACS-V-301 Globe valve 1/2" 300 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Handwheel


MMACS001



MMACS001



MMACA001



MMACS001



MMACS002



MMACS002



MMACS002

00ACS-V-501 Ball valve 1/2" 300 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VBBAVAISWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-510 Ball valve 1/2" 300 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VBBAVAISWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMACS001

00ACS-V-521 Ball valve 1/2" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Starting air 480 165 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 03CBS04 VLRACBMSWAFACGZZZZZZZ

MMACS002





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.


00FGS-V-001 Ball valve 8" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Fuel gas 175 120 Gear, top mounted handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBLAAADRFXAACDADHZZZZ

MMFGS002



MMFGS002



MMFGS002



MMFGS002



MMFGS004



MMFGS004



MMFGS004



MMFGS004

00FGS-V-051 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A105 SWE Fuel gas 175 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBBAVADSWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMFGS004


MMFGS004


MMFGS006





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



MMFGS006

00FGS-V-101 Ball valve 1/2" 150 ASTM A105 SWE Fuel gas 175 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBBAVADSWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006


MMFGS006



MMFGS002





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.




MMFGS002

00FGS-V-205 Globe valve 4" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Fuel gas 175 120 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VLRAAADRFAFACDZZZZZZZ

MMFGS004

00FGS-V-250 Globe valve 1-1/2" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Fuel gas 175 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VLRACBMSWAFACGZZZZZZZ

MMFGS006


MMFGS002


MMFGS002


MMFGS002


MMFGS004


MMFGS004


MMFGS004


MMFGS005


MMFGS004


MMFGS004


MMFGS006


MMFGS001


MMFGS001


MMFGS004


MMFGS004


MMFGS006


MMFGS002

00FPW-V-001 Check valve 8" 150 ASTM A216-WCB BE Water 150 120 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VCSCAAADBEAACDZZZZZZZ

MMFPW001 FM/UL





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.


00FPW-V-010 Gate valve 4" 150 ASTM A216-WCB BE Water 150 120 Gear, top mounted handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VGRAAADBEZFACDZZZZZZZ

MMFPW001

00FPW-V-225 Gate valve 3" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Water 150 120 Gear, top mounted handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VGRAAADRFZFACDZZZZZZZ

MMFPW001 FM/UL

00FPW-V-301 Ball valve 1" 800 ASTM A105 SWE Water 150 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VLRACBMSWAFACGZZZZZZZ

MMFPW001

00LOT-V-001 Ball valve 3" 150 ASTM A351-CF8M BE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBTAAADBEXCAR9DABZZZZ

MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT001


MMLOT001

00LOT-V-014 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

SWE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBBAVADSWKCARQDABZZZZ

MMLOT001


MMLOT002

00LOT-V-024 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)


MMLOT001


MMLOT002

00LOT-V-030 Ball valve 3" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBLAAADRFXCACDADHZZZZ

MMLOT002

00LOT-V-031 Check valve 3" 150 ASTM A216-WCB BE Lube oil 145 210 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VCSCAAADBEAACDZZZZZZZ

MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT002


MMLOT002





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.


00LOT-V-036 Check valve 3" 150 ASTM A351-CF8M BE Lube oil 145 210 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VCSCAAADBEAAR9ZZZZZZZ

MMLOT002


MMLOT001


MMLOT001


MMLOT002

00LOT-V-301 Ball valve 1/2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

RFFE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01SAS02 VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

MMLOT002



MMLOT002



MMLOT002



MMLOT002

00LOT-V-310 Ball valve 1-1/2" 150 ASTM A105 SWE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBBAVADSWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMLOT001



MMLOT001



MMLOT001



MMLOT001

00LOT-V-314 Ball valve 1/2" 150 ASTM A105 SWE Lube oil 145 210 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSS01 VBBAVADSWXCACGADGZZZZ

MMLOT001


MMLOT002


MMLOT002



MMLOT002



MMLOT002

00WSW-V-111 Ball valve 3/4" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)

RFFE Water 150 120 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 00SAL01 VBBAAADRFXCARLADGZZZZ

MMWSW002



MMWSW002



MMWSW002



MMWSW002



MMWSW002





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.


00WSW-V-120 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)


MMWSW002

00WSW-V-121 Ball valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)


MMWSW002

00WSW-V-130 Ball valve 1-1/4" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 304 (UNS S30400)


MMWSW002



MMAAU001

01CWM-V-011 Butterfly valve 4" Undefined

ASTM A234 Grade WPB

MGE Cooling water 80 230 Gear, top mounted handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01CSG01 VBDBWKLZZGMUBOKZZZZUM

MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003

01CWM-V-300 Ball valve 1" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Cooling water 80 230 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSG01 VBTAAADRFXCACGDABZZZZ

MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM001


MMCWM001

01CWM-V-411 Ball valve 1/2" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE Cooling water 80 230 Lever 5.8320 5.8320 01CSG01 VBTAAADRFXCACGDABZZZZ

MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003



MMFGS005


MMLOT003

01SCR-V-300 Globe valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 (UNS S31600)

RFFE Flue gas 7 900 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01SAS01 VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

MMSCR001



MMAAU001


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM001


MMCWM001


MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003



MMFGS005


MMLOT003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



RFFE Flue gas 7 900 Handwheel

5.8320 5.8320 01SAS01 VBTAAADRFXCARQDABZZZZ

MMSCR001



MMAAU001


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


ASTM A234 Grade WPB



MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM002


MMCWM002


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003





PressClass



DesignTemp(F)

Oper. Type

SupplyCont.

InstallCont.



MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003


MMCWM003



MMFGS005


MMLOT003


SWE Flue gas 7 900 Handwheel


MMSCR002




485925 Appendix B

Actuated Valve List

Valve Tag Number Body Type

Valve

Size

Pressure

Class Body Material Type

End

Prep PM Spec Fluid Type

Design

Pressure

(psig)

Design

Temp

(F)

Actuator

Type

Stem

Position

Max Open/Close

Time Fail Action

Supply

By

Installed

By P&ID Drawing Notes

00ACI-MOV-060 Ball Valve 2" 150 ASTM A182 Grade F 316 RFFE 01SAS02 Instrument air 145 165 Motor VUP 2-5 sec/in FP 5.8320 5.8320 MMACS001

00FGS-SSV-008 Ball Valve 8" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE 01CSS01 Fuel gas 175 120 Cylinder VUP FC 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004

00FGS-SSV-054 Ball Valve 2" 150 ASTM A105 RFFE 01CSS01 Fuel gas 175 120 Cylinder VUP FC 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS001

00FGS-SVV-408 Ball Valve 2" 150 ASTM A105 RFFE 01CSS01 Fuel gas 175 120 Cylinder VUP FO 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS004

00FGS-ESV-200 Ball Valve 8" 150 ASTM A216-WCB RFFE 01CSS01 Fuel gas 175 120 Motor VUP 2-5 sec/in FP 5.8320 5.8320 MMFGS002


Project # 81799

Page 1 of 1 Burns McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.

Revision 0

81799_8320_485935 485935-1

SECTION 485935 - POWER PIPING WELDING AND FABRICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide all welding and fabrication required to complete the piping systems as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified. B. The welding and fabrication required includes field welding and field fabrication as specified

and as required to complete the piping systems.


1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping. b. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. c. LOS-1M - Recommended Practices for Cleaning, Flushing and Purification of

Steam and Gas Turbine Lubrication Systems. 3. American Welding Society (AWS). 4. Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI):

a. ES3 - Fabricating Tolerances. b. ES16 - Access Holes, Bosses and Plugs for Radiographic Inspection of Pipe Welds. c. ES21 - Internal Machining and Fit-up of GTAW Root Pass Circumferential Butt

Welds. d. ES24 - Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material Requirements.

5. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. b. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. c. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.


1. Isometric piping drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the following: a. Contractor shall provide Isometric Drawings with the following fabrication

information for review prior to fabrication of the piping: (1) The fabricator's name and the date that the fabrication information is added. (2) Field welds, piece mark numbers, hanger locations, hanger attachments,

instrument connections, drain and vent connections, and any added dimensions required for fabrication.

b. Engineer will check only overall piping dimensions, branch and miscellaneous connections, and conformance to Material Specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for detail dimensions and for the fabrication of the piping in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.

c. Contractor shall clearly label any change in dimensions or piping configuration from that indicated on the Contract Drawings due to requirements peculiar to Equipment furnished under this Contract. Dimensions indicated with an asterisk(*) are approximate dimensions. Contractor shall determine exact dimension based on Equipment actually furnished by this Contract.

SECTION 485935 - POWER PIPING WELDING AND FABRICATION: continued

485935-2 81799_8320_485935

d. Contractor shall clearly label with a method as approved by Engineer any revisions made in fabrication information after the first submittal and shall note and date the revision adjacent to the fabricator's name.

e. Contractor shall make all revisions to the Contract Drawings required to make complete "CONFORMING TO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS" Drawings at no additional cost to Owner.

f. After construction is complete, Contractor shall submit the Contract Drawings to Engineer for Engineer's permanent record.

2. Welding procedures as specified. 3. Welders' qualification test records as specified. 4. Weld radiograph reports as specified. 5. Postheat treatment temperature records as specified. 6. ASME manufacturer's data reports for piping as required by ASME B31.1 and the ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Welding Procedures and Qualifications:

1. Prepare welding procedures designed for the conditions of this Contract and as follows: a. Include certified copies of the qualification test records as evidence that the

procedures have been qualified in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes: (1) ASME B31.1. (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

b. Submit in a form similar to the "Recommended Forms of Procedure Specifications" outlined in the above codes.

2. Qualify all welders and welding operators in accordance with the following: a. Qualify in strict compliance with the following codes:

(1) ASME B31.1. (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

b. Qualify for each welding procedure to be used. c. Submit qualification test records for position 6G and certify each welder and

welding operator on the job for each welding procedure they are to use before they do any welding.

3. Submit welding procedures and qualification test records as Submittals. Welding procedures and welders' qualification test costs shall be at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections and Stamping: 1. Compliance with the requirements of ASME B31.1 shall be verified by a recognized

insurance or inspection company. 2. Compliance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code shall

be verified by an authorized code inspector. 3. Owner shall retain the right to maintain one or more inspectors in the shop during

fabrication and welding. 4. Inspect welds in accordance with the following:

a. Keep radiograph exposure records which show date, location, area, film number, serial number, film combination, time, source-film distance, angulation, and other pertinent information for each weld radiographed. Submit a summary of this record, and an expert interpretation, in report form for each weld as a Submittal.


81799_8320_485935 485935-3

b. Imperfect welds, as outlined in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and in ASME B31.1 will be judged unacceptable and shall be repaired. Repaired welds shall then be reradiographed.

5. Contractor shall assume the expense for all inspections required.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect all pipe ends of fabricated sections with heavy metal pipe end protectors, tack welded

to the pipe and sealed with at least three wraps of waterproof tape. B. Protect all flanges with plywood or masonite covers sealed and bolted to the flange with not

less than four bolts. C. Protect threaded connections with thread protectors. D. Protect small connections with plastic inserts pressed into the connection and sealed with at

least three wraps of waterproof tape. E. Do not remove end protectors until pipe is ready for connection. The removal or damaging of

these protectors to assist in unloading, storing, or handling the pipe in the field will not be tolerated. Replace or repair any end protectors damaged in the field.

F. Block pipe stored outdoors at least 6 inches above the ground. G. Separately store pipes made of different materials. H. Identify each piece of fabrication with a piece mark number which is repeated on each end of

the section and on each branch. I. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be handled with nylon slings or other nonferrous devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL: A. Perform all welding and fabrication in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1, and

in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code if under the jurisdiction of that code.

B. Design, fabricate, and test equipment and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and the Applicable Codes and Standards listed in ARTICLE 1.02, this Section.

C. Fabricate in a manner to keep field welds at a minimum. D. Complete all welded connections true to line, facing, and position within the tolerances

specified in PFI ES-3. E. Shop-fabricated piping assemblies which connect to existing piping or equipment shall be

fabricated long with loose flanges, unless the Contractor field measures the piping and equipment locations and checks bolt hole orientation for the existing connections.

F. Plates, lugs, insulation saddles, and other attachments welded to pipe shall be of the same material as the pipe.

G. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside. H. Do not use miter bends unless specifically specified or indicated on the Drawings. I. Provide insulation clips on all vertical runs of insulated pipe. Weld clips to pipe at 10-foot

intervals. Clips shall extend into the last outer layer of insulation.

3.02 WELDING: A. Processes and Procedures:


485935-4 81799_8320_485935

1. Accomplish shop welding by one of the following processes or a combination of these processes: a. Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW). b. Submerged Arc Welding (SAW). c. Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) or (MIG). d. Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) or (TIG).

2. Clearly describe the welding processes and combinations of processes used in the welding procedures and qualify the processes as specified above.

3. Butt weld end preparation on all pipe shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.25, PFI ES-1 and PFI ES-21. Weld end preparation for field weld connections to Owner-furnished items are subject to Engineer's approval. Provide weld build-up on inside of pipe if required for machining to required "C" dimension.

4. The use of backing rings shall not be permitted. The root pass shall be made by the gas metal arc welding process or the gas tungsten arc welding process. The shielding and/or purging shall be by an inert gas, and the gases to be used and the flow rates shall be specified in the welding procedure.

5. Make tack welds as follows: a. Use the same welding procedure used for making the root pass. b. Make without consuming the insert where consumable inserts are used. c. Inspect and repair if necessary before making root pass. d. Fuse into the root pass if not removed.

6. Accomplish weld cleaning as follows: a. Use wire brushing, grinding, pneumatic deslagging, or hand tools as necessary to

remove oxidation, slag, and flux between passes and after final pass. b. Remove all defects such as cracks, porosity, slag entrapment, and undercutting

down to solid weld metal or base metal prior to applying subsequent passes. 7. Welding may be interrupted on 1% Cr, 1/2% Mo through 3-1/4% Cr, 1 percent Mo

materials provided the following conditions are fulfilled: a. A minimum of at least 3/8-inch thickness of weld deposit or 25% of the welding

groove is filled, whichever is greater. b. The weld is wrapped with adequate insulation to allow for slow cooling to room

temperature. c. Welds must be at preheat temperature before welding is resumed.

8. Make welds to equipment connections in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's requirements or these Specifications, whichever method is more stringent.

9. Weld plates, lugs, insulation saddles, and other attachments to pipe in accordance with the procedures established for the pipe material.

10. Remove weld defects by chipping, grinding, or arc gouging. Reweld the area using the same welding procedure used originally.

11. Stamp all welds with the welder's or welding operator's number or symbol. B. Materials:

1. Consumable insert rings, where used, shall be of the same material as the base metal. 2. Filler materials shall be compatible with the base metal and shall be specified and

purchased by ASME or AWS classification and chemical composition. 3. Electrodes shall be compatible with the base metal, suitably shielded where applicable,

and shall be specified and purchased by ASME or AWS classification and chemical composition.

4. Properly store welding electrodes and filler material to ensure that no damage occurs. Store electrodes in suitable enclosures which provide a regulated temperature if


81799_8320_485935 485935-5

recommended by the electrode manufacturer. The use of wet or moist electrodes will not be permitted.

C. Heat Treatment: 1. Heat treat welded joints in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1, and in

accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code if under the jurisdiction of that code.

2. Accomplish preheating by induction or resistance heating methods. a. Preheating with controlled flame heating is acceptable for shop fabrication with a

method as approved by Engineer. b. Determine the preheat temperature by temperature indicating crayons or other

approved method. c. Preheating with flame heating is not acceptable for use during field installation

unless approved by Engineer and with a method as approved by Engineer. 3. Accomplish postheat treatment by full furnace heat treatment or local induction or

resistance heating. a. Postheat treatment with controlled flame heating is acceptable for shop fabrication

with a method as approved by Engineer. b. Postheating with flame heating is not acceptable for use during field installation

unless approved by Engineer and with a method as approved by Engineer. 4. Make a complete automatic recording temperature record of the postheat treatment cycle

for all welds. Submit summary of records as Submittals. 5. Preheat and postheat treatment for welds attaching plates, lugs, insulation saddles, and

clips to pipe shall be made in accordance with the heat treatment procedures established for the pipe material.

6. Preheat and postheat treatment for welds made to equipment connections shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's requirements or these Specifications, whichever method is more stringent.

3.03 RADIOGRAPHY: A. The Contractor shall coordinate and arrange for radiography, by an Owner-approved inspection

service, of at least 10% of all butt welds, and at least one weld for each welder. B. All radiography shall be coordinated by the Contractor and conducted at the project site during

off-hours when a minimum number of personnel are in the area or in the shop. Measures shall be taken to protect personnel including, but not limited to, thoroughly roping off the unsafe areas. Obtain Owner approval prior to performing any field radiography.

C. Each weld shall be assigned a number. Contractor shall maintain a marked-up copy of piping drawings identifying the location and number of each radiographed weld. Upon completion of the work, these drawings shall be submitted with as-built drawings.

D. Radiograph exposure records shall be kept on site where the inspection is performed by the inspection service which show date, location, area, film number, serial number, film combination, time, source-film distance, angulation, weld number and other pertinent information for each weld radiographed.

E. A summary of this record, the radiograph exposure records, and an expert interpretation by the inspection service shall be submitted in report form for each weld to the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to interpret the radiography reports and accept or reject welds, or direct the Contractor to remove welders consistently not meeting the standards of acceptability. All radiograph interpretations shall be made by the inspection service under the direct supervision of an ASNT Level III certified inspector.

F. All joints shall be left exposed until radiography and other testing is completed.


485935-6 81799_8320_485935

G. Welds which do not meet the standards of acceptability as outlined in the above mentioned ASME Section IX, will be judged unacceptable and shall be repaired or cut out and re-welded by the Contractor as directed by the inspection service or Engineer, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Two additional welds performed by the same welder that produced the rejected weld

shall be radiographed. 2. In the event that another weld is rejected from the same welder, the number of additional

welds to be radiographed shall double each time until no welds are rejected. 3. Repaired and re-welded joints will then be re-radiographed.

H. Inspection stamps, code symbol stamps, and other required information shall be stamped on the pipe by using "low stress" steel stamps, or other approved method. 1. All the costs of radiographing each weld, the inspection services, and the accompanying

reports and interpretation shall be paid by the Contractor.

3.04 BENDING: A. Make all pipe bends for nominal pipe sizes of 8 inches and larger by a hot bending process.

Make pipe bends for nominal pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller by either a hot or a cold bending process.

B. Perform hot bending of pipe in accordance with the following: 1. Fill pipe with firmly tamped sand. 2. Uniformly heat pipe to at least 1950oF but not higher than 2250oF. 3. Perform all bending at temperatures between 1650oF and 2000oF.

C. Perform cold bending of pipe using a cold bending machine with internal mandrel. D. All bends shall be free from cracks, visible buckles and wrinkles, and surface defects in

addition to the tolerances specified in PFI ES-24. The allowable flattening for all bends, as determined by the difference between the major and minor diameters, shall not be greater than 8% of the nominal pipe diameter.

E. Make bends so that circumferential buttwelds are not located within the bends. Circumferential buttwelds may be located within the tangent section on the holding or pulling ends.

F. Make bends so that the wall thickness prior to the bending operation is not less than the product of the specified minimum wall thickness and bend thinning allowance in accordance with the following:

Radius of Bend Nominal Pipe in Diameters Bend Thinning Allowance 6D 1.06 5D 1.08 4D 1.14 3D 1.25

G. Bend electric-fusion-welded or electric-resistance-welded pipe so that longitudinal weld is

located in the neutral axis of the bend. H. Perform postheat treatment of bends in accordance with the following:

1. Carbon steel piping which has been heated to 1650oF or higher for bending or forming does not require postheat treatment.

2. Carbon steel piping having a wall thickness of 3/4-inch or greater and all carbon steel pipe having a nominal pipe size of 4 inches and larger, which has been subjected to cold


81799_8320_485935 485935-7

bending or forming operations shall have a postheat treatment at the temperature and time cycle specified in ASME B31.1 for welded joints.

3. All alloy steel pipe bends shall have a postheat treatment at the temperatures and time cycles specified for welded joints in ASME B31.1 or in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (depending on which code has jurisdiction).

4. Make a complete automatic recording temperature record of the postheat treatment cycle for all hot-formed sections and bends. Submit summary of records as Submittals.

3.05 CONNECTIONS: A. Branch Connections:

1. Branch connections for all branch lines 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be butt welding fittings, butt weldolets, or fabricated fittings. a. Butt weldolets may be used for tee connections smaller than are available using butt

welding fittings. b. Fabricated fittings shall be shop fabricated and reinforced in accordance with the

requirements of ASME B31.1. 2. Bonney Forge Threadolets or Sockolets or Vogt forged steel Couplets, WFI threaded, or

socketweld Pipets shall be used for branch connections 2 inches and smaller. 3. Socket weld or threaded tees shall be used for lines 2 inches and smaller as indicated on

the Piping Design Table. B. Instrument Connections:

1. Instrument connections shall be of the same design as the piping system to which they connect.

2. Instrument connections, except connections for temperature wells shall be as follows: a. Bonney Forge Sockolets or Vogt forged-steel socket weld Couplets. b. Size as indicated on the Drawings and DIVISION 25.

3. Connections for temperature wells shall be as follows: a. Bonney Forge Threadolets or Vogt forged-steel threaded Couplets. b. Size as indicated in DIVISION 25.

4. Provide instrument connections for all instruments, controls, and sample points controls indicated on the P&IDs. The instrument connections are not indicated on the piping plans. Location of the instrument connections will be reviewed on the isometric piping drawings when they are submitted by the Contractor for review.

5. Provide connections on the instrument air headers for air supplies to instruments installed by this Contract.

C. Drain Connections: 1. Drain connections shall be of the same design as the piping system to which they

connect. 2. Drain connections shall be Bonney Forge Threadolets or Sockolets or Vogt forged-steel

Couplets. Size of drain connections shall be in accordance with the following table unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:

Drain Connection Sizes

Piping Design Tables 1,2,3,4 5,6,7,8 All Others

Drain size on 14" and larger pipe 2” 2” 2” Drain size on 10" and 12" pipe 2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” Drain size on 4" to 8" pipe 1-1/2” 1” 1” Drain size on 2" to 3" pipe 1-1/2” ¾” ½”


485935-8 81799_8320_485935

Drain size on 1-1/2" and smaller pipe ½” ½” ½”

3. Provide drain connections at all low points and between all header sectionalizing valves and between all equipment sectionalizing valves on all piping systems, whether shown on the Drawings or not.

4. Drain connections shall be provided as specified and per the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall indicate the drain connections on the isometric piping Drawings prior to submittal for review. The location of drain connections is subject to Engineer's approval.

D. Vent Connections: 1. Vent connections shall be of the same design as the piping system to which they connect. 2. Vent connections shall be Bonney Forge Threadolets or Sockolets, or Vogt forged-steel

Couplets. Vent connection sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. 1/2-inch size for all Piping Design Tables. b. Vent sizes shall be the same as the line size where line sizes are smaller than the

specified vent size. 3. Provide vent connections at all the high points of all piping systems except compressed

air systems, whether shown on the Drawings or not. 4. Vent connections are not indicated on the Bid Drawings. Contractor shall indicate the

vent connections on the isometric piping Drawings prior to submittal for review. The location of vent connections is subject to Engineer's approval.

E. Radiograph Access Holes and Plugs: 1. Access holes and plugs for radiographic inspection of pipe welds shall meet the design

requirements of the piping system and shall be in accordance with PFI ES-16. 2. Provide access holes and plugs for all field welds on the lines which are specified to be

radiographed. Install access hole plugs in connections in the shop, but do not seal weld. 3. If access holes and plugs are provided for radiographic inspection of shop welds, the

access hole plugs shall be installed and seal welded in accordance with PFI ES-16 after the weld has been radiographed and accepted and before the piping is shipped to the field.

3.06 CLEANING AND PAINTING: A. The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale,

foreign materials, dirt, greases, and oils. B. Clean all fabricated piping, parts, and appurtenances in accordance with PFI Standard ES-5,

and the following: 1. Exterior Surfaces:

a. Remove all loosely adhering foreign material from the outside surfaces of all piping.

b. Piping, parts, and appurtenances of uninsulated piping shall be prepared and coated in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 099000 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS.

c. Clean all exterior surfaces of insulated piping, parts, and appurtenances above 100oF to SSPC-SP3 quality.

d. Clean all exterior surfaces of insulated piping, parts, and appurtenances operating below 100oF as specified in SECTION 099000 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS.

2. Interior Surfaces:


81799_8320_485935 485935-9

a. Blast the interior surfaces of fabricated piping with silica-free grit to SSPC-SP5 quality and profile depth of 1.5-3.0 mils and exhaust with dry compressed air per Appendix 485990.

b. All other systems shall be cleaned with rotary tools or wire brushing as described in standard PFI ES-5, Articles 4.2.1 and 4.2.2.

C. Prime the exterior surfaces of all fabricated piping (except galvanized and stainless steel) the same day the surface preparation is done with a barrier coat primer. Pipe preparation and coating shall be as specified in SECTION 099000 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS.

D. All surfaces shall be painted except for piping internals, including internal surfaces of branch connections, galvanized steel, stainless steel, flange faces, threaded surfaces, and external surfaces within 3 inches (75 mm) of field-welded connections.

E. All weld end preparations for field welds on alloy steel and carbon steel piping shall be coated with a consumable coating to prevent surface corrosion prior to welding. The manufacturer's coating to be used shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to use.

F. Carbon steel flange faces shall be given an application of a water soluble preservative coating. The manufacturer's coating to be used shall be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to use.


81799_8320_485940 485940-1

SECTION 485940 - HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Provide all hangers, supports, restraints, concrete, grout, and anchors required to adequately

support the piping systems as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Provide hangers, supports, and anchors for all process piping systems furnished, erected, or

installed by this Contract except where hangers are specifically listed to be furnished by others. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Summary of Work: SECTION 011100.


1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping. b. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A123 – Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A125 - Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. c. A193 - Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature

Service. d. A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High-

Temperature Service. e. A320 – Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. f. A335 - Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.

3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS): a. SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials Design and Manufacture. b. SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. c. SP127 – Bracing For Piping Systems Seismic – Wind – Dynamic Design, Selection,

Application. 4. Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications:

a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning. b. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning. c. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. e. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning. f. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.


1. Drawing on 8-1/2"x11" sheets of each support assembly to be used in the Work. Support assembly parts and materials shall consist of pipe support manufacturer components or standard pipe support assemblies indicated in the Drawings.

2. Location, elevation and size of supplementary steel supplied by Contractor not shown in the Drawings.

3. Hanger tagging designations shall be in a manner as approved. 4. Concrete pad, grout, and foundation details.

SECTION 485940 - HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: continued

485940-2 81799_8312_485940


1. All pipe support fabrication shall present a neat appearance. All flame cut edges shall be ground smooth. Weld spatter shall be removed by grinding or wire brushing before painting.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Ship hangers to the Site with each hanger assembly individually bundled and each bundle

durably tagged with the hanger assembly number. Any item too large to be bundled with the other support components shall be clearly tagged with its hanger assembly number.

B. Coat threaded connections with a suitable rust preventive compound. C. Cap ends of all threaded material to prevent damage during shipping. D. Delivery shall be as specified in DIVISION 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured by the following:

1. Anvil International, Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports, Inc. 3. Lisega, Inc. 4. Piping Technology and Products, Inc.

2.02 APPLICATION AND DESIGN: A. The Application and Design of all pipe supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommended procedures and the applicable codes and standards listed in ARTICLE 1.02, this Section unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.

B. Design for site seismic conditions provided in SECTION 011100. C. Pipe hanger assemblies, supports, restraints, and anchors shall be complete to include the

following: 1. Rigid supports, concrete supports, floor supports, guides, sway braces, and anchors as

required to adequately support the piping systems for normal operating and occasional hydrostatic loads.

2. All necessary structural steel, brackets, angles, and clips which are not a part of the building structural steel, but which are required to properly support the piping system. a. Added support beams required for attachment of supports to building structure will

be attached by means of clip angles. (1) Clip angles shall conform to "Framed Beam Connections" as indicated in

AISC Manual of Steel Construction. (2) Supplementary beam clip angles shall be sized to match support beam

strength. (3) Bolting shall be through elongated holes in the clip angle. (4) Permanent attachment of clip angles shall be by field welding.

b. Pipe hanger support brackets shall not be cantilevered from building structural steel members.

3. All necessary concrete pads, pipe stanchions, and foundations with fasteners, grout, or anchor bolts. Allow for 1 inch of grout under floor supported pipe stanchions for leveling, or provide other field adjustable means of leveling floor supports.


81799_8310_485940 485940-3

D. Pipe hanger assemblies, anchors, and sway braces shall be designed by the hanger manufacturer in accordance with the more stringent of the following: latest editions of ASME B31.1, MSS SP58 and SP69, as indicated on the Drawings, and the following: 1. Locate supports so that the spacing does not exceed that given in Table 121.5 of ASME

B31.1. The vertical deadweight deflection between supports should be very small and allow piping to have positive slope towards drip pockets for proper drainage to avoid water hammer.

2. Locate the first rigid hanger in a system so that the restraining action of the hanger produces a bending stress no greater than 1/4 of the allowable stress listed in Appendix A of ASME B31.1, and the rigid hanger (rod hanger) restraining uplift loads do not exceed piping operating dead weight loads to avoid rod buckling.

3. Locate supports at concentrated loads so as to prevent excessive bending moments in system. The support may be located near the horizontal elbows within the 1/4 point of supporting span of the piping system.

4. Locate supports adjacent to safety valves so as to prevent excessive deflection and moments due to reaction of discharging safety valves. Supports shall be rigid to accommodate the discharge of safety valves.

5. Locate supports and hangers such that the resultant reactions imposed on floor mounted equipment connections due to the weight of the piping, or thermal expansion of the system does not exceed the following unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: a. Manufacturer Equipment connections allowables. b. In-line supported Equipment shall have zero (0) forces and moments.

(1) Movements of equipment connections for pipe 2-1/2-inches and larger are shown on the Drawings for the Owner-supplied equipment.

(2) Contractor shall obtain the movements of equipment connections 2 inches and smaller from Owner on Owner-supplied equipment and movements of equipment connections for all Equipment supplied by this Contract.

6. Riser clamps shall be designed to use shear lugs or trunnions to prevent the clamp from slipping.

7. Pipe insulation shall be accounted for in design of pipe clamps and other attachments. 8. Rigid struts shall be capable of field adjustment. Field adjustment allowance shall be at

least plus or minus 3 inches. 9. Coordinate hanger design and location to ensure that no interferences will exist between

hangers, pipes, and building steel or electrical apparatus and HVAC duct work. 10. Design all auxiliary steel required to properly support the piping with the same safety

factor stress levels as the main hanger components in accordance with MSS SP58. 11. Contractor shall be responsible for follow-up on hangers to help solve vibration or

movement problems of pipe apparent after start-up.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION: A. Pipe hanger assemblies, anchors, and sway braces shall be constructed of the following

materials: 1. Pipe support components shall be suitable for service at their maximum sustained

operating temperature. Materials of pipe supports such as pipe clamps and other components with design temperature of less than 750ºF, and any part of the components located less than 9 inches from outside of the piping shall be carbon steel of an ASTM type having a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi and a minimum ultimate strength of 58,000 psi.


485940-4 81799_8312_485940

2. Hanger rods shall be hot-rolled carbon steel cut to length and threaded in the factory. Maximum allowable stress in a rod shall be 9,000 psi (633 kg/cm2) at the threaded root cross sectional area and 12,000 psi (844 kg/cm2) in non-threaded rods. a. Threaded length of rod shall be long enough for the pipe support adjustment.

3. Pipe clamps up to 750oF shall be carbon steel as specified in paragraph 2.03A.1 of this Section.

4. Clevises, turnbuckles, and eye nuts shall be forged steel. 5. Eye rods shall have full and neatly welded eyes with the cross sectional strength of the

eye greater than or equal to strength of the rod. 6. All guide or pipe supports that include a friction load shall use the following materials:

a. RTFE slides for lines which have a design temperature less than or equal to 450°F. b. Graphite slides of bolted design for lines which have a design temperature greater

than 450°F. 7. Protection saddles up to 750oF shall be carbon steel as specified in paragraph 2.03A.1 of

this Section. 8. All miscellaneous carbon steel hanger components located in either outdoor or

unenclosed areas shall be hot-dip galvanized, with the exception of lugs and clips welded directly to pipes or structural members.

B. Pipe hanger assemblies, anchors, guides, restraints, and sway braces shall use only the following acceptable types of components as outlined in MSS SP58 and SP69: 1. Upper Supports: Type 22 with bolt and Type 57. Where the horizontal movement of the

pipe exceeds 6 inches in 6 feet of free hanger rod length between structural and pipe attachments pivot points (4.7º), horizontal traveler or equal may be used.

2. Intermediate Supports: Types 13, 14, 17, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, and 56. 3. Lower Supports: Types 2, 3, 4, 8, 24, 35, 37, 39, 42, and steel plate lugs shop welded to

the pipe. Type 1 may be used on noninsulated piping systems. Where a riser clamp is used as this lower support on a vertical line operating above 200oF, provide adequate shear lugs welded to the pipe to keep the clamp from slipping on the pipe. Use alloy steel components on all lines over 750oF as specified in paragraph 2.03 A.4 this Section.

C. Pipe hanger assemblies shall be coated with the manufacturer's standard coating.



81799_8320_485945 485945-1

SECTION 485945 - POWER PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. This Section describes material and installation requirements for piping and equipment

insulation and jacketing. B. The following Insulation Purpose codes are defined here and shown on the Piping and

Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Legend Sheet. 1. H Thermal Efficiency 2. HT Thermal Efficiency with Heat Tracing 3. P Burn Protection 4. PT Burn Protection with Heat Tracing 5. A Anti-Sweat 6. T Heat Tracing 7. N None

C. The Insulation Purpose for each pipeline is indicated on the Line List. D. The Insulation Purpose for each piece of equipment is indicated on the P&ID that the

equipment appears on. E. The minimum required insulation thickness and number of layers is defined by the pipeline or

equipment design temperature and the Insulation Purpose. F. The minimum required insulation thickness applicable to the piping systems and included

valves, fittings, and in-line equipment is indicated on the Line List. G. The minimum insulation thickness applicable to equipment is indicated on the equipment list. H. Piping systems shall be identified to indicate content, direction of flow and heat tracing (if

applicable) in accordance with this Specification. I. Piping systems shall be identified to indicate contents, directions of flow, and freeze-protected

areas in accordance with this Specification. J. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Description of Equipment Furnished by Others: SECTION 485790. 2. Erection and Installation of Power Piping: SECTION 485990.


1. Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA): a. Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards.

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. A13.1 – Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. c. C196 - Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating Cement. d. C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. e. C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and

Tubular Form. f. C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. g. C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. h. C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial

Applications.

SECTION 485945 - POWER PIPING INSULATION: continued

485945-2 81799_8320_485945

i. C592 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)(Industrial Type).

j. C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. k. C892 - High-Temperature Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. The following shall be submitted as Submittals:

1. All applicable items listed in DIVISION 1. 2. Submittals shall, at a minimum, include the following:

a. A material list which identifies all insulation and jacketing materials, coverings, coatings, finishes, and accessories proposed for use for the insulation class. The list shall include the following: (1) Name of the manufacturer of each proposed material. (2) Manufacturer's complete designation for each material (trade name, product

number, and other nomenclature). (3) Generic description of each material (for example: "Glass Mineral Fiber

Board," "Aluminum Alloy 5005 Jacket," "Vermiculite Insulation Cement," and similar wording).

(4) For multiple-layer insulation installations, the proposed thicknesses of each layer for each pipe size and for each item of equipment.

b. Complete manufacturer's specifications for each material proposed confirming that the material meets the requirements of this Specification for the proposed application. Manufacturer's information shall also include the following: (1) For insulation material:

(a) Density. (b) Thermal conductivity(s) (at ASTM-listed mean temperatures, if

applicable). (c) Compressive strength. (d) Flexural strength. (e) Dimensional stability. (f) Maximum allowable service temperature. (g) Composition.

(2) For insulating cements: (a) Dry covering capacity. (b) Maximum allowable service temperature. (c) Shrinkage upon drying. (d) Compressive strength. (e) Dry adhesion to steel. (f) Linear shrinkage after heat soaking for 24 hours at maximum

operating temperature. (g) Thermal conductivity(ies) (at ASTM-listed mean temperatures, if

applicable). (3) For jacketing materials:

(a) Surface pattern (smooth, corrugated, or other description). (b) Moisture-barrier material and method of application. (c) Color.

(4) For blanket materials: (a) Composition.


81799_8320_485945 485945-3

(b) Color. (c) Maximum allowable service temperature.

(5) For adhesives, mastics, coatings, and related items: (a) Composition. (b) Maximum allowable service temperature. (c) Physical characteristics.

(6) General descriptions of other materials and other information that may be requested by Engineer.

(7) Manufacturer's recommendations for installation or application of the materials.

(8) Certificates of asbestos-free materials. c. A set of application details depicting the following configurations proposed for the

class. (1) Details for removable jacketing and insulation for flanges, valves, strainers,

hangers, in-line equipment, and equipment indicating removable sections. (2) Details for safety valves. (3) Details for wall and floor penetrations. (4) Details for below grade installations. (5) Details of special configurations. (6) Plans, sections, and details, as necessary, to fully describe configurations for

each piece of equipment indicated in this Specification to be insulated. (7) Details of typical welded insulation clips, if welded clips are desired.

d. Application details shall show insulation materials, insulation cement, weather barriers, vapor barriers, jacketing, coatings, securements, reinforcements, stiffening mechanisms, supports, sealing and caulking, expansion joints, and all other materials to be installed or applied. Details shall distinguish differences between indoor and outdoor applications.

3. Certificates of completion of factory tests. 4. Details of piping identification system. 5. Details of insulation for each piece of equipment showing the removable sections

required for disassembly. Show all details or sectional cuts. 6. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all supplied products.



2. Submit written certifications, as Submittals, that the above factory tests have been satisfactorily and successfully completed.

B. All sound control lagging material shall be produced by a manufacturer having a minimum of five years’ experience in furnishing similar noise control lagging material for pipe. Submittals shall include test reports from independent laboratories meeting the following minimum criteria. Products not meeting these minimum test standards will not be accepted. 1. Insertion Loss when tested as a pipe wrap directly over over 51-mm (2”) mineral fiber

glass (per ASTM E1222-90):

Frequency, Hz 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 STC 2 10 16 27 35 34 33


485945-4 81799_8320_485945

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Contractor shall receive, inspect, unload, haul, and store all materials for insulation, jacketing

and pipe identification. B. All materials for insulation, jacketing and pipe identification shall be stored indoors.

Manufacturers' recommendations for storage shall be followed including, but not limited to: 1. Maximum and minimum ambient temperatures. 2. Stacking. 3. Packaging. 4. Moisture control.

C. Protect all materials from damage due to exposure to high or low temperatures, moisture, crimping, buckling, spotting, streaking and other physical or chemical damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ABOVE GROUND INSULATION: A. All materials, including block, board, blanket, and preformed pipe insulation, facings, cements,

mastics, sealants, weather and vapor barrier materials, coatings, and related items, shall be asbestos-free. Contractor shall provide written certifications from the material manufacturers to this effect.

B. Insulation materials for lines and equipment with Insulation Purpose codes of H, HT, P, or PT shall be chosen from the acceptable materials listed below or other materials suitable for specific applications and acceptable to Owner. 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation:

a. Calcium silicate insulation conforming to ASTM C533, Type I (to 1200°F) or Type II (to 1700°F).

b. Mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C547, Type I (to 850°F) or Type II (to 1200°F).

c. Diabase wool fiber insulation bonded with a thermosetting resin, impregnated with a water repelling addition and conforming to ASTM C547, Type I (to 850°F) or Type II (to 1200°F), in physical properties and dimensions (to rated temperature).

2. Block Insulation: a. Calcium silicate insulation conforming to ASTM C533, Type I (to 1200°F) or Type

II (to 1700°F). b. Mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C612, Type IA or IB (to 450°F),

Type II (to 850°F), Type III (to 1000°F) or Type IV (to 1200°F). 3. Board, Sheet or Slab Insulation:

a. Mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C612, Type IA or IB (to 450°F), Type II (to 850°F), Type III (to 1000°F), Type V, or Type IV (to 1200°F).

b. Products manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation: (1) Crimp Wrap Crimped Pipe and Tank Wrap (to 850°F).

c. Products manufactured by Johns Manville: (1) "Pipe and Tank Insulation" unfaced (to 399°F).

d. Products manufactured by Rockwool Lapinus B.V.: (1) Lapinus Slab "Slab 213 - Type IB, Slab 223 - Type II, or Slab 233 - Type

IV." e. Products manufactured by Roxul, Inc.:

(1) Roxul "RHT 40, 60, 80, 100, or 120." 4. Blanket Insulation:


81799_8320_485945 485945-5

a. Alumina-silica fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C892, Grade 5, Grade 8, or Grade 12.

b. Mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C553, Type II or Type III, unfaced (to 450°F), Type IV (to 850°F), Type V or VI (to 1000°F), or Type VII (to 1200°F).

c. Johns Manville "Thermo-Mat." d. Alpha Associates "Temp-Mat." e. Rockwool Lapinus B.V. "Type 159, 160, 164, or 168 Lapinus Wired Mat." f. Roxul, Inc. "Roxul RW Blanket Insulation RW 40, RW 60, or RW 80."

5. Insulating Cement: a. Mineral fiber cement conforming to ASTM C195. b. Expanded or exfoliated vermiculite cement conforming to ASTM C196.

6. Thickness shall be as described in this SECTION. C. Insulation materials for lines and equipment with Insulation Purpose code A and a design

temperature of 35°F (2°C) to 90°F (32°C) shall be: 1. For pipelines 2-1/2 inches in nominal size and larger, one or both of the following:

a. Mineral fiber preformed pipe insulation conforming to ASTM C547, Type I or II, with: (1) An integral vapor barrier. (2) A self-sealing strip. (3) A factory-applied aluminum jacket with a minimum thickness of 0.016-inch

and with an integral moisture barrier. b. Mineral fiber block or board insulation conforming to ASTM C612, Type IA, IB, II,

III, or IV; with a field-applied vapor barrier. Vapor barrier material to be Encacel V or Encacel X as manufactured by Childers Products Company, or other similar material acceptable to Owner.

2. For pipelines 2 inches in nominal size and smaller and valves, fittings, flanges, strainers, tanks, and equipment of all sizes, flexible elastomeric cellular insulation conforming to ASTM C534, Type I, except in heat traced areas.

3. Insulation thickness shall be: a. 0.75 inch for pipelines 4 inches and less. b. 1 inch for pipelines 6 inches to 24 inches. c. 1.5 inch for pipelines 26 inch and larger. d. 0.75 inch for equipment.

D. Insulation materials for heat traced lines and equipment with Insulation Purpose code T shall be: 1. As specified, if piping is required to be insulated for other purposes. 2. As specified for underground if heat tracing extends to the frost depth. See insulation

details. 3. If not otherwise to be insulated, or specified materials are not permitted in

freeze-protected areas, use: a. Preformed mineral fiber pipe insulation conforming to ASTM C547, Type I or II. b. Mineral fiber board thermal insulation conforming to ASTM C612, Type IA, IB or

II. c. Other materials required, such as insulation adhesives, need be rated for a minimum

service temperature of 400oF. E. Where indicated on the Drawings, sound attenuating piping insulation materials shall be:


485945-6 81799_8320_485945

1. Sound control lagging material shall consist of a rugged, reinforced aluminized-faced, mass loaded limp vinyl barrier. Material shall be non-lead composition for safe handling and easy installation.

2. The barrier shall be constructed of a 3-mm (0.12”) thick mass loaded, limp vinyl sheet bonded to a thin layer of reinforced aluminum foil on one side. The barrier shall have a nominal density of 4.9-kg/m2 (1.0-psf) and shall have a minimum STC rating of 28. The barrier shall exhibit minimum flammability ratings of 0.0-seconds for flame-out and after-glow, and 5-mm (0.2”) for char length when tested in accordance with Federal Test Std. No. 191-5903. The barrier shall have a minimum thermal conductivity (K) value of 0.29 and a rated service temperature range of -40°C (-40°F) to 105°C (220°F). When tested for Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E84, the barrier will have a Flame Spread Index of no more than 10 and a Smoke Development Index of no more than 40.

3. Rolls of lagging shall include an additional 152-mm (6”) width of barrier on one side to provide an overlap of adjacent application and an improved acoustical seal.

4. Manufacturers: a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Engineer approved equal.

2.02 BELOW GRADE INSULATION: A. Insulation materials for below grade piping in direct contact with soil shall be cellular glass

block and pipe thermal insulation conforming to ASTM C552 as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation or approved equal.

B. Provide below grade insulation on all insulated piping as shown on the Drawings.

2.03 ABOVE GRADE JACKETING: A. Jacketing shall be aluminum alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005 conforming to ASTM B209 with an

embossed finish and a factory-applied moisture barrier consisting of one layer of 40- to 60-pound virgin kraft paper coated on one side with a 0.001-inch minimum thickness polyethylene film.

B. Minimum jacketing thicknesses shall be: 1. Indoors:

a. Pipe, fitting, and valve insulation 12 inches or less in outside diameter: 0.016-inch. b. Pipe, fitting and valve insulation greater than 12 inches in diameter: 0.024-inch. c. Equipment: 0.024-inch.

2. Outdoors: a. Pipe, fitting, and valve insulation 12 inches or less in outside diameter: 0.020-inch. b. Pipe, fitting, and valve insulation greater than 12 inches in diameter: 0.032-inch. c. Equipment: 0.032-inch.

3. All removable and reusable insulation panels and sections: 0.032-inch.

2.04 BELOW GRADE JACKETING: A. Jacket material shall be 125 mils thick woven glass fabric reinforced bituminous material with

an integral aluminum foil layer and a protective film coating. 1. Pittwrap as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation or approved equal.

B. Jacket shall be heat sealed at overlap after installation. C. Ends of insulation shall be sealed with 3/16-inch thickness of bitumastic coating.

1. Pittcote 300 as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation or approved equal.

2.05 SECUREMENTS AND SUPPORTS:


81799_8320_485945 485945-7

A. Securement wire shall be the annealed galvanized type. B. Securement bands shall be 0.020 inch thick aluminum and as follows:

1. Use 1/2-inch-wide bands for installed jacket diameters up to and including 30 inches. 2. Use 3/4-inch-wide bands for installed jacket diameters exceeding 30 inches.

C. Pipe insulation supports for vertical pipe runs may be either the welded or clamped type. Materials shall be as follows: 1. For design temperatures above 750°F - chrom-moly steel. 2. All others - carbon steel. 3. Refer to SECTION 485935 and the Contract Drawings for requirements and details.

2.06 PIPING SYSTEM MARKINGS: A. Contractor shall prepare a legend for identifying piping systems and obtain Owner's approval

of the legend and colors to be used prior to marking the systems. B. Markers shall be Brady Co. material B-946 self-sticking pipe markers and combination "Arrow

Tape," or similar products designed for outdoor use and approved by Engineer. C. Colors shall be per Appendix 485990. D. Marker lettering shall be as follows:

1. Lettering on markers to be applied to bare piping or insulation jacketing having an outside diameter of 3 inches or less shall be approximately 1 inch high.

2. Lettering on markers to be applied to bare piping or insulation jacketing greater than 3 inches in outside diameter shall be approximately 2 inches high.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL: A. The configurations of installed insulation and jacketing materials shall comply with the

applicable recommendations of the MICA Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards (hereinafter referred to as "MICA Standards") and this Specification. In case of conflict, this Specification shall have precedence.

B. All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including recommended surface temperatures at installation. Should a conflict arise between a manufacturer's recommendations and this Specification, notify Engineer.

C. Insulation shall be installed in the thicknesses and configurations specified. Some unavoidable interferences may be encountered, however, which preclude installation of the required thicknesses. In these cases, notify Engineer and obtain written approval for alternative configurations before proceeding. Notching of insulation is not permitted without Engineer's approval.

D. Do not apply insulation to piping and equipment until leak tests and hydrostatic tests have been successfully completed as specified in SECTION 485990.

E. Do not apply insulation to flanged joints until the joints have been retightened as specified in SECTION 485990.

F. Do not apply insulation or jacketing over thermowells. G. Provide a clearly and permanently marked pull plug of specified insulation and jacketing

materials over equipment and ASME nameplates. Plugs shall be marked "EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE" or "ASME NAMEPLATE," as applicable.

H. Provide fire-resistant drop cloths and enforce their use during surface cleaning and installation of insulation to keep materials off gratings, floors, structures, equipment, and other items not specified to be insulated. Contractor shall protect all insulation materials during and after


485945-8 81799_8320_485945

installation to prevent damage from weather, breakage, and similar causes until jacketing has been installed and accepted.

I. Protect moving parts of valves and other equipment to prevent dust and insulation materials from clogging the parts. Plug openings of equipment, as necessary, to prevent foreign materials from entering during surface cleaning and installation of insulation.

J. All surfaces to be insulated shall be clean and dry prior to installing insulation on them. Unless specified otherwise, clean by wiping and brushing, as necessary, to remove loose foreign matter, grease, and other substances. Solvents may be used upon notification of Engineer and enforcement of appropriate precautions.

K. Provide weather protection for all insulation materials during and after application until such time as the insulation is jacketed to provide final weather protection. Wet insulation will be rejected and require complete replacement before the Work will be accepted.

3.02 INSULATION AND JACKETING OF PIPE: A. Insulation:

1. All portions of piping shall be insulated per the designated insulation thickness and this SECTION.

2. All portions of piping which have an Insulation Purpose of P and are within a minimum of 7 feet above a floor, platform or stairway, or are within a minimum lateral distance of 3-1/2 feet from any stairway, ladder, platform, walkway or operating aisle, and have an operating temperature in excess of 140°F shall be insulated in accordance with Table 485945-1 if the personnel burn protection thickness is greater than the thickness specified. a. Only portions of the pipe line meeting the distance criteria need to be insulated.

3. All portions of piping which are heat traced shall be insulated. 4. Insulate vent and drain lines and instrument tap lines to the outlet side of the root

valve. Lines with double root valves shall be insulated to the outlet side of the second root valve.

5. Unless precluded by the pipe size, straight runs of pipe shall be insulated with preformed pipe insulation. Contractor shall submit, and obtain approval for, configurations requiring block insulation for this application prior to ordering materials.

6. Install specified insulation supports on all vertical runs of piping as follows: a. Welded supports shall be attached in compliance with codes and standards

applicable to the piping and SECTION 485935. b. Clamped supports shall be attached securely to the piping without deforming the

piping material. c. Supports shall be installed on all vertical runs exceeding 10 feet in straight length. d. Supports shall be located as follows:

(1) One (1) no more than 3 feet from the bottom of a straight run of pipe. (2) Above each valve or fitting with 10 or more feet of straight pipe running

vertically upward from it. (3) At intervals not exceeding 10 feet.

7. Install preformed pipe insulation sections as follows (refer to MICA Standards): a. All joints except expansion joints (see below) shall be tightly butted. b. Taper insulation at flanges to permit removal/reinstallation of bolts without

damaging the insulation. c. Stagger all joints in double-layered insulation as follows:

(1) Longitudinal joints in half sections: approximately 90o around pipe circumference.


81799_8320_485945 485945-9

(2) Longitudinal joints in quad sections, approximately 45o around pipe circumference.

(3) Circumferential joints: Mandatory 12 to 18 inches along pipe axis, where possible; 6 inches minimum.

d. Provide expansion joints in each layer of insulation for all piping and ducts with design temperatures over 600°F in accordance with the Standard Insulation Details drawing and as follows (NOTE: "horizontal straight runs of pipe" below refers to continuous runs of preformed pipe insulation along horizontal straight piping between discontinuities on the pipe insulation, such as special fitting and valve insulation fabrication, pipe hanger rod and clamp penetrations, pipe flanges, and similar items.) (1) In horizontal straight runs of pipe which are 6 to 12 feet in length, install an

expansion joint in approximately the middle of the run. (2) In horizontal straight runs of pipe which exceed 12 feet in length, install

expansion joints as follows: (a) One (1) within 4 feet of each end of the straight run. (b) Approximately evenly spaced along the run of piping with intervals

not exceeding 10 feet in length. (3) Install an expansion joint at each insulation support in vertical piping. (4) Use naturally occurring circumferential butt joints between sections of

preformed pipe insulation, where possible, to form expansion joints. (5) Tightly compress the collars of blanket insulation between the preformed

pipe sections. Blanket insulation should remain compressed after preformed sections are secured.

(6) Secure collars at butt joints with a staple. Do not staple into preformed pipe insulation sections.

8. Secure preformed pipe insulation sections with wire and bands as follows: a. Use specified wire and bands of the following minimum sizes:

Insulation Outside

Diameter (in.)

Inner or Outer Insulation

Layer

Wire or

Bands

Wire Gauge

Band Width (in.)

Band Thickness

(in.)

12 or less Inner Either 16 3/8 0.015 Outer Bands

Only -- 3/8 0.015

Less than 17 To 12

Inner Either 14 1/2 0.020 Outer Bands

Only -- 1/2 0.020

Greater than 17 Either Bands Only

-- 1/2 0.020

b. Draw bands and wires tight to securely butt longitudinal joints and to imbed them in

the insulation. Take care to minimize cutting of insulation. c. Secure bands with clamps. Twist wire. Maintain tightness of bands and wires while

securing them. d. Cut off excess ends of wires and bands and imbed the clamps and wire twists in the

insulation, taking care to minimize cutting of insulation. Be sure insulation is tightly secured.


485945-10 81799_8320_485945

9. Point all joints, cracks and depressions, except expansion joints, with insulating cement, as necessary, to provide a smooth finished surface. Allow cement to dry thoroughly. Repeat process, as needed, to repair any shrink cracks, depressions, and other surface breaks.

10. Install insulation on pipe bends, valves, fittings, flanges and in-line specials as follows: a. For piping 2-1/2 inches in nominal size and larger, use preformed pipe, preformed

fitting, and block insulation materials to form the following types of insulating covers, as applicable (refer to MICA Standards): (1) Preformed valve and fitting insulation shall be installed, where applicable,

with joints tightly butted. (2) Field or factory-fabricated valve/tee insulation, constructed of specified

preformed pipe or fitting insulation and/or block insulation, may be used. Adhesives used in their fabrication, however, shall be rated for service in 1200oF or higher temperatures.

(3) Built-up and beveled in-line flange insulation may be used. Any adhesives used shall be rated for service in 1200oF or higher temperature.

b. Preformed fitting and pipe insulation and block insulation shall be applied in sufficient layer thicknesses so that the final total thickness is at least as thick as required by the applicable insulation class.

c. Fill unavoidable large voids with specified blanket insulation. d. Secure insulation as specified, except that the required wire/band spacing may not

be possible on some configurations. In these cases, wrap wire and/or, apply a 1200oF rated adhesive or otherwise tightly secure the insulation in a manner acceptable to Owner. Contractor shall advise Owner of locations where the required wire/band spacing cannot be accomplished.

e. For piping 2 inches in nominal size and smaller, preformed pipe and fitting insulation and block insulation may be installed as specified in Paragraph 3.02.A.6. In lieu of this, insulating cement may be used as follows: (1) Surfaces shall be cleaned of loose dirt and scale, grease, and other

substances. (2) Apply the cement in layers not exceeding 1/2-inch in thickness. (3) Allow each layer to dry completely before applying successive layers. (4) The final total thickness of all layers shall meet the required minimum

thickness requirement of the applicable insulation class. (5) The finished surface shall be smooth and shall blend into adjacent pipe

insulation on connecting piping. f. Install removable and reusable insulation, blankets, or pads on orifice flanges,

conical strainers, valve bonnets, and other locations where access to piping, valves, or in-line specials may be required for maintenance, tightening of flanges, and similar activities in accordance with the Standard Insulation Details drawing. (1) Except as noted below, removable and reusable insulation shall be insulated

metal equipment covers as follows: (a) Panels and sections shall be constructed of block insulation fastened

to, and reinforced with, metal jacketing sections. Aluminum plate, flat bar, angle, or similar items may also be used for reinforcement.

(b) The total insulation thickness shall meet the minimum insulation thickness specified.


81799_8320_485945 485945-11

(c) The equipment covers shall be constructed to facilitate removal and reinstallation of the entire assembly with ease and without damage to either the insulation or jacketing.

(d) Cut-outs for pipe, pump shafts, and similar items penetrating the equipment covers shall be cut so that no gap exists between the cover and the penetrating piece larger than (seal gaps with siliconized rubber calking):

Penetrating Item Maximum Allowable Gap (in) Pipe Jacketing 1/8

Pump Shaft 1/4 Other Contact Owner

(2) Flexible insulation blankets may be used on large installations. They shall be

constructed as follows: (a) Insulation blankets shall be fabricated from the specified blanket

insulation material fastened to suitable fabric or mesh covering. Coverings for inner layers of insulation shall be suitable for service at 1200oF. Coverings for outer layers of insulation shall be suitable for service at 300oF and shall be durable and moisture resistant. Metal mesh shall be aluminum or stainless steel.

(b) The total insulation thickness shall meet the minimum insulation thickness specified.

(c) The blankets shall be constructed to facilitate removal and reinstallation with ease and without damage to the insulation, coverings or securements.

B. Jacketing: 1. Install specified jacketing on all piping insulation, except the following:

a. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. b. Removable and reusable insulation blankets.

2. Prepare outdoor piping insulation by applying a protective layer of mastic or vinyl tape to the outside surfaces. Irregularly shaped surfaces at valves, fittings, and similar items may be coated with two applications of epoxy paint in lieu of the mastic or vinyl tape.

3. Install jacketing over the insulation to provide a tight protective cover as follows: a. Longitudinal jacketing joints shall be installed with an overlapping crimped

edge. The overlap shall be a minimum of 2 inches for indoor application and a minimum of 3 inches for outdoor or below grade application. The crimped edge shall be installed on the underside of horizontal piping with the overlapping edge about 30o from the bottom horizontal tangent of the jacketing and facing down. The overlap area on vertical runs of piping shall be located on the side of the pipe least visible to normal walkways and aisles.

b. Circumferential jacketing joints shall be overlapped as follows:

Design Temperature Length of Straight Pipe (ft)**

Minimum Required Overlap (in)

Indoors Outdoors Over 600°F 0-30 2 3 Over 600°F 30-75 3 3 300°F-600°F 0-75 2 3


485945-12 81799_8320_485945

300°F-600°F 75+ 3 3 Under 300°F All Lengths 2 3

** Length over which jacketing is installed as continuous straight cylinder with no

change in nominal diameter (i.e., may include in-line specials which require no change in jacket configuration from connection pipe).

c. The area of circumferential overlap between two adjacent jacketing sections shall be

located at least 4 inches from any butt or expansion joint in the outside layer of insulation covered.

d. Factory- or field-fabricated aluminum insulation covers may be used on all pipe bends, fittings, flanges, valves, and related items. Factory-fabricated (one-piece, two-piece or sectional) covers are mandatory where proper fit-up is possible. All joints between sections or with adjoining pipe insulation shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches for indoor application and a minimum of 3 inches for outdoor application unless precluded by standard fabrications. Advise Owner where the required overlap cannot be achieved.

e. Jacketing shall be installed on vertical piping so that upper sections overlap lower sections. Install stainless steel "S" clips on all horizontal laps. Locate clips at approximate 90o intervals around piping where installed jacketing is 24 inches or less in diameter. Locate clips at approximate 45o intervals for larger diameters of installed jacketing.

4. Secure jacketing bands on maximum centers of 12 inches as follows: a. On each side of a circumferential joint within 3 inches of the overlap area. Do not

install bands in overlap area. b. Use ½-inch wide bands for installed jacket diameters up to and including 30 inches. c. Use ¾-inch wide bands for installed jacket diameters exceeding 30 inches.

5. Install aluminum flashing and rainhoods on pipe hanger rods which support outdoor insulated piping.

6. Install aluminum caps to cover the ends of insulation at flanges at those locations where insulation blankets will be used to cover the flanges. See Standard Insulation Details drawing.

7. Apply the specified sealant at the following locations: a. To seal flashing and rainhoods. b. To seal jacketing in transition areas where jacketing diameters change (e.g., where

built-up flange insulation covers join adjacent pipe jacketing), both indoors and outdoors.

c. All below grade joints. C. Heat-traced Piping:

1. All heat-traced piping and tubing shall be insulated. Heat-traced piping and tubing is indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. Heating cable will be furnished and installed by this Contract as described in DIVISIONS 47 and 48. If the piping operates at an elevated temperature, the heating cable shall be installed either directly on the pipe or between layers of insulation. Do not install insulation over the heating cable until the heating cable has been satisfactorily installed, successfully tested, and released by Owner.

3. The minimum required insulation thickness on heat-traced piping is 2 inches. 4. For piping and tubing that would not otherwise be insulated, install insulation and

jacketing in only the freeze-protected areas. In these cases, insulation and jacketing shall


81799_8320_485945 485945-13

be terminated using good industry practices and per these Specifications. Transitions to other insulations and terminations shall be smooth and of good appearance.

5. Preformed pipe insulation shall be grooved to fit over heating cable or oversized sections shall be used.

3.03 INSULATION AND JACKETING OF EQUIPMENT: A. Insulation:

1. Except as indicated otherwise, all equipment designated by these classes shall be insulated using the specified preformed pipe, block, and board insulation.

2. All portions of equipment which are within a minimum of 7 feet above a floor, platform, or stairway, or are within a minimum lateral distance of 3-1/2 feet from any stairway, ladder, platform, walkway, or operating aisle, shall be insulated according to the personnel burn protection thickness specified in the Minimum Insulation Thickness Table if the personnel burn protection thickness is greater than the thickness specified.

3. Equipment installed outdoors with an Insulation Purpose of P and supplied with support points may be protected by using galvanized expanded metal mesh with the exception of protecting electrical conduit or cable tray.

4. Install sections of insulation with joints tightly butted. For double layered insulation, joints in the outer layer shall be staggered at least 6 inches, where possible, from joints in the inner layer. Stagger other joints as much as possible.

5. Taper insulation at flanges, manways, and covers to permit removal/reinstallation of bolts without damaging the insulation.

6. Fill unavoidable large voids with specified blanket insulation. 7. For design temperatures above 500°F, provide a suitable expansion space between

insulation and the equipment to allow the equipment to "grow" when heated or provide suitable expansion joints in the insulation as approved. Expansion joints shall be spaced as follows: a. For cylindrical shells, longitudinal joints at maximum intervals of 15 feet of arc,

circumferential joints at maximum intervals of 10 feet along the cylinder axis. b. For tank and vessel heads, provide one circumferential joint at the greatest diameter

of the head. c. For large flat areas, at maximum intervals of 20 feet in both dimensions of the

plane. 8. Point all joints, cracks and depressions (except expansion joints) with insulating cement

and ensure that the fill material in all expansion joints is tightly packed to provide a smooth finished insulation surface.

9. Secure insulation material as follows: a. Use existing insulation clips, where provided, ensuring they are securely attached.

Existing insulation clips shall not be removed without written approval. b. For cylindrical shells, use 3/4-inch-wide x 0.020-inch-thick bands on maximum 12

inch centers or welded-on insulation clips with 14 gage wire on maximum 12 inch centers.

c. For tank and vessel heads, use 3/4-inch-wide x 0.020-inch-thick bands connected to a floating stainless steel ring and to one of the circumferential bands on the cylindrical part of the tank or vessel. Or, use welded-on insulation clips with 14 gage wire on maximum 12 inch centers.

d. For flat areas, use welded-on insulation clips with 14 gage wire on maximum 12 inch centers.


485945-14 81799_8320_485945

e. Where the overall installed length of a band for equipment with a design temperature above 600°F will exceed 50 feet, one stainless steel expansion spring shall be installed in the band for each 50 feet of length. Springs shall be evenly spaced along the band. Childers Products Company 4 inch "Chil-Springs" are acceptable for this application.

10. Provide removable and reusable block or board insulation sections at flanges, manways, and covers. Insulated metal equipment covers, as specified in ARTICLE 3.02 shall be used in this application, unless approved or directed otherwise by Owner. Removable and reusable insulation panels for the following equipment shall be constructed of the specified metal in sheet or plate of 0.080-inch minimum thickness:

11. Provide removable and reusable insulation assemblies on all equipment which will require tightening, cleaning, or periodic maintenance or as directed. Assemblies shall be insulated metal equipment covers or flexible insulation blanket assemblies as specified in ARTICLE 3.02. Contractor shall obtain approval for the type of assembly proposed for an application before installing the assembly.

12. Stiffener rings shall be insulated with the same minimum thickness of insulation specified for the equipment.

B. Jacketing: 1. Install specified jacketing on all equipment insulation. 2. Prepare outdoor equipment insulation as follows:

a. Install 1-inch hexagonal galvanized wire mesh over insulation. b. Apply layers of a suitable mastic coating, approved by Owner, in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions to a minimum total mastic thickness of 1/4-inch.

c. Allow mastic to dry thoroughly. 3. Install jacketing over the insulation/mastic to provide a tight protective cover as follows:

a. Adjacent sections of jacketing shall overlap a minimum of 3 inches. Generally, equipment shall be jacketed from bottom to top so that upper sections overlap lower sections.

b. In outdoor applications, seal all jacketing laps with suitable weatherproof mastic approved by Owner.

c. Install stainless steel "S" clips on all horizontal laps. The spacing between "S" clips shall not exceed 3 feet. (Measure diameter of arc on curved surfaces). Upper sections of jacketing shall be supported by a minimum of two "S" clips.

4. Fasten jacketing at the laps with stainless steel sheet metal screws. The spacing of the screws shall not exceed 6 inches at centers.

5. For design temperatures above 500 °F, install 3/4-inch-wide x 0.020-inch-thick stainless steel bands on maximum 18 inch centers. Bands shall be installed only on cylindrical shapes exceeding 3 feet in diameter after application of jacketing. Install bands circumferentially only. Do not install bands on lap joints.

C. Sound Attenuated Piping and Equipment: 1. In addition to the requirements specified herein for insulation and jacketing, the

following shall be provided on piping and equipment specified to include sound attenuation: a. First layer: minimum of 2 inches mineral fiber b. Second layer: sound control lagging material per ARTICLE 2.01(E). c. Third layer: minimum of 1 inch mineral fiber d. Fourth layer: jacketing


81799_8320_485945 485945-15

3.04 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Mark all unburied piping, as specified, below indicating:

1. Contents of piping. 2. Directions of flow. 3. Heat traced piping.

B. Install markers as follows: 1. Markers shall be installed only in the presence of Owner's representative, who will direct

the location and position of the markers. 2. Markers shall be installed in accordance with ASME A13.1 and as specified below. In

case of any conflict, the specification shall govern. Notify Owner of situations that preclude following these requirements and obtain approval before proceeding with alternate installations. a. Legends and flow arrows are to be placed on the sides of piping most readily visible

during normal operations. They should not be placed at the "bottom-dead-center" location on overhead horizontal runs of piping unless absolutely necessary. Normally, they should be placed in one of the two lower quarters of overhead horizontal piping, centered in the quarter as nearly as practical.

b. Flow arrows are to point away from legends. c. Where possible, place markers in areas on outside piping that are most protected

from weather. They should, however, be clearly visible to a casual observer standing upright.

d. Legend and flow arrows are to be applied: (1) At every valve. Where valves are clustered in a single line, one legend and

one flow arrow may suffice. (2) At every wall penetration on both sides of the wall. (3) Where piping runs from floor to floor on both sides of each floor penetrated. (4) Where buried piping enters or exits the ground. (5) At every tee or pipe branch, on all three runs. Where flows represented by

the same legend symbol mix, only one legend marker may be needed. But, three flow arrows will always be needed at these locations.

(6) At intervals not exceeding 50 feet of pipe run on all piping. Markers installed per (1) through (5) above may suffice on some piping runs, precluding the need for midpipe marking.

e. Bare piping and insulation jacketing shall be cleaned and dried before markers are applied. Clean surfaces, as necessary, to remove dirt, grease, dust, scale, and other substances, which could prevent markers from adhering tightly to the surfaces. Wipe and air dry surfaces, as necessary.

3. Background and letter colors shall be in accordance with Appendix 485990. For pipeline fluids not identified therein, but included in this project, provide a letter and coloring scheme for approval.

4. Apply markers in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Markers shall be square to piping and smooth in final appearance.


485945-16 81799_8320_485945

Table 485945-1

Insulation Purpose P – Burn Protection

Temperature Range °F

130-199

200-299

300-399

400-499

500-599

600-699

700-799

800-899

900-999

1000-1099

Number of Layers

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

Nominal Pipe Size

Minimum Insulation Thickness – Inches

2” and Smaller

1 1 1.5 2.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 5 5.5

2.5” 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5

3” 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.5 4 5 5.5 6.5

4” 1 1.5 2 3 3.5 4 4.5 5.5 6 7

6” 1 1.5 2 3.5 4 4 5 5.5 6.5 7.5

8” 1.5 1.5 2.5 4 4 4.5 5 6 7 8

10” 1.5 2 2.5 4 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5

12” 1.5 2 2.5 4 4.5 5 6 7 8 9

14”-16” 1.5 2 3 4.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 9.5

18”-20” 1.5 2 3 4.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8 9.5

22-24” 1.5 2 3.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 7 8 9 10

26-28” 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 7 8 9.5 10

30-38” 1.5 2.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 7 8.5 9.5 11

40” and Over

1.5 2.5 4 4.5 5. 5.5 8 8.5 9.5 11

Equipment 1.5 2.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 7 8.5 9.5 11


81799_8320_485961 485961-1

SECTION 485961 - ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Erect and install Equipment and Materials complete and ready for operation to include all

labor, rigging, blocking, scaffolding, tools, construction materials, and services to remove from storage, trucks or rail cars, haul, store, protect, assemble, erect, and install as specified.

B. The Equipment to be installed is, in general, furnished complete; however, Contractor will be required to furnish small quantities of materials such as bolts, nuts, cap screws, cinch anchors, studs, dowels, and gasket materials to complete the erection of the Equipment.

C. Equipment to be installed will be shipped with separate small miscellaneous components such as instruments, elbow wear blocks, bolts, and related items, which will require Contractor to perform field assembly of the components to complete the Equipment erection. This small miscellaneous work shall be included in this Bid such that no claims for extras will be presented later.

D. Furnish the following materials as required to erect and install the Equipment: 1. Stainless steel and brass shim stock. 2. Bolt thread lubricants, pipe dope, gasket compound, and sealers. Thread lubricant shall be

"MolyKote G," or approved equal. 3. Nonhazardous solvents and cleaning compounds. 4. Wiping cloths, sponges, and cleaning materials. 5. Welding rod and other expendable construction materials. 6. Grout. 7. Paint for touch-up of damaged areas of shop coatings. 8. Cribbing, scaffolding, jacks, slings, and other erection material. 9. Dowels with jacking-out nuts.

E. Assume full responsibility for all Equipment and Materials upon receipt at the jobsite or upon taking over Equipment and Materials in storage, until the erection and installation is complete and accepted by Owner.


1. Erect, install, weld, and test Equipment and Materials in accordance with, but not limited to, the following codes and standards: a. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

(1) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. (2) B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping.

b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): (1) C157/C157M - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic

Cement Mortar and Concrete. (2) C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink). (3) F1554 - Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength.

c. American Welding Society (AWS). d. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications:

(1) SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: : A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 1. B. Submittals required shall include the following:

SECTION 485961 - ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL: continued

485961-2 81799_8320_485961

1. Welding procedures as specified. 2. Welders’ qualification test records as specified. 3. Weld inspection reports as specified. 4. Postheat treatment temperature records as specified.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Perform all welding and installation activities in accordance with these Specifications.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Receive, examine, assume responsibility for, and store all Equipment and Material installed

under this Contract which was received prior to the award of this Contract from points of storage in Owner's warehouse or other contractors' storage yards at the jobsite. Inform Engineer of any damaged Equipment found during the examination.

B. Receive, unload, examine, and store in suitable facilities all Equipment and Materials installed by this Contract which arrives after the award of this Contract in accordance with the following: 1. Arrange for proper location of cars and trucks for unloading subject to approval of

Engineer. If additional switching operations are required, these shall be paid for by Contractor.

2. Examine the Equipment and Material before unloading for concealed damage and immediately report any damage to Engineer for examination by representatives of the manufacturer or common carrier.

3. Pay all demurrage charges and claims for damage to cars resulting from the unloading operations.

4. Spare parts furnished with Owner-furnished Equipment will be separately packaged and labeled as "spare parts." Unload, haul, and deliver all spare parts to Owner's warehouse and place them in the area designated by Owner. Owner will receive and inventory spare parts in his warehouse and will assume and maintain control of all spare parts after they are delivered and placed in his warehouse.

C. Inventory all Equipment and Materials received in accordance with the following: 1. Notify Engineer prior to starting inventory so Engineer can be present if desired. 2. Do not unpack Equipment or Material for inventory unless it is accompanied by a

packing list. Store as received until a manufacturer's representative is available to identify the material or a packing list is received.

3. Furnish lists of material received to Engineer and report all shortages and missing items to Engineer within one working day.

D. Be responsible for the safety and protection from loss or damage of all Equipment and Material received until the Work is complete and surplus material is accepted by Owner.

E. Protect all Equipment and Material during unloading, storage, and installation against corrosion, moisture deterioration, mechanical injury, and accumulation of dirt or other foreign matter to include the following: 1. Store indoors unless outdoor storage is approved by Engineer. 2. Protect all bearings by field lubrication where required. 3. Megger all motors on arrival at jobsite and keep a record of these readings. 4. Block Equipment and Materials stored outdoors at least 6 inches above the ground.

Equipment may be stored outdoors only as approved by Engineer. 5. Keep all pipe and Equipment connections closed until ready for connection.


81799_8320_485961 485961-3

6. Cover Equipment and Materials with suitable covers and provide temporary heat where required.

7. Replace or restore to original condition any Equipment or Material damaged or lost while in custody of Contractor.

8. Clean all damaged areas of shop coatings according to SSPC-SP3 and develop a profile depth of 1.0 mil. Spot prime cleaned areas with 2 mils dry film thickness of barrier coat primer manufactured by: a. Ameron - Amercoat 185 HS. b. Carboline - Rustbond. c. International - Interprime 298. d. Tnemec-Chem-Prime H.S. Series 37H.

9. Use coating materials provided by the manufacturer for touch-up or repair of any coatings damaged during shipping, storage, installation, or commissioning.

10. Keep and turn over to Owner upon request, records of all Equipment maintenance performed during storage and installation until acceptance by Owner. Records shall include: a. Motor megger data. b. Lubrication. c. Shaft rotation. d. Motor heaters energized. e. General condition of Equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL: A. Erect and install Equipment and Materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

requirements and his erection representative's instructions for the means employed for doing the various classes of work, all tolerances in alignment and leveling, and the quality of workmanship for each class and stage of the Work.

B. Shop and erection drawings will be made available to Contractor prior to the start of erection work.

C. Learn the design loadings of the various floors in the power plant and do not overload any floor.

D. Cover and protect Owner's concrete and tile floor surfaces from scarring and oil spots. E. Construct foundations for Equipment where foundations are not specified or indicated on the

Drawings to be provided by Others. F. Furnish and install grout, shim material, and the miscellaneous steel necessary for brackets,

anchors, or supports required for the erection and installation of the Equipment and Materials. G. Perform all welding required for the erection and installation of the Equipment and Materials. H. Furnish all bolts, studs, nuts, and gaskets for makeup of all connections to the Equipment and

replace any manhole or other gaskets damaged during storage, inspection, cleaning, or placing into service.

I. Install and weld piping furnished with the Equipment where specified. J. Furnish and install all pipe hangers and supports for piping to be installed with the Equipment. K. Install insulation and lagging furnished with the Equipment.


485961-4 81799_8320_485961

L. The Equipment manufacturers or Owner may provide certain special tools and special slings which may be used by Contractor during erection. After erection, all special tools, eyebolts, and devices furnished as part of the Equipment or loaned by Owner are to be delivered to Owner in good condition or replaced.

3.02 WELDING: A. Processes and Procedures:

1. Accomplish welding using the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process except as otherwise specified or required by the Equipment manufacturer.

2. Clearly describe the welding processes to be used in the welding procedures and qualify the processes as specified above.

3. Fabricate and weld piping in accordance with the requirements of SECTION 485935 and SECTION 485990.

4. Make tack welds, accomplish weld cleaning and repair weld defects as specified in SECTION 485935.

5. Accomplish all welding in accordance with the best modern practices to reduce distortion to minimum. Include tack welds, alignment clips, and clamps as required.

B. Materials: 1. Filler materials shall be compatible with the base metal and shall be specified and

purchased by ASME or AWS classification and chemical composition. 2. Electrodes shall be compatible with the base metal, suitably shielded where applicable,

and shall be specified and purchased by ASME or AWS classification and chemical composition.

3. Properly store welding electrodes and filler material to ensure that no damage occurs. Store electrodes in suitable enclosures which provide a regulated temperature if recommended by the electrode manufacturer. a. The use of wet or moist electrodes will not be permitted.

C. Heat Treatment: 1. Heat treat welded joints in accordance with the applicable codes and the Equipment

manufacturer's requirements. 2. Accomplish preheating by induction or resistance heating methods.

a. Preheating with a gas torch is not acceptable unless the method is approved by Engineer.

b. Determine the preheat temperature by temperature indicating crayons or other approved methods.

3. Accomplish postheat treatment by local induction or resistance heating. a. Postheat treatment with flame heating is not acceptable unless the method is

approved by Engineer. 4. Make a complete automatic recording temperature record of the post-heat treatment cycle

for all welds. Submit summary of records as Submittals.

3.03 GROUTING: A. Grout all Equipment, machinery, pipe supports, and related items with a nonshrinking grout,

except where otherwise specified by the equipment manufacturer. See ASTM C157 for measuring shrinkage.

B. Nonshrinking grout shall conform to ASTM C1107 and be one of the following: 1. Sauereisen F100 Grout, Sauereisen Cements Company. 2. Five Star Grout, Five Star Products, Inc.


81799_8320_485961 485961-5

3. Crystex, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Masterflow 713 Grout, Master Builders Company. 5. Supreme Grout, Cormix Construction Chemicals.

C. Chip back and clean foundation surfaces as required for proper clearances and to obtain proper bonding.

D. Furnish and install grout forms. Grout forms shall be tight and shall be caulked as required to prevent leakage.

E. Provide a 3/8-inch I.D. minimum stainless-steel weep tube with screwed cap on outside of foundation from the inside to the outside of the grout forms at floor level on those pieces of Equipment which form a "pond" inside the Equipment support frame.

F. Grout bed shall have at least 2 inches of thickness for every four feet of horizontal grout flow required and shall be as required to properly align and position Equipment and machinery.

G. Protect anchor bolt holes from freezing using methods approved by Engineer. This requirement shall be Contractor's responsibility from the time the foundation is released to Contractor for his use until grout has been placed to prevent water from entering the sleeves.

H. Grout all anchor bolt sleeves, unless otherwise specified by the Equipment manufacturer. I. Place grout under entire support plates and bed plates.

1. Drill grout vent holes if necessary. J. Protect grout for at least 24 hours against rapid water loss. K. Maintain grout between 65oF and 80oF until cured. L. After grout has hardened for at least 6 hours, remove grout forms, remove excess grout to a

neat trim line and apply a coat of an approved curing compound. M. Care shall be taken to prevent the transmission of vibration from operating machinery and

construction activities to the Equipment being grouted. N. Unless otherwise directed by Equipment manufacturer's instructions, leveling and support

shims and wedges shall be grouted in place with nonshrinking grout. 1. The shims and wedges shall be completely encased in grout.

3.04 EQUIPMENT ERECTION AND ALIGNMENT: A. Make all measurements and determine elevations to position and align Equipment and

machinery in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Keep all pipe and Equipment connections closed until ready for connection and exercise care to prevent foreign material from entering Equipment during erection.

C. Accomplish all field machining, trimming of pipe or pump well casing, and similar operations that might be required to fit Equipment together or to install Equipment.

D. Shim Equipment, machinery, and motors as required to align Equipment and machinery at normal operating temperatures.

E. Align motors to Equipment and machinery with motor rotor at the mechanical center to within 0.0020-inch angular and offset misalignment unless manufacturer's requirements are more stringent.

F. Align the Equipment as many times as required. G. Tighten anchor bolts using torque wrench or by the turn-of-nut method. Do not overstress the

ASTM F1554 anchor bolts. H. Prepare Equipment for initial operation in accordance with DIVISION 1, and the

manufacturer's instructions, including the following: 1. Cleaning, sounding, blowing and flushing as required and as specified. 2. Lubrication with lubricants supplied by Owner.


485961-6 81799_8320_485961

3. Performing all required inspections and checks. 4. Employment of personnel qualified for performing the above work.

I. Following initial alignment, pull and store coupling bolts, remove all shipping restraints, make all required inspections and checks, and tag as ready for rotational checks.

J. After all connections and rotational checks are made, and the Equipment and machinery is prepared for initial operation, set clearances as required, verify alignment, and make up couplings. 1. Have final alignment check and make up of couplings observed by Owner and Engineer.

K. When motors require doweling to base plates, it shall be done after hot run in. END OF SECTION 485961

81799_8320_485990 485990-1

SECTION 485990 - ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF POWER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Erect and install all piping and accessories required to complete the piping systems as indicated

on the Drawings and as specified. B. Piping erection and installation includes the following:

1. Installation of hangers, supports, and anchors. 2. Holes, flashings, and concrete inserts. 3. Fabrication and erection of piping systems. 4. Field welding. 5. Makeup of flanged, screwed, and solder joints. 6. Connections to equipment. 7. Connections to existing piping. 8. Furnishing and installing miscellaneous valves. 9. Install miscellaneous valves furnished by others. 10. Identification of piping including grade, schedule, piece mark numbers, and connection

locations. 11. Testing of piping systems.

1.02 REFERENCES : A. Applicable Codes and Standards:

1. Design, erect, weld, fabricate, and test Equipment and Materials in accordance with, but not limited to, the following codes and standards: a. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

(1) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. (2) B31.1 - Code for Pressure Piping - Power Piping.

b. American Welding Society (AWS). c. Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI):

(1) ES-3 - Fabricating Tolerances. (2) ES-16 - Access Holes and Plugs for Radiographic Inspection of Pipe Welds.


1. Welding procedures as specified. 2. Welders’ qualification test records as specified. 3. Weld radiograph reports as specified. 4. Hanger and support adjustment reports as specified. 5. Post-heat treatment temperature records as specified. 6. Data reports as required by ASME B31.1 and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Perform all welding, testing, cleaning, and installation activities in accordance with these

Specifications.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

SECTION 485990 – ERECTION AND INSTALLATION OF POWER PIPING: continued

485990-2 81799_8320_485990

A. Protect piping and accessories during unloading, storage and handling as specified in SECTION 485935.

B. Keep all openings closed until ready for connection and exercise care to prevent foreign material from entering piping and accessories during erection.

C. Block all pipe and accessories stored outdoors at least 6 inches above the ground. D. Clean all areas on piping systems and structural steel according to SSPC-SP3 that have been

damaged due to handling or installation such as field welds, hanger attachments, temporary supports, and similar items to a profile depth of 1.0 mil. Spot prime all cleaned areas to 2 mils dry film thickness with barrier coat primer manufactured by: 1. Ameron - Amercoat 185 HS. 2. Carboline - Rustbond. 3. International - Interprime 298. 4. Tnemec - Chem-Prime H.S. Series 37H.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS: A. Install hangers, supports, and anchors in the locations indicated on the hanger manufacturer's

detail drawings. B. Install hangers, supports, and anchors in strict accordance with the hanger manufacturer's

recommendations. C. Remove paint in area of weld on structural steel before welding hanger attachments. D. Adjust hangers and supports as follows:

1. Prior to putting the piping systems into service, remove and/or reinstall travel stops, adjust all constant support and spring hangers to the correct cold load, adjust all solid hangers to correct position, and remove all temporary hangers used in erection and testing. Adjust all floor pipe supports to proper position and grout into place.

2. After and during the time the piping systems are being put into service, adjust all spring hangers for the correct hot load and align all hanger rods to the correct hot position.

3. Furnish and install additional hangers, sway braces, and bracing as required to stabilize piping systems.

4. Submit a report listing the cold and hot position, after adjustment, of all hangers and supports compared to the design positions. Readjust all hangers which, in the opinion of Owner, have excessive deviation from design position.

3.02 HOLES, FLASHINGS, AND CONCRETE INSERTS: A. The wall openings and penetrations that are being furnished by the building contractor are

indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. All holes, sleeves, flashing, and concrete inserts required for the erection and installation of

piping which are not indicated on the Contract Drawings shall be field-cut by this Contract. C. Cut holes through concrete and masonry with a core drill and grout in sleeves. D. Field cut all openings required in grating. Openings larger than 4 inches in diameter shall be

banded with a bar of the same size as main bearing bars. Openings cut in grating shall be cleaned and cold galvanized.

E. Furnish and install caulking, flashing and hoods for all piping through outside walls and roofs. 1. Roof and wall flashing for pipe 12 inches and smaller and at a temperature of 200oF or

less shall be as manufactured by BUILDEX-DEKTITE PIPE FLASHING.


81799_8320_485990 485990-3

2. Roof and wall flashing for pipe larger than 12 inches and at a temperature of 200oF or less, shall be as indicated for standard sealant detail.

3. Roof and wall flashing for pipe at a temperature greater than 200oF shall be as manufactured by A&A Manufacturing Co., Inc., Gortiflex Penetration Seal.

4. Sealant shall be Dow Corning, 3-6548 Silicone RTV or approved equal. 5. See Piping Detail Drawings for quantities and details of construction.

3.03 FABRICATION AND ERECTION: A. General:

1. Fabricate and erect piping in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1 and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code if under the jurisdiction of that code.

2. Field-fabricate piping in strict accordance with all requirements of SECTION 485935. 3. Complete all field welded connections true-to-line, facing, and position within the

tolerances specified in PFI ES-3. 4. Weld valves into pipe lines in open position to prevent damage to valve seat unless

otherwise noted by valve manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Make last weld joint only after all flanged joints have been coupled and after the

connection has been positioned true-to-line, facing, and position. 6. Keep plugs in radiograph access holes at all times except when radiographic inspections

are being made. Seal weld radiograph access hole plugs in accordance with PFI ES-16 after the welds have been radiographed and accepted.

7. Install piping with a minimum clearance of 7'-6" over passageways and walkways except in cases required or approved by the Resident Project Representative.

8. Route piping parallel to equipment, building columns, and foundations as much as is possible unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.

B. Small Piping: 1. For 2 inches and smaller piping where the routing or location is not shown on the

Drawings, Contractor shall submit to the Resident Project Representative, for information only, the proposed routing of all field-routed pipe.

2. Fabricate and erect piping 2 inches and smaller in accordance with the following: a. Lines shall deviate from the arrangements indicated as required in order to avoid

interference with other work, aisleways, maintenance access, and similar spaces and to provide a neat and accessible installation.

b. Do not route small pipe liquid lines over electrical panels, switchgear motor control centers, or other electrical items unless approved as the only reasonable routing. Reroute and arrange as directed and approved by Owner with all labor and material furnished by this Contractor.

c. The specific arrangements shown on the small piping details shall not be varied. d. Lines may include five diameter bends in lieu of elbows and shall include standard

reducers for pipe size reductions. Bushings shall not be used for pipe size reductions.

e. Provide offsets, fittings, unions, drip pockets, vents, drains, hangers, and supports to make a complete installation.

f. Contractor shall be responsible for designing the hanger systems in accordance with SECTION 485940 of the Specifications to allow for thermal expansion of the pipe and movement of the equipment connections.

g. Use tees for all branch connections unless branch is at least two standard pipe sizes smaller than main pipe.


485990-4 81799_8320_485990

h. Furnish and install all of the valves, strainers, and special items indicated on the flow diagrams.

i. Install globe valves so that the direction of flow is with the upstream pressure under the disc.

j. Furnish and install all necessary pipe and fittings required to install all relief valves in a vertical position. Furnish tail pipes and route to a place where the discharge will not injure personnel when operating the piece of equipment.

k. Install drain lines from drip pockets to traps without pockets. l. Provide all required miscellaneous vents and drains whether indicated on the

Drawings or not. m. Furnish and install lines not indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the

Specifications and the P&IDs, in locations approved by Owner. n. Furnish and install unions in piping systems using screwed joints as follows:

(1) Install so lines may be broken for maintenance, valves may be removed, and equipment disconnected.

(2) Install in lines which are erected without unions and which, in the opinion of Owner, cannot be properly maintained.

(3) Install dielectric unions wherever copper pipe is joined to iron or steel pipe or equipment. Install in positions which receive axial thrust only.

o. Furnish and install flanges in piping system using socket weld joints as follows: (1) Install so lines may be broken for maintenance. (2) Install in lines which are erected without flanges and which, in the opinion of

Owner, cannot be properly maintained. 3. Provide instrument connections on small piping as follows:

a. For all instruments, controls, and sample points indicated on the flow diagrams. The instrument connections are not indicated on the small piping Drawings. Connections in small piping shall be field located by this Contractor with approval.

b. Of the same design as the piping system to which they connect. c. Of the size and type specified in SECTION 485935. d. Furnish tees, nipples, and couplings as required to accommodate temperature wells

without restricting flow. 4. Provide drain connections on small piping as follows:

a. At all low points and between all header sectionalizing valves on all piping systems.

b. Of the same design as the piping system to which they connect. c. Of the size and type specified in SECTION 485935.

5. Provide vent connections on small piping as follows: a. At all high points of all piping systems. b. Of the same design as the piping system to which they connect. c. Of the size and type specified in SECTION 485935.

3.04 FIELD WELDING: A. Processes and Procedures:

1. Accomplish all field welding using the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) process except as otherwise approved for specific applications.

2. Clearly describe the welding processes to be used in the welding procedures and qualify the processes as specified above.

3. Make all field welds in strict accordance with all requirements of SECTION 485935.


81799_8320_485990 485990-5

4. Make socket welds by withdrawing pipe approximately 0.06-inch away from contact with the bottom of the socket before starting the weld.

B. Materials: 1. Filler materials and electrodes shall be as specified in SECTION 485935. 2. Properly store welding electrodes and filler material as specified in SECTION 485935.

The use of wet or moist electrodes will not be permitted. C. Heat Treatment:

1. Heat treat all field welds in strict accordance with the requirements of SECTION 485935. 2. Make a complete automatic recording temperature record of the post heat treatment cycle

for all welds. Submit summary of records as Submittals.

3.05 MAKEUP OF FLANGED, SCREWED AND SOLDER JOINTS: A. Flanged Joints:

1. Apply gaskets for low pressure, low temperature joints dry. Apply all other gaskets in accordance with the gasket manufacturer's instructions.

2. Use anti-seize compound to lubricate all flange bolt and stud-bolt threads. Anti-seize compound shall be suitable for temperatures up to 1000oF, and shall be "Molykote G" or approved equal.

3. Tighten flanged joints to properly compress the gasket and to obtain the design loading recommended by the gasket manufacturer. Do not exceed the maximum stress values allowed by ASME B31.1 for the bolting materials used.

4. Retighten flanged joints as follows: a. Retighten flanged joints in pipelines and on equipment after they have been exposed

to working temperature and pressure for a sufficient length of time to ensure that flanges and studs have reached a point of constant temperature, and have attained such changes in dimension as will take place.

b. Where the operating temperature is 450oF or higher, retighten joints after 200 hours of service at operating pressure and temperature.

c. Tighten pressure seal valve bonnet studs or spanner nut with torque wrench per manufacturer's instructions before start-up and after one temperature cycle.

B. Screwed Joints: 1. Use anti-seize compound to lubricate all screwed pipe joints, with the compound applied

to male threads only. Anti-seize compound shall be as specified above for flange bolt and stud-bolt threads.

2. Seal weld all screwed joints and screwed plugs on piping and equipment as directed. 3. Seal weld all screwed thermowells where noted on Instrument Data Sheet.

3.06 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT: A. Furnish all labor and material to complete screwed, flanged, and welded connections of all pipe

systems to equipment. B. Leave final pipe flanges that connect to equipment loose until final field fit-up to allow for

misaligned flanges on equipment. C. Connections to equipment made by this Contract shall be disconnected and connected as

required for checking the alignment of the equipment. Any misalignment of the piping shall be corrected by this Contractor.

D. Piping connected to equipment which must vary from the drawings because of requirements peculiar to the particular equipment furnished by this Contract, shall be furnished and installed as required to make a complete and workable installation without additional cost to the Owner; this requirement shall include changes required in the piping systems because of design


485990-6 81799_8320_485990

changes made by the manufacturer between the time of design and the time of installation and because of equipment furnished of different manufacturer or type than that specified.

3.07 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPING: A. Furnish all labor and material to complete screwed, flanged, and welded connections of all pipe

systems to existing piping as indicated on the Drawings. B. Provide all gaskets, companion flanges, unions, bolts, couplings, welding, and labor as

required to complete these connections. C. Field check location of existing piping and that previously installed by other contractors, prior

to fabricating connecting pipe, or fabricate pipe long with field welds located so pipe can be trimmed to fit in field. Leave final pipe flanges that connect to existing flanges previously installed by other contractors or this Contract loose until final fit up to allow for misaligned flanges.

D. Connections to existing pipe in which no pipe or instrument connection is provided shall be supplied by this Contract. Method of attachment of these connections shall be approved.

3.08 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES: A. Instrument Root Valves:

1. Furnish and install root valves for all instrument and sample connections, except connections for temperature wells, including connections on all piping and equipment furnished by others and erected under this Contract and/or as indicated on the equipment connection schedule.

2. Root valves shall conforming to the Piping Design Table of the line or equipment to which they are connected and DIVISION 25.

3. Instrument root valves are not fully indicated on the Drawings. B. Instrument Air Supply Root Valves:

1. Furnish and install a root valve for each instrument air supply tubing takeoff from an instrument air header.

2. Instrument air supply root valves shall be gate or globe valves conforming to the Piping Design Table of the Instrument Air Header to which they are connected.

C. Drain and Vent Valves: 1. Furnish and install valves for all drain and vent connections including drain and vent

connections on all piping and equipment furnished by others and erected under this Contract, and as indicated on the equipment connection schedule.

2. Drain and vent valves shall be gate or globe valves conforming to the Piping Design Table of the line to which they are connected.

3. Drain and vent valves shall be the same as the connection size. 4. Drain and vent valves shall have a threaded outlet nipple (and threaded cap) of the same

schedule as the inlet pipe. 5. Drain and vent valves are not indicated on the Drawings.

D. Strainer Blowdown Valves: 1. Furnish and install blowdown valves and discharge piping to equipment drains for all Y-

type strainers. 2. Strainer blowdown valves and discharge piping shall conform to the Piping Design Table

of the line in which the strainer is installed.

3.09 PIPING IDENTIFICATION: A. The piece mark number for all prefabricated pipe sections shall be clearly visible.


81799_8320_485990 485990-7

B. All piping field fabricated from random length pipe shall be identified as to grade and schedule after erection with a painted continuous colored stripe visible from the floor. Color code shall be in accordance with SECTION 485901.

C. Identify all connections on piping with a label painted on the pipe and visible from the floor after erection. The connections shall be labeled as follows:

Type Connection Label Instrument connection Instrument tag number Drain connection "D" Vent connection "V" Radiograph access hole "R"

3.10 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. General:

1. Test piping systems in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 137 of ASME B31.1.

2. Furnish all necessary Equipment and Materials required for testing including pumps, calibrated test gauges, temporary blank-off plates, special fittings, relief valves, temporary piping systems, gaskets, supports, anchors, and bracing required to conduct tests.

3. Provide temporary water and air supplies for filling and testing and provide temporary drain lines and hoses for disposal of water without flooding.

4. Protect plant equipment and materials from damage resulting from leaks in piping systems during testing.

5. Protect instruments and appurtenances as required during testing. Furnish and install temporary plugs for testing and blowdown.

6. Install and/or remove as required hanger pins or blocks during testing to prevent damage or movement to hangers as recommended by the hanger manufacturer.

7. Notify Owner and the proper authorities when systems are ready for test. 8. Repair or replace any Equipment and Materials if damaged. 9. Clean fluid from leaks off equipment immediately after contact. 10. Repair or replace all tested Material or Equipment found leaking or defective

immediately. 11. Remove all temporary piping, supports, anchors, bracing, fittings, and blank-off plates

after testing. 12. Tests pressures shall be in accordance with the Line List.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: 1. Perform hydrostatic tests in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1. 2. The hydrostatic test pressure at every point in the system shall be at least 1.5 times the

system design pressure except as otherwise specified and in the case of factory tested pressure vessels. Pressure vessels shall be adequately isolated from the pipe hydrotest.

3. The temperature of the test media shall be at least 70ºF. Provide any temporary heating equipment required.

4. Drain and blow dry all air lines after hydrostatic tests. C. Pneumatic Tests:

1. Perform pneumatic tests in accordance with the requirement of ASME B31.1. 2. The pneumatic test pressure at every point in the system shall be at least 1.2 times the

system design pressure except as otherwise specified. 3. Provide a temperature test gauge to record fluid temperature concurrently with pressure.


485990-8 81799_8320_485990

4. Do not perform pneumatic testing without coordination of Work in areas around piping being tested. Owner shall be made aware and approve of all pneumatic testing prior to filling the pipe.

D. Smoke Tests: 1. Perform smoke tests only for large diameter, low pressure ducts in systems as indicated

in Appendix 485990. 2. Fill duct with smoke and seal both ends with blind flanges. 3. Duct shall pass test if visual inspection reveals no smoke outside of duct for a minimum

period of 30 minutes. E. Initial Service Leak Tests:

1. Perform initial service leak tests in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1. 2. Test valves in the systems for tightness and proper action. 3. Perform initial service leak tests on all piping systems not specified above to be

hydrostatically or pneumatically tested. END OF SECTION 485990

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

System

CodeService Piping Specs

Max Press (psig)

Max Temp (°F)

TestTest

Pressure (psig)

Grit BlastPaint Color

Letter Color

00SSW01 145 120 Hydrostatic 220 N Orange Black

01SAS02 145 120 Hydrostatic 220 N Orange Black

00SAL01 145 120 Hydrostatic 220 N Orange Black

00SAL01 145 165 Pneumatic 174

01SAS02 145 165 Pneumatic 174

ACS Starting Air 03CBS04 480 165 Hydrostatic 720 N Blue White

BAG Combustion Air 00SAL01 15 122 In‐Service N/A N Grey White Designed Duct00SAL02 80 230 Hydrostatic 12001SAS02 80 230 Hydrostatic 12001CSG01 80 230 Hydrostatic 12001CSS03 80 230 Hydrostatic 120

DOC Oily Water 00PDH01 5 210 Hydrostatic 7.5 N Orange Black

FGS Fuel Gas 01CSS01 175 120 Pneumatic 210 N Yellow Black01CSS01 150 120 Hydrostatic 22501CSS01 145 210 Pneumatic 17401SAS02 145 210 Pneumatic 17400SAL01 7 90000SSW01 7 90001CSS01 7 90001SAS01 7 90001CSS01 150 120 Hydrostatic 22500SAL01 150 120 Hydrostatic 225 N Green White

AAU Urea

Instrument Air N Blue White

Test RequirementsSystem Data Labels

Notes

ACI

FPW

CWM Cooling Water N Green

Fire Protection Water

White

N Red White

LOT Lubricating Oil N Brown

N/A N

Green White

White

N

Designed DuctSCR Exhaust Gas Smoke White

Service WaterWSW

Black


Page 1 of 1 Burns McDonnell Engineering Company, Inc.Revision 0

81799_8320_485995 485995-1

SECTION 485995 - PREPARATION FOR INITIAL OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Prepare all Equipment and systems installed under this Contract for initial operation in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, these Specifications, and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide all labor and materials to perform cleaning, flushing, sterilization, operational checks and adjustments, and preparation for initial operation.

1.02 REFERENCES: A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Equivalent SI units or grades may be used wherever English

units are used in the Specification. Exceptions to the following standards have been made through these Specifications. When an exception to a standard is specified, the Specifications shall govern. 1. National Fire Protection Association:

a. NFPA 56 - Standard for Fire and Explosion Purging of 2012 Edition

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Perform all work to meet the quality specified herein and the quality assurance requirements of

the Equipment manufacturers, including, but not limited to, the following standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1.04 ACCEPTANCE AND PERFORMANCE TESTS: A. After a period of initial operation, a performance test will be conducted on the complete power

plant. Owner will make preparations for the tests, furnish operating and testing personnel, and incur expenses connected with the tests.

B. Contractor will be notified as far in advance of the tests as possible and may have representatives present at his expense.

C. If operation and performance of the power plant is unsatisfactory due to any deficiency in Contractor's Work, Contractor shall make repairs and redo his Work to obtain satisfactory operation and performance. If any supplementary tests are required as a result of such deficiency, Contractor shall incur the expenses connected with the supplementary tests exclusive of operating labor, fuel, water, and other normal operating expenses.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FLUSHING AND CLEANING: A. General:

1. Flush or blow out all piping systems and Equipment to remove all dirt, scale, chips, and other foreign material.

2. Furnish and install all necessary equipment and materials required for flushing and cleaning including pumps, temporary blank-off plates, steam sources and supply lines, special fittings, temporary piping systems, gaskets, supports, anchors, and bracing required for the flushing and cleaning operations.

3. Provide temporary water supplies for filling and flushing and provide temporary drain lines and hoses for disposal of water without flooding.

SECTION 485995 - PREPARATION FOR INITIAL OPERATION: continued

485995-2 81799_8320_485995

4. Furnish labor and materials to dismantle Equipment and open handholes and manholes as required to inspect and clean piping and Equipment.

5. Furnish labor, materials, portable pumps, and equipment as required to clean out and inspect existing sumps that are required for system start-up.

6. Remove orifice plates from pipelines before flushing and reinstall after flushing. 7. Remove control valve internals before flushing and reinstall after flushing. 8. Remove, clean and replace pump suction strainers as necessary during cleaning and

flushing operations. 9. Protect instruments and appurtenances as required during flushing. 10. Remove all temporary piping, supports, anchors, bracing, fittings, and blank-off plates

after flushing. 11. Reassemble all Equipment ready for operation. Furnish and install new gaskets as

required to reassemble Equipment. 12. Contractor shall be required to furnish, and properly dispose of, and remove from site all

fluids used in cleaning and flushing operations. 13. Owner will provide all fluids for initial fill of systems unless otherwise specified.

B. Natural Gas Piping: 1. Upon completion of the flushing and cleaning air blow in any natural gas piping, the air

in the line shall be purged with nitrogen. The nitrogen shall be purged with natural gas. At no time shall air and natural gas be allowed to mix during either the purging of the natural gas piping or the filling of the piping with natural gas. Purging shall be in accordance with NFPA 56.

C. Equipment: 1. Open the following Equipment for inspection and thoroughly sweep, blow out, flush, and

clean: a. Oil tanks. b. Engine oil sumps. c. Selective Catalytic Reducers. d. Gas filter/coalescer. e. Gas dewpoint heater. f. Urea tank.

2. Thoroughly inspect, clean, and flush any other Equipment affected by the flushing operations.

3. Furnish and install new manhole gaskets as required. D. Lubricating, and Hydraulic,Oil Systems:

1. Thoroughly clean and flush lubricating and hydraulic oil systems until clean. 2. Heat oil, circulate oil, vibrate lines, clean strainers, and replace filters in accordance with

Equipment manufacturer's instructions and as directed by Owner. Owner will furnish all flushing oils. Flushing oils will be reused for first fill of system.

3. Drain systems, wipe out reservoirs, and clean as required. 4. After flushing fill lubricating systems with oil and lubricate Equipment with oil and

lubricants provided by Owner. E. Other Systems:

1. Flush all other systems per these Specifications and as directed by Owner 2. Open up Equipment and clean and flush. 3. Provide all temporary pump, pipe, and Equipment as required.

3.02 INITIAL OPERATION:

SECTION 485995 - PREPARATION FOR INITIAL OPERATION: continued

81799_8320_485995 485995-3

A. Provide all supervision and labor as required for initial operation of all piping systems, Equipment and appurtenances installed under this Contract until they are accepted for operation.

B. Remove, clean, and replace filters and pump suction strainers as often as necessary during initial operation and as directed.

C. Perform all required operational checks and adjustments during initial operation. D. Make adjustments and modifications as required to make Equipment and machinery furnished

under this Contract operate properly and perform in accordance with guarantees. E. Repack valves, retighten flanges, tighten valve bonnets, and make repairs and adjustments for

all piping systems, equipment, and appurtenances installed under this Contract until they are in successful commercial operation.
